WQ0000484_Technical Specification_20180720

- � JULY 2018' 4V
x • n . Pik
R. EVI .1O ! 1 .14 i_8 _! DiQt► :•....•`1;..
t , �

f r •i. -
=` `} ` TABLE OF CONTENTS
-DIVISION/SECTION-No. SECTION TITLE
` DIVISION 1; ;':;' GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
010.10 ' - f SUMMARY
•01300 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
01720:" PROJECT RECORD DRAWINGS
01730 OPERATION & MAINTENANCE DATA
DIVISION 2 SITE WORK
02220 EARTHWORK
02221 TRENCHING, BACKFILLING, AND COMPACTION
02910 SITE RESTORATION
DIVISION 10 SPECIALTIES
10441 SIGNS
DIVISION 11 EQUIPMENT
11000
GENERAL EQUIPMENT REQUIREMENTS
11001
EQUIPMENT DATA SHEETS
11002
RIGID EQUIPMENT MOUNTS
11010
DISSOLVED AIR FLOATATION SYSTEM
11020
BIOREACTOR TANKS
11030
MOVING BED BIOFILM REACTOR SYSTEM
11040
AIR OPERATED DIAPHRAGM PUMP
11050
SCREW POSITIVE DISPLACEMENT BLOWER
11220
COURSE BUBBLE DIFFUSION EQUIPMENT
DIVISION 13 SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION
13010 PRE -FABRICATED CONCRETE BUILDING
DIVISION 15 ' MECHANICAL
15000
GENERAL PIPE SCHEDULE
15050
PIPING SYSTEMS
15061
STEEL PIPE
15062
DUCTILE IRON PIPE

Z717 /o
Civil & Environmental Consultants, Inc.
1900 Center Park Drive
Suite A
Charlotte, NC 28217
Phone: [phone] • Toll Free: [phone]%%
Fax: [phone]e
To:
NC DEQ Division of Water Resources
Non Discharge Permitting Unit
512 North Salisbury Street
Raleigh, NC 27699
Letter of Transmittal
Date: 9/5/2018 1 Job No.: 174-540
Ms. Tessa Moi
;), . _ '.,tip -
RE: Rtutivtu
Mountaire Farms, Lumber Bridge, NC DEQIDWR
SEP 10 2018
We are sending you attached via FedEx Priority the following items:
OShop drawings QPrints QPlans
OCopy of letter DChange order .0
WQROS
TTFWLLP RPrinnlAL OFFICE
DSamples Specifications
Copies
Date
No.
Description
1
4/2018
Rev 1
Full Size Plan Set Mountaire Farms (36 sheets)
2
4/2018
Rev 1
Half Size Plan Set'Mountaire Farms (36 sheets)
3
7/2018
Rev 1
Technical Specifications Mountaire Farms (1 original)
For approval
® For your use
As requested
0 For review and comment
For bids due
Remarks: Attached please find revised
modified to reflect the acceptance of
Copy to: M Wade, Kevstone
J Wren, Mountaire
B. Sise, Mountaire
J Zuniga, Mountaire
0 Approved as submitted 0 Resubmit _ copies for approval
0 Approved as noted 0 Submit _ copies for distribution
0 Returned for corrections 0 Ret m nrants
ed after loan to us
I � i
Plan'6 (nal submittal has been
I
I
I
I
I
1
0 c e,o e$ �qy�
less (:?A
George P. Tyrian P.E.

:: .. 15064
PLASTIC PIPE ...
A5067
'STAINLESS STEEL PIPE
1,5085
PIPING CONNECTIONS =
15090
EXPANSION JOINTS AND FLEXIBLE HOSE
15005 .
.PIPING APPURTENANCES
.1.5096:: _
::PIPE HANGERS &: SUPPORTS .
15101-
GATE VALVE .. '
15103 :.
..: BUT.TERFLY:VALVE
... 15107 .
KNIFE GATE ..:. '
15118 : -
:SWING CHECK VALVE
..: 15140
PINCH VALVE
15147. . _
-SOLENOID VALVE:
... 1.5250::: ...
:PIPING INSULATION ...
DIVISION 16 ..:
..: ' .ELECTRICAL ..
16050
_: ... BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS.& METHODS
.16060
-GROUNDING & BONDING ..
: ' 1:6073 .: ....
' ... :HANGERS & SUPPORTS
16075
ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION .
16120 - -
CONDUCTORS & CABLES
16123 -
FIBER OPTIC & INSTRUMENTATION CABLES
1'6130:
CONDUITS RACEWAYS .& BOXES
16140 :::
:.- WIRING DEVICES
.16269 -
-ENCLOSED. VARIABLE FREQUENCY.DRIVES .-
: 16410 :
ENCLOSED -SWITCHES & CIRCUIT:BREAKERS
16441 ...
SWITCHBOARDS
16442
PANELBOARDS
16461 -
LOW VOLTAGE TktANSFORMERS _ =
16511 :
INTERIOR LIGHTING .
DIVISION 17
INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL
17001.
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS..::
1.7050 :
-BASIC CONTROL. SYSTEM: MATERIALS & METHODS
17100
CONTROL EQUIPMENT
17200
PROCESS INSTRUMENTATION:
17950
SYSTEM INTEGRATION

DIVISION I
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

SECTION:01010
::SUMMARY OF WORK
1.0 ::: AUTHORIZATION.. :.
1Vlountaire Farms of North Carolina, hic: (Mountai' ' Yarms): entered into a consent -agreement
with. the State of North Carolina Au Quality Department to address, odor control believed to be.
emitting from.1he"19-million gallon treated wastewater storage. lagoon. As a result, Mount aire,
Farms elected to modify thew existing wastewater treatment facility by adding secondary
... . ... .
treatment to remove additional soluble biochemical oxygen: demand.
2.0. PROJECT LOCATION
The work will be: performed -at the site of the.;existing Mountaire Farms of North Carolina, Inc..
wastewater treatment facility: located at located at 17269 NC 71 Highway N Lumber Bridge,
j .Robeson County, North Carolina, 28357. -
3.0 :: EXISTING. FACILITIES
Existing major primary WWTP processes include a 330,000:gallon equalization Basin, a
..:" dedicated influent pumping-station,'three (3).Sorin DAF. systems.with a stated hydraulic rating of.
800 gpiii each; ari estimated 10,000 gallon above ground clarifier; one (1) World_Water Works:
DAF system:with a stated hydraulic rating of 2,400 gpm, a 19.79 million gallon aerated storage
lagoon, and a treated wastewater irrigation system serving .17 irrigation f elds.. Currently. process -
wastewater gravityflows from the production' lant and collects in the equalization basin.
Wastewater is then pumped, at varying flow rates,ao.the Sorin DAF systeni. The Sorin DAF -
i system effluent gravity flows.to the above ground clarifier where it is :plumped to- the: World
Water Works DAF "system-.. Effluent fiom the.World Water Works DAF system gravity flows to
the aerated storage lagoon prior to:being chlorinated and land applied to the 'irrigation' fields
which consist of 537.8 acres of wetting area.
4.0 'PROJECT DESCRIPTION -
Work is to include furnishing all labor, materials,, equipment; and services required to complete
modifications, rehabilitation, and expansion to the existing treatment facilities. These
improvements include, but are not:limiied to, the following elements:
1. Modifications and additions to primary treatment system including the
following:
a. Addition of fourth Sorin DAF system
b. Yard/building piping
01010-1 MOUNTAIRE FARMS -LUMBER BRIDGE
WWTS UPGRADE

C. Electrical and control system upgrades and additions
2. Addition of Moving Bed Biofilm Reactors including the following:
a. New bolted stainless steel tanks
b. Course bubble air diffuser system
c. Yard piping
d. Elevated walkway additions
e. New blowers
f. New electrical and control system
g.
3. Site work
a. Paving and grading
b. Yard piping
5.0 PLANT OPERATION
During this Contract, operations at the W WTP shall remain completely uninterrupted. The
Contractor shall schedule his work to meet the requirements of this Operations Plan.
6.0 SPECIAL CONDITIONS
None
**END OF SECTION* *
01010-2 MOUNTATRE FARMS - LUMBER BRIDGE
WWTS UPGRADE

SECTION 01300
-' SUBMITTALS .
1.0 ::: GENERAL
" Submittals covered by:these requirements include manufacturers' -information, shop
drawings, test procedures, test results; samples; requests for substitutions, and -miscellaneous
Work -related submittals.: Submittals shall also include; but not be limited to, all mechariical,
electrical and electronic equipment and systems, materials, reinforcing :steel, fabricated items,
. ... ...
and piping -and -conduit details.- The Contractor shall furnish all drawings, specifications,
descriptive data; certificates, samples, .tests, methods schedules :and manufacturer's installation_: ..
and 'other instructions as specifically required in the Contract documents ,to demonstiate fully
that the materials and equipment to be. fitrnished and the methods of Work: comply with the
provisions and.intent of the Design. documents.:'
All: submittals required shall be transmitted'to the -Construction' Manager.
All details on shop Drawings submitted for review shall show clearly the elevations of the
various parts of the main members and lines' of the structure; and where correct fabrication of the
Work depends uponfield measurements -, such measurements shall be_niade and, -rioted on the
drawings before the drawings are submitted for. review... .
2.0 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES
The Contractor: shall be i esponsible for; the accuracy and completeness of the information.
contained 'in.each submittal and shall assure that the material, equipment or method of Work .
-, shall be as'describe.d in the submittal.. The Contractor shall,verify that=all features of all products
conform to the specified requirements: Submittal documents shall be clearly edited to indicate
- only those items, models; orseries of equipment, which are being submitted foi review. All
extraneous, materials: hall be crossed out or otherwise obliterated. The;Contractor shall ensure .
that there is no conflict with other. submittals and notify the Construction Manager in each case
where his submittal may affect the Work of another Contractor or the Owner. The Contractor .
shall coordinate submittals among his subcontractors and suppliers.
The Contractor shall coordinate submittals with the Work so that Work will not be delayed. He
shall coordinate and schedule different categories of submittals, so that one will not be delayed
for lack of coordination with another. No extension of time will be allowed because of failure to
properly schedule submittals. The Contractor shall not proceed with Work related to a submittal
until the submittal process is complete. This requires that submittals, for review and comment
shall be returned to the Contractor stamped "No Exceptions Taken" or "Make Corrections
Noted."
The Contractor shall certify on each submittal document that he has reviewed the submittal,
verified field conditions, and complied with the Contract Documents.
01300-1 MOUNTAIRE PARMS -LUMBER BRIDGE.
WWTS UPGRADE

The .Contractor. may authorize in writing a material or equipment supplier to deal directly with . ' .
the Construction. Manager orwith.the Owner With.regaid to a submittal. These dealings shall be tl
limited to:Contract interpretations to clarify and expedite the Work and shall not. relieve the
Contractor of ris,responsibilitie's nor.obligations. as specified in these Contract. Documents.
3.0 CATEGORIES OF SUBMITTALS �I
A. GENERAL:
Submittals fall into two general categories; submittals for review and comment, and submittals
which are primarily for information only. Submittals which are for. information only are
generally specified. as "product data" in Part 2; of applicable specification sections.
Two se arate lists will -be provided: 1 submittals for review and continent 2 .and roduct data
p p () (). p. I
(submittals) for information'only..:
Throughout the course of the Work, the, Contractor shall update- both lists ,with a suitable
spreadsheet, and report status and dates: of submittals for review and.comrnent. The updated lists
will be submitted monthly with progress payment information. = j
B; SUBMITTALS=FOR REVIEW AND COMMENT:
All subrittals except where specified to.be submitted as product data for information only shall
be. submitted .by the Contractor. to. the Construetion:Manager. for review and comment.
C. SUBMITTALS (PRODUCT DATA) FOR INFORMATION ONLY::':* ---
Where specified, the Contractor shall furnish submittals (product data) to the Construction
Manager for Information only.
- 4.0 TRANSMITTAL PROCEDURE `I
A. GENERAL:
Submittal- documents common to more than one piece of equipment shall be identified with all
the appropriate equipment numbers. Submittals for various items .shall be made with a single
form when the items taken together constitute a manufacturer's package or are so functionally
related that expediency indicates checking or review of the group or package as a whole.
Shop drawings for components of a system or systems requiring unit responsibility shall be 1
submitted together with all other system components as a complete shop drawing package.
Failure to submit data for the complete system will be cause for rejection of individual i
submittals.
0 000-2 MOUNTAIRE FARMS - LUMBER BRIDGE
W WTS UPGRADE
I
i

A unique number, sequentially: assigned; :shall be noted on the transmittal form accompanying.
.: each item submitted. Original submittal numbers shall. have the following foi: at: "XXX' ;
_ where "XXX";is the sequential number assigned by the Coiitractoi. Resiibirtiittals shall Have the
following format: XXX-Y'; where "XXX" is the originally_assigned submittal" number and "Y"
is a sequential letter assigned for fesubmittals, i.e:, A, B, or C being the lst,.21id, and 3rd. "
resubmittals, respectively.: Submittal 25B, for: example; is the second resubmittal of submittal
25..
B. DEVIATION FROM CONTRACT: ... .
If the Contractor proposes to provide material e ui ment or of work which deviates-
p'.P .. P' q: P.. .
from the. Project Manual, he shall indicate so under "deviations" on the transmittal form .
a ccoiiipanyingahe.submittal copies. ...
C. SUBMITTAL COMPLETENESS:::
Submittals which do not, all the information' . quiied'to.be subniitted,.incliiding:deviations;
are not acceptable and. will be -returned without review. Submittals which do not. contain the
Contractor's signature and date wi1L be unacceptable and returned -without review.
5.0. REVIEW PROCEDURE.
A. -GENERAL::
Submittals:are specified.for those features and char acteristics:of materials,,equipment, and::
methodsof operation which can be selected based on the Contractor's judgment of their...:
�.. .
conformance to T specified.requirements. Other features and characteristics are specified in a-
manner which enables: the Contractor to deteimine:acceptable options without submittals. The
review procedure is based on the-Contractofs guarantee that -all features and characteristics not
t requiring submittals conform as specified. Review shall: not extendto means; methods,
techniques, sequences.or procedures of construction, or to verifying quantities, dimensions,
weights or gages, or fabrication processes (except -where specifically indicated or -required -by the
project manual) or to safety precautions or programs incident thereto.. Review of a separate item,
as such, will not indicate approval of the assembly in which the item functions. -
Project Work, materials, fabrication, and -installation shall conform with reviewed shop
drawings, working drawings, applicable samples, and catalog data.
B. SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW AND COMMENT:
_ Unless otherwise specified, within, 5 calendar days after receipt of 'a submittal for review and
comment, the Construction Manager shall review the submittal and return with comments.. The
period for return of submittals is exclusive of any time awaiting clarification or further
information for submittals which are'' incomplete in themselves or should be packaged together .
with other functionally related equipment. The Construction Manager reserves the right to retain
submittal packages beyond 5 days if the package is unusually complex or includes components
01300-3 MOUNTATRE FARMS -I UMBER BRIDGE
W WTS UPGRADE

i
: with extensive interfaces with other project. Work.. The reproducible original will be retained .by
the Construction Manager..The returned submittal shall indicate one of the following actions:
1. •If the review indicates that the material,: equipment or Work method
complies with the' project irianual, submittal copies will be marked "NO .
EXCEPTIONS; TAKEN:" . In this event, the Contractor.'may begin to
implement.the Work.method or°incoiporate the material or equipment .'
covered _by. the submittal.
2. If.the review indicates limited corrections.are required, �copies.will be
marked."MAKE CORRECTIONS NOTED." The Contractor may begin
implementing the Work method or incorporating the material and "
equipment covered by. the, submittal in accordance with the noted ... ..
corrections. Where submittal. information will be. incorporated in O&M
data, a corrected copy shall lie provided. .
I If,the review:reveals that the submittal is insufficient or contains 'incorrect
data, copies will be marked "AMEND AND RESUBMIT." Except at his
own risk, the Contractor shall not undertake Work covered by this
submittal until it has been.revised-, resubmitted.and returned marked either .
"-NO EXCEPTIONS TAKEN". or."MAKE CORRECTIONS NOTED."
4.. If the review indicates that the material, equipment, or Workmethod does
not comply with the project manual, copies of the submittal will be
marked "REJECTED - SEE REMARKS." Submittals lacking critical'
information specifically required (e.g.' Certificate of Unit Responsibility)
or.with deviations which have not been identified clearly: may lie rejected. . .
E risk, the Contractor shall not undertake the Work
Except at his own i
...
covered: by such submittals until a new submittal is made aild returned
marked either "NO EXCEPTIONS TAKEN". or "MAKE CORRECTIONS -
NOTED."
C. SUBMITTALS (PRODUCT DATA) FOR INFORMATION ONLY:
Such information is not subject to submittal review procedures and shall be provided as part of
the Work under this -Contract and its acceptability determined under construction observations
and inspection procedures in the field.
6.0 EFFECT OF REVIEW OF CONTRACTOR'S SUBMITTALS,
Review of Contract Drawings, methods of Work, or information regarding materials or
equipment the Contractor proposes to provide, shall not relieve the Contractor of his
responsibility for errors therein and shall not be regarded as an assumption of risks or liability tl
by the Construction Manager or the Owner, or by any officer or employee thereof, and the
Contractor shall have no claim under the Contract on account of the failure, or partial failure, of
the method of Work, material, or equipment so reviewed. A mark of "NO EXCEPTIONS
01300-4 MOUNTATRE FARMS - LUMBER BRIDGE
WWTS UPGRADE
1

TAKEN" or "MAKE CORRECTIONS NOTED" shall mean that the Owner has no objection -to
the Contractor, upon his own respoi-isibility, using the plan or method of W.prk proposed; or
rovidin the materials or eq ui meat proposed.
providing n .P p .p
7.0 ' DISTRIBUTION -
Distribute reproductions of reviewed shop drawings and copies. of reviewed product data and. -
samples to the job site maintenance manuals. Special- tools, -accessories and spare parts -shall be
submitted to the. Construction Manager or delivered to the Owner'.as is appropriate. _.
8.0 REPETITIVE REVIEW
..: Shop: diawings and O&M:manualsaubmitted:far: each item.will be reviewed: no. more. than twice:
at the Owner's expense. 'All subsequent reviews will be performed at times convenient to the
Construction Manager and at the Contractor's expense; based:on=the Construction Manager' s then
prevailing rates.. The Contractor shall reimburse. the Owner for all. such fees.invoiced,to the
Owner by the Construction .Manager.
Any need for more than'one resubmission, or-any:other delay -'in obtaining Constru' lion. .
Manager's revievr of submittals, will not entitle Contractor .to an extension of the Contract Time:
or reimbursement for acceleration of the-Woik.
"END OF SECTION*
1
01300--5 MOUNTAIRE FARMS - LUMBER BRIDOF.
W WTS UPGRADE

l
as
SECTION 01720
RECO RD DRAWINGS ,
PART 1--GENERAL
:1.01 DESCRIPTION: ...
:.
A. SCOPE:
The Contractor shall maintain a neatly marked full-size set of Contract and shop
drawings which show the :actual installed condition, layout and dimensions :of -completed work.::
This shall include information about all new or modified equipment, piping, conduit; sttuctures,
and: facilities.. Buried and concealed work such as structures;: piping, conduit and: cables shall
have.buHal depth -and horizontal and vertical dimensions to permanent surface improvements or.
site coordinate points shown on the drawings:' "Ail required Electronic files shall be organized
and indexed for each,process area such that they are easily recognizable and accessible."
'The primary purpose of these'as-built documents is to provide accurate information for::
the future operation, maintenance, modification, and.ekpansion of the plant. It is especially
important to record, the actual installed conditions for concealed systems, equipment, and.: -
materials. Typical concealed systems include, but are not limited to; buried structures, piping, .
conduit, and cable; interconnecting wiring within conduits, wireways-and tray; and commuter
software and firmware;-
- B. PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS:
Record documents shall show the actual installed conditions of the Contractor installed or LI
modified systems, -equipment, and material at the time of acceptance of the -related portions of
the work.
C. RELATED WORK:
As -built documents are required to be submitted and accepted by the Construction !.
Manager upon the work or portions of the work being considered substantially complete.
Other Contractor supplied documents which shall be submitted in as -built condition shall MI
include operation and maintenance instructions and test results.
. I
01720-1 MOUNTAIRE FARMS - LUMBER BRIDGE
WWTS UPGRADE
I
,y

1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE: .
A. SUBMITTALS:
,In accordance with specification Section 01300 the following as -built documents
submittals shall.be.provided:.
1. Contract Documents : :: ...
.2.: Contract supplemental drawings. including lighting drawings .
3. Change. orderdrawings:
4. Yard i m� la out di•awin s
p.P .g Y .. ... g
5... Fabrication drawings ,
:8.... Test results
9. Software documentation.
The Contractor shall submit one full-size copy of the corrected documents and.the ---
marked-up doddrAents tot e Construction Manager fbi ieview and approvdL The Contractor
shall keep. one copy for his records. CAD drawing files will:be updatedby the Construction
Manager°based-upon'the contractors corrected. drawings..Th'ese electronic`as-builts only include
the contract drawings and:do not include contract supplemental drawings such as Electrical and;: ...
Instrumentation connection diagrams, lighting drawings, piping layout drawings, -and landscape
irrigation drawings.: The contractor shall supply electronic copies of these supplemental
drawin s iE&I.dia rams ,. lighting drawings,pipilayout drawings�'Iandscapa irrigation
drawings),to reflect final as constructed conditions. Electronic files shall be'organized and
indexed for each process area such that they are easily recognizable and accessible.
PART 2--MATERIALS AND' METHODS.
2.01 STANDARDS
A:.: ' . GENERAL:
All revisions and additions to drawings shall be designated with a numbered balloon
callout symbol on the drawing which, references a, corresponding note. The callout notes shall be
shown in; a vertical :column below the general notes on the right side of the drawing.. The callout
note shall indicate the nature and extent of the revision or addition and the date the note was
recorded.
01720-2 MOUNTAIRE FARMS -LUMBER BRIDGE
WWTS UPGRADE

I
B.: DOCUMENT MARK-UP:
Where documents are required to be marked -up; they shall be marked with erasable
colored pencils using the following color code.
Additions --red .
Deletions --green
Comments_ -blue.
Dimensions --black
aw
.:PART 3--EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL
A full-sized set of. drawings. shall be updated to current conditions on a weekly: basis
using the' mark -'UP procedure specified herein:" These field record -drawings shall be maintained
in a clean- dry, and legible condition. Record documents shall not be used for construction
purposes and shall, be' available for review by the Construction Manager during normal working
hours gat the Contractor'sfield office:. At the completion of the wi) prior to final payixient, all...
record drawings shall be' submitted to the Construction Manager.
Whenever existing processpiping, electrical conduit or ductbanks, gas or water inains, -
d utilities are exposed during construction, the and
sewers, or. other undergroun
elevations: of these utilities shall be measured and recorded on the as -built drawings. - Locations
and sizes of electrical conduit and conductor embedded within concrete structures shall be
recorded -on the electrical: plan recoil drawings: This field verified data of existing utilities shall
be designated on the as -built drawings by a standard symbol to be selected by the Construction
Manager. Field verified dimensions shall be required on all exposed utilities even if no other -
Work- is required on these. facilities.
Immediately after any portion of the Work is substantially complete, drawings shall be `I
updated to reflect the as -built conditions, and shall be submitted for review and approval. Only
complete sets of as -built documentsas they relate to systems, equipment, or materials will be j
reviewed for acceptance. Upon approval, the Construction Manager shall return the drawings to
the Contractor for incorporation into the final set.
f
**END OF SECTION* *
I
I
01720-3 MOUNTArRE FARMS -- LUMBFR BRIDGE
WWTS UPGRADE
�r

SECTION 01730
OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE INFORMATION
PART 17-GENERAL
:: ... 1.01 SCOPE ..
Operation'and maintenance.(O&M) instructions shall be provided in accordance with this
section and as required in the .technical sections of this project manual... O&M information shall
be provided for ea In piece:of equipment; equipment assembly. or subassembly, and
material -provided; or modified under this contract.
Submittal of O&M manuals shall aie :applicable to, but not necessat limited to:
l_... Major equipment.
2.. Equipment used- with electrical motor loads of 1/6-hp nameplate or -
greater.
: 3. Specialized: equipment including sampling equipment, electric, pneumatic
and. hydraulic_ actuated valves, and instrumentation and control systems for
HVAC and process sy-stems such as'meters; recorders; and transmitters.
4... Valves -greater than and including 8 inches in diameter.. .
O&M instructions must be submitted and accepted before on -site training may start. .
r PART 2--PRODUCTS
2.01 TYPES OF INFORMATION REQUIRED.
-It A. GENERAL: .
O&M information shall contain the names, addresses; and telephone numbers of the
manufacturer, the nearest representative of the manufacturer, and the nearest supplier of the
manufacturer's equipment and parts. In addition, one or more of the following items of
information shall be provided as applicable.
B. OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS:
Specific instructions, procedures, and illustrations shall be provided for the following
phases of operations: n,
0173 0-1 MOUMAIRE FARMS -LUMBER BRIDGE
W WTS UPGRADE

1. SAFETY PRECAUTIONS:: List personnel hazards for equipment and list )
safety precautions for all operating conditions, .
2. ;OPERATOR PRESTART: Provide requirements:to set up and prepare
each system for use:
J. STARTUP,=SHUTDOWN, AND POSTSHUTDOWN PROCEDURES:,
Provide a control sequence for:each of these. operations. a ... ..
-4. NORMAL OPERATIONS: Provide: control diagrams with datato:explai_zi 1
operation -and control of systems and specific equipment.
S. EMERGENCY OPERATIONS: -Provide emergency procedures for
equipment malfunctions to permit . short period of continued operation or to shut down the .
equipment to.prevent further damage to systems and equipment- lnclLide emergency shutdown:
instructions for fire, explosion, spills,, or other foreseeable contingencies. Provide guidance on i
emergency operations of all utility systems including valvelocations and portions of systems
controlled..
... ... ... ..
6. OPERATOR SERVICE REQUIREMENTS: Provide instructions.for
services to be performed by the operator such as lubrication, adjustments,. and inspection.
C. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE: I
i
The following information shall be provided for preventive and scheduled maintenance to
minimize corrective maintenance and repair: -IY
1. LUBRICATION DATA: Provide lubrication data, .other than instructions
for lubrication in accordance with paragraph 01730-2;01.B.6.: I'
i
a. A table showing recommended lubricants for specific temperature' -I
ranges and applications-
b. Charts with a schematic diagram of:the' equipment showing ff
lubrication points, recommended types and grades of lubricants, _f
and capacities; and
C. A lubrication schedule showing service interval fiequency.
i
1
01730-2 MOUNTAI11L I -ARMS -LUMBER BRIDGE
WWTS UPGRADE
�.I
t

2. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE PLAN. AND, SCHEDULE: Provide
manufacturer's schedule for routine preventive maintenance, inspections, tests, and adjustments
required:to ensure -proper. and economical operation and to minimize .corrective maintenance and
repair. Provide rnaiiufactilrer's, pr6icetion:of preventive maintenance rimanliours on a daily,:.
weeldy, monthly, and annual,basis including craft:requirem ants by type of craft.-
D.. CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE:.
Manufacturer's recommendations shall be'provided on procedures and, instructions for
correcting problems and making repairs.
1. TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDES AND -DIAGNOSTIC TECHNIQUES:
Q .
Provide step-by-step procedures to promptly isolate the cause of typical malfunctions: Describe:
clearly why.the checkout is -performed and what conditions are to'be sought. Identifytests or.:
-inspections and test: equipment:required to determine. whether parts and equipment may be:'..
reused or require replacement.
2. ..:WIRING DIAGRAMS AND CONTROL DIAGRAMS: Wiring diagrams
And control diagrams shall be'point-to-point drawings of wiring and control. circuits including
- - factory=f eld interfaces. Provide a complete and accurate depiction of the actual job -specific
wiring and control work. " On diagrams; number electrical and electronic wining and.pneumatic`
control tubing and the'terminals'for each ve identically to actual installation numbering.
3. MAINTENANCE AND REPAIR PROCEDURES: Provide instructions
and list tools required to restore product.or equipment to proper condition or operating standards.
9 :4.:-. REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT INSTRUCTIONS:- Provide. step -by.- ..:
step procedures and list. required tools and. supplies for removal, replacement, disassembly; and
Assembly of components, assemblies, subassemblies,- accessories, and attachments.- Provide
tolerances, dimensions, settings, and adjustments requiu_ e& Instructions shall include.a
combination of test and illustrations'.
5. SPARE PARTS AND SUPPLY LISTS: ' Provide lists of spare parts'and
supplies required for maintenance and repair to ensure continued service or operation without
unreasonably. delays. Special consideration is required for facilities at remote locations. List,
spare parts' and supplies that have a long lead time to obtain. -Indicate current list price for all
spare parts.
6. CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE MANHOURS: Provide manufacturer's
_- projection of corrective maintenance manhours including craft requirements by type of craft.
Corrective maintenance that requires participation of the equipment manufacturer shall be
identified and tabulated separately.
I
7. MOTOR INFORMATION: Provide motor manufacturers operation and
maintenance information; including but not limited'to lubrication, care, parts information;
operating constraints and motor wring diagrams.
0173 0-3 MOUNTAIRE FARMS - LUMBER BRIDGE
WWTS UPGRADE

I
i
I
al
E. APPENDICES:
The following:information shall. be provided; include -information not specified in the
preceding paragraphs but pertinent to the maintenance or operation of the product or equipment.
1. PARTS IDENTIFICATION: Serial numbers shall.be provided for each:
equipment:number•.::Provide identification and coverage for:all.parts of each component, -.-
assembly, subassembly, and accessory of the end items subject to replacement including motors.
-:Include specialhardware: requirements., such.as requirement to use high -strength bolts and nuts.
Identify parts by make, model.'. serial number, and source of supply to -allow reordering without
:further identification: Provide clear and legible illustrations; drawings; and.exploded views to -
enable easy identification of the items. When. illustrations ,omit the part numbers and description,
both the illustrations and separate listing shall show the index, reference, or key number Which:
.will. cross -'reference the illustrated part to the listed:part. Pails shown irrthe listings shall be
grouped by components, assemblies, and subassemblies.
2. WARRANTY INFORMATION: List -and explain the various warranties
and include the. servicing, and: technical ,precautions:pre'scribed liy.the manufacturers 'or contract:
documents to keep warranties in force. ,
-i
PERSONNEL TRAINING REQUIREMENTS::.Provide information
3• -
available fi-om the manufacturers to use in training designated personnel tooperateand maintain
the equipment. and systems properly.
4. TESTING EQUIPMENT AND -SPECIAL; TOOL INFORMATION:
Provide: information on test equipment required to perform specified tests and on special .tools .
needed for the: operation; maintenance, and repair of components.
,5.:. INTITAL SETTINGS: All initial factory settings and field settings
adjusted during start-up are to be documented and provided in electronic format with the'final ;
O&M submittal:
PART 3 --EXECUTION
3.01 TRANSMITTAL PROCEDURE
The Contractor shall submit a list of all anticipated manufacturers O&M Manuals to the
Construction Manager before the first O&M Manual is submitted. The Construction Manager
will compare this list to the Contractor's list for concurrence.
A. DRAFT: l _
One copy of the draft O&M manuals shall be provided as required. Acceptable
submittals will be retained. The transmittal form will be returned with the request for the
01 % 3 0-4 MOUNTAIRL FARMS - LUMBER BRIDGE
WWTS UPGRADE
I
i_

required final. O&M manuals:. If submittal. is deficient, it will be returned until revised manuals
are acceptable.
B. FINAL:
Upon submittal of an approvable draft. O&M manuals, six:(6) copies of the final, O&M
manual will. be requested. Minor. deficiencies identified in the. draft must be' coi7ected- in the. finial
:inanuals.::Iffinal manuals are -found to be deficient,•five (5)'copies will be returned for revision
and resubmittal. Approval of the draft manual does not ensure approval of the final manual.
C_ FORMAT AND ORGANIZATION:: '
O&M manual submittals sliall'be numbered consecutively_and shall.begin with 1.
Resubmittals-that have been returned as not approvable shall be resubmitted with the original
number plus a code letter in paientheses:after the number to .indicate a resubmittal '(i.e., th&fiirst
resubmittal would-be indicated by 1(A), the second by 1(BY, etc.): Reviews in excess of a single .
(1) review of the Draft manual and a single (1) review of the Final manual -will be completed at-
the'expense.: of the Contractor... :
-Each O&M manual -shall be reviewed for completeness by: the Contractor prior.to.
transmitting to fhe Construction Manager and shall indicate proof of such.review..Manuals
submitted;to the Construction Manager that, are obviously deficient will be returned as
- "Rejected" without review.
The first page of each -O&M manual will be the Equipment Record_ Sheet.. This sheet
must.be included in fhe draft as complete as:possible"and fully completed in the final manual.
Manuals, submitted. without this sheet will be, returned without review. Maintenance .:
requirements.must be filled out in `detail: Simply noting to refer to the O&M manual is NOT.
acceptable. If additional space: is -required to complete the maintenance list, use page 2 of the
equipment record sheet.
Where an O&M manual has been. prepared by the manufacturer as a standard manual to
cover more than one model of a particular piece of equipment, all references to models other
than the one specifically installed shall be deleted or crossed out.
Submit draft and final O&M manuals printed on 8-1/2 by 11-inch size heavy first quality
paper with standard 3-hole punching, bound in'a heavy duty 3-ring or 3-post style binder suitable
for bookshelf storage or as otherwise acceptable as determined by the Construction Manager.
Unbound manuals will be returned without review. Provide outside of binders with titles. Table
each section of manuals, as listed above, for easy reference with plastic -coated heavy duty
dividers. Provide complete index for each manual following Equipment Record Sheet.
Reduce drawings or diagrams bound in manuals to 8-1/2 by 11- inch or 11 by 17-inch
size. Where reduction of drawings is not practical to ensure readability; fold larger drawings
separately, and place in vinyl envelopes bound into the binder. Identify envelopes with drawing
numbers.
01730-5 MOUNTAIRE FARMS - LUMBER BRIDGE
WWTS UPGRADE

Include in O&M manual, copies of installation instructions,original parts lists, or other
documents packed with eduipment.when delivered. --- -
H_
Where the drawings and specifications identify a piece of equipment by an instrument tag
number or equipment number, that salve number shall also be used to identify the equipment in .
the O&M manual.
3.02 ELECTRONIC FORMAT
In. addition to the printed copies specifled in 01730-3.01g, O&M information as
specified,will be transmitted on CD�-ROM. Electronic format shall on CD=ROM. Electronic
Format shall be Microsoft Word, (*.doe) Microsoft Excel (*.xls); ADOBE ACROBAT'(*.pdf),
Auto desk Aut6CAD. (*..dwg), or other approved format with appropriate readersoftware
included.: Two copies of CD-ROM disks shall be provided with -all printed O&M manuals: -
Website-addresses are not an acceptable substitute to CD-ROM disks. Transmittal forms 01730-
A, B?: & C shall be included with tzansmittal.: After acceptance, their final copies shall: be
provided... .
3.03 FIELD CHANGES -
-. Following the acceptable installation and operation of an equipment item'.1he item's ..
:. instructions, and procedures shall be modified and supplemented by the Contractor to reflect any �-
field changes or information requiring field data.
**END OF SECTION**
01730-6 MOUN1'AIRE FARMS -- LUMBER BIUDGE
WW1's UPGRADE

... ... ... ... ...
22
-0 00 1
i
SECTION. 02200
-.EARTI-IWORI ... -. -
I GENERAL
Earthwork shall include the loosening and_reanoving;transporting,_storage;:baelcfilling, and all
_.:-handling:ofmaterial of either natural.soils, deposited soils, rock or boulder for.the construction
and completion of all work under this contract.
.I
Contractor shall hid project .assuming. disposal . of liaardous waste or, of pctroleuffi-
contaminated soil is,NOT required. If specialized excavation and disposal is required, it wil ( '
be negotiated as a change. order.
V�
Contractor shall :bid project: assuming excavation in rock or high groundwater areas is -not
required. . If specialized excavation and, disposal .is: required,: it will. be negotiated I as. a.
is
I
change order.
The use of explosives''f6r excavations will riot -be permitted.
2. ASSOCIATED DEFINITIONS::
"Earth" includes. all materials, such ,as sand, gravel, clay, loam, nnlck, soft,or disintegrated
rock, not requiring blasting, barring or wedging froni their original beds, and specifically
excludes -all ledge or bed rock, and individual boulders or masonry larger than. one-half cubic
yard in volume.
"Subgrade" is earth material on which structures or other materials are to be placed.
�I
Backfill" includes selected materials for the backfilling of all excavations and trenches tip to
the original surface of the ground of the other grades as may be shown or directed.
"Spoil" includes surplus excavated materials not required or suitable for backfills or
embanla-nents,
II
�I
sl

i
J
o22W2.
"]�lmbanlcments".:include Fills, constructed of selected materials above:the original surface: of
the ground; :..
"Rock" includes all. pieces of.ledge or. bred rock,: boulders, or masonry larger: than one-
half cubic yard in. volu ne requiring blasting, barring, or 'Wedging. for removal from their
original beds,
-:The term "Excavation," where used, shall: be deemed and understood to cover the
fol.lowin described: work:
Grubbing; removing; storing,: and rehandling of all materials of every name. and nature:
necessary to be removed for all:purposes:inciden.tal to construction and completion of
a]I the work under contract; ..
All sheeting; sheetpili�'gbracigand shoring, and the' placing, driving cutting oWandr
removing of the same; al.l.dihing, ditching, flaming, cofferdammiag, .pumping,. bailing, _.
and draining or: otherwise. disposing of water;
The refilling: of trenches and .pits and the furnishing and placing of material over
trenches and pits to the line off lling indicated on: the flans or directed.
- The coiilpacted of all mate rialsused in filling or ietillirig by rolling, ramming, water,
puddling, as may be required;
"Tlre removing and disposing of all surplus materials from the excavations in the
manner specified;
The maintenance, accommodation and protection of travel;
The supporting and protecting of all tracks, rails, building, clubs, sidewalks,
r
pavemer►ts, overhead wires, poles, trees, shrubbery, pipes, sewers, conduits, or other
structures ol• property in the vicinity of the work; whether over or underground or

02200 3 .
which appear within the excavations, and the restoration of the same in case of
Settlement. or other - h jury., . .
i
All temporary bridging and fencing and the removing of:sarne, the temporary paving
of highways roads, driveways, and'the permanent revairirlg of: replacing and relaying
of pavements, curbs, gutters; and sidewalks .removed, .disturbed,: or injured, the,
removing and cleaning away of all construction rubbish, refuse, unused materials,
plarit;'and tools -from -the site of work;
The dressing; sodding or. seeding of all unpaved areas as may ale necessary to leave he
surface in as good condition:as it was previous to the cominencenlent of the .work.
3. EXCAVATION
Excavations shall be of sufficient size, and only of sufficient si�e,.to give suitable room
for the proper:Obstructioti of structures and di
appurtenances, inclung efo
r
or
. I
sheeting, dewatering, and other similar•: work necessary for_ completion. of the Contract:
Excavations for structures shall be made only to the lines and grades -shown on. the Plans,.
specified, or directed.
In no case will undercutting excavation' faces for extended footings be permitted. Not less
b
. l
than: 12 inches clearance shall be provided between -excavation faces and exterior wall
surfaces unless otherwise specified. Adequate clearance shall be provided for placement and
compacting of backfrll materials.
The trenches in which pipelines are to be constructed, shall be excavated in all cases in such
planner and to such depths and widths as will give suitable room for the pipelines which the _I
trenches are to contain for sheeting, pumping, and draining, and for removing the material not
suitable for pipe subgrade.
Trenches in which pipelines are to be conshlicted shall be excavated in all cases .in such

02200.11 .
manner and to such depths and widths as will give suitable room for the pipelines which the
trenches are to contain for sheeting, pumping, and draining, an:d .for removing the:rilaterial riot'...
:,.suitable forpipe ubgrade:
Where, .for any. reason, the width of the lower portion of the trench, incasured at .18 inclies
above the top Of the pipe shall not exceed 12 inches above the.top of the pipe, exceeds the
... ... ...
niaximunr width, additional coriciete cradle 'or concrete. encasement, as required `by loading
-conditions shall:be furnished -and installed by -the -Contractor at his own expense:
4.- .EMBANKMENT...
Embankments shall be constructed to establish lilies and grades at the aocations shown on:
the Plaits and as:directed by the E.nginecr. Fmbanknient materials shall be natural soil Tree
from excessive moisture, frost,.stiunps; trees, roots, sod, mul6h, marl, vcgetable.Matter or. .
other unsuitable_ materials.:Embankment 'materials shall''be obtained from acceptable
materials on the site of. -from approved borrow -pits and shall be. well graded from. fine to
coarse with a -minimum content of;silt. All materials shal l be suitable foie compaction in layers
not exceeding & inches ul:thickness:and shall remain stable. when:wet.
The entire surface to be covered with embankment shall be stripped of all grass, vegetation,
topsoil, rubbish, or other unsuitable materials before -any embankment material is placed.
In general, embankment ihaterials,shall be placed in horizontal layers not exceeding 8 inches
in thickness, measured after compaction, and sliall be thoroughly compacted. Stogies, if any,
shall' not exceed 6 inches in greatest dimension and shall 'be well- distributed throughout the
mass. Where embankments are to be constructed across ground, which will not support the
weight of the construction equipment, the fill shall be constructed byplacing successive loads
of granular material, in uniform layers until a satisfactory bearing is obtained. In areas
upon which structures are to be build, the embankment materials shall be placed in layers not
exceeding 6 inches in thickness, measured after compaction. All embankments shall be
S
subject to Density Control.

02200-5. '
5. UNAUTHORIZED EXCAVATION
Whenever excavations are carried beyoind or below the lines and grades shown on the' . .
Plans, or as given or directed by the Engineer, all such excavated space shall be refilled
with granular material, concrete or other materials as the Engineer may..direct. AU.
material, which slides, falls, or caves into the established limits of excavations due to
any cause whatsoever, shall be removed and disposed of at the'Contractor's expense.
No extra compensation will be paid the Contractor for airy materials ordered for refilling -the
void areas. left by a slide, fall, cave-in, or any other -unauthorized excavation.
6. REMOVAL OF WATER
The Contractor. shall at.:all times during construction, provide and maintain' proper .and
satisfactory means and.devices for the removal of all stormwater entering the excavations, .
and shall remove all'such water• as' fast as it may collect, in such manner as shall not interfere
with the prosecution of the work or the -proper placing of pipelines, inasonry, or other work.
Removal of water. includes the construction and removal'of cofferdams, sheeting and bracing, I
the furnishing of materials and labor necessary therefore, excavation and maintenance of
ditches and sluice -ways, .and the furnishing and operation of pumps, wellpoints, and _I
appliances needed to maintain through drainage of the work in. a satisfactory manner.
Water shall not be allowed to rise over or come in contact with any masotu•y, concrete or 1
mortar, until at least 24 hours after placement, and no stream of water shall be allowed to
flow over such work until such time as the Engineer may permit.
Water pumped or drained from excavations, or any sewers, drains, or water Courses
encountered in the work shall be disposed of as directed by the Engineer.
Sanitary sewage shall be pumped to sanitary sewers. -�
i

02200-�6
Should groundwater be encountered during the excavation,: additional costs incurred- will: be
-lie otiated:as a change. order. .
- Any damage causedby iniproper'llandiing of water shall be :repaired by the Contractor at his
own expense.
7. -STORAGE OF. MATERIAL
Topsoil suitable for final grading shall be removed and stored on the site separately from
'other excavated material.
All -excavated materials shall -be -stored - in locations so as.nbt'to endanger the:work, and: .. .
so that. easy access may lie hi d at 611,.tirnes to all parts of the excavation. Stored material
shall�be kept. neatly piled and trinimed: so.as to cause little inconvenience as -possible to. .
public travel onto adjoining property holders.
8. SHEETING AND BRACING
The Contractor shall fiunish,.place 'and. maintain: such sheeting, bracing, and: shoring as ix►ay
be required :to. support -the sides and ends of excavations in such manner. as to .prevent any:
movement ,which could, in; airy way, injure .the pipe, _sewers, masonry, or other work,. or
endanger existing structures, pipes or pavements.
in no case will: bracing be' permitted against pipes, or structures in trenches or other
excavations: All timber sheeting and bracing shall: be :sound::and straight, Tree from cracks,
shakes: and large or loose' knots, with dressed edges where directed, and Steel, sheeting'and
- bracing shall be sound and shall conform with ASTM.
I
Sheeting shall be driven as the excavation progresses, and in .such manner as to maintain
pressure against the original ground at all times. The sheeting shall be driven vertical with
t edges tight together, and all bracing shall ,be of such design andstrength as to maintain the
sleeting in its proper position.

. 02200-7 .
If, in. the judgment of the Engineer, the slice ting or supports fiim" ished are inadequate or
unsuited f6r:the purpose, he can order any,such sheeting:or bracing to be replaced or additional .
sheeting :and bracing to be installed:. Any sheeting and, bracing ordered and: so. installed for
such purpose'shall be furnished aiid installed at the expense of the Contractor.
1
Whether or not the Engineer orders any additional sheeting .or bracing . to be installed or..
unsuitable sheeting or bracing to be replaced,. the Contractor shall be.'solely responsible for
the adegttacy of all sheeting or bracing:
.In general, all sheeiing and: bracing,- whether of -.steel, timber or other ifiaterial_used to support
the sides of trenches - or other open excavations shall- be withdrawn as .the trenches or other:
... ' open excavations are being refilled, That portion" of the' sheeting extending below the top of
a -pipe of sewer shall- be withdrawn, unless,directed,.before snore than six inches of'earth is..
placed above the top of the pipe or sewer and before any bracing is removed. The voids left
by the sheeting:shall be carefully refilled with selected material and rammed tight with tools
specifically adapted for the purpose; or as otl wise approved: "
The Engineer may order the Contractor to:delay the removal of sheeting and bracing, if, in his
judgment; the installed work has not attained the necessary strength to permit placing of
backfill.
If, to serve any purpose of his own, the Contractor files a written' request :for permission to
leave sheeting or bracing in the trench or excavation; the Engineer may grant such permission,
I
in writing, on condition that the cost. of such sheeting and bracing be assumed and paid. by the
Contractor.
The Contractor shall leave in place of all sheeting, shoring, and bracing which are shown on -{{
the drawings, or specified to be left in place or which the Engineer may order in writing to be I
left in place. All shoring; sheeting, and bracing shown or ordered to be left in place will be
paid for under the appropriate items of the Contract. No payment allowance will be made for
wasted ends or for portions above the proposed cut-off level, which are driven down instead
Ili

J
- 02200-8.
of cut off
In case: sheeting is left in place, it shall be cut-off br driven down as, :directed so that no portion
of the same shall remain within ;1.2" inches of the finished street of ground surface: "
9. BACKFILLING
BackBllittg around structures shall not' be . coniineiiced until directed by the Owner's
Representative., Backfrll arotind structures may be -placed- by machine,- provided the work shall
be done carefully to prevent damage to tar e. structure:.In no:case shall backfrll ''materials b'
allowed to fall directly oii a structure:until at least .12 inches of hand placed material has been :..
placed thereon and compacted:
Backlill around structures shall be deposited in horizontal layers not more "than one° foot in
thickness °and shall- be compacted to prevent settlennent.
All excavation shall :be backtilled to the original surface of the ground or to: such other grades
as may be shown'. specified.. or directed. Backfrlling shall..be done with suitable excavated
materials, approved by the Engineer, which can be satisfactorily compacted during refilling"of
the excavations. In -the event the excavated materials are riot suitable, special, backfill obtained
from approved borrow pits shall be used for backfilling. Frozen earth shall not -be used for
backfilling.
Backfill.ing shall besubject to Density Control.
The source of all backfill will. be submitted to the.Owner. The Owner. reserves the right to
sample the backfrll, at the Owner'sexpense, to verify that no contaminated materials are
brought on site. .
10. DENSITY CONTROL
All earth .work specified for Density Control shall have a minimum dry density as follows:

. 02200=9 .
MINIMUM COMPACTION
LOCATION: SOIL TYPE .. DENSITY -.
All aces under: pavements, Cohesive Soils. 95- Percent of maximum:dry
road surfaces, .. :within density.y h . ASTM:D698
highway. right-of-way
Cohesion less: Soils 75 Percent of maximum
.., a d c e t lative iisity :by ASTM
D2049
Udder turfed, sodded, . Cohesive: Soils 85 Percent of maxiti�um dry.
... seeded; non-traffic.areas::: ... densiiy. by AS TM D69.8: ...
.. st Sot o m .
Cohe otaless Is - 40 I'ereeilt f maxi um:
relative density by ASTM
D204 9 �
Insure backfill materials have moisture content within three (3).percent of optimum moisture
content at time of placement..
Soil, compaction testing, shall be' by soilsengineering employed by: Owner and: shall be
performed at Owner's expense.
Each layer of material shall be thoroughly tamped or. rolled to. the required •degree of
I
compaction by sheepsfoot or pneumatic rollers, mechanical tampers, or vibrators, unless a
satisfactory compaction is obtained by the travel: of trucks and earth moving machines. `I
Successive layers shall not be placed until the layer undefconstruction has been thoroughly
compacted
Trucks or other heavy equipment shall not be operated over pipelines until a minimum of I
24 inches of backfill above the crown of the pipe .has been placed and properly compacted
by tampers or other approved methods. Operation of any construction equipment over the
pipe, regardless of the depth of backfill, should be done with care and at the Contractor's
risk.

02200-10. .
Where required, the Contractor shall, .at his own expense, add sufficient water during
x•olling and tamping to assure complete consolidation.o:f`the fill.material.
1,1.1 At1LING MATERIAL, ON ROADS
When ifis necessary to:haul material oventhe streets=br-paveriients, the'Coiitractor shall
:provide suitable tight vehicles so as to:prevent deposits on the roads, Of pavements iiz'-:
all cases where any materials are dropped froini. the vehicles, the: Contractorshall clean up
ihe..same.as.'often as irected and keep the pavements clean and free from:dint, mud,
stone,: and other hauled ..material... .
1.2AOAD.WAYS' ..
Fill sections of roadways shall be coiistfucfed in accordance with applicable provision of
ara r a h 4 . -' IEi-nbaiikment:,'
In cut sections, the'subgrade shall be: pfoperly ahaped and -compacted to the minimum-'
dry density for- a:depth of b inches before any: base course or surface course'of pavement
is placed thereon..
When any portion of the subgrade is constructed: in a . Iocationi that con -orms ' to or
approximately with; the elevation of the subgrade, the existing surface shall- be 'plowed
and 'manipulated in order that the subgrade when compacted will have a uniform density.
Ditches and drains shall be provided and maintained to:satisfactorily drain the subgrade.
In no case shall, any base course of pavement be placed on frozen or muddy subgrade.
13. SPOIL
In general, all spoil material shall be disposed of offsite unless otherwise directed to an
area specified by the Owner.. Should any spoil material be placed on site, then the surface
of all spoil .placed on the site shall be graded and dressed. No unsightly mounds or heaps
shall be left on completion of the work.

220 0• 0-II..
14. SUBMITTALS
For any excavated material or deti'olition debris disposed of off -site, the, Contractor: will
furbish Owner with written documentation certifying the proper transport and. disposal _
of material:
The. Contractor will furnish the. Owner with the intended source of any fill material 1
I
furn.islied frozii off -site:
. l
15-. FINISH GRADING
The Contractor shall provide finish grading elevations within 0.1 foot plus or minus
from required- elevations, .or from existing, grade if.not otherwise specified.` Finisli
grading shall be completed'using existing .top soil or:other material as:specified; - with J
I
.'the'e finished surface free of stones, sticks, or other materials I inch or more ,ui any
I.
_. direction. Top soil shah. riot be placed when'subgrade is either wet or frozen enoiigh-to I
cause eloddina.
END OF SECTION C
`f
1.
r I
_I
f

02221 1
SECTION 02221
TRENCHING BACKFILLINCOMPACTING FOR UTILITIES
G AND .
1. General
A. Work included in this section: consists of, but is not limited: to, methods of installation
... of the following:..
1: -Sewers chamzcl ' and drain. i in
plp g ... ..
2. .Water pipitig (potable' plant,.piocess and Rion potable).
3:. Relocation of `existing piping.
4. Containment' piping...
S. Surface drainage conduits and piping, .
6. Electrical duct banks, conduits, and direct burial cables.
7. :All related utility and -processappurtenances.
�.- . B: Definitions:
I . Excavati.on,... :All excavation will. be de#ined,,as unclassified. No:separate.
pay.ments will be made for rock.excavationor removal of unsuitable
materials'.'
rd
r - .
t ,
2. Submittals
A. Submit respective pipe or conduit manufacturer's data regarding methods of
installation and. general recommendations.
3. Job, conditions
°A. Verify location'and existence of underground structures and utilities.
B. Take necessary precautions to protect existing: utilities from damage
due to any construction activity. Repair damages to utility items at own
expense. Assess no cost to Owner, Engineer, or auxiliary party for any
damages.

22 _.. :0 21-2..
C. Avoid overloadii'g the surface a sufficient distance back. fronte-dge of excavation
to prevent slides or: caving. M:aintain.and trim excavatedmaterial .in. such manner
to be as little inconvenience as possible to public and adjoining property owners:
D. Provide fullaccess to points as designated by Owner to prevent serious 1
interr uptiot!'Of travel. E. Protect and maintain bench marks, monuments or otlienestablished
�l
points and reference points and.if disturbed or destroyed; replace
items to full satisfaction of Owner:
4. Materials
A. - - Baekfill material:.
.. 1. As approved by Engineer:
-2. Free of rock., cobbles;=roots, sod or other organic matter, and frozen...=
material:.:.
3: Moisture content at time of placeinent: - :
three (3):percent plus/minus of optimum moisture content, as ... `I
specified in accord with ASTM 131557.
B. .. ' Subgrade stabilization material consisting of. ASTM C33
gradation size No. 57 crushed stone.
C. Embedment materials:
4f
1. Observe drawing notations for specifics regarding. embedment ll
conditions.
5. Execution
Remove and dispose unsuitable materials to site approved by Owner. -I
Excavate trench, backhll, and compact for all underground utility lines; structures, bases
t fi
and appurtenant items.
_ 4I
`r

02 2 i -�3 .
6. Excavation
A•.. Unclassified excavation;,.
1.. Remove rock excavation,clay, silt, gravel; hard pan; . .
loose shale;'and loose stone as diiected by Soils Engineer
and dispose of it: to site approved by ,Owner.
qq
B..: ... Excavationfoi•appurtenances: :: ...
A.-, Excavate fonappurtenant structures to provide at least :12
..: IN (minimum) clear distance between. outer surface and .:
embatilunent and.in full observation 'to Safety. Rules: . .
C. °Trench.exeavatio.n::
1. Unless given peiniission lo'do otherwise; excavate'tzenclies by open cut
method to depth shown on drawings and necessary to accommodate
.work.:.:
2 Backfill trench as soon as ossible, _Minimize length: of open trench at
... .. _. s g :. p
any one time. In.no'case, open more. than 100 feet' of trench at one-time.
- 3.. Observe the following trenching criteria:
a.Trench size. Excavate only sufficient width to place pipe or -conduit and
)low for' backfill and co a i iiipactor. Exceed outside "diameter 'of utility
�'•
r` service by.folIowing :dimensions: .
Overall Diameter of Utilit -._Service ' Excess Dimension'
33 IN. and -less 161N .
more than 33 IN':` 24 IN
b. Cut trench walls vertically from bottom of trench to 1 FT above top
of pipe, conduit, or utility service
c. Keep trenches free of water. Include cost of dewatering in original
proposal.
1
,d. Brace and sheet trenches as soil condition dictate in. full observation of .
OSHA requirements. Do not remove sheeting until backfilling has.

02221-4. .
progressed to stage that no damage to piping, util ity. service, or conduit
Will result due to removal: . .
e. Brace -trenches running near walls oi• colunmis, to prevent any. settlement
or other disturbance:of walls or columns:
7. Preparation of Foundation foi. Pipe :Laying
A. If over -excavation' occurs backfill: and p
compact to 90: percent oofaiiaxiinum
p
dzy density per AS`l'M I7698, or backfill with granular bedding material.
... ...
B. - 'Subgrade stabilization: Provide subgrade stabilization when directed by the -
Owner in accordance. with these specifications and detaiIs.when shown:
Observe -the following renuiremeiits when unstable trench bottom materials
are encountered. ..
1. Notify Owner when unstable materials are encountered.
.. .2. Remove unstable trench bottom caused by Contractor .failure to: dewater
or Contractor_operations. Replace with backfill and compact .to 90 percent
..
of maxiniuin dry density per-ASTM D698 or bael�fill with granular
bedding material without additional coinpentation
8. : Rackfilling
A. Methods: Provide backfill and compaction. methods of the following types:
1. Carefully compacted backfill. Furnish carefully compacted backfill ere .
indicated on drawings and specified for trench embedment conditions
and for connpaeted backfill conditions tip to 12 IN above top of pipe,
conduit or structure. Comply with the following:
a: Place backfill in lifts not exceeding 8 IN (loose thickness).
b. Hand place, shovel slice, and pneumatically tamp all carefully
compacted backfill.
C. Observe specific pipe, conduit or st uctiire manufacturer's J,
recomzm.endations regarding methods of backfilling and compaction.

_z
02221-5.
d. Ensure compaction of. each lift to requirements stated in these
specifications..
e. Exercise extreme care in bacicfillir g operations to avoid displacing -
joints and,.appurtenaiices or causing any horizontal or vertical- . .
misalignment, sepaiatioii;;or:distoition. Repair damages, distortions
or misalignments to full satisfaction of Engineer:.;
... .. ; 2. Common .trench backfill. Perform remaining bacicfilI in
accordance with the following:
a:. -Place backfill in liftihieknesses capable of being'compacted to
densities specified.' .
--b. Observe specific pip i e- or conduit manufacturer's recommendations
regarding: iiiethods of backfil:ling aiid compaetion.
c. Exercise extreme care in backfilling operations to: avoid dis lacing
p g.
Joints and appurtenances .or causing any horizontal or vertical
ii isalignip6nt; separation., or distortion. Repair damages, distortions
-} .or misaligiiinents-to full satisfaction of Engineer'
B. Water flushing for consolidation is not perrriitted.
C. Backfilling:for electrical installations:
-1.: Observe Part 8, "Backfilling', with the:following
modifications for electrical installation.
a. ' • Observe notes and details on electrical drawings for fill in
ii iniediate vicinity of direct buried cables.
D. Backfilling for Structures:
1. Where required all backfilling and compaction to be performed around
structures shall be considered carefully coinpacted backfill and shall
comply with Section 8.A.1. above
9. 'Compaction

.02221-6.
. I
14. Compaction requirements: Place. at ensure backfill and fill materials to achieve .
an. equal or "higher" degree,of compaction than.undisturbed iiiaterials'adjacent to
the work; however, in no case shall degree of compaction'- fall below .
Minimum Compaction" -specified.
l
Com act, trench backfill to density -required_in accordance with the following:
ASTM D698
ASTM D 1557
AASHTO.T99
ASTM D2049
. g y. y .
C. Unless noted otherwise on drawings or more=stem entl b other sectians* of these
specifications, comply with the following trench compaction criteria:: I .':LOCATION SOIL TYPE DENSITY
L .: Carefully Compacted
Backfill:
All A licable areas C sive soils 95 percent of MAX dry density by
pp <o ( )
ASTM:D698
Cohesioile5s soils (
75) percent of MAX relative d isity
by
AST
M D2049
2.:.Commont ench
Backfill:
Under pavements; ioad:way Cohesive -soils (90) percent of MAX di`y density by . �-
surfaces, within ASTM D698.
highway right-of-ways
Cohesionless soils (60) percent of relative density by I-
ASTM D2049
Under turfed, sodded, plant- Cohesive soils (85) percent of MAX.dry density by r
seeded, anon -traffic areas ASTM D698
Coliesionless soils (60) percent.of relative_ density by
ASTM D2049
h

P

.f
02910-1
.l
SECTION 02910
SITE RESTORATION -
- i
PART GENERAL
1.01''DESCRIPTION OF WORK: The intent of this Section is to:restore the work area'
.as
closely as possible, to its pre -constriction condition except such modifications as may. be
delineated in these Contract: Documents.
PART2 PRODUCTS
NOT USED .. -
.:PART3 EXECUTION'.
3.01 SITE WORK
A. General: Upon completion ofall construction activities, the Contractor shall be
responsible for restoring the site to its original, state- of appearance.. All :construction
debris and materials shall -be removed from:: site and: Asposed of properly. All
uncontaminated, excavated soils shall be removed from the site.'Soils, deemed by,
the Engineer to be contaminated; shall be properly: stockpiled in accordance with
regulatory guidelines in an area that: will not. interfere .with the_ operation: of the : f
facility. .
B. Landscaping: Anydisturbance of grassy areas shall be re -seeded to restore the lawn 'I
to its original state, unless.original conditions were such that grasses and foliage were I
non-existent. All plants, shrubbery and other foliage destroyed during construction
.Shall be replaced so that the original,appearance of the landscaping is restored. f
C: Concrete/Asphalt: Any concrete curbing, asphalt, or other aboveground
improvements removed, damaged or destroyed during constieuction activities shall
be repaired/replaced at the Contractor's expense. `~
Repair asphalt with a minimum of 8 inches of Type 11 bituminous concrete in two I
equal, compacted lifts. Resurface repaired areas with a minimum of 1-1/2 inches
of Type I-1 bituminous concrete. Taper I-1 to match existing pavement. Grade
fi surface to drain. A4
i
f

9 �f,

-
i
�
,'
�s

SECTION 10441 ..
SIGNS.: rr
PART 1- GENERAL -
1.01 DESCRIPTION
This section specifies inforrhational and accident prevention signs. -Building signs and
room signs. are specified in Section 10400:
.:. 1.02::: OPERATING AND DESIGN REQUIREMENTS . .
A.... GENERAL:
Accident prevention signs shall conform as to de"sign witli OSHA Section 1910.145 of
subpart J; Part 1910; Chapter XVI.1, Title. 29 of the :Code of Federal Regulations:: Exit signs shall
.conform. with Section 1910.37(g) of the OSHA .Safety and Health• Standard for General Industry, ..
Article 1.0, Section.1 0. 1 13of the Uniform Fire Code, and"where applicable.with local Brie_ . .
regulations. .
In addition -to the.signs identified on the: schedule in Part 3. of this section, the following.. .
shall be 'provided:
L .. , 'Caution Automatic Equipment May Start At Any Time":Signs' shall be
.. provided.
-s 2. Construction warning signs in accordance with OSHA regulations at all -
plant entry gates, i.e., "hard hat area," etc.
J•
3. Construction waming:signs in all buildings where Work is. being
perfoimed such as "hard hat area", "overhead danger
4. Other construction related barricades or ribbon. "
5. Constructionrelated site barricades, lights, etc. at roadway and other site
excavations.
6. Warning signs at all electrical areas warning of electrical shock hazards in
accordance with OSHA regulations.
i
7. Construction information signs at plant entries stating that all visitors must
register and check -in with the Contractor and/or Construction Manager. t
10441-1 MQUNTAIRF FARMS - LUMBER BRIDGE
W WTS UPGRADE

B: DESIGN REQUIREMENTS:
1. SIZE: Sign size shall:-1 a 'as follows:
I
A, - l4 inch x 20 inch
... .. W" 10.inch x:1:4.inch
C - 7 inch x 10 inch . 1
:.: 2.- TYPE: The sign type shall be as: follows: .
.... Message
CAUTION --AUTOMATIC EQUIPMENT MAY START AT ANY TIME . .
DANGER .-480 VOLTS
NOTICE —NON -POTABLE, WATER --DO NOT DRINK
NO SMOKING
I
DANGER --KEEP OUT
DANGER --HIGH VOLTAGE r
DANGER -=CONFINED SPACE ENTRY
DANGER --CONFINED SPACE --HAZARDOUS ATMOSPHERE
EAR PROTECTION REQUIRED BEYOND THIS POINT.
NOTICE:= RESTRICTED AREA AUTHORIZED PERSONNEL ONLY -
PART 2--PRODUCTS...
= 2.01 GENERAL
f
Sign lettering shall be, single stroke and shall contrast in color with the background: For
those messages for which there are international symbols, the international symbols shall be l
used. Chain mounted signs shall have lettering on both sides. I
2.02 MATERIALS
Signs shall be 0.100-inch thick fiberglass with embedded fadeproof legends.
PART 3--EXECUTION
Signs shall be distributed as indicated by Construction Manager.
V
**END OF SECTION** Y
10441-2 MOUNTAIRE FARMS-T.UMBF,R BRIDGE
WWTS UPGRADE
l�_

...
DIVISION I
EQUIPMENT .
a -
t
� '
I:
a
,
*

SECTION 11000 =
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS TOR EQUIPMF,NT
PART I --GENERAL.
1.01 ADESCRIPTION
A.: SCOPE:
- Phis section specifies general requirements which areapplicable'to all in.e6hanical..: :
equipment. The Contractor is responsible for ensuring that all mechanical. equipincilt meets
the requirements of this section.in addition to the specific requirements of the individual equipment
specification section.
B. EQUIPMENT LISTS:
-E ui menflists presented in theses specifications and ass ecified on the drawin s
... q P... , presented p .... ,. - p ... g , are.
included for the convenience of the Construction Managcr and Contractor and ;are not complete
listings of all equipment, devices. and material to beprovided under this contract. The Contractor .
agrees to prepare his own matefial and equipment takeoff lists as necessary to meet the requirements
of this project manual.
i
L02 QUALITY ASSURANCE.
A. :::ARRANGEMENT:..:
The arrangement of equipment shown on the. drawings -is based upon information• available
to the.Owner at the tune of design and is not intended to show exact dimensions peculiar to a.
specific manufacturer. The drawings are, in part, diagram ilatic, and some features of the illustrated
equipment installation may require revision: to meet..actual equipment installation requirements. .
Struetural-supports, foundations, connected piping, valves, and electrical conduit specified may
have io be altered to accommodate the equipment provided.
B. REFERENCES: -
This section contains references to the following documents. They are apart of this section
as specified and modified. Where a referenced document contains references to other standards,
those documents are included as references under this section as if referenced directly. In the event
of conflict between the requirements of this section and those of the listed documents, the
requirements of this section shall prevail.
Unless otherwise specified, references to documents shall mean the documents in effect I
at the time of Notice to Proceed. if referenced documents have been discontinued by the issuing 1
organization, references to those documents shall mean the replacement documents issued or
1 1000-1 NIOUNTAIRE FARMS- LUMBER BRIDGE
W WTS UPGRADE
1

1
otherwise identified by that organization or, if -there are no replacement documents, the last -
version of the'document'before it was discontinued.
Reference Title
A 8MA- Std 9 Load Ratings and: Fatigue Life for Ball Bearings '
ABMA Std. 11 Load: Ratings and Fatigue :Life foi• Roller Bearings
ANSI B1.1 Unified Screw Threads - -
ANSI B1.20.1 Pipe -Threads,. General.Purpose(Xnch)
ANSI B16.1 Cast Iron .Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings, Class,125
ANSI B18.2.I - Square`and Hex,Bolts and Screws, Including ASItcW Hcad:'
Bolts, Hex Cap Screws, and Log.Screws
ANSI B18.2.2 Square and Hex Nuts
C. UNIT:RLSPONSIBILITY::
Equipment systems made up:of two or more components shall be manufactured and
assembled as a unit by the responsible manufacturer. The responsible manufacturer shall:select all
components.of thesystem to assume compatibility, ease.of construction and efficient maintenance.
The responsible manufacturer shall coordinate sclecfion and de' gn of all system components such
that all.equipiiient.furnislied under the specification forthe equipment system, including equipment
specified_ clsewhere-but ieferenced'in the specification, is compatible and operates properly to
achieve tlie-performance requii•einents specified. Uiiless, otherwise specified; -the responsible
nanufacturer shall'be the manufacturer of the driven equipment. Agents, representatives or other
entities who are not a direct component of the manufacturing corporation will not be acceptable as a .
substitute. for the manufacturer's corporation in meeting this requirement. This requirement for unit . .
responsibility shall in no way.relkize the Contractor ofhis responsibility to-thd Owner= for
perfoiliiance of all systems;
_ The Contractor. shall assure that all equipment systems provided for the.project aide products
for which unit responsibility.has been accepted by the responsible manufacturer.
D. BALANCE:
Unless specified otherwise, all rotating elements in motors; pumps, blowers and centrifugal
compressors shall be fully assembled, including coupling hubs, before being statically and
,i dynamically balanced. All rotating elements shall be balanced to tine following criteria:
I
W
e=76N
1 1 000-2 MUUNi•AIRE FARMS- LUMBER BRIDGE
.WWTS UPGRADE

Wherc:
= imbalance,: ounce
maximum.
TV: = Weight of the balanced assembly, pounds mass . ... ..
s
N = : Maxiinunr operational speed, rpm
1.03 - BQUII'MF..NT ANCI3OR CALCULATIONS
The Contractor shall cause driven egiiipmerit manufacturer to prepare, and Contractor shall
submit, equipment anchor- calculations' for all equipment wi.tli drivers.20 horsepower and greater in
accordance with the requirements.of Section.11002.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
The -following information shall be.prov ided in'accordance with Section 01300'•
Submittal information for this Section (111000) shall be numbered and marked (specification-::
number and equipment number) for inclusion.(fling) with other submittal information for the
associated itein of equipment to be mounted:
l .: Shop drawings for all a ui went . ads e iii went anchors :and base late
P.q..p p q p. p ,
soleplate or m6unting:block details: Shop drawings shall depict size and
location oflequipment pads and reinforcement; egWpnient-drains;-
equipmentanchor bolt, size, location, and.projection; expansion joint.
locations; elevation of top of grout and grout thickness; elevation of.t"op of I-
baseplatc; soleplate; or. mounting -block; size and location of elecirical
conduits; and any other equipment mounting features embedded in
equipment pads.
i
j
PART 2--PRODUCTS
2.0.1 FLANGES AND PIPE THREADS
l
Flanges on equipmentand appurtenances provided under this section shall conform in
dimensions and drilling to ANSI B16.1, Class 125. Pipe threads shall conform in dimension and
limits of size to ANSI B 1.1, coarse thread series, Class 2 fit. 1
Threaded flanges shall have a standard taper pipe thread conforming to ANSI B 1.20. 1.
Unless otherwise specified, flanges shall be flat faced.
Flange assembly bolts shall be heavy pattern, hexagonal head, carbon steel (unless other
wise specified) machine bolts with heavy pattern, hot pressed, hexagonal nuts conforming to ANSI
B18.2.1 and B18.2.2. Threads shall.be Unified Screw Threads, Standard Coarse Thread Series,
Class 2A and 2B, ANSI B 1. 1.
11000-3 MOUNTAIRE FARMS - LUMBER BRIDGE
WWTS UPGRADE
r
1

2.02 BEARINGS
Unless otherwise-specif ed, equipment bearings shall be oil or grease lubricated, lball.or
roller type, designed to withstand the stresses of the service specified.: Each bearing shall:be rated in ' ...
accordance with the latest revisions of ABMs Methods of Evaluating Load Ra' tings of Ball and
Roller Bearings. Unless otherwise specified, equipment:bearings shall have a minimum L-10 rating
life;of50,000.Izours. The rating life shall be determined usin the maximum equipment operating
speed:
..
Grease lubricated. bearings, excepttliase specified.to be factory sealed 'and lubricated, sliall =
be fitted with easily accessible grease supply, flush, drain and relief fittings. Extension tubes shall
... ... .. .. .. .
be used when necessary: Grease supply fittings shall be standard.hydraulic aleihite type.
. Oi.l lubricated bearings shall be equipped.with either. a pressure.lubiicating system or a
separate oil reservoir type_system. Each: oil lubrication system shall be of sufficient, size to; safely
absorb the heat energy normally generated in the bearing under a maximurn ambient temperature of
60 degrees C: and shall be equipped with a filler pipe and an external level:indicator gage.:
All bearings accessible to touch and located within 7'feet measured vertically from floor or
working level or within 15 inches measured horizontally from stairways, ramps, fixed ladders or.
other access structures shall either incorporate bearing housings with sufficient cooling to maintain
surface temperature at 65- degrees C or less for continuous operation_ at,bearing rated load and a
50 degrees -C:aMbient:temperature or appropriate shielding shall be provided that will prevent
inadvertent human :contact. :: .. .. ...
Unless :otherwisespecified, all bearings shall be -fitted with beadng'isolators, specifically
selected for the size and type bearing. Bearing isolators shall be labyrinth,: non -fretting type
-� designed to expel contaminants bycentrifiigal force and prevent escape of lubricants: Vapor bloc: k
.. ' capability shall. be provided; Bearing seals shall be Inpro/Seal or approved equal.
2.03 V-BEL.TASSEMBLIES (NOT USE
2.04. PUMP SHAFT SEALS : (NOT USED)
2.05 COUPLINGS (NOT USED)
2.06 GUARDS
I
Exposed moving parts shall be provided with guards'which meet the requirements of
OSHA. Guards shall be fabricated of 14-gage steel, 1/2-13-15 expanded metal screen to provide
visual inspection of moving parts without removal of the guard. Guards shall be. galvanized after
fabrication and shall be designed to be readily removable to facilitate maintenance of moving parts.
Reinforced,holes shall be provided. Lube fittings shall be extended through guards. ,
0
11000-4 MOUNrAIRF FARMS - LUMnr•.R BRIDGE
W WTS UPGRADE

i
II
2.07 CAUTION SIGNS-.
Equipment: with. guarded -moving- parts which- operates automatically or by remote control
shall be' identified by signs .reading "CAUTION - AUTOMATIC EQUIPMENT MAY START AT
g ''c g material, , figid,
ANY 'TIME .. Si ns shall be constructed of filler lass material rniniiilum 1/8 tinch.thick ri lid -
suitable for.post mounting. Letters shall be .white on a c•ed background. The sign size and pattern .
shall be. as shown on the drawings; Signs shall be installed near: guarded inoving parts. -
2.08 GAGE TAPS, TEST PLUGS AND GAGES
Gage taps shall be provided .on the suction and discharge sides of:piuiips, blowers and
compressois.,Pressurc and vacuum gages shall be provided -Where specified.
2.09 NAMEPLATES
Nameplates shall.be provided on each item. of equipment and shall containthe specified
equiprocht.name or abbreviation and equipment mmiber in addition to manufacturer's model and
serial numbers, Equipment nameplates sliall be engraved or stamped stainless steel and fastened to
the -equipment in -an accessible location with stainless steel. screws oi•: drive pins:.: _
I .
2.10 LUBRICANTS
The Contractor shall,provide, for each item_ of mechanical equipment a supply of the
lubricant regirii•ed for,the commissioning period. Lubricants shall be of tlrc type recommended by
tine equilihient manufacturer and shall be products of die Owners current lubricant supplier. The -.
Contractor sliall-limit the various types of lubricants by consolidating them, with the equipment
manufacturer's approval;:into. the least number cif differentaypes. Not less than.90 days before the
date shownin his construction schedule for starting,'testing and adjusting egiupment, the Contractor -
shall provide the Owner with three copies of list showing the required lubricants, after'
consolidation, for each iterii of mechanical equipment. The: list shall show estimated quantityof
lubricant needed for a frill year's operation, assurnhig the. equipment will -be operating continuously. -
2.11 EQUIPMENT MOUNTING AND ANCHOR BOLTS
Rigid equipment mounts shall be as specified in Section 11002.
2.i2 SPARE PARTS
Spare parts, wherever required by detailed specification sections, shall be stored in
accordance with the provisions of this paragraph. Spare parks shall be tagged by project equipment
number and identified as to part number, equipment manufacturer, and subassembly component I
(if appropriate). Spare parts subject -to deterioration such as ferrous metal items and electrical
components shall be properly protected by lubricants or desiccants and encapsulated in hermetically
sealed plastic wraPliing. Spare parts with individual weights less .than 50 pounds and dimensions
less than 2 feet wide, or 18 inches high; or 3 feet in length shall be stored in a wooden box with a -
hinged wooden cover and locking hasp: Hinges shall be strap type.
1 1000-5 MOUNTAIRF, FARMS — LUn BLR BRfpGr
WWTS UPGRAI)r

11000-6 MOUNTAiRE FARMS - LUMBER BRIDGE .
WWTS UPGRADE

.Spec No.. 174-540..
...
Revision #• 2
Date: 9/4/18
Issued bye GPT
..Page 1 of.1=
:. EQUIPMENT DATA SHEET.
MBBR.TREATMENT SYSTEM .
MOUNTAIRE FARMS '
LUMBER
BRIDGE, NC
Activated Sludge Reactor
EQ.: No.
Number:
Two
Type:
MBBR (mixed bed'bioreacfors)
Manufacturer:- _
Entex or Engineer -Approved
Equivalent .
--Model: ..
:N/A
Design Flow:.
2.5 MGD
... Return. Sludge: Flow (MGD)
0
. Design Criteria:
SALR of-20 g/m2/d '
Media Re d,CM
q �CF. -):
. )
3,730 :
1:125 (9
Media' T e: .
yp�
Entex Bi oportz
Media Fill: :::
32% .
Tank Dimensions:
52' Dia x 29' ft SWD
_.
Effluent Criteria:.
... ... ...
65% to'90%o sBOD removal
..
Accessories (supplied):::
Influent Screens.
Effluent Screens
-
DO probe.
Screen score. (using air)
Basin DO control
Ancillary Equipment-
Tanks
(specified elsewhere):
Aeration grid
y
Blowers

.Spec No...1. 4-540.. '
... ... .. ...
Revision . • :: ' .. .
Date: 9/4%18
Issued by GPT
..Page 1 of.1:
EQUIPMENT ;DATA: SKEET ::: .
MBBR TREATMENT SYSTEM
MOUNTAIRE FARMS:
.LUMBER BRIDGE,:NC
Aeration. Grid
EQ.. No.
Number:
Two (2): .
Purpose: _ : =
To mix and provide oxygen to. MBBR
...Tanks 1 and' 2
Manufacturer:. :
Entex or Engineer -Approved Equivalent
Minimum: ::
4000 scfm (per tank)
Maximum:.. '
11,744 scfin
• :Pressure Prop (at Dropleg):
T5 s
p g •
Drop. Pipe Size: _ : '
18"
Materials of Construction: -
304 SS Drop Pipe
.PVC Header
-Diffuser:
Coarse Bubble
Accessories:::
Yoke lateral su orts dro . i e supports
pp- ppp pp.
Tank Info:... '
MBBR tanks
... Dia::
Height:.
35'
Max Liquid SWD:
31.5'
Tank Reference Drawing:
i
271, 272
11001-2

... _.
..
.Spec No..174-540..
;. Revision # 1
Date: 4/9/18
Issued byc= GPT
Page 1 of 1..
EQUIPMENT DATA SHEET.
MBBR TREATMENT SYSTEM . .
... ... MOUNTAIRE FARMS
.... ...: LUMBER BRIDGE, NC
MBBR Tanks
EQ., No.
Number:
Two (2)
Manufacturer:
Tarsco orEqual
Material of Construction:
304 SS
Volume:
556;000 gallons with Sft freeboard
Dimensions:
_52' foot diameter by 35' foot sidewall -
-- - - ... ..
height -
'. Type:.. ..
... Cylindrical .. .
Service:
MBBR tanks
Working Temperature::
Ambient:''
Working Pressure:
Atmospheric ...
Contents:.
Wastewater .
Interior Piping:
Yes. See:nozzle schedule, aeration
-
diffusergrid'(by others)
Seismic .Group '..
... II ':: .
Accessories:-
Steps and cat -walk, nozzles as shown on-.
:drawings; pipe supports -
Ref..Drawing:.:
271, 272
"r
4
11001-3

Spec No...174-540.
:..
Revision F;
-.Date: 4/9/18
ssued by:'GPT
::.
Page Io f.l:
' EQUIPMENT DATA SHEET.
MBBR TREATMENT -SYSTEM "
... : M - UNTAIRE FARMS
..: LUMBER BRIDGE, NC .
Sludge. Storage Tanks
. EQ. No. .
Number:
Two:(2)
Manufacturer:
Rental Equipment (Frac Tanks); . -
Material of Construction:
Epoxy Coated Steel .
Volume:
21,000 gallons, .-,
Dimensions::'
560" x -102" x-120"
.. TYpe : : '
Frac Tank '
Service:
Waste Activated Sludge Tank
Working Temperature::.: ...
Ambient r.."".
Working Pressure:
Atmospheric
Contents:::
.::Wastewater;:waste:activated sludge
Interior Piping:
No.,.:
Seismic Group....
1 ; Accessories:.
:Level gauges, outlet manifold (by others)
�
S
11001-4

.. Spec ec No..174-540.
Revision #:.'3 ...
Date: 9/4/18 -
:Issued by-: GPT
.Page 1 of.1 , '
EQUIPMENT DATA SHEET
MBBR TREATMENT SYSTEM ;
MOUNTAIRE
FARMS ...
LUMBER BRIDGE, NC
Aeration Blowers
EQ.: N6.
'
Number Pumps:
Three (3)
-:Purpose:..
Provide air for MBBR:tanks
Manufacturer.:
Excelsior or Engineer Approved I
Equivalent
- Model: :
:Cycloblower HE250:.CDL 750 RC2
Speed:
Max 2200 rpm
Discharge Temp.:,
263
Design Inlet -Temp.:
80OF
:Blower Elevation (ASL):
'.:200 ft
Pump Motor:..
'Size:.*-: ...
350 ] PP
Electrical: ':
-460 V/3pH/60 Hz .
Type:
TEFC.. .
- Motor .FLA 5:15A at 460.V.
Capacity, each:
Max 4043 scfm (@ 60 Hz)
:Discharge Pressure::
15 psig
Materials of Construction:
Manufacturer Standard...:'
Type:
Positive Displacement
Accessories:
Air inlet filter, air outlet silencer, NEMA
3R noise enclosure; space heater; EAP
11 drive panel, exhaust fan w/ thermostat -
(1/3 HP, 115/230/l/60); relief valve,
check valve
Sound Level:
Approx. Dimensions,
172" x 82" x 136".
(LxWxD):
Connections:
12" outlet
14" inlet
11001-5
I

Spec No..174-540. .
Revision #: 2' -
..Date: 9f4%18
Issued by: GPT
Page 1 of. L
EQUIPMENT DATA SHEET
- MBBR.TREATMENT SYSTEM ..
MOUNTAIRE FARMS :.
:. LUMBER BRIDGE, NC
DAF Sludge Pump and Transfer
EQ. No.
Number: -
Two (2)
Type:
-Bolted air -powered :diaphragm, ball .
valve
Manufacturer;
Wilderi -or equal -
Model: ..
PS8
Design Flow:.
60 GPM at 20 psig
Air Requirements:
..: .. q.
10 SCFM u si
P to 100 .: p g: .. ..
Fluid Pumped:
Wastewater Sludge; DAF float flange
Inlet and Outlet Size:
2" :inlet, --2" outlet
_
Materials of Construction::
..
Diaphragm:,
Wit=Flex.
Wetted Parts:
Polypropylene
Accessories:
Air filter; pressure regulator (by others)
Approx. Pump:Dimensions,
24" x 19" x 327' ...
�? (LXWxD)
,. Pump Weight:
M
89 .lb.
}
i
11001-6

Spec No..174-540. -
Revision #:.:2 •
Date: 9/4/18
Issued by-.: GPT -
Page 1 of.1
EQUIPMENT DATA SHEET
MBBR TREATMENT SYSTEM:
MOUNTAIRE
FARMS
LUMBER BRIDGE, NC --
:: ... New Primary DAF Unit - - -
Number:
One
Manufacturer:
-Sorin or Eng ineer Approved Equivalent
DAF.Model Number:
Sorin 600
Design Flow::
600 gpiri/ 800 gpin hydraulic
Design Inlet TSS: -
DAF Function:
-:'Primary Treatment
Liquid. Material:..
- Wastewater
Liquid Specific Gravity:
LO
Working Pressure:-::
Atmospheric r
Materials of Construction::
SS 304
Operating Weight:
132;940 lbs. :
Dimensions:
-27'6" x 8'x14'9" -
End Connections: °
Float discharge -. TBD
Influent - 6" :::
Effluent _ 12'9
Driver:
2 Hp skimmer drive
Recycle pump
Controls:
Match existing
Electrical:
480 V/3 plisse/60 Hz
Accessories:
Polymer feed pumps
4-2 HP with VFD Moyno Pumps
L
i,
5y _.
r
11001-7

Spec No...114-540 . .
..
- Revision #:..0 ..
Date: 4/18/18
..
Issued by: GPT
Page 1of1'.
EQUIPMENT
DATA SHEET
MBBR.TREATMENT SYSTEM '
MOUNTAIRE FARMS
LUMBER BRIDGE, NC ;
= Pre -Engineered Building
:
Quantity: :: .'
. One: 1 .. O
Type:
Pre fabricated concrete or engineer -
approved equal .
Size::.:
20-ft: by- 15-ft;.10-ft interior wall clearance
Doors:
One`double door,' one additional man door
Color:
Mfr. Standard as Approved by: Owner ...
:Insulation:
- " Mff. Standard
Options:.
Lightin heat: ump, mini=s lit M01.9-
Power:
120/208 V 3. ph
" Panel Schedule:
See:Drawing 502 .: .
Additional:,
NC PE Stamped Drawings
= Suitable for Building Permit:-
11001-8

- SECTION 11002
RIGID EQUIPMENT,MOUNTS
PART 1=-GT'NERAL.
1.01 DESCRIPTION..
A. - SCOPE: .. -
This sectionspecifies minimum requirements foie rigid equipment n-nounts (baseplates,
soleplates, and mounting blocks) an-d their installation on equipment pads.. Completed° -
equipment.supports sliall consist of equipment pads,'equipment.anchors,: and rigid equipment,
mounts (baseplates, soleplates, on• mounting blocks) set in. grout.
Unless alternate requirements for equipment mounts are. specifled in'the applicable
equipment s specification, the requirements of this section shall be -applied to ri rid mounts for all -
-P� � 4 pP 6
..
rotating or reciprocating equipment tli, is used to mix, convey, or pressurize. fluids (gases and
liquids).. The icgbirements of this section shall also apply whenever referenced iii'specifications
for
ypes
ween this
on
ind � iidual equipment manufacturers, the a lore estt restrictive, requirements inelmentss hall prevail.
of
.4
B... DEFINITIONS:.
Specific equipment- mounting trminology used in this section conforms to the following �-
definitions:
1. BASEPLATE: Fabricated,(welded struetural steel elements), cast, or plate
steelbaseproviding a common mounting element on which the legs, feet, or 1nounting.surfaces
of equipment are mounted by means of bolted connections.
.1_
2. SOLEPLATE: A machined plate, spanning an opening in the floor or f
equipment pad, providing a common mounting element.on which the legs, feet, or mounting
surfaces of equipment are mounted by means of bolted connections.
3. MOUNTING BLOCKS: Multiple smaller baseplates on which individual
legs, feet or equipment supports are mounted when equipment or drivers are not fastened to a
common.baseplate or sole plate.
4. EQUIPMENT PAD: Concrete foundation (block or slab) supporting and
elevating equipment mounts above the supporting structural floor slab or local grade. L
5. MOUNTING PADS: Thickened or raised areas of baseplates and
soleplates where the feet or mounting surfaces of mounted equipment and drivers are bolted
and/or doweled to the baseplate or soleplate.
1 1002-1. MOUNTAIRE FARMS -LUMBER BRIDGE
WWTS UPGRADE

6. LEVELING'BLOCKS: Temporary steel blocks placed -under baseplates,
soleplates, or a mounting block'at. levelin p ositions atequipment anchors):for the_ tu' �osc of :..
leveling baseplates, soleplates, or mounting blocks prior to grouting,. .
7. SHIMS: Thin stainless steel plates of a uniform thickness installed on top
of Leveling Blocks. for fine adjustment of level.
8: WEDGES: Paiiws of unif firmly tVererl metalblocks that are stacked with
the tapered surfaces reversed (relative to :the other -wedge) so. that the top_ and bottom surfaces of
the wedges are parallel: ,Wedges are used between equipm. irpads and baseplates; soleplates; or .
mounting blocks for the purpose of leveling baseplates, soleplates; ofmounting blocks..
9. ::. .,MOUNTING STUD:. Threaded, rod of bolts anchored to baseplates, .:
soleplates, or mounting blocks for the. -purpose of mounting.equipment or ancillary devices onto
baseplates, soleplates, or,:mounting blocks.
14.. REINFORCEMENT DOWELS: Steel. reinforcement rods embedded in
concrete, across: a cold joint, for the. purpose .of transferring, oads or force across the joint;
11. MACHINE ALIGNMENT DOWELS: ;Tapered diameter rods inserted: in
tapered diameter holes for the ur ose of aligning machinery-'' The practice,of drilling tapered
diameter holes through machinery. and.baseplates.so that -Machine Alignment Dowels play be
inserted to -facilitate alignment of machineryis.known.as Doweling.
12. LEVELING POSITION:-. A location.on the top. of a concrete equipment
ad where leveling tools'and equipment will lie tem oraril installed or used for the purpose of
pad:whereP Y• P:P
leveling baseplates,,soleplates, and mounting blocks prior to,grouting.
1:3. GROUT SYSTEM MANUFACTURER: Refers to the. approved. epoxy -
grouting.system manufacturer, abbreviated as the GSM.
14. GROUT SYSTEM MANUFACTURER'S TECHNICAL
REPRESENTATIVE(S).; Refers to the technical representative(s) of the approved Grouting
System Manufacturer and shall be abbreviated as GTR.
_ C. EQUIPMENT MOUNTING REQUIREMENTS:
Unless otherwise specified, equipment and drivers shall be rigidly nrounted,on a common
cast iron or fabricated steel baseplate or soleplate grouted into place on a concretc equipment
pad. Under no circumstances shall baseplates, soleplates, or. mounting blocks be grouted directly
to concrete slabs or floors. Equipment that uses an interdependent equipment and driver
mounting configuration (equipment that is bolted onto the driver frame and equipment that
supports the driver entirely from the equipment frame) may be bolted;directly on concrete or .
grout surfaces of equipment pads if the driver i.s less than five horsepower. Bolting equipment
1 1 002-2 MOUNTAI.RE FARMS - LUMBER BRIDGE
wWTS UPGRADE

rr
I -
directly on concrete or grout surfaces of equipment pads: is not acceptable for equipment and
_.
drivers that:do not have an interdependent_ egiiipuient and drivel• mounting configuration.
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. REFERENCES:.
This section contains references to the following.documents.: It is a part of this section as ...
specified and:in6dified. In ease of -conflict between the requirements of this. -section and those of.
the listed document, the requirements of -this section shall prevail.
Unless: otherwise:specitied, references:to documents shall mean the documents -in effect
at the tune of Notice.to Proceed.. if referenced documents have been discontinued by the issuing:
organization, references to those.docunielits.shall mean the replacement documents issued or:
otherwise identified by that organization or, if there are no replacement documents, the -last `
version of the document before it was -discontinued.
Reference Title .
ANSI/HI 1.4 Centrifugal. Pumps — Installation;: Operatiori and
Maintenance
ANSUIdI 2:�1 Vertical Pumps- Installation, operation and
Maintenance I_
. p:.
API RECOMMENDED. Recommended Practices for Machinery .I.nstallation. and _
P.RACTICE:686 Installation Design
ASTM:E329 Inspection and Testing Agencies -for Concrete, Steel,..
and Bituminous Materials as Used in Construction
MIL PRF-907E Anti -Seize Thread Compoupd,.High Teimeratufe .
�-
SSPC Society for Protective Coatings Specifications, Vol. 2
IBC 2018 International.Bui[ding Code (including local
amendments)
UBC 2018 Uniform Building Code, 2018 Edition
1.03 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
A. SUPPORTS, ANCHORAGE AND MOUNTS:
Supports (equipment pads), anchorage (equipment anchors), and morons (baseplates,
soleplates, or mounting blocks) for equipment specified in this section shall be furnished by the
Contractor and shall confot•tn to the specifications and details for rigid equipment mounts.
Anchorage and mounts for equipment specified in this section shall be configured to resist the
maximum lateral and vertical forces encountered during operation of the equipment. Maximum..
lateral and vertical forces shall include, but are not limited to, the combined forces resulting from
seismic loads specified in the UBC 2018, loads resulting from pipe connections and pipe
11002-3 N40UNTAIRL FARMS - LUMBER BRIDGE
\VwTS UPGRADE
r

anchorage, and other loads resulting from operation of the equipmeni_(as indicated by the
e to ment.manufacturer . Equipment ment anchor size di.auieter .shall"be as re uiied'b the
q p ) q P (.. ) q Y.
equipment manufacturer to resist. the maximum lateral, and vertical forces specified ri this
paragraph.
B. EQUIPMENT ANCHOR CALCULI TiONS:
Equipment anchor calculations shall demonstrate -that equipment anch.or.size,
embedment, and edge distance comply with the UBC 2.018 *and are sufficient'to'resist the
-maximum lateral and vertical forces specified in Paragraph 1.1002_1.03 .A': ' Equipment anchor'
calculations shall be scaled by a registei•ed'structural or civil:engineer licensed in :the State of:
North Carolina. :
C: EQUIPMENTR QUIRING EPDXY GROUT
Equip>iient requiring: epoxy: gi out shall be:any piece of egtiipment 50:liorsepowcl �r
greater,.1500 pounds or greater- or any Niece of reciprocating; equipment 20 horsepower or
greater..
1.04 SUBMITTALS,
A. EQUIPMENT=SPECIFIC SUBMITTALS:
The following information shall be provided in accordance with Section 01300; :
Submittal information.. for this Section (11602) shall be numbered and marked (specification;;: -..
number and equipment number) for inclusion (fling) with other submittal information for the
associated item of equipment to be -mounted:
Shop drawings for all. equipment pads; equipment anchors,• and baseplate, :
soleplatc or mounting block details. --Shop drawings shall depict size and
location of 'equipment pads and re'inforcement; equipment drains;:
equipment anchor, size, location, and projection; expansion joint
locations; elevation of. top of grout and grout thickness; elevation of top of
baseplate; so.leplate; or _mounting block; size -and location of electrical
conduits; and any other equipment mounting features°embedded in .
equipment pads.
PART 2--PRODUCTS
2.01 GENERAL
Prior to initiating any installation efforts, the Contractor shall provide schedule
containing, the expected dates for preparation of equipment pads for leveling, grouting, and final
equipment anchor clamping for each item of equipment.
11002-4 h,10UNTAIRE FARASS •- LlJMBLR BRIDGE
WWTS UPGRADE

I
2.02 CONCRETE EQUIPMENT PADS
. ... Concrete equipment. pads'. for equipment and floor penetrations shall .be as shown in the" .
equipment pad and equipment anchor details for rigid mounted equipment.
2-.03 BASEPLATES, SOLEPLATES, AND MOUNTING BLOCKS
:
--A, GENERAL:
Unless otherwise specified, Type .fbascplates; soleplates, and mounting blocks shall be :a:
iiiinimuin of 1. inch thick fo-:equiptent with drivers 20 horsepower and larger. All
Type Lbaseplates, soleplates, and mounting blocks shall have edges of surfaces bearing -on `grout
rounded to, a radius. of not less than 0.25 inch: Horizontal corners of Type I baseplates;
soleplates, or mounting blocks shall be rounded to a radius of not.less than.two inches to avoid _..
producing stress risers on the grouted foundation. Grout pouring holes-(miiiimun! 4 inches.in
diameter for epoxy gio't ininimuiii. 2'/z inches in diameter for cerr entitious=lionshriilk:grout)
shall be provided in all baseplates and soleplates and all baseplates and soleplates shall have
rout release holes: Mountin blocks ma be routed without: =rout ourin holes. provided that:
g' g Y g' 6 pouring p -
no.dimension.ofthe mounting block (width or length) exceeds 18 iches. Grout -relief or gent n
holes (tninim>iin l inch:in diameter) shall be:pi•ovided in all baseplates; soleplates, and,mounting .
blocks. Internal stiffeners shall be provided on all cast and fabricated baseplates and shall be
designed to allow free flow of grout from one section of: the baseplate to another. The minimum j
acceptable opening in cross bracing and stiffeners shall be 2-inches: high by 6-inches in width.
All welds shall be continuous -and free from skips, blowholes, laps and pockets.
Mounting holes for.equipment.Anchors shall be drilled through baseplates; soleplates, and
mounting blocks. Mounting holes for equipment anchors shall not: be burned: out_and they.shall
not be open slots. All mounting.studs shall -be Type 316 stainless steel. 'An anti -seize or anti -
galling compound; as specified in paragraph 1 1002-2.06, shall be applied to all mounting stud
threads prior to installing lints on mounting studs. Terminations requiring connections io
baseplates, soleplates, or mounting blocks shall be acorn nuts welded to the under side of the
baseplate. or nuts welded to the underside of the baseplatc and with cork, plastic plugs & I_
grease. In no case shall the fastener terminate only into the metal base. Where baseplates,
soleplates, or mounting blocks are leveled using jackscrews, jackscrew threads shall be tapped in
thickened pads or otherwise in sufficient metal to provide ease in adjusting level.
Mounting pads for equipment shall be machined after all welding and stress relieving and _
shall be coplanar within 0.002 inch per foot in all directions. Mounting pads shall extend not
less than 0.5 inch beyond the perimeter of the foot or mounting surface of the mounted
equipment, in any direction.
Equipment baseplates shall provide common support for the equipment and driver (and
flywheel, if one is specified). Baseplates for equipment with drivers 20 horsepower and greater
shall be furnished with eight transverse alignment (horizontal) positioning jackscrews for j
alignment of equipment drivers on horizontal surfaces of baseplates. Two of the eight transverse
alignment/positioning jackscrews shall be installed in perpendicular directions in a horizontal
1 1002-5 MOUNTAIRE FARMS-- LUMBER BRIDGE
WWTS UPGRADE

plane at the mounting position for each cornenor foot of the equipment driver. (Eight additional
jackscrews shall be.piovided'for transverse alignment of the flywheel, if flywheels are specified.)
B. TYPE I BASEPLATES.
Type'I baseplates shall be: late or fabricated structural steel baseplates with thickened
steel mounting pads. for doweling:and bolting equipment to the baseplate. The baseplates shall
be rectangular in. shape for equipinept ether tliaii centrifiigal i efi igeration machines and pump
baseplates, which :may be "T" of "L" shaped to accommodate the equipment, drive and
accessories;' Baseplates for split case pumps shall include supports for suction and. di charge ..
elbows, if t equired by the specified. configtii•ation,:- I'e- imeter ' - begs shall: be beams with a .
- minimum depth equal to. 1/1 Otb of the longest dimension -of the baseplate. Beani depth need not
exceed 14 inches lrovided that the deflection and-tnisaiignment is kept within acceptable limits
as -determined by the manufacturer.
C. TYPE IIAII BASEPLATES: (NOT. USED,) -
D. TYPE .IV BASEPLATES: (NOT USED)
E. SOLEPLATES: _ .
Where.soleplate's-are provided, the iinderside shall be scribed with the.words "THIS
r : SIDE DOWN'.':tising welding rod anaterial prior to milling the mounting pad for each equipment
footor mounting surface flat to a.tolerance of'hot less than 0.002 inch per foot in all directions. -
Soleplates shall bc'machincd-fbr.an indexed fit to the mounted equipment br driver: -Alternative
marking methods,'using heavy scribing: or machining, are acceptable_ provided that they maybe
(: observed following blastiiig in preparation for :cbating.
F.: MOUNTING BLOCKS:::
Where equipment is fabricated'or castwith feet or mounting.surfaces that are notfastened
to a common baseplate or soleplate, as in. dry -pit bottom suction jxunps, the equipment may be
i supported on individual concrete piers or equipment pads in lieu of a common baseplate. or
soleplate and equipment pad. In such instances, the equipment shall be supported at the.feet or
_ mounting surfaces on individual mounting blocks, which shall be leveled and grouted.into place.
on the individual piers or equipment pads as.specified in this section. Vertical volute -type
pumps weighing,more than 2000 pounds shall be mounted on mounting blocks under each foot
or mounting surface for the pump. All mounting blocks shall be furnished with jackscrew
threads (three locations, minimum) tapped in the mounting block for the purpose of leveling
mounting blocks with jackscrews:
2.04 GROUT FOR EQUIPMENT PADS
A. EPDXY GROUT _,OR EQUIPMENT MOUNTING:
1 l 002-G MOUNTA[RE FARMS -- LUMBER BRIDGE
WWTS UPGRADE

L
Unlessotherwise specified, gI out for setting bearing surfaces of baseplates, soleplates,
and mounting blocks.on equipment pads shall be Epoxy Grout for Equipment Mounting.. 'Where
the term epoxy grout is used in the context. of details -and specifications. fot equipment mounting..
it shall mean Epoxy Grout for Equipment Mounting.
B. CEMENTITIOUS NONSHRINK GROUT:
Cetnentitious Nonshrink Grout may be used for setting bearing surfaces of baseplates,
soleplates, or iiiounting blocks on:equipment pads where equipment does not meet the criteria for
epoxy grout. Where the terns noiishrink-grout or cen entitious: grout is used in the context of
details and specifications for equipment rounting it shall mean Cementitious Nonshrink Grout.
2.05 EPDXY PRIMER
Epoxy primer shall be a lead free, chrome free, rust inhibitive, -two -component epoxy
primer specifically desigi ed;for use on metal substrates and in conjunction with epoxy grout.
... The epoxy primer shall be a product of the -epoxy grout manufacturer. .
2.06 : -' ANTI-SEIZE/ANTI=GALLING COMPOUND (_
I
Anti seize or:anti-gallingcompound shall be,a molybdenum disulfide and graphite
I
combination in an aluminum complex base grease conforming to MIL=PRF'907E-.
.. Acceptable products include. Jet Lube 550 by :Jet Lube, Inc.,.E-Z Break by LA -CO, or equal.
wo
2:07 PRODUCT DATA
The following shall be provided in accordance with Section,01300:
1. Equipment anchorcalculations specified in paragraph 11002-1.03.
2. Results of grout strength tests, as specified in paragraph 11002-103 E.
PART.3--EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL
A. ALL EQUIPMENT
Grouting for installation of equipment on equipment pads shall take place prior to {
connecting any field piping or electrical and instlumentation,systcros. Unless the Construction
Manager accepts an alternate installation procedure in writing, baseplates, soleplates, and
mounting blocks shall be leveled and grouted with the equipment removed. Pumps shall be
installed in accordance with this section and ANSI/HI 1.4 or ANSI/I11 2.4,.-as appropriate for the
type of pumping equipment installed.
1 1002-7 MOI NTAIRE FARMS - LUMBER BRIDGE
WWTS UPGRADE

Connecting pipin g.With flexible connections and/or expansion joints shall be anchored
...
such that the intcndeduses of these joints are maintained in 'the.piping systeniwithout imposing
strain on:the.equipment connections.
Where an equipinent.manufacturer's insta:llationaequirements include a rigid connection
between the machine and connecting pilling systenis;.the Contractor shall -delete any flexible
coupling (including: equipment connection fittings) shown on. the drawings -and install the
equipment in, the following manner, in lieu of installing llv flexible. coupling. .
I , - -`17lic equipment pad shall be prepared as shown on. the details for rigid -
equipment mounts ;
2. The baseplate, soleplate, or mounting blocks supporting the equipnient .
shall he:installed; leveled,,aid grouted in place as specified:in this section..
3, : The piping shall be installed and aligned to the equipment connections and
-.the field piping connections without welding one of.the joints for one
section of pipe between the: equipment connection and the field piping and:
all.valving.. All flanged joints shall -be bolted up and pressure tested:
4. /1ll piping shall be. fully supported by supports designed to accept their:fiill
weight -and th ust forces•
S. The final. sections, of piping shall be aligned with the.equipment and field,
.connections without -the use'of jacks, chain falls or other devices to force it
into alignment..
6. The final piping joints shall be -welded only after the previous steps have
been coinpleted and accepted by the Construction Manager:
B. EQUIPMENT REQUIRING EPDXY GROUT.
Prior to commencing equipment mount installation work on equipment pads, the
Contractor shall require the manufacturer of the epoxy grout for equipment mounting to. conduct
a training school for the workers that will bc`using the. product.. The school shall be not less than
4 hours in length and shall cover all aspects of using the products, from mixing to application.
This requirement, however, shall not be construed as relieving the Contractor of overall
responsibility for this portion of the work. The epoxy grout manufacturer shall submit a"list of
school attendees that have been satisfactorily trained to perform epoxy grout installation for
equipnient mounting.
3.02 EPDXY GROUT TRAINING AND QUALITY CONTROL
" For equipment with drivers 20 horsepower and greater, a GTR shall perform training and
quality control of epoxy grout installation for equipment mounts. In general, GTR shall be on
site to perform Contractor and/or Grouting Subcontractor application training and to inspect and
1 1002-8 MOUNTAIRE FARMS -LUMBER BRIDGE
W%VTS UPGRADE

l
verify. that the application personnel have successfully performed surface preparation, grouting j
system application; and Quality Control Inspection in accordance with these specifications fora.:'
representative portion.of the:grouting work.. .-.
Specifically, the:GTR shall' -form the following services:for.a minimum frcqucncy of
once per equipment type and size:
1 Inspect ambient conditions during various g outing system installation
.
phases for conformance with the GSM requirements.
2. Tnspeet the surface preparation of concrete substrates onto which.grouting
system materials are to :be applied-, for conformance to the specified _
,application criteria,. including but not limited to 'stibstrAe prof le, degree. of
cleanliness, and nioisture.
3.: 11 - pect the surface preparation ofthe:rnetal.lae substrates onto which -the
. 'epoxy.primer is to be applied.
4. Inspect the epoxy -pi metallic substrate for coverage and adhesion.
5. inspect preparation and application of grouting form work for
conforiance to the specifications.
6. Inspect and record that the "pot life" of grouting system materials is not. .
exceeded -daring installation:
:- 7.. Inspect grouting systems for cure,:
8. Inspect:and record that representative localized repairs made to -voids .:
identified via tapping are in conformance with the specification
requirements.
9. Conduct a final review of completed grouting system installation for
conformance to these specifications:
10. ' Attest to conformance of the Contractor's work by signing appropriate
entries in the "Grouting System Inspection Checklist," form 11002-A in
Section 01999.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. CONCRETE EQUIPMENT PAD PREPARATION:
t After the concrete is frilly cured, the top of the equipment pad shall be roughened by
chipping the surface. Chipping shall remove all laitance and defective or weak concrete and
result in a rough surface profile with a 0.25 inch minimum amplitude. Chipping shall expose
1 1002-9 MOUNTAIRE FARMS ••• LUMBER BRIDGr
WWTS UPGRADii
I
Y

brokcn.aggregate without dislodging unbroken aggregate from the cement matrix and sliall not
cause fractures below the concrete surface. A light duty, hard held pneumatic chipperwith a
chisel type.tool shall be used for. chipping the equipment pad concrete surface. Abrasive blast, -
bush -hammer; jack hammers with sharp chisels, Heavy chipping tools, or needle gun preparation
of concrete surfaces to be grouted is not acceptable.
Prior to leveling activiticssatisfactory removal of defective orwealr.concrcte shall be::
demonstrated in -the presence of the. Constriction Manager by operating the chipper on the
chipped concrete'surfaceat'locations'identifed by the Construction Managpi. The chipped
:surface of the concrete shall be such that: the final baseplate, soleplate, or mounting Mock.
in the grout manufacturer's recommended grout thickness between the surface
of the: equipment. pad and the lower baseplate flange, underside of the solcplate or underside of
mounting block.
All dust; dirt, chips, oil, water, and any other contarainants shall be removed and the
surface protected with plastic slteetirig:until grout is installed.
Concrete equipment pad surfaces that have�been finished smooth: and level for use as
leveling positions shall be:protected from damage during chipping activities.., Alternatively,
levclin 7. ositions ma lic restored on ohi cd surfaces:: Lcvelin osidons shall be restored b
b y Y PP' g p Y
installing leveling -blocks or leveling plates for jackscrews on a -High compressive strength epoxy
putty. (Philadelphia Resins, Phillybond Blue 6A, or'equal). Leveling blocks and leveling plates
shall be installed -level on the epoxy putty.
Yp. Y
B. BASEPI.ATES, SOLEP.LA,rES, AND MOUNTING BLOCKS:
All surfaces of baseplates,-soleplates,:and:mounting:blocks:.to be in contact with -:epoxy
grout shall be cleaned and shall be primed.with epoxy primer. within 8 hours of cleaning.
C. LEVELING:
All machinery shall be tnounted•and leveled by millwrights. Precision surveying
equipment shall be used for leveling. Machinists' spirit levels will notbe permitted for leveling
purposes for any baseplate, soleplate, or mounting block. with a plan dimension greater than
4 feet. Baseplates and mounting blocks shall be leveled to a maximum tolerance of 0.002 inch
per foot or as otherwise required by the equipment ananufactuiet•, if more stringent: Soleplates
shall be leveled to 0.0005 inch per foot or as. otherwise required by the equipment manufacturer,
if more stringent-.- An anti -seize or anti -galling compound specified in Paragraph 11002-2.06
sliall be applied to all equipment anchor threads prior to beginning baseplate, soleplate, or
mounting block leveling.
All baseplates, soleplates,. and mounting blocks shall be leveled against steel surfaces
(jackscrew plates, leveling blocks, leveling nuts, support plates, or other steel surfaces). Use of
other materials for leveling purposes is strictly and specifically prohibited. Unless otherwise
specified, baseplatcs, mounting blocks, and soleplates shall be leveled as hidicatFcd in the leveling .
details. Leveling equipment and tools shall be stainless steel leveling blocks and shims, steel
1 1002-10 MUUNTAIRE FARMS — LUMBr.•.R BRIDGE
WWI's UPGRADE

wedges, or jackscrews bearing on leveling plates. Leveling nuts may be used:for leveling:
baseplates and soleplates weighing less than 200 pounds. The use of lev eling nuts for leveling r
mounting blocks is_not permitted.. �-
After Uaseplatcs7 soleplates;: ormounting blocks have been _leveled on the.leveling ...
equipment.,. the Contractor shall clamp the.baseplates,, soleplates,. or mounting blocks in position.
by installing: the equipment anchor nuts and:wasliers. Clamping torque shall be less than the::
final clamping. torque specified in.Paragraph.11002-2.01, but sufficient to hold:the baseplate,
soleplate, or mounting block in position. The Contractor shall verify -that the correct level and
position of the baseplate, soleplatc, or mounting block has been maintained after clamping on the
level i ng 'equipment:
Leveling blocks shall be stainless steel, four inches square and 7 -1/2: inches thick with an : -
open-ended. slot terminating in the center for the equipment anchor. Leveling blocks shall be
machined flat on all horizontal surfaces and placed under the baseplate or soleplateat each.
equipment anchor. Shiii'is shall be -pie -cut stainless steel; slotted for removal after grouting, and I
shall extend not less than three inches beyond the baseplate, soleplate or mounting block.
Leveling blocks and shims shall -be coated with a light:oiI just. prior to beginning thelevelingand -
grouting work, ;Shims shall be placed so the.tabs on the:sh.ims are easily accessible,
D. GROiJT1NG:.:.
Grout forms shall be built of minimum 0.75 inch: thick waterproof plywood and Shall be
securel braced (minimum brace sire shall be two-by-four lumber)'. forms sliall be designed for:
a minimum of 6 inches hydrostatic head:above the: final elevation of thc. grout, to assist in flow
during installation. Equipment mounting grout shall be furnished with expansion joints installed
at four:to six foot -intervals; perpendicular to the. centerline. of baseplates.
Forms shall be coated with three :coats of paste wax on all areas .drat will come. in contact:
with the grout to prevent the grout from bonding to the forms. Foiirrs shall be waxed before
assembly to pievent.accidental application of wax to surfaces where the grout is to bond. Before
any forms are installed, all concicte surfaces that will contact epoxy grout shall be free from any
foreign material, such as oil; sand, water•, wax, grease, etc. Forms shall be liquid -tight. Any
open spaces or cracks informs, or at the joint between forms and the foundation, shall be scaled
off, using sealant, putty, or caulking compound. All outside vertical and -horizontal edges of.the
grout shall have 457degree chamfers as indicated in the equipment anchor details for rigid
equipment mounts. Match chamfers in concrete portions of the equipment pad. Block outs°shall
be provided at all shimming and leveling positions to allow removal of leveling equipment and
tools after the grout has cured, Jackscrews shall be coated with a light oil or other acceptable
bond -breaking compound prior to grouting.
The 45-degree perimeter chamfer strip shall be located at the final elevation of the grout. I
The final elevation of the grout on baseplates with exposed I-beam or C-channel supports shall
be at the top of the lower support flange. The top of the grout, on all other baseplates soleplates,
and mounting blocks, shall be at least 1.0 inch above the bottom or underside of the baseplate,
soleplate, or mounting block and shall not be higher than the top of the baseplate, soleplate, or
11002-11 MQUNTAI.RL:FARMS —LUMHER BRIDGE
WW1's UPGRADE
�4

mounting block. The grout's final elevation shall not be so high as to bond the equipment anchor--- -
nut and washer.
p y g equipment g..
I
The resin and hardener fore ox rout fore ui ment iiiountin °sliall be. mixed'in . .
accordance with.the epoxy.grout niarnifacturer's,recomiiiendations. Epoxy grout shall be placed
at'the center'of one end' of the baseplate or.soleplate and worked toward the ends in such a
manner as to force tlic air out"frown beneath-thc baseplate or solop.latc and out the vent holes,- to
eliminate voids.. Epoxy grout shall be placed'in.a manner -that avoids -air entrapment, using a
head box to pour grout into the grout holes. When the bead box is moved to, the next grout hole,
a' 6-inch higli standpipe shall. be placed over the grout hole and filled with.grout. Use"of
vibratin tools and/orjarring ra pin or to in fornis. to facilitate rout flow is: riot ermined
g J g� pl g pp. g) � g P.
during placement of epoxy grout..-: •
The- Contractor'shall exercise care: to -never allow the grout. to fall below the :baseplate.::
level.once the grout has made contact with the baseplate. Grout placement shall.be continuous
until all portions of the space beneath, the baseplate, soleplate, or mounting blockhave been.
filled. Subsequent batches of grout shall be prepared -so as to be. ready when the preceding batch
has been placed. Under no circumstances shall the grouting operation be halted because of lack
of grout mix. ..After,the,entire. baseplate is full, 6i finch high. standpipes shall be maintained. over
each grout hole, to continue purging of air. When the grout has started to take an initial�set
(typically this is determined by anoticeable increaselh temperature and no flow of grout at the.-' .
vent holes) the standpipes shall be removed and excess grout cleaned fi om all surfaces.
Where the cavity iinder a baseplate o. mounting block extends above the elevation of the.;
top of the bolting flange for the baseplate or. mounting block,:grouting may' be completed in two..
pours..- Under -these circumstances, the first grout pour shall be continuous until the lower.face of -
the:bolting flarige,for the:baseplat6".6f, mountinI.g.hlock is submerged in"grout:a minimum' if oneon a
inch. The second grout pour shall be completed with standpipes and air -purges as specified in
the previous:paragraph:
'Grout forms shall be checked foi• leaks throughout grout pours. Leaks shall be repaired
inumediately to prevent formation of voids: ' A final. check of baseplate,-soleplate, or mounting
block level and elevation shall be' perfoiined before the grout sets.
A grout saimple shall be taken for each equipment pad that has a baseplate, soleplate; or.
mounting block set in grout. 'The sample shall be placed in a cylinder of sufficient size to yield
three two-inch cubes as test samples. The samples shall be.fagged with project name, date, time,
the equipment number and ambient* temperature at the time of placement. Once the epoxy. grout
cylinder has been completely filled, it shall be placed.next to the foundation of the equipment
being grouted and allowed to cure for 48 hours. After 48 hours, the test cylinder shall be tested
in accordance with the grout manufacturer's recommendations by the independent testing
laboratory specified in paragraph 11002-1.02 B. The results shall be reported directly. to the
Construction Manager. Forms shall be removed only after the grout has clued sufficiently and
upon specific permission from the Construction Manager. ;
1 1002-12 MOUNTAIRE FARMS -LUMBER BRIDGE
WWTS UPGRADE

i
E. COMPLETION:
Upon acceptance by the Construction Manager. and the.equipment manufactorec's .�-
representative and after the grout has reached-suffcient strength, grourfornis and' block- outs at
leveling positions shall be removed.' Leveling blocks and shims or :wedges and support dilates
shall be removed, leveling nuts Arid jack screws shall -be backed off to allow the grout to fully.
I
support the baseplate, mounting block, or soleplate: Take card not to damage the grout during
removal of extended shimming material or leveling equipment and tools. _
Thc:equipment-anchor. nuts shall .be: tightened, -using calibrated indicating torque
wrenches; to -develop the hill: claniping:force'required by the equipment mahufacturer. .
Equipment anchor nutsshall be tightened in increments of not more than 25 percent of the
final torque value in an altenWing pattern'to avoid'stress concentration:ori the grout surface.:::
After.tightening equipment anchor nuts -to final -values, apply additional wax, -grease, or mastic to
all.exposed portions of the equipme'111•anchor beneath the: baseplate; soleplate;: or. mounting �-
block.
After applying additional wax or mastic.to-exposed portions of equipment anchors, block I_
outs (pockets) for access to leveling nuts, leveling blocks: and shims, oi' wedges sliall be tilled,
with the grout tnaterial' installed_under baseplates, soleplates, or mounting blocks and pointed
after the e'quipment'anchor mits have been tightened to'final values. Jackscrews shall be
removed and holes in the baseplate; soleplate;; or: mounting blocks filled with.a flexible sealant
(silicone.nibber) or a short cap screw.
Check for. baseplate, soleplate, or mounting block movement (soft foot) by individually
loosening and re -tightening each equipment anchor. Vertical movement at each equipment
anchor shall be measured and recorded during loosening and retightening and shall not exceed 20 l
micrometers (0.001 inch). Vertical movement shall -be neasured using a:iiiagnetic-based dial. -
indicator on the baseplate, soleplate, or mounting block referenced to -the epoxy grout surface of
the equipment pad or other approved method. Soft foot. conditions shall be sufficient cause for r
removal and reinstallation of grout and baseplates, soleplates, or mounting blocks. I-
Check for grout voids by tapping along the upper surfaces of the.baseplate, soleplate,. or
mounting block. Grout voids shall be sufficient cause for removal and reinstallation of grout and
baseplates, soleplates, or mounting blocks. Grout voids shall be marked.: At the discretion of the
Construction Manager, grout voids may be repaired as specified in Chapter 5, Section 3.16 of
API 686.
3.04 FINAL INSPECTION
The Construction Manager will conduct a final inspection with the Contractor for
conformance to requirements of the contract documents.
I
**END OF SECTION**
1 1 002-13 MOUNTAIRI; FARMS -LUMBER BRIDGH
WWTS UPGRADH
-f-

SECTION I1010
DISSOLVED AIR FLOTATION. EQUIPMENT
1.0 DESCRIPTION OF THE PROCESS PRIMARY UNIT: '
In the treatment process; screened wastewater is pumped to the process :unit for particulate removal.
Polymer is injected into the waste stream, which -then is -mixed in.a flocculation chamber with the
ionized wastes, A high-pressure, air=saturated recycle water stream is piped from the flotation cell to
the end of the flocculation chamber, which discharges the mixed waste stream to tha atmospheric
flotation cell. As the pressure: of the waste stream reduces upon entering the flotation cell;
microscopic airbubbles form:in the: -water and: rise to the; water surface, aiding the flotation of
flocculated contaminants: Float material is.mechanically scraped from the water surface into a
hopper, thus removing the contaminants from the system. Treated wastewater discharges from the
flotation- cell to. the biological treatment process. --
I.- I AUTOMATION
Complete start/stop cycles for all necessary equipment are'programmed in the PLC to ensure optimal
treatment at all times.: Start and stop sequences are determined by water levels in:the equalization
basin and are described in the following sections..
1.1.1 START CYCLE
a. At a predetermined high level :in the equalization. basin, a signal is sent -to the PLC.
b. Recirculation,pump starts, runs approximately 20 seconds: Pressure increases to pressure
switch activation point.
c: Pneumatic air supply ,valve' opens; Feed pump starts; Polymer pumps) start, Skimmer cycle
starts.
1.1.2 STOP CYCLE
a.. At a predetermined low level in the equalization -basin, a signal is sent to the PLC.
b. Feed pump deenergizes, Polymer pump(s) stop, recirculation pump starts timing off (3
minutes).
C. Pneumatic air supply valve.,closes, recirculation pump starts timing off (15 seconds).
d. Skimmer deactivates (if on), recirculation pump stops.
2.0 EQUIPMENT SPECIFICATIONS
Following is a description of major equipment supplied by Owner.
2.1 INFLUENT FEED
11010-1 MOUNTAIRE FARMS - LUMBER BRIDGE
WWTS UPGRADES

2.1.1 FEED PUMP (EXISTING)
TYPE: G0RMAN-RUPP CENTRIFUGAL MODEL T-6
OUTPUT: 600 GPM
MATERIAL: ... CAST IRON
. ... ... ... .. _.
INSTALLED POWER: 20 HP
ELECTRICITY: 480:VOLT 60: CYC. THREE PHASE
2.1.2 FEED PIPING (SUPPLIED BY OWNER)
MANUAL VALVE: 6" BUTTERFLY VALVES WITH HANDLE -LATCH
CHECK VALVE: 6" FULL THROAT SWING:CHECK WITH LEVER
LEVEL CONTROL: FLOAT SWITCHES: HIGH AND LOW LEVEL ALARMS,
SYSTEM ON AND SYSTEM OFF..
2.2 - MICRO FLOTATION
2.2.1. FLOCCULATION CHAMBER
The -flocculation chamber is a tube -:type, constructed of 6" schedule 10 welded stainless steel pipe
mounted on. a stainless steel support structure. The :flocculation -chamber -is provided with 'sample
connections, polymer injection ports, and recirculation 'injection ports. The flocculation. chamber is
bead=blasted after fabrication: j
2.2.2 FLOTATION BASIN
The.flotation basin is one (1) unit rated to properly treat 600 gallons per minute of the proposed
influent characteristics. -The vessel is constructed of 11 gage'304L stainless steel. The connected
piping is -304 or 316 stainless steel. ;The flotation vessel, and connected piping is bead=blasted inside
and out after fabrication.: The flotation vessel contains,three (3) 304 stainless steel tilted plate
separators.
TYPE: TII TABLE PLATE FLOTATION VESSEL
LENGTH: 14' 2"
WIDTH: 109 _ 8"
HEIGHT: 11' - 5"
2.2.3 SKIMMER/THICKENER
The hydraulic -driven stainless steel skimmer designed to thicken and remove floatable solids is
Y g
mounted on the flotation basin.
11010-2 MOUNTAIRE FARMS - LUMBER BRIDGE
WWTS UPGRADES

DRIVE: HYDRAULIC-VICKERS -(or engineer -approved equivalent)
INSTALLED POWER: 2-HP
ELECTRICITY: :: 480 VOLT 60 CYC. THREE PHASE.:
2.2.4 RECIRCULATION PUMP .. ..
TYPE: TRAVAINI'MULTISTAGE LATERAL SIDE CHANNEL
CENTRIFUGAL PUMP ;WITH STAINLESS. STEEL: . .
IMPELLERS (or engineer -approved equivalent),
PRESSURE: _ : 11.2 PSIG
OUTPUT:. 75.GPM ..:
INSTALLED POWER: = 25:HP'
ELECTRICITY: 480 VOLT 60 CYC. THREE PHASE-::
2.3. POLYMER.FLOCCULANTS .=
:2.3.1- : POLYMER FEED PUMP::
TYPE: ROTARY GEAR-MO.YNO PUMP (or engineer -approved
equiva ent)..
NUMBER PROVIDED:_: 4 (2 ARE SPARES)
OUTPUT: 0 -1 K GPH
INSTALLED POWER: 2-HP
r ELECTRICITY: 480 VOLT 60 CYC. THREE PHASE
CONTROLLER: VARIABLE -FREQUENCY DRIVE (VFD):: -
2.3.2.: POLYMER MIXER, (EXISTING) : . .
2.4 ELECTRICAL, PANEL
2.4.1. CONTROL PANEL
The control panel houses all switches, relays, timers and other such items as required for the
operation of the system. HAND - OFF - AUTOMATIC switches are. provided .in control
components. Pilot lights indicate which components are energized. A red alarm signal indicates a
system malfunction. .
ENCLSOURE: HOFFMAN STAINLESS STEEL NEMA 4x
PANEL COMPONENTS: ALLEN BRADLEY
PANEL VIEW: ALLEN BRADLEY
I
11010-3 MOUNTAIRE FARMS - LUMBER BRIDGE
WWTS UPGRADES

SECTION 1 I020
BOLTED STAINLESS STEEL. TANK
PART1: 'GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE
A. GENERAL --The following requirements shall be standard for all, equipniei't
. f thished by -the Seller;' -in addition to the requirements of the Eg1liptnent Data Sheets.:
(specification 1100T)'and drawings. These provisions cover-fiu-nishing.and ercctiorr of
bolt togethe'r.stainless:steel wastewaterfanks.
y
B.. PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS OF LIQUID STORED -
Liquid Type: Wastewater..:
Specific Gravity: l .l
... Tgmperatdre:. 50 to I OS OF
pH:: . 2-1
Total. Suspended. Solids: .. .<5;000 ppm:
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop:. Drawings:. Submit,shop drawings of the Bolted steel reservoir and all :accessories: _
for review and approval by the. engineer prior to beginning any related shop fabrication
'or erection.. Include sufficient data to show that the reservoir and accessories conform
to therequirements to these'Specifications.
Submittals shall ineWde:
1. Design calculations, signed by'a civil or structural engineer. regi tered
in the State of North Carolina:
2.. Fabrication and erection drawings and details for. the reservoir and all
accessories.
3. CeI` lied mill tests on steel plate and structural rnembers demonstrating
that the physical and chemical requirements of this Specification have
been met:
PART 2: PRODUCTS
_-I 2.1 DESCRIPTION
A. The Manufacturer shall furnish, erect and ' test the tank, as required by
AWWA.D 103-•09. The Manufacturer shall be completely responsible for the
1 1020-1 MOUNTAIRE FARMS - LUMBER BRIDGE
WWTS UPGRADE

construction and : satisfactory performance of. the tank during the: guarantee
period. The tank shall ,conform tO AWWA 0103�-09, to the latest edition '
Building Code, and to the requirements of the plans and these Specifications.
The supplier shall siibniit for approval complete and detailed plans for the tank
and appurtenances. .: .
B. The. bolted stainless. steel tank sliall have.. a nominal capacity.: of 556,000
gallons. It shall -have a nominal diameter of 52 feet and a nominal height of 34
feet. __:Provide tire- tank complete with all pipe: connections; access: openings, -
nozzles. taps, drains, ladders, vent, and other accessories as shown on the.plans
or required:herein.
2.2 DESIGN DATA. ..
A: Nominal tank dimensions are included for intended relative size of tank. Tank. .
nianufacturer:can supply a,larger tank as needed, to match manufacturer standard sizes:: ...
{
13: DESIGN CRITERIA..
e followiri; data and:information are supplied as a basis for design and erection of:
-the tankand appurtenances:
1. Tank Capacity & Dimensions
a. Nominal Capacity 556,000 gallons
b. Usable Capacity : 460,000 gallons ... -
c, Inside Diameter- 52 feet
d. Tank Height ... .34 feet
2: Seismic Design Criteria.:
a.. Seismic Zone.. Zone I
3. Design Wind Loading
a. Design Wind Speed, V l30 mph
4. Roof Design Loading
a: Roof Live Load N/A
b. Ground Snow Load N/A
5. Liquid to be stored Wastewater
6. Allowable Soil Bearing Pressure 2,500 psf
2.3 MATERIALS
A. Tank materials fabrication, erection, and venting shall conform to the ANST/AWWA
D103 latest revision.
11020-2 MOUNTA IRE FARA4S- LUMBER BRIDGE
WWTS UPGRADE

B. P.Wes'and Sheets.. Plates and sheets shall conform to alipr6l)riate ASTM designation
z
as set forth. in Section.4.4, AWWA D1:03-09, and shall have a minimum yield strength
of 30,000 psi.. .
C..Structural,Shapes. Structural shapes shall, conform to the requirements and ASTM
designations of AWWA D103-09 section 4:.5 .
D. Bolts. Tank joint bolting shall be ininimurri %"'diameter,'shall ine'etthe requirements
of AWWA D 103-09 section.4:2.1. and have tensile strength of at least 120,000 pounds
per square'inch.
E. , Gaskets and Sealant.. All gaskets and sealants used on this tank, shall' onforh to the
requirements of AWWA D 103709 section .4.10.
2.4: ACCESSORIES:
A. ACCESS llATCHES: Tank manways: Side manways to: be flange-nlounted access
... doors only. Flush niounted doors are not.acceptable,
B. PIPE SUPPORT: Where shown on -reference drawing, tank manufacturer is to-
fiuziish pipe support brackets to support 18" sch l OS stainless.steel,pipe..
.. .. ... .-.
C. Pipe Connections:
1. Provide inlet nozzles, outlet nozzles (with :anti vortex plate), overflow
nozzle, and -drain outlets as shown on the Mans.
PART 3: EXECUTION
3.1 CONSTRUCTION
F. Field erection of the tank shall be' in strict accordance with the procedures outlined in
the: manufacturer's erection manual, and performed by an authoriz.ed dealer of the tank.:
manufacturer.
G. All bolts, nuts and washers on the inside of the tank to be encapsulated in accordance
with manufacturer's standard procedures. A11 excess encapsulating material shall be
removed from each bolt during installation.
3.2 FLOOR & FOUNDATION
A. Bolted stainless steel panels shall be either placed over a three (3) inch compacted
sand base contained liy a steel or concrete ring wall, or a non -extruding and resilient
bituminous type filler `meeting the requirements of ASTM D 1751 if set on a concrete
11020-3 MOUN•rAnui FARMS •- LUMBER BRIDGE
WWTS UPGRADE

slab. Polyethylene copolymer caps and sealant shall be:used to cover the bolts, nuts
and washers exposed on the inside of the floor. Levelffig of the start:-- ring shall be .
'
required and the maximum differential within the..ring.shall not.exceed :one-
eight.(1/8') inch, nor exceed one -sixteenth (1/16") inch within any ten (10ft) feet of
length.
B. Tank supplier shall include design excavation and construction of concrete foundation
and floor underlayment with quotation.
I-
C... Tank foundation shall be concrete ringwall per AWWA D 103'09 section-13.4.1 or:
granular, lean with steel retainer ring per AWWA D103-09 section 13A.S. -
. f
3.3 TESTING & INSPECTION;:
A. UenckaLTest storage tank:after erection.;Floorsliall be clean and free from
dirt, foreign substance and debris:
..
B. Bottom:- Vaculun test seams :in floor plates.
C. Shell: Test by filling with water to elevation of overflow. Completed storage
tank shall, show no leaks at end of 24 bout test period:
' 3.4 WARRANTY
A. The tank manufacturer shall warrant the -tank against.any defects in `
wor roan nship and materials for a period of one (1) year from the date. of
installation is, complete_.
END OF SECTION J_
i
1
�I
I
E I
11020-4 MOUNTAIRE FARMS -LTIMBFR BRIDGE
WWTS UPGRADE
11

SECTION 11.030 .. ...
MOVING BED BIOREACTOR SYSTEM EQUIPMENT
L PART1 — GENERAL.
1.1. SCOPE Furnishing, installation, testing and' startup assistance for the ,equipment.
::components required to install a moving media system described herein..
as
Construction of the aeration basin::system will -require: an: integrated set of major
..equipment components including moving bed attached growth media (BioPortz);
outlet sieve -assemblies, and a : coarse bubble diffused• 'aeration system. The
equipment component systems -shall meet: the performance and- design :.criteria
specified in this section:
..
1.2. GENERAL. The equipment furnished under this section shall be fabricated,
assembled, placed in proper operating condition-, and tested in full conformity with
..drawings, specifications, engineering data, instructions, and:recommendations. of
the equipment manufacturer.�unle'ss exceptions are rioted byENGINEER: .
The equipment shall. be furnished complete with, all required piping, . supports,.
connectors,' and any additional materials- or construction required_ for proper.
assembly and installation. -The furnished coarse bubble aeration system shall:begin
s
at the drop pipe into the, basins as -shown onthe drawings and shall included all air
distribution.piping,.Supports, and'aeration:manifold'grid assemblies. Thefurnished
sieve assemblies included in this. equipment specification shall connect to : the
flanged. connections installed in the basin walls, as shown on the.drawings.: Basin
drain sievesas shown.on the drawings are also required as part of this specification
Jo retain the media when the basins are drained.
1.3. Coordination. All equipment provided in -this section shall be furnished by or -
:through a single manufacturer/supplier that shall coordinatewith CONTRACTOR,
'the design, fabrication, delivery, installation and testing of the system components.
The. single manufacturer/supplier shall .,have the sole responsibility for
coordination, and performance of all components of the system with the
performance and design criteria specified herein.
1.4. Submittals. Suhmittals.shall be made in accordance with the submittals section,
! 01300.
1.5. Sieve Assemblies.
1.5.1. Complete detailed drawings of the proposed sieve assemblies and layout for
each basin showing all pipe sizes, lengths and maximum allowable span
between supports of each sieve assembly shall be provided with Submittals.
The layout will also show the spatial compatibility of the sieve assemblies and
1103 0-1 MOUNTAIRE FARMS - LUMBER BRIDGE
WWTS UPGRADES

supports with the. coarse bubble aeration system piping,-:- the basin interconnect
piping and basin drain sieves/grating inside each of the basins. The drawings
shall also include details of the connection of the sieve assemblies to the basin I
interconnects ..and outlet -weir box, sieve.. supports;. and anchor details;
expansion joints, gaskets, bolts, nuts and washers, and-all'inaterials used.
1.6. Moving Media
1.6.1. A detailed plan describing the methods proposed for safe storage of the
media at the site. The plan shall s eci�the tYpe of to �material required: and
;
provide a detailed drawing showing CONTRACTOR how to place: and secure I
a tarp over the containers of media to protect the media from": the sun, =
-precipitation, wind,, and construction activities.
l.ZOperation and Maintenance: Manuals.- . Adequate.operation and :maintenance.
manuals shall be :supplied- prior to .shipment of the equipment to jobsite:. The
operation and maintenance manuals shall be in addition to any instructions or parts ;
.lists packed' with or: attached to the equipment. when delivered. Operation and
maintenance manuals shall be submitted in accordance with the submittals section.
1.8; Material and°Workmanship Warranty. The manufacturer shall guarantee that the.
outlet sieve_ .assembly components aril piping will be free from materials and
workmanship. defects, including damages that may occur during shipping, for a
period of one year following delivery of product.
2. PART 2.— PRODUCTS
2.1. Acceptable. Manufacturers. All, of the system components as specified herein shall.
be provided: by or: through Entex Technologies Inc., Chapel Hill; NC or an -
engineer -approved equivalent.
2.2. Service Conditions. All of the system components specified herein shall be
designed to operate and endure the environment presented by normal, no -toxic,
biologically degradable: wastewater treatment plant operation.. In addition, the -
system components specified. herein shall also be designed to endure the
environmental conditions presented when a basin is taken off-line and drained_ for
maintenance and/or cleaning.
2.3. Performance and Design Requirements. The system components will be designed
to help the suspended growth activated sludge portion remove soluble organics
contained in wastewater. The basins containing the moving media shall be aerobic.
2.4. Coarse Bubble Aeration System. Coarse bubble aeration system shall conform to
E. Section 11220. The aeration equipment included shall convey air from the air drop
pipes to the air diffusers. The air diffusers shall diffuse the air uniformly into the I
entire width and length of each aeration basin.
11030-2 MOUNTAIRE FARMS -LUMBER BRIDGE I
WWTS UPGRADES
I

2.4.1. _ ,The aeration system shall be designed to, convey the required. airflow to each
of the basins: and transfer the required amount of 'oxygen into - solution. - :The
coarse, bubble: aeration system shall: also have sufficient mixing capacity. to -
thoroughly mix the entire contents of the basin; keep all biologicalSolids :an
= . media in suspension and shall also provide sufficient agitation of the: carrier
... -.
elements against the sieve. openings -to keep biofouling-related headloss to a- w
minimum. ..
2.5. Sieve Assemblies. The aieve assemblies shall :retain:the: carrier elements within
..each basin while allowing mixed liquor.to freely pass. Flow.out of ea' basin shall
: ' be distributed uniformly among the basin sieve assemblies: The Sieve Assemblies
shall be constructed of 304 Stainless Steel:' The Sieve Assemblies shall be
constructed .of spiral. wound wedgewire.. In' no event shall- the: openings :between -
.::adjacent wires be greater than 2l3 the smallest dimension of the moving.media;:
2.5.1: Sieve diameter, inches 1:6
15.2. Max."Sieve.length, feet: 6...
: 2.5.3.. Number of:sieves per: cell 6:
2.5.4: jotal number of sieves 12
2.5.5. Maximum allowable'headloss
.. across each cell:at peak
hour flow, inches 2
2.6.:Seve Assemblies and Supports
1 2.6.1 Wedge Wire Sieves: 'Type 304L or 316L. stainless steel
l
2.6.2. Basin Drain -Sieves Type .304L or 316 stainless steel . .
:2.6.3. Supports Type 304L stainless steel:
2.6.4. Assembly Bolts/Nuts Type 31.6 stainless steel
2.6.5. Gaskets Neoprene; 45 to 55 Type Durometer, tested ;
in -accordance with ASTM 52240.
Moving Media. The carrier elements will remain suspended in the mixed liquor from the
agitation,created by. the coarse bubble aeration system. The,high surface area of the media
will create an environment suited for nitrifying biofilm growth to enhance the overall
_! performance of the aeration basins while operating at a lower suspended growth solids
retention time (SRT).
2.6.6. Flow
Average design 2.55 MGD
Peak Hourly (for sieve design) 3.2 MGD
11030-3 MOUNTAIRE FARMS - LUMBER BRIDGE
WWTS UPGRADES

.. I
2.6.7. Total media: biologically. active surface area (ft2)
First Oxic Cell 3,463,023 I
Second :Oxic Cell: 3,463,023
-
2.6.8. Design Influent;
mg/1 Month -Average ..
BOD5 .. 1,300
TS:S ... a V 200
NH3-N 30
16.9. Design Effluent,
mg/l.. Month Average
BOD5 --- 500:
2.7..Moving:-Media. The, moving. bed biofilm reactor carrier -elements- shall ::be-
fabricated from extruded HDPE and have a specific gravity without.biofiln.! growth -
between 0.94- and 0.98.:The media shall be black incorporating carbon black for
Orihanced:UV protection. Visual inspection of the inedia shall confirm.the size and -
shape conformity :of all pieces. The carrier. elements shall be no less than 15mm
in diameter and _12 mm in._cylinder length.: The system shall provide a minimum
biologically. effective surface area of 589. m2%m3.
The moving bed biofilm reactor carrier elements shall be a standard product of the
supplier and shall have. been used iin at least 5 fully operational USA installations.
3.. PART 3 — Miscellaneous
i
3.1. Influent Screening. The influent screening to the WWTP shall have a maximum.
opening no greater: than 2/3: ahe width of the IFAS supplier's Sieve Assembly
opening. Thus, if a 5 mm Sieve Assembly is used, the influent screening must be
no larger than 3 Inm. Similarly, if a 10 mm Sieve Assembly is used, the influent , screening, must be -no larger than 6 mm..
END OF SECTION
1
,f ,1
11030-4 MOUNTAIRE FARMS - LUMBER BRIDGE
WWTS UPGRADES

SECTION H 040
AIR OPE.1RATFD DIAPHRA.GM.PUMP
PART l
GENERAL
._ A.
All-e ui ment'ai) lied under section:11040 is -also sub•ect:to .the re uirement
. q p 1P J q sofall
other divisions and sections.
B.
The Bidder shall, submit -for- `approval- complete characteristic curves of the pumps
proposed to fui•iiish.before Alication.is started, as well as a:complete description of the
pumps. This ,description, steal I include' materials. of construction for all. fluid contact parts,
-mechanical 'seals, and -shaft. It shalt also include:the quMntity and pressure of
seal water, if required. Characteristics of primps furnished may have a tolerance of 2%.in
hcador capacity: above or below requirements specified herein. Curves shall also indicate
required net- positive suction head (NPSH), efficiency, horsepower, maximum diameter
:impeller that : can be installed::in.:pump;::and proposed: impeller diameter for the
application.
PART-2
PRODUCTS.
2:1 GENERAL
A.
These specifications.. present the; -design,.. materials, and methods of a ..particular
:manufacturer -and are intended to furnish a minimum standard of function, design, and -
quality: Manufacturers/bidders'nortnall.y'engaged in the design,: manufacture, and supply
of similar equipment are considered acceptable alternates and will be evaluated on aheir
I
own merit .Uythe owner and engineer. However, bids by alternate.rnauufacturers/bidders ..
amust clearly indicate, by paragraph, all deviations from. this specification.
B
The work under this section includes; furnishing ,equipment and materials, and technical
...
assistance for startu .nid-testin .of air diaphragm type pumps.
C.
All piping and valves furnished with the equipment shall be Ae.manufacturer's standard
subject to approval by the owner's engineer.
D.
All electrical equipment and controls furnished with the equipment shall be the.
_
manufacturer's standard subject to approval by the owner's engineer.
E.
Like items of material/equipment shall be the end products of one manufacturer in order
to provide standardization for appearance; operation, maintenance, spare parts and
manufacturer's services.
F.
The manufacturer of equipment requiring fabrication of structural and mechanically
driven components shall complete all fabrication, sandblasting, painting and .assembly
i
and pretest all controls prior to shipment,
1 10,10-1 MouNTA[RE FARMS-- LUMBER BRIDGE
wwTS uPGRAt)r

2.2 DESIGNBASIS- -
A. All. ptimps must operate at: specific speeds below. the "upper limits of specific speeds"
establklied byalie hydraulic institute so that the pumps may operate at the stated capacity,
..head, and. suction lift with assurance of freedom from cavitation and resonant frequency .
vibration...
B. All:pumps, motors and control- cgtripiflent shall conform to :t► e iequirem i ..a set forth in.
the following pages. as -to capacity, head, - and other requirornents.-Motors shall be of - -
aniple size to operate without 616rload under all possible condi.tioins of loading through
the .entire range of the pump characteristics curve within the nameplate horsepower.
Ample means of lubrication shall be provided for all beariu'gs aiid parts wliete required. .
AIetnitc industrial type fittings, or approved. equal shall be used for grease lubrication. .
-Where packing or :mechanical seals_ are• provided, :wai'' .seal: eonirections shall be
provided. Pumps -aid motors shall perform the work intendedt without undue wear arid
undue heating.:
C. =Pumps with external.'iiioving parts such as coitpliiigs shall liave factory fabricated, OSHA
apptoued expanded metal guards. Pumps with couplings shall have a 'fabricated- steel
.b
ase:
2.3 - AIR DIAPHRAGM PUMPS_
:
A; The liutnp to be futhished under this specification is included -in the followitiglist; ;
.car:,--...+ ....:.. :..::...:. : " •
P-7401 & P-7402 Sludge (WAS) Transfer Pump. 2 Air Diaphragm
I-
B, Construction of the air diaphragm ptunp shall conform to, the following require.plents:
1. The sludge piunps shall- be air'powered double diaphragm type as -manufactured
by Wild.pn or approved equal.
2. The -primp body.shall be'the clamp mounted non-metallic design, constructed of
polypropylene unless otherwise specified. Unless otherwise specified, the `
diaphragms shall be Viton, connected by a stainless steel rod.
3. The pump shall have 2" NPT inlet and outlet connections. Air inlet shall be 3/"
NP.T and the exhaust shall be 1 %Z" NP'r. Maximum pumpable particle, size shall {
be ?3/8". 1
4. The pump shall be self -priming and capable of running dry without damage. The
pumps shall have check valve manifolding to _permit free flow of solids at the ll
specified size,
5. Check valves shall be heavy duty ball type; balls shall be coated. Valve seats and I
ball retainer rings shall be lined. Lining and coating shall be of the same material
as the diaphragms
6. The main air valve assembly and pilot valve assembly shall be externally
serviceable.
7. The pump body shall have provisions for• bolting to a permanent foundation.
1 1040-2 N40UNTAIRE FARMS- LUMBER BRIDGE
WWTS UPGRADE
1
i
1-

8. Each pump shall be furnished with- an air supply filter•/regulator/lubricator•, air
rriotoi mufflei= assembly and a discharge piping surge suppressor.
9. ..: .Each put n' p: shall lie"furnished: with suction -and discharge pulsation dampeners
selected specifically for the.piuup and its operating range, and consistent with the
niatcrials of construction of the wetted parts of the pulnp, '
10, ...: The pump'sliall operate at mid -range of •i.ts� published capacity. and head at the
specified design rate and total"dynamic head,
:C. PUMP DATA—AIRDIAPHRAGMPUMPS
..... ._... ......... .. en._.r t...c...._._.s.............<.",::.-:: •,..... ..-,.. .....dq. ,f..l._.s <.-._...-... ..a t... .__ s,.-.,.x... - -
g i
Quantity: Two (2) c
Manufacturer: Wilden, ar equal
Model:.. PS S
................... . .
Puinp Type: ... :: Air Olm-ated Double Diaphragm_.t
Pump Capacity- 112 gpm @ 0 psi..:. '
Fluid; : Thickened Waste Activated Sludge (-51/n)
Fluid Temperature:. 50 to 105 RF
Fluid Specitic.Gravity: 1.1
:Bod Material:. --: --- Polypropylene .
.. _.
Diaphragm Material: viton
Pulsation.Dampeners: Yes" --._..
Filter/Regulator/Lubricator: ...:' Yes
Muffler Assembly:. Yes
Motor Control: ...
Motor Data:. n/a _
Air Requirements: _.... _ 20 psi ....... _.
�.
PART 3 — EXECUTTON
2.4 GENERAL
A. All equipment and materials shall be installed as specified in the contract documents and
as showtr on the construction drawings and in strict accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations.
END OF SECTION 11040
11040-3 MOUNTAIRF FARMS -LUMBER BRIDGE.
w1VTS UPGRADE

SECTION :11.050
POSITIVE. DISPLACEMENT BLOWER SPECIFICATION
Part 1 - GENERAL
"L l Manufacturer & -Quality Assurance
A. The equipment specified herein is intended to be standard equipment for. -positive
displacement air systems and: be supplied by a single OEM. to assure uniform..quality and -
compatibility...
B. Manufacturer or packager qualifications:: Supplier shall have experience in providing similar
equipment, and shall show evidence of satisfactorily operating installations, in the eastern
region of the United States..
L
C.. Blower packager must�be an.'authorized-distributor of the blower being supplied and must
be factory authorized to perform warranty service.
1.2 .Manufacturer's Field Representation
A. General: Provide the services of. a qualified factory certified representative for the required...
days as specified hereunder. A man -day. is defined as eight,(8) on-sitemorking hours.
I
B. Inspection & : Start -Up:- Upon notification of completion of aeration system . by the
contractor, provide:a minimum of one (1) day for blower equipment installation inspection,
certification, control panel. parameter- setup, start-up and corrective adjustments. Site start- -
upprocedures must include equipment soft -foot checks and drivetrain alignment with a laser
alignment, tool.
i
C. Direct coupled drivetrain arrangements must be laser aligned `cold' as well as _`hot'. The hot -.
condition being defined as immediately following One (1) hour of runtime under normal j
design conditions.
D. Operator Training: Provide a minimum of one (1) day for blower package operator training.
Training to include but not limited to all lubrication locations, procedures, intervals and L
allowable lubricants. Drivetrain maintenance, filter servicing, special start-up & shut -down
procedures.
1.3 Testing
A. Blower: A factory blower performance and mechanical acceptance test report from the actual _-
blower manufacturer shall be supplied for each blower.
11050-1 MOUNTAIRE FARMS - LUMBER BRIDGE
WWTS UPGRADES Y
,

Aeration Blowers
::Quantity ...
3: ...
Discharge Pressure
15..0 PSIG- . .
Motor "HP
. 350 FT.
Max. BHP ::
332 BHP
Motor RPM
1800 RPM
Air, Flow (Design)
4303.SCFM
Air Flow (Min. Capacity)
1000 SCFM
Elevation
222'ASL
Inlet:Air Temp.'-.:
100°F
Blower RPM ...:
192.1.RPM
Max. Allowable RPM:.
1950 RPM
Blower Model
250CDL750 -
i RC2 Series
_ The blower shall be .a Gardner: Deriver '.'Hybrid", HE Series and shall be exactly the model number,
specified above; or an engineer-approvd equivlent.
_ 2.2.RotgU Positive Displacement Blowers" .
A.. Each blower shall be of the horizontal rotary helical screw: blower. Axial flow and positive
displacement type, providing oil -free air, suitable for heavy-duty continuous industrial
service.
B. Design. shall incorporate ,an axial/radial gas flow from inlet to. discharge with internal
volume reduction occurring as the :rotors mesh, creating an ever decreasing cavity until the
discharge port is uncovered.
1 C. Casing shall be of close grain iron of two piece construction and must be precision doweled
to each other for proper alignment. The casing shall be sufficiently ribbed to prevent
distortion under service conditions.
D. Head plates shall be fabricate drive end and gear end head plates of close grained cast iron
which are precision machined for exact bearing housing fit. c
11050-2 MOUNTAIRE FARMS - LUMBER BRIDGE
WWTS UPGRADES

E. _ Rotors shall be of the three -lobe main/fiye-lobe gate helical design, and .shall be. of close
grained ductile iron, stress relieved, precision machined on all surfaces, dynamically 4
balanced, and_shall operate -without rubbing, liquid seals, or air cylinder lubrication.:
F.: Helical alloy steel:timing gears shall provide precise rotor:synchronization so that
operating clearances are properly maintained.:
G. One four -point angular: contact bearing -;provide axial:rotor positioning and one cylindrical -
roller bearing provides radial rotor positionin of each rotor on the: discharge end. One
deep groove ball bearing provides'radial positioning on the inlet end of each rotor.
H..: Gears and bearings shall be lubricated by a splash oil system (force feed lubrication _
available upon request and required for above 20 PSIG). All lubricants shall be retained.by
a non -contacting compound labyrinth seal made by .Inpro/Seal® for the main and .gate
rotor bearing oil seals (mechanical seals available'on request). -The drive shaft oil seal shall
also,be a compound labyrinth Inpro/Seal®. Shaft air seals shall lie_ of the piston ring type
(graphite requited for above 20 PSIG) -w.ith atmospheric venting.'
I. Flanges shall be flat faced and drilled and tapped in accordance with ANSI 13I6.1,
125/1:50# rating.'.
:2.3 Electric Motors
A. Constant torque, TEFC (FP55), 1800 RPM, L1 15 S.F.,.460/3/60,:class F insulation, certified
for DOL starting and VFD service. Motors shall be as manufactured by Marathon, Baldor, c
-
WEG Electric or Toshiba..
B. Motor must -meet or exceed Energy Independence and Security Act (EISA 2007 / 2010) . ;r
standards :for NEMA premium efficiency.
C.' Frame must be'cast iron ' and equipped with cooling fins. The motor feet ahall be solid for
-better mechanical strength and reduced vibration- Aluminum" and steel :framed motors are
not allowed. Skeletonized mounting feet are not allowed.
D. Conduit box must be cast iron, split diagonally and rotatable in 00' increments.
E. Endshields shall be cast iron with fins for better thermal heat dissipation for lower bearing
operating temperatures.. They must be equipped with drain holes to expel water that may I L
condense inside the frame in certain environments.
F. VFD operated motors to meet MGI Part 31 rating and must be equipped with an insulated
bearing on the NDE and an AEGIS grounding ring on the DE.
2.4 Blower. Package Accessories
A. General: - The blower packages shall be fabricated and assembled with the following
accessories and shipped complete to the extent feasible for safe shipping.
1105 0-3 MOUNTAIRE FARMS - LUMBER BRIDGE
WWTS UPGRADES

B. Equipment Base: The base shall be comprised of carbon steel plate and structural: steel shapes
and be of sufficient design. to support'the blower, motor; drivetrain and silencers without
undue flexing. The base. must be of a heavy duty design to ensure operating vibration levels
are` within the blower 'manufacture's allowable tolerance. The blower and the. motor are:
mountedin the horizontal configuration providing for vertical airflow and horizontally
mounted silencers. The silencer may not be welded to the: base in any way. A base structure
used for direct coupled. applications must .be equipped with machined -mounting pads under...
all coupled, equipment: to eliminate soft -foot and alignment: issues: All direct. coupled
applications must have sufficient jacking provisions for ease of horizontal_shaftalignment.
All bases must be equipped -with both lifting lugs for crane lifting as well as a sufficient
forklift access point. All welding to be per AWS, D1.1. Al:l welders :must have:a current.
welder qualification'test.record for AWS D1.1 issued. by and AES accredited test facility
with a certification no. All welder continuity. Jogs must be up to date.
C. Drive: The blower and motor must be direct coupled and not belted; geared or speed
increased -reduced by any. mechanical power. transmission means. The coupling shall be of
the flexible, close coupled and maintdnance.free type..-:'
D. Drive Guard: All mechanical power transmission drive corriporients.rnustbe.equipped with
a steel guard sufficiently designed :to protect personnel: from accidental contact .with moving
parts. Guard(s) shall be securely mounted' and designed for. removal without the use of..
special tools. -All belt drive guards shall be constructed to allow visual. inspection of the
sheaves and belts without removal.. Guards shall be painted safety yellow or safety orange.
Plastic /polymer guards are'not allowed.
E. Filter: Provide - each' blower with a. suitably sized air filter, based on. the filter manufactures
published airflow. capacity .levels. Filters to. be. equippedwith weather a weather hood. for
_i outdoor installations... Acceptable manufactures include Universal Silencer-, Stoddard,
Solberg or: approved equal.
F. Intake Silencer: Provide a heavy duty double . shell Cylindrical noise: *attenuation unit
constructed of carbon steel sheet, tubing and plate.- The silencer must be multi -chambered
for pulse -control but'shall not contain internal packing material that may become dislodged.
- The silencer must be independently supported but not welded to or integral with the base
structure in any way. The silencer must be isolated from the blower connection. by a flexible
connector / expansion joint and not supported by the blower. in anyway.'. Silencer to be Model
URDY as manufactured -by Universal Silencer or equal..
G. Discharge. Silencer:. Provide ;a heavy duty double shell cylindrical noise attenuation unit
constructed of carbon steel sheet, tubing and plate. The silencer must be multi -chambered
for pulse control but shall not contain internal packing material that may become dislodged.
The silencer must be independently supported but not welded* to or integral with the base
structure in any way. The silencer must be isolated from the blower connection by a flexible
connector / expansion joint and not supported by the blower in anyway. Silencer to be Model
URDY as manufactured by Universal Silencer or equal.
The discharge silencer in applications subject to pressures above 15.0 psi must meet the
required ASME code construction requirements and be ASME code certified for it's
11050-4 MOUNTAIRE FARMS - LUMBER BRIDGE
WWTS UPGRADES

maximum pressure and temperature exposure.
H. Flexible Connector / Expansion Joints: A flex-conn / expansion joint is required directly at
the inlet and discharge of the blower to provide vibration isolation, accommodate thermal
expansion.and eliminate loading of the blower cylinder. Three piece clamped sleeved type
and one piece arch type are both acceptable. Lateral, angular, elongation and compression
tolerances must. be. suitable to accommodate thermal growth and, component manufacturing
tolerances. The minimum allowable ratings for the inlet is 10 psi, 150°F. The minimum
allowable -'ratings for the discharge is 30 psi, 350°F:: Connector joints to be equivalent to'.Flex-Fab sleeve -type and General Rubber arch -type. _
I. _ Pressure Relief Valve: Provide'a spring or weighted type . relief valve properly 'sized to
protect the blower from over pressurization. The valve must be located downstream. of the
discharge silencer. for pulsation protection. Provide valves equal to S:utorbilt.weight-type.and
Kunkle spring -type.
J. Check Valves: Provide . a full port. dual plate _`butterfly style' .check valve to be located
downstream of the pressure relief. valve. The body shall be steel -or cast iron. The internals
shall be corrosion resistant aluminum as a minimum. The hinge pin shall be stainless steel
and the closure stop pin must be Teflon coated to provide for cushioned contact points. The
valve shall be sized based .on airflow. as per: the manufacture's :recommendation to :avoid
chatter induced fatigue failures. Under -sized and over -sized valves are not permitted. The
Valve must be suitable for low pressure air. Pump valves and -valves- with external levers,
springs or other control mechanisms are not.permitted.. Provide avalve equivalent to. Fiexi-
Hinge Model 502M, 518; 503 or equal:
K..: Discharge lsolation Butterfly Valve: Provide a water type, resilient seated, ,lever operated
butterfly valve: for isolating.the blower from the system. Furnish valve with cast :ironor
ductile iron body and a corrosion resistant disc such as stainless steel, Aroxy coated or Nylon .
coated. The stem shall be stainless steel with a heavy duty :Acetal plug bushing. The seat
elastonier to be EPDM or:Viton. The hand. lever must. be equipped with position latching
plate' Acceptable manufactures are DeZurik, DelVal, Keystone,:Bray, Mueller, or approved
equal.
L. Discharge Pressure Gauge: Provide 0-15 or 0-30 psi scaled pressure gauge to be stem
mounted or panel mounted connected to the discharge side of the blower. Gauges not
connected downstream of the discharge silencer require a pulsation snubber. Stem mounted
gauges require .a liquid filled case. The case shall be weather tight and be of corrosion
resistant material such as stainless steel, aluminum, polysulfone or . approved equal.
Minimum size is 2-1/2" diameter and minimum accuracy to be +/- 2-1/2% of span per ASME
1340.100 Grade 1A. Acceptable manufactures are Wika, Ashcroft or approved equal.
M. Inlet Restriction Gauge: Provide a low vacuum or differential pressure gage to be connected
to the inlet side of the blower, downstream of the filter element. Acceptable ranges are 0-15
to 0-30 Inches H2O scale. Remote mounted and direct stem mounted are acceptable but must
be easily viewable without climbing. The case shall be weather tight and be of corrosion
resistant material such as stainless steel, aluminum, polysulfone or approved equal.
Minimum size is 2-1/2" diameter and minimum accuracy to be +/- 2-1/2% of span per ASME
B40.100 Grade Acceptable manufactures are Dwyer, Ashcroft or approved equal.
11050-5 MOUNTAIRE FARMS - LUMBER BRIDGE
WWTS UPGRADES

N. .-Thermometer: Provide 50-300 to:50-500 degrees-F scaled thermometer to be stem mounted
or panel mounted connected to the discharge side of the blower.. Remote mounted
thermometers require a separable brass or stainless steel therinowell . packed with heat
conductive paste. Minimum insertion depth. to be 1/3rd of the pipe diameter. The case shall ..
be weather tight and be of corrosion resistant material'such as stainless steel,. aluminum or
approved equal: Minimum size is 2-1/2" diameter and.minimum:accuracyto be +/-:1% of
span per ASME B40.300 Grade IA. Acceptable manufactures are Wika, Ashcroft, Reotemp,=
Winters or approved: equal.
... ... _.. ... ...
P. High.Discharge Temperature Switch: Provide_ 1"00-300 to "100-500 degrees F adjustable scale- "
temperature switch to be stem mounted -or panel mounted connected to the discharge side .o.f ..
- the blower. Remote mounted thermometers require a separable .brass or -stainless "steel
therinowell packed with Beat conductive paste. Minimum insertion depth to be 1/3rd of -the
pipe diameter. The .case shall.be weather tight (NEMA 4X or IP66.). and be of :corrosion:
resistant material such as stainless steel; aluminum or: approved equal: The. switch outputto
be SPDTsnap action and: have a set point repeatability of +/-1% of the adjustable range.
Acceptable manufactures are Ashcroft, United Electric or approved equal:
Switches with 'automatic shutdown reset are not allowed. A manual reset to be located at the
control panel by the controls supplier:
2.5 Shop Pairitin ..
A. Shop Prime _ Coating: Prime paint all components before assembly )with an alkyd primer
equivalent to Sherwin Williams Kem-Flash prime. Surface preparation, application_. and
minimum DFT millage to be as per the paint manufactures published recommendation..
B.: Shop. Finish Coating: Finish: paint. all :components before assembly with an enamel paint
equivalent to Sherwin Williams Sher-Kem paint.. Application and:minimum: DFT millage to
~j be as per the paint manufactures published. recommendation. Color to be the OEM's standard.. '
i color or owner requested color.
2.6 Sound Reduction Enclosure
A. Each blower assembly shall be furnished with a sound attenuating enclosure suitable
I for locating outdoors. The enclosure shall be manufactured of 0.063" thick formed
aluminum, sheet metal panels. The acoustical packing and overall design shall be
sufficient to meet a free -field noise requirement of 85 dBA at any horizontal distance
of 10 Feet from the outer most exterior surface. The enclosure design shall incorporate
a perforated a galvanized steel inner liner to mechanically secure the acoustical foam
material and to protect the foam from damage. Painted and powder coated steel
enclosures do not offer sufficient weather protection for outdoor installations.
Y �
11050-6 MOUNTAIRE FARMS - LUMBER BRIDGE
WWTS UPGRADES

--- ... ...
B. The enclosure shall be furnished with hinged latching doors sufficient to view, access, -
and -otherwise, -carry out all standard maintenance requirements without enclosure panel
disassembly. These activities include but may not be limited to- oil drain and fill, grease
fitting and plug access, filter service, guard removal and drivetrain- replacement and
alignment..Doorhinges shall.be ofthe.lift-off style to, facilitate field assembly and allow_
removal if needed. -
C.:.: The -enclosure must be equipped with a 120/1/60 forced air ventilation system. The air:
ventilation fan shall be _mounted on the enclosure and sized as,'necessary -to ' keep the
:assembly at a temperature needed to maintain proper operation. _as recommended bythe
assembly manufacturer and -must be.pre-wired to a thermostat. -Blower shaft mounted- �.
fans are. not acceptable due.to hindering maintenance and.troubleshooting access at the'... `
-blower. Also VFD operated turndown speed result in reduced ventilation airflow. _
D.. All exposed hardware, latches, hinges; door handles and similar must be highly weather:
resistant such. -as stainless steel, chrome or aluminum.
E. The enclosure will be free. standing . and not. attached or mounted onto the: blower..
package frame i in . any way.: The enclosure will require . field assembly and .shall be
supplied with installation instructions and fasteners. No special shall be'required for
field assembly.
F. - All i e enetration holes in the enclosure shall be sized to allow for passage of pip' '
p p p p. g pip
.fittings and/or flanges..Flashing rings shall:be provided to seal all pipe penetration holes
after final assembly.
.*.*END OF. SECTION* * -
i
i
L
I
11050-7 MOUNTAIRE FARMS - LUMBER BRIDGE
WWTS UPGRADES

SECTION 11220
COARSE BUBBLE DIFFUSION EQUIPMENT
PART 1--GENERAT -
1.01 DESCRIPTION
A.. SCOPE: ...:..
This section specifies provisions cover furnishing, delivery and installation of aeration cquupment as
specified in the attached EgtiipmentData Slieets F.O.B.- job site -at the Mount'ire Farms facility.iif
Lamber Bridge, NC:: Included are "coarse: bubble..".type aeration diffusers, related piping: and
accessories. 'Aeration blowers, dissolved oxygenequipment and other_ monitoring instruments for'
the :aeration system are furnished by others.
B: DEFINITIONS'
1. STANDARD CUBIC FEET PER MINUTE (SCIZM):: The volutrietric flow.
rate in cubic feet per minute at 68 degrees: F, 14.70 Bounds per square inch absolute pressure and
36 percent relative humidity.
2. DIFFUSER HEAD LOSS (INCHES VJ.C.):' The total.pressure .loss from the "
connection point of the diffuser, connectoi° ao the header tiv oug}i the entire diffuser to alie point ofair
exit to the aerated liquid, measured in inches of water column.
C. OPERATING CONDITIONS:
Aeration diffusers and equipment furnished .-under this .section shall be designed to satisfy the
following specific'requirements:
l a. The system . shall satisfy minimum and maxunurn air flow criteria established in the
Equipment Data Sheets. Refer to blower Equipment Data Sheets for elevation and air.flow.
b: Diffusers shall furnish minimum oxygen transfer efficiencies (OTE) as follows: 27,470
Ib/D (actual both tanks), 51,154 lb/D (standard summer max — both tanks). Efciency sliall
be determined from certified shop tests as defined hereafter. . :
c. The distribution of diffusers- within each aeration basin zone shall be as deternhined in
accordance with air flow criteria stated in the Equipment Data Sheets.
T The aeration equipment manufacturer shall submit coinplete designs, including test data and layouts
for approval.
11220-1 MOUNTAixr: FARMS • • LUMBER BRIDGE
W W1's UPGRADES

JJ
�f
i
l
.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.. REFERENCES:.
ll
This section contains references to the .following documents: They area part of this section
as' specified and modified. Where a referenced document contains referene.es to other standards,
those documents are included as' 'references 'under this 'section as if referenced directly.:.. ... In the event
of .conflict between the requirements of this. section and those of the listed- documents, the
requirements -of this section: shall prevail.
Unless otherwise specified, references to'documents shall mean the documents in effect
at the time of -Notice to Proceed. If referenced documents have been discontinued by the issuing .
organization,=a 'ferences to :those documents shall mean the i•eplacelnent documents issued or
otherwise -identified by that:,organization -or, if there are no. replacement documen, tsthe:last
version of the document before it was discontinued:
h
Reference ° Title
ASTM A240 fleat-Resisting Chromium and Chromium -Nickel Stainless
.-Steel Plate, Sheet, -and Strip for Pressure Vessels
ASTM A276 Stainless and: Heat -Resisting Steel, Bars and Shapes
ASTM A380 Standard Practice for ,Cleaning.and Descalirig Stainless
-Steel Parts, Equipment and Systems
ASTM A,743 Castings, Iron-Chromium;'Iron-Cln•olnium-Nickel,
C6rr6sion Resistant, for Severe Service.
ASTM .A774 ::_ As -Welded Wrought Austenitic;Stainless Steel Fittings for
General Corrosive Service at Low and Moderate
. Temperatures'
ASTM A778 Welded; Unannealed Austenik Stainless Steel Tubular -
Products
1.03 S UBMITTYILS
f-
The following submittals shall be provided in accordance with Section 0 13 00.
1. Manufacturer's literature indicating diffuser head loss versus airflow through
the diffusers; and range of airflows per difftiser, SCFM.
2. Manufacturer's catalog and/or other data confirming conformance to
specified design, materials of construction and equipment requirements. f,
3. Manufacturer's catalog and/or other data indicating oxygen transfer
efficiency of the diffusers and test method used for determination.
M1 ffi; r
II
1 1220-2 MOUNTAIRE{ FARMS — LUMBER BRIDGE
W WI's UPGRADES

t
PART 2--PRODUCTS
2:01 CANDIDATE PRODUCTS
Coarse btibblc diffusion equipment, including .drop leg, distribution piping and supports.. ..
shall be provided by a single Inantifactuler.:Th . use of "static tube" type aerators or coarse bubble
type aerators utilizing flexible m6mbrancs will not be accepted.
The Owner and :Construction. Managei-, believe: the following products are capable of::
satisfying the icquirements of this Section. This statement, however, shall not be construed as an
endorsemeizt of a:.ppal-ticular• iiiariufactur•er.'s product;_ nor s1ia11: it be-construed::that a ruined
manufacturer's standard product will comply with all of thc.requireti�ents of tlii :Section.,.' Supplier-.
tosubmit maiitrfactuler's: ilifarmation on difftrsers-to Engineer for engineer review -or approval..
2.02 MATERTALS
Component. Material
.. .. piffiisers ..: .. .. ._..
Stailit ess steel, ASTM A240, Type 304L; 22. .
gage minimitul
Piping and fittings As specified in,Equipment.Data Sheets .-
Piping.supports guides, and. anchors -Stainless steel,'ASTM A240 and ASTM A276,
Type 304; Tyre 304Lfor:welded components or
engineer approved.equal
Fasteners
S tainless steel, .Type 404.6r"engineer approved. :
equal
Materials specified are considered. the minimum acceptable for the purposes of durability, -
strength; and resistance -to erosion and corrosion. The Contractor may .propose alternative
materials for the purpose of providing greater strengthwor to meet required stress limitations.
However, alternative materials must provide at least the same qualities as those specified for the
purpose.
2.03 AIR DIFFUSION ASSEMBLIES
A. GENERAL:
Air diffusion assemblies shall consist of air distribution piping, supports, diffuser
connectors, diffusers and appurtenances. Assemblies shall be designed for not more than the
maximum pressure loss listed in Equipment Data Sheets when operating at the maximum airflow
rate per di Miser.
11220-3 MOUNTAIREFARMS -LUMBER BRIDGL:
W WI's UPGRADES

B. AIR DISTRIBUTION PIPING;
Manufacturer -provided ail' distribution piping shall consist of the. dropleg from the main air
connection and headers as shown, A loose follower flange for the connection of the drop leg: to the
main air distribution header shall be. provided. -.Headers shall be provided with renlovable Grid caps.
C. ANCHOR SYSTEM:
Support and (diffuser piping) tie -downs shall be. designed to insure that they have a -margin::
of safety of l-0':I against calculated buoyant forces.
The aeration equipment manufacturer. shall include as part of bid recozninendations for anchoring of..
the aeration system to a bolted stainless steel tank bottom. Anclior materials of cottstnrction'to be as
Specified in Equipment Data Sheefs,
2.04 a SPARE PARTSAND SPECIAL TOOLS
Spare partsshall be tagged and stored as specified in paragraph 11000-2.12.: -
S _ diffiisets, each size.,: ..
2.05 PRODUCT DATA
The following product data shall be provided in accordance with 'Section
01300:
[. Operating and maintenance information specified in Section 017A.
2. Manufacturers written re' coinmendations for installation:
PART 3--EXECU'I'IO1V
I
..
3.01 ' INSTALLATION
L.
I
Equipment shall be installed as shown and according to the manufacturer's instructions.
Recommended installation procedures shall be followed, including, but not limited to, installation of
the pipe Supports and leveling of the diffusers. All diffusers on a single air header shall be installed
in a single horizontal plane within a tolerance of phis or minus 1/4 inch.
The equipment shall be installed and tested under the direction of qualified manufacturer's
representative. j
3.02 TESTING �
Testing shall conform to the requirements of those specified.in this section.
11220-4 MOUNTAIREFARMS -LUMBER BRIDGE
W WTS UVGRAIXS

After. nstallation and prior to acceptance by the Owner, .the contactor with the assistance of the.
equipment manufacturer. shall perform and supervise field perforri'ance tests. Details of the test
procedures shall be submitted to the Engineer for. Approval.: All tests shall be. scheduled to be
-witnessed by theEngineer. Tile tests shall consist.of, but not:be limited .to the following: .
A: Unifoi'ni Air Distribution:
An air distribution tests1iall be perfoimcd-oil each basin. The. basin will .be filled with clean
water to a depth above the aiT.manifold.sufficient to visually inspeetAhe operation -of the':
diffusers, generally a depth about one foot above the diffusers. The systctn shall be operated
at one SCF.M.per diffilser with- air flow' ' iformity. being verified by nieans of visual
inspection: If, in the opinion. of the engineer th6re -are areas: of consistent low .or' high air.
quality: release, the: Contractor shall: make alF riecessaly' adjustments to correct these
deficiencies.
During filling of the basins.f6r the air-uniformity:test, observations will be Itrade when the
water level is at: the top ofale diffusers to -insure that each Diffiiser is at the saute elevation
plus ornunus l/8 inch:.
All water required for thc: tests, including filling, 'dewateriiig; and cleaning, of ahc wanks;
shall b providcd:at the Contractor's -expense:
B. -Leakage Tests:
The Contractor shall. perform a. field leakage test . for drop .pipes, air manifolds . :and
distribution headers.. The procedure shall :consist of :operating the system and applyhig a
soap solution to eacli joint or submerging the joint with clean:water and visual observing the
joint for• leakage. The procedures.will b'e subject to the approval of the° ngineer.. '
Final testing shall include operation of the assemblies with the channels. filled with clear
Water to the design operating depth:: -.The Contractor shall :pay for ,all costs for the
manufacturer to provide a trained representative on site to balance the system.
3.03 TRAINING
-- A minimum of 2 hours of training.shall be provided.
I
**END OF SECTION**
I
1 1220-5 MOUNTAIRE FARMS- LUMBER BRIDGE
W WTs UT'GRAnf:s

SECTION 11.030
MOVING BEIJ BIOREACTOR SYSTEM EQUIPMENT
PART 1 —GENERAL,':.
1.1. SCOPE Furnishing, installation, testing and startup. assistance for the -equipment-
.:components. required to install"a moving media�system described herein.
Construction of the aeration basin :system will require= an integrated set of major
..equipment components including moving bed attached growth media (BioPortz);
outlet sieve assemblies, and a coarse bubble': diffused: aeration system. The
equipment component systems shall meet the performance and- design: criteria
.
specified in this section:
L2. GENERAL. The equipment furnished under this section shall -be fabricated,
assembled, placed in prop eroperating.condition- and tested in full conformity with
..drawings, specifications, engineering data, instructions, and:recommendations. of
the equipment manufacturer: unless exceptions are rioted by'ENGINEER. .
I The equipment shall. be furnished complete with all required ' piping, . supports,
.connectors, and an' -additional -:materials: or construction required: for proper
assembly and installation. The furnished coarse -bubble aeration system shall begin
at the drop pipe into the: basins as ;shown on. the drawings and shall included all air
..distribution: piping,. supports, -and aeration_manifold grid assemblies. The furnished
sieve assemblies included in this. equipment Specification shall connect to: the
= flanged connections installed in the basin walls. as show on the:drawings.: Basin
drain sieves as shownon the drawings are. also required as part of this specification
-to retain the media when the basins are drained.
1.3. Coordination: All equipment provided in this section shall be furnished by or .
through a single manufacturer/supplier that shall coordinate with CONTRACTOR,
the design, fabrication, delivery, installation and testing of the system components.
The; single manufacturer/supplier shall :have .the sole responsibility for
coordination and performance' of all components of the ' system with the -
performance and design criteria specified herein.
1.4. Submittals. Submittals shall be made in accordance with the Submittals section,
01300.
1.5. Sieve Assemblies.
1.5.1. Complete detailed drawings of the proposed sieve assemblies and layout for
each basin showing all pipe sizes, lengths and maximum allowable span
between supports of each sieve assembly shall be provided with Submittals.
The layout will also show the spatial compatibility of the sieve assemblies and
11030-1 MOUNTAIREFARMS -LUMBER BRIDGE
WWTS UPGRADES

supports with.the, coarse bubble aeration system piping;:the basin interconnect .
piping and basin drain sieves/grating inside each of the basins. The drawings
shall also include details of the connection of the sieve assemblies to the basin
interconnects ..and outlet weir box., sieve.. supports,, and anchor details,
expansion joints, gaskets: bolts, nuts and washers, and all materials used.
r
1.6. Moving Media
1.6.1. A detailed plan describing the methods proposed for safe. storage of the v
media at. the site. The plan shall specify the type of tarp material required and
provide a detailed drawing showing CONTRACTOR how to place, and secure
a tarp over the containers of media to protect the: media from the sun,
precipitation, wind; and construction activities.
1.7. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: . Adequate operation. and ::maintenance
manuals shall be 'supplied prior to .shipment of the equipment to jobsite:. The
operation and maintenance manuals shall be -in addition to any instructions or parts
.. lists packed with orattached to the equipmentwhen delivered. Operation and'
maintenance manuals shall be submitted iri accordance with the submittals section.
1.8. Material and'Workmanship Warranty. The manufacturer shall guarantee that the.
outlet sieve assembly: components and piping will be free from materials and.:
workmanship defects, including damages that may occur during shipping; for a -
period of one year following delivery of product.
2. PART 2 — PRODUCTS
.2. L Acceptable Manufacturers. All of the system components as specified herein shall
:be: provided. by or: through Entex Technologies Inc., Chapel Hill; NC of an
engineer -approved equivalent.
2.2: Service Conditions. All of the system components specified herein shall be
designed to operate and endure the environment presented by normal, no -toxic,
biologically degradable wastewater treatment plant operation.. In addition, the
system components specified herein shall also be designed to endure the
environmental conditions presented when a basin'is taken off-line and drained for
maintenance and/or cleaning.
2.3. Performance and Design Requirements. The system components will be designed
to help the suspended growth activated sludge portion remove soluble organics
contained in wastewater. The basins containing the moving media shall be aerobic.
2.4. Coarse Bubble Aeration System. Coarse bubble aeration system shall conform to
Section 11220. The aeration equipment included shall convey air from the air drop
pipes to the air diffusers. The air diffusers shall diffuse the air uniformly into the
entire width and length of each aeration basin.
1103 0-2 MOUNTAIRE FARMS - LUMBER BRIDGE
WWTS UPGRADES

2.4.1. The aeration system shall be designed to. convey the 'required, airflow to each
of the basins and transfer the. required amount of:oxygen into solution.The
coarse.bubble aeration system shall also have- sufficient mixing capacity to
thoroughly mix the entire contents of'the basin; keep all biological solids :and
--- :media in suspension and shall also provide sufficient agitation of the. carrier
elements against the sieve openings, to keep. biofouling-related headloss to a,
minimum.
:. 2:5. Sieve Assemblies. The: sieve assemblies shall :retain: the. carrier elements within
...each basin while allowing mixed liquor. to- freely pass.. Flow.out of each basin shall
e ,istri uted.unifornily among the basin sieve assemblies. The Sieve Assemblies
shall be constructed of 304 Stainless Steel:' The Sieve Assemblies shall be
... ... ... ... ...
constructed .of spiral. wound wedgewire.. In no event shall- the -openings between.
adjacent Wires be greater than 2l3 the smallest dimension of the moving.media:
2:5.1: Sieve diameter, inches 16
..2.5.2. Max:' Sieve length, feet : 6 -.
: 2.5.3. Number ofsieves per cell 6:
2.5.4: Total number of sieves ' 12 -
2.5.5. Maximum allowable headloss
across each cell:at peal{
hour flow; inches 2
_.
2.6.: Sieve Assemblies and' Supports
2.6.L 'Wedge -Wire Sieves:.. Type 304L. or 316L:stainless steel
-
2.6.2. Basin Drain -Sieves Type.304L or 316 stainless steel
16.3. Supports Type 304L stainless steel..
2.6.4.. -Assembly Bolts/Nuts Type 316-stainless steel
2.6.5: 'Gaskets Neoprene,45 to 55 Type A Durometer, tested
in accordance with ASTM 52240.
JMoving Media. The carrier elements will, remain suspended in the mixed liquor from the
agitation created by the coarse bubble aeration system. The high surface area of the media.
will create an environment suited for nitrifying biofilm growth to enhance the overall
performance. of the aeration basins while operating at a lower suspended growth solids
retention time (SRT).
i 2.6.6. Flow
Y, Average design 2.55 MGD
Peak Hourly (for sieve design) 3.2 MGD
j
11030-3 MOUNTAIRE FARMS - LUMBER BRIDGE
WWTS UPGRADES

-.2.6.7. Total media: biologically, active surface area (ft)
First Oxic Cell 3,463,023
Second:Oxic Cell 3,463,023 - --
2.6.8. Design Influent
mg/1 Month Average ::: ..
BOD5 1,300
TSS .. :: 200
NH3-N- 30
Design Effluent, ...
ing Month Average
BOD5 500:
2.7..Moving::Media. The moving.;bed bioflm reactor carrier.; elements.. shall.: be.
l_
fabricated from extruded HOPE and have a specific gravity without. biofilm growth
between 0.94 and 0.98, The media shall be black incorporating_ carbon black for = -
... erihanced UV protection. Visual' inspection of the .media shall confirm the size and
shape conformity sof all pieces. The carrier elements shall: be nso lesthan 15mm. . L
in diameter and- 12 mm: in: cylinder length. The. system -shall provide a minimum
biologically. effective surface area of 589 m2/m3.
The moving bed.biofilm reactor carrier elements shall'be. a standard product of the
supplier and shall have been used in at least 5 fully operational. USA installations.
as
3. PART 3.— Miscellaneous
3.1. Influent Screening. The influent screening to the WWTP shall have a maximum
.:opening no greater: than 2/3the width of the WAS supplier's Sieve Assembly
opening. Thus, if a 5 mm Sieve Assembly is used, the influent_ screening must be
no larger than 3 min. Similarly, if a 10 mm Sieve Assembly is used, the influent
screening must be no larger than 6 mm.
END OF SECTION
11030-4 MOUNTAIRE FARMS - LUMBER BRIDGE
WWTS UPGRADES

SECTION 150.00
GENERAL PIPE SCHEDULE
PART: I= GENERAL
L l' _ . DESCRIPTION-:
A:: The Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and:services for
installation of all pipe and -pipe fittings as indicated, in.accordance. with provisions of the
Contract.
B. Completely coordinate work with all other trades.
C. Although such work may not be specifically indicated, furnish.and install all supplementary. .
or_miscellaneous items, appurtenances, and -devices incidental to or necessary fora sound,.-:
secure, and complete installation.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. The:Contractor shall verify on shop drawings': dimensions, schedule of pipe;: ftongs,
hangers, supports and miscellaneous appurtenances: When special fittings are necessary,
verify locations of items and include complete details:
B.. The'Contractor shall submit' copies' of any manufacturer's written directions regarding
material- handling, delivery, storage, and: installation...
C. Information shall include but no necessarily be limited :to:
1:. -Dimension of piping lengths
2. Invert or centerline elevation ofpiping crossings
3. Acknowledgement of bury depth. requirements
4. Details of fittings, tapping location, thrust blocks, restrained joints segments,
harnessed joint segments, hydrants, and related appurtenances. -
PART 2--PRODUCTS
2.1 PIPE SCHEDULE
A. Unless otherwise indicated on drawings or equipment data sheets, piping system materials,
fittings and appurtenances are subject to requirements of specific technical specifications
and shall be as follows:
11000-1 MOUNTAIRE FARMS - LUMBER BRIDGE
WWTS UPGRADE
I

Service Category Size Range Piping S, sue_
Wastewater, Piping, exposed All sizes Sch 1 OS, Stainless.`Steel -
Wastewater Pi ing; buried All sizes Ductile: Iron
p .
Air Piping, exposed : All sizes Sch 40, Carbon Steel .
2.2 SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS AND PIPING SPECIALTIES . .
A. Insulating joints. - Provide insulating -joints where dissimilar metals are joined together and
where specifically indicated: on drawings. Type of joint shall be,as detailed and in
accordance with the following requirements:
1..:Insulating flanges provide each; unit to: consist of flat faced 1/8 inch thick, dielectric:
asbestos for temperature up to 700 T; 1/32 inch wall thickness spiral wound mylar bolt
sleeves; :1/8 inch thick high strength phenolic=insulting washers.
2. Insulating unions —.Provide dielectric union -by Epco or approved equal:
3. Insulating couplings.— when joining larger diameter dissimilar metal pipe, use insulting
::coupling :equal to Rockwell N.o'. 416 or Dresser Style 39. When pipes have different:
outside diameters, use insulating reducing couplings equal to Rockwell No. 417.or
Dresser Style 39-62. .
' PART 3--EXECUTION
3.1 DELIVERY, INSPECTION; -AND STORAGE;
A. The Contractor shall inspect materials thoroughly upon arrival. Remove damaged or
rejected -materials from site. Observe manufacturer's directions for delivery and storage
of materials and accessories. Store materials on -site in enclosures or under, protective
coverings above ground to keep clean and dry, where necessary.
B. Protect pipe coating during handling. using methods recommended by manufacturer. Use
} of bare cables; chains, hooks, metal bars, or narrow skids in contact with coated pipe is
not permitted.
C. Prevent damage to pipe during transit from storage to location of installation. Repair
abrasions, scars, and blemishes. - If repair of satisfactory quality cannot be achieved;
replace damaged material immediately.
D. Erect piping to accurate lines andgrades and support as required on drawings or
described in specifications.. When temporary supports are used, ensure that sufficient
rigidity is provided to prevent shifting or distortion of pipe. Install expansion devices as
necessary to allow expansion and contraction movements.
11000-2 MOUNTAIRE FARMS - LUMBER BRIDGE
WWTS UPGRADE

3.2 PIPING OUTSIDE BUILDINGS AND STRUCTURES
A. Install piping as shown on drawings with ample clearance and allowance for expansion or
contraction.
B.- Install flexible joint within two. (2) ft of joint where'pipe enters or leaves structure.
Install ,second flexible joint not more than six- (6) ft or less than.four (4) ft from first joint:
Provide balance of piping with standard laying lengths and in accordance with drawings.
C.: Unless otherwise shown on the drawings-, provide minimum of three: (3):feet earth cover::
over exterior buried piping systems: and appurtenances conveying water, fluids, or..
solutions subjectto freezing.
3.3. PIPE.INTERSECTIONS.WITH STRUCTURES
A. Enter and exit through structure walls by using wall seals specified or as shown on
drawings.
3.4 EQUIPMENT PIPE CONNECTIONS
A. Install .flexible couplings .or Dresser couplings as shown on drawings.
B., Where shown on the -drawings, couplings shall he restrained with galvanized steel control .
rods and nuts.
...
.: ... .. . .
C. Exercise. care in bolting flanged joints so that there is no restraint on.the opposite end of.
pipe or fitting which would :prevent uniform gasket pressure at connection or would cause
unnecessary stresses to be transmitted to equipment flanges. Where push -on joints are
used in conjunction with flanged`joints, final positioning of push -on joints shall not. be
made until flange joints have been tightened without strain.
D. Tighten flange bolts at uniform rate which will result in uniform gasket compression over
entire area of joint. Provide tightening torque in accordance with manufacturer's
recommendations.
E. Support and match flange faces to. uniform contact over their entire face area prior to
installation of any bolt between the piping flange and equipment connecting flange.
F. Provide gaskets of Garlock 3400, see specification 15075
G. Provide utility connections to equipment shown on drawings, scheduled, or specified.
H. Unless otherwise specified, make piping connections to equipment, including but not
limited to installation of brass and fittings, strainers, pressure reducing valves, flow
control valves, and relief valves'provided with or as integral part of equipment.
11000-3 MOUNTAIRE FARMS - LUMBER BRIDGE
WWTS UPGRADE

.I. Where. connections between new .work and :existing work is made, .use suitable and: proper
fittings to suit conditions encountered as shown on the drawings. Make connections in
thorough: and workmanlike manner. Perform connections with exisimg-piping. at time
Spec ified by Engineer. ,Undertake connections in fashion which will disturb system as
little as possible.
J; Provide suitable equipment and facilities to. dewater, drain; and di of liquid removed
without damage. to adjacent property.
3.5 TESTING AND INSPECTION: .. .
A. Each section of installed line willbe visually inspected by the Construction Manager
or to final testin pipe shall bearue to both line
.. _.: prior g�The.p oand shall contain no
p. ... grade,..
broken pipe, shall show no leaks; shall Show neither obstructions .r�or the projection of -
connecting pipes:into the main pipe, and shall.contain:no debris:or.other. deposits which
shall in anyway reduce the full cross-section area of the pipe: -
B. Perform testing and inspection prior to cleaning and final acceptance. Acknowledge..
satisfactory performance of tests and inspections in writing to Engineer prior to final
acceptance: ...
C. Types of testing and inspection to be employed: for the piping systems included:
-,
1. Hydrostatic pressure testing
D. Test and inspect all pipes: and joints in designated sections. Provide all necessary
= equipment and perform all work required in connection with the tests and inspections.
E. Bear the cost of all testing and inspecting, locating and remedying of leaks and`any
necessary retesting and re-examination.
- F,. Hydrostatic ' ressure testing: Contractor shall perform leakage tests er. Engineer:
P. p. p
i
**END OF SECTION**
11000-4 MOUNTAIRE FARMS - LUMBER BRIDGE
WWTS UPGRADE

SECTION 15050
PIPING SYSTEMS
PART 1--GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION:.
I
A. SCOPE:
1. GENERAL: This section specifies systems of piocess piping and general
requirements for piping systems. Detailed specifications for the components. listed on the Piping
System Specification. Sheets are found in other sections of Division 15..This section shall be. used m'
:conjunction with those sections:
Contractor shall provide all piping and ancillary devices as shown, specified
and required to provide a fully functional system. i�
2. CONTRACTOR DESIGN OF PIPING SYSTEMS: in addition -to - -
materials,. labor, and plant required to construct piping systems, Contractorshall provide
Professional engineering services ("Design Professional") for the design and inspection of piping
systems work. .
The Contractor shall provide" 4he final design, inspection, and certification for
.f
the piping wall. thicknesses, supports, seismic restmints,-and provisions for control of dynamic
forces and or buried and exposed piping on this oJ'ect. Pipe suPorts are sPecified Pe'expanion f
under Section 15096. 1 The design' of these.systems shall be the product of a professional engineer I
currently licensed to practice in the State of North Carolina retained bylie Contractor. The
professional engineer (hereinafter and in all referenced sections the "Design Professional") shall
obtain and maintain professional liability insurance in the amount of $1,000,000 aggregate to be in
effect for duration of this project plus one year.
B. DEFINITIONS:
Pressure terms used in- Section 15050 and elsewhere in Division 15 are defined as follows:
1. MAXIMUM: The greatest continuous pressure at which the piping system operates. rl
2. TEST: The hydrostatic pressure used to determine system acceptance. {,
1
15050-1 MOUNTAIRE FARMS - LUMBER BRIDGE
WWTS UPGRADF.

.1.02 _ QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. ...REFERENCES: .
This section:contains. references to the following documents. They are a part of this section
as specified and modified. Where a -referenced: document contains referencesto other standards,
those documents are. included as references under this section as if referenced directly: In the. event
.-of conflict between the requirements of this section,aiid those of the .listed documents, the
requirements of this section shall prevail.
Unless: otherwise specified, references to documents shall mean:the documents in effect
at the time of notice to proceed. If referenced documents have been discontinued by the -issuing
organization, references to those documents shall: mean the replacement documents issued or
otherwise.ideirtified.by-that organization.or; if there are no replacement -documents; the last.
:version of the document -before it was discontinued: Where document dates. are given -in the
following listing,eferences: to those documents shall mean the specific document version_
associated -with that date; regardless of whether the document has been superseded .by a version
with a later. date, discontinued or replaced. -
1 Reference Title
ANSI A13.1 Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems
ANSI B 1.20.1. _ Pipe Thiedds, General Purpose. (Inch)
ANSI B 1.6.1 Cast. Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings Class 25.125> 250
. and 800
ANSI B16.3 Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings Class 150 and.300
ANSI 816.5 Pipe Flanges and Flanged.Fittings
ANSI B 16.9 Factory -Made Wrought Steel Buttwelding Fittings
ANSI B 16.11 Forged Steel Fittings,. Socket Welding and Threaded
ANSI B 16.12 Cast Iron Threaded Drainage Fittings
ANSI B31.3 Chemical Plant and Petroleum. Refinery Piping.
ASM$ Section IX Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code Welding and Brazing
Qualifications
ASTM A53 Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot Dipped, Zinc -Coated Welded and
Seamless
ASTM A105/A105M Forgings, Carbon Steel, for Piping Components
ASTM A1.06 Seamless Carbon Steel Pipe for High -Temperature Service
ASTM A126 Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings foriValves,
Flanges, and Pipe Fittings
ASTM Al 97 Cupola Malleable Iron
15050-2 MOUNTAM FARMS - LUMBER BRIDGE
WWTS UPGRADE

Reference
- Title
ASTM A234/A234M
Pipe Fittings of Wrought Carbon Steel and Alloy Steel for
..
Moderate and Elevated Temperatures
ASTM A536
Ductile Iron Castings
ASTM C564
Rubber Gaskets for Cast Iron Soil.Pipe and Fittings .
- ASTM D1248 ; .
Polyethylene Plastics Molding and -Extrusion Materials
ASTM D1784.
Rigid Poly Chloride): PVC Compounds': and Chlorinated
,
Poly.(Vinyl. Chloride) (CPVC) Compounds
ASTM D1785
Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) -Plastic Pipe; Schedules 40; 80, and
120
ASTM'D2241 ..
Poly -(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) PIastic Pipe (SDR-PR)
ASTM D2665 . _ _
: Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) -Plastic Drain, Waste, and Vent
.Pipe and Fittings
ASTM D3034
Standard Specification for. Type PSM Poly. (Vinyl Chloride) _
.(PVC).Sewer Pipe and Fittings
AWWA C105 ' �
Polyethylene Encasement for Ductile -Iron Piping for Water and
Other.Liquids
f
AWWA C1.10
Ductile -.Iron and Gray -Iron Fittings, 3 Inch Through 48 Inch, for
an e Water d Oth r I igilids
AW WA C 111 :
Rubber -Gasket Joints for Ductile -Iron and Gray -Iron Pressuze
Pipe and Fittings.
AWWA C115 .
Flanged Ductile -Iron and Gray -Iron Pipe with Threaded Flanges:
AWWA C151 '
Ductile -Iron Pipe; Centrifugally Cast in Metal Molds or
Sand -Lined Molds, for Water or Other Liquids ..
AWWA C200
Steel Water Pipe 6 Inches and Larger
AWWA C205
Cement -Mortar Protective Lining and Coating for Steel Water
Pipe--4 In: and Larger --Shop Applied
AWWA C206
Field Welding of Steel Water Pipe
AWWA C207
Steel Pipe Flanges for Waterworks Services --Sizes 4 In. through
144 In.
AWWA C208
Dimensions for Fabricated Steel Water Pipe Fittings
AWWA C209
Cold -Applied Tape Coating for Special Sections, Connections,
and Fittings for Steel Water Pipelines
AWWA C210
Liquid Epoxy Coating Systems for the Interior and Exterior of
Steel Water Pipe
AWWA C214
Tape Coating Systems for the Exterior of Steel Water Pipelines
' 15050-3 MOUN•1•AIRE FARMS - WMBBR BRIDGE
WWTS UPGRADE
i

Reference:. Title
AWWA C600 Installation of Ductile -Iron Water Mains and Their.
Appurtenances
AWWA C651 Disinfecting Water. Mains
AWWA C900 Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pressure Pipe,-4 Indies Through 12.
Inches, for Water ,
AWWA Nil l -Steel Pipe -'-A Guide for Design and Installation
. . . FEDSPEC Coating, Pipe,_ Thermoplastic Resin or Thermosetting Epoxy
.L-C-530B(I)
MIL-H-13528B Hydrochloric AcidJnhibited Rust Removing
MIL-STD-810C: Environmental- Test Methods '
UPC Uniform Plumbing:Code ,.. .
B. FITTINGS AND COUPLING COMPATIBILITY:
To assute'unifoirriity and compatibility of.piping components; fittings :arid couplings: for .
grooved -end or shouldered -end piping systems shall be furnished by the same manufacturers.
-, . C. PIPING SUPPORTS, SEISMIC RESTRAINTS, AND EXPANSION CONTROL:.
Piping supports, seismic restraints, anchorage and expansion control shall be designed by
the Contractor's Design Professional selected under paragraph 15050-1:OIA. There may be:
k situations where the Owner wants to: control where certain anchors -are located -the level of.forces : that can be transmitted -to structures, the direction that expansion growth is -allowed, or -requires use.
of particular piping elements. In such cases these elements will be shown and shall be incorporated
into the Design Professional's design.
Mandatory anchorage locations will be identified on the mechanical drawings, and
maximum limitations, if any, for structure loads from the anchor will listed in kips, e.g. "X, 50'%
identifying location and 50,000 lb -force. Where structural load would be exceeded, piping -
flexibility or expansion.joints shall be provided to achieve the maximum loading. If a particular '
{ type of support, anchor, seismic restraint or expansion element'is detailed on the drawings, then
those elements shall be incorporated into the Contractor's design. Piping submittals by the
Contractor shall'include all elements, including those portions directed by the Owner, as well as
complete piping runs. The structural reaction loads for all fixed supports shall be calculated and
shown. The Contractor's Design Professional shall, as part of the submittal process, notify the
Owner if he believes any Owner -shown elements are incompatible with the overall piping system
and its function.
Additional requirements are specified in related sections.
D. BURIED PIPING:
15050-4 MOUNTATRF FARMS -- LUMBER BRIDGE
WWTS UPGRADF.

- IJ
. I
A11 buried' r m shall be designed as fully -restrained systems'.. Where:required;.Design
pip g..- ... �.
Professional. shall size temporary and/or permanent thrust restraints. Restraint systems shallbe
designated to allow complete piping system disassembly without destructive measures..
Buried piping shall be -provided as specified. Unless otherwise noted; materials; specified in
the PIPESPEC shall. be used. Thicknesses specified in the PIPESPEC orreferenced specifications
shall be considered minimums. Excavation, installation and bacl�lI shall be as specified.
Piping submittals by the Contractor shall include all elements, including those.poitions . 4.
-directed bythe Owner; as well: as- complete piping runs.: If a particular type -of restraint or expansion
elementor approach is detailed on the drawings, then those elements shall be incorporated: into the- i
Contractor's design. The Contractor's Design Professional shall, as part of the: submittal process, ,
notify the Owner if he believes any Owner -shown elements are incompatible with the overall
.piping
.: ... -
system and its function.
Additional requirements are specified in related sections.
PART 2=-PRODUCTS
2.01 PIPING MATERIALS
Unless otherwise specified, piping materials, including pipe; -gaskets, fittings, connection
and joint assemblies, -linings and coatings; shall be selected from. those listed on the piping system -
specification sheets.:Piping materials shall conform to- detailed- specifications for each type of pipe
and piping appurtenance specified in other sections of Division 15.. -
New and existing piping is' designated by service rather than pipe material. :Existing pipe
material types may. not be the same as material types specified for new piping. Contractor, shall
investigate and provide suitable connections, including electrical isolation, as necessary.
2.02 PIPING IDENTIFICATION
I
A. PLASTIC CODING MARKERS:
Plastic markers for coding pipe shall conform to ANSI A13.1 and shall be as manufactured
by W. H. Brady Company, Seton Name Plate Corporation, Marking Services Inc., or equal.
Markers shall be the mechanically attached type that are easily removable; they shall not be the
adhesive applied type. Markers shall -consist of pressure sensitive legends applied to plastic backing
which is strapped or otherwise mechanically attached to the pipe. Legend and backing shall be
resistant to petroleum based oils and grease and shall meet criteria for humidity, solar radiation,
rain, salt, fog and leakage fungus, as specified by MIL-STD-810C. Markers shall withstand a
continuous operating temperature range of -40 degrees F to 180 degrees F. Plastic coding markers
shall not be the individual letter type but shall be•manufactured and applied in one continuous length
of plastic.
15050-5 MOUNTAIRE r-ARMs--LUMBER BRIDGE
WWTS UPGRADE

n
Markers beating the legends,on the background colors specified in the PIPESPEC shall be
provided in the following letter heights:
Qutside Pi � e Diameter,"Inches :. Letter height; inches
Less than 1-1/2 1/2
1-1/2:through 3: 1-1/8...
Greater than'3 2-1/4
Outside pipe diameter shall include insulation and jacketing.
In addition, pipe markers shall include uni- and bi-directional arrows, indicating flow_
direction, in the same sizes as the. legend. Legends and arrows shall be white' on blue. or red
......
backgrounds and black on other` specified;backgrounds.
B. PLASTIC TRACERTAPE:
Tracer tape shall be 6 inches wide, colored the same as the background colois as specified in
Table .A,paragraph 15050-3.07, and -made of inert, plastic material suitable for direct burial.', Tape::
shall be capable of stretching to twice its origiinal length and shall .be -as manufactured by Allen .
-Systems, W. H. Brady Co., Seton Name Plate: Corporation, Marling Services Inc., or equal.
Two messages shall be printed on the tape. The first message shall read "CAUTION
CAUT/ONCAUT/ON PIPEBURIEDBELOW"with bold Iettels approximately
2 inches high." The blank shall -be filled with the particular system fluid such'as chrloiine, oxygen or
sulfur dioxide.:The second message shall read "CALL "with letters. approxizxiately
3/4. inch high.. Both messages shall be printed at maximum intervals of 2 feet.
C. MAGNETIC TRACER TAPE:
Polyethylene magnetic tracer tape shall be as manufactured by Allen Systems, W.H. Brady
Co., Seton Name Plate Corporation, Marking Services Inc., or equal. Tape shall be acid and alkali -
resistant, 3 inches wide, 0.005 inch thick, and have 1,500 psi strength and 140 percent elongation .:
value. The tape shall be colored the same as the background colors as specified in paragraph
15050-3.07 and shall be inscribed with the words "CAUTION —PIPE BURIED BELOW" and
the name of the piping system.
2.03 VALVES
Valves of the same size and service shall be provided by a single valve manufacturer.
! Packing shall be nonasbestos material. Actual length of valves shall be within 1 /16 inch (plus or
minus) of the manufacturer's specified length. Flanges shall meet the requirement of ANSI B 16.5.
Push -on and mechanical joints shall meet the' -requirements of AWWA C111'. Valve operators are
specified in Sections 15185.
15050-6 MOUNPAIRE FARMS - LUMBER BRIDGE
WWTS UPGRADE

2.04 PRODUCT DATA
Product data on piping materials and layout shall be provided in accordance with Section 01300. .
A. PRE -CONSTRUCTION DATA:
All information specified shall be transmitted to the Engineer a minimum of four (4)=weeks
prior to'construction.
1. Design drawings=arid calculations for pipe wail:thickness; supports,
anchorage, seismic restraints, and expansion control systems as specified
in -Section 15096. The: drawings and calculations shall be sealed and
submitted by the .design professional specified in paragraph .1-5050-1.02 C
through the Contractor. The Design Professional shall affirm that loads on
structures are within the load limits noted on the contract documents. I
2. -Manufacturers' product literature on each bend, coupling, fitting, bolt,
gasket, restraint or other item provided pursuant to this section.
3. ... : A schedule showing the quantity provided and the. piping system for each
item provided under this section.
.. f
4. Piping layout drawings, for both exposed, and buried .piping systems,
depicting supports;:locations:of support; fittings aad.restraints;aeismic:
restraint provisions, and other pertinent information, including wall and floor
penetrations, where applicable. Submitted piping layout drawings shall
clarify detailed connections to new and. existing equipment, piping and::
structures, Unless otherwise -indicated on drawings, piping fitting angles and
vertical and horizontal pipe locations'shall be determined by Contractor and -
depicted on piping layout drawings. Drawings shall.be original layouts by
the Contractor; photocopies of contract drawings: are not acceptable.
Layout drawings and other Product Data shall be defined and depicted by system•
B. POST -CONSTRUCTION DATA: rr
Inspection reports, authored, sealed and signed by the Design Professional retained under I_
the provisions of paragraph 15050-1.02 A. shall be submitted to the Construction Manager each
week, as provided under paragraph 15050-3.04, The Design Professional's final report shall be
submitted to the Construction Manager before beneficial occupancy by the Owner, as provided
¢ under paragraph 15050-3.04. -
2.05 PIPE AND VALVE COMPATIBILITY �
15050-7 MOUNTAiRE FARMS -LUMBER BRIDGE
WWTS UPGRADE

Selected pipe and pipe end connections for valves, or other equipment, shall be fully compatible
within each piping system. Contractor shall coordinate the selection of pipe materials, linings and
end connections so that valves operate properly over their entire range (e:g. sufficient disk clearance
-- for butterfly valves)::.: Selected end connections shall also be suitable for;specified valve or .
equipment (e.g. wafer style valves or spectacle flanges shall be properly supported between -flanges
of equal inside diameter).
PART 377EXECUTION
:3.01_ INSTALLATION -.
A. LOCATION:
The Contract drawings are, in pal f; diagrammatic. Piping shall be provided as specified
except for adjustments to avoid architectural and structural features: and shall be coordinated with
electrical construction.. Adjustmentsto new piping shall:be made to avoid interferenceand shown
ou the pipe_layout drawings.
k Submitted piping,layout drawings shall clarify detailed connections to nevv and existing
equipment;,piping and structures._ Unless otherwise indicated on drawings; piping fitting angles and
vertical and horizontal pipe locations shall be detern ined.by Contractor:
i B. -:PIPING SIZES:
Where the size of piping is not,specified, the Contractor shall provide .piping of the_ sizes
required by UPC. Unless specified otherwise,'smiall piping (less than 1 inch in diameter) required:
-for services not described by UPC shall be.1/2 inch.
C. EXISTING PIPING MATERIALS:
Contractor shall pothole existing pipe at connections to new pipe to confirm material and
4 joints. prior to commencement of work.
D: PIPE SUPPORT, ANCHORAGE AND SEISMIC BRACING:
1. GENERAL: Piping shall be supported by anchor brackets, guides; saddles or.
hangers. Pipe movement due to thermal expansion and internal pressure and dynamic forces shall
be accommodated by pipe springing, anchors, expansion joints, and guides selected for the specific
purpose by the design professional retained under the provisions of paragraph 15050-1.01 A. The
details for the piping support, anchorage, seismic bracing, and expansion control systems shall be
submitted with the Contractor's piping layout drawings as product data under the provisions of
paragraph 15050-2.04.
Acceptable types of supports, guides, saddles, expansion joints, flexible couplings,
hangers and structure attachments for general piping support, expansion/contraction and for seismic
15050-8 MOUNTAIRE FARMS -LUMBER BRIDGE
WWTS UPGRADE

. I
bracing, as well as anchorage details, are -referenced in Sections 1509 8 or shown on the drawings.
Where a specific type of support or anchorage is indicated on the drawings, then only that type shall
be used at. that4"ocation.
... ...
Piping shall be vertically'supported by anchor brackets; guides, saddles or hangers I
and shall:be seismically braced as required to resist seismic loads. Supports shall be provided on
each run at each change of direction. Piping supports manufactured of iron. or steel. shall,be hot -dip
or mechanically galvanized.
.: Unless otherwise specified, existing.pipes and supports shall.not be used to support
Heys+ piping. Existing:hinnel pipe support racks can:be used foi•riew pipe if the Design Professional
determines that the existing rack components are adequate to support the additional load:
I
2. PIPING. CONNECTIONS TO "MACHINES: Piping at machine
connections shall be aligned in all planes to permit insertion of bolts at bolted connections or
cou P.lin screwed connections without usin gJ'acks come-a-longss f other mechanical means to -
align. . g. .. � o
g :. '... ..: . .
align field piping with. the" connections at the machines: ' Bolts shall not be. forced into mating
:flange bolt holes and shall be capable being withdrawn using finger pressure alone.. The use of
`dutchmen' mitered sections or similar- specials to achieve. the required alignment with machine
connections is.strietly prohibited. -
F_ ANCHORAGE FOR BURIED.PIPTNG:.
.. I
_.
All plugs, caps, tees and bends in buried pressure piping systems shall be anchored by . .
means of reaction backing or restrained joints: as specified. a:
F. BEDDING AND BACKFILL:
Bedding and backfi11 for buried piping shall be as specified per Section 02200 and as
shown on the drawings.
G. EQUIPMENT CONNECTION FITTINGS;
Equipment connection fittings, as specified in Section 15085, shall be provided between
field piping systems and equipment inlet and outlet connections.
H. BURIED PIPE AT STRUCTURES:
Unless otherwise specified, buried piping shall have two flexible fittings or couplings
where pipe passes through structures per Section 15085 and as shown on the drawings.
Restraints across. each joint shall be provided.
9 if
- I
15050-9 MOUNTAIRE FARMS - LUMBER BRIDGE
WWTS UPGRADE

I
: 3.02 PIPING IDENTIFICATION
A. PIPE CODING:
After application of the specified coating and insulation systems, exposed piping, interior '
and exterior, and piping in ceiling spaces, pipe trenches, pipe: chases and valve boxes shall be
identified.with plastic inarkers.as: specified in paragraph 15050-2-.02 A. Legend markers and_
directional arrows shall be located'at each side.of walls; floors and ceilings,' at,one:side of each piece
of equipment, at piping intersections,, and at approximately 0-foot centers.
B.:: ...PLASTIC TRACER TAPE!
- =:=
A single=line of tape as specified -in paragraph 15050-2.02 B shall be provided 2,:5 feet above
the centerline of buried systems:4; -5, and 7 pipe. For systems-4,:5, and 7.pipelines buried 8 feet or
- greater below finished grade, contractor shall provide a..second line of tape 12:inches below finished
grade,, above and parallel to each buried. pipe. :Tape shall :be spread_ flat, with message side up before
backfilling.
C: MAGNETIC TRACER TAPE:
Polyethylene magnetictracer tape shall be buried 12 to .18 inches -below ground and shall be
:above andparallel to'buried nonferrous,, plastic and reinforeed'tlnermosetting resin. -pipe -lines. For
i pipelines buried:8 feet or greater below final grade, the Contractor shall. provide a second -line of
tape 2.5 feet above and parallel to the buried. pipe.
3.03 ' VALVE IDENTIFICATION
Stainless steel tags bearing the specified valve number stamped in l/4-inch high letters shall
be installed on valve flanges in "a position -visible from floor level. 'Flangeless valves 8 inches in
diameter and larger.shall have tags attached to the valve body by self -tapping, -corrosion resistant
metal screws. Flangeless-valves 6 inches in diameter and smaller shall have tags attached to the
valve stem by stainless steel wine. Wire shall be 0.063 inch minimum.
4
3.04 INSPECTION
C The Contractor shall cause the Design Professional retained under the provisions of
paragraph 15050-1.01 A to inspect the installation of the piping supports, anchorage, seismic
restraints and expansion control systems provided under this contract. The Design Professional
shall be at the site of the work during the installation work and shall provide the Construction
Manager with weekly reports indicating progress of the work.
Upon completion of construction, but prior to beneficial occupancy of the piping systems by
the Owner, the Design Professional shall conduct a detailed final inspection and furnish the,
Construction Manager with a final report certifying, without qualification, that all work has been
accomplished in accordance with applicable requirements. All reports shall bear the Design
Professional's seal and signature in accordance with the laws, rules and regulations of the state.
15050-10 MOUNTAIRE FARMS -LUMBER BRIDGE
W WTS UPGRADE,

I
3.05 TESTING
A:: ... GENERAL:
'
Upon completion ofpiping,,-but prior to. application of insulation on eXP � osed i in , the I
P p g
. Contractor.shall test. the piping systems. Pressures,.media and. test durations shall be as specified in
thePIPESPEC.. Equipment which maybe damaged by the specified test conditions shall be
isolated: Testing shall be peirformed using calibrated test. gages and, calibrated volumetric .
measuring equipment to. determine leakage rates. Each test gage shall be selected so that the
specified test pressure falls within the upper•.half of the gage's.range. Unless otherwise specified, _
the Contractor shall notify the'Construction Manager 24 hours prior to each test., -
Unless otherwise specified, testing, as specified herein, shall include existing piping systems
which coririect with:new pipe systems. Existing pipe shall be -tested to the nearest existing valve.'' .
Anypiping which fails the test shall be repaired. Repair -of existing piping will be considered and:
paid: for as extra work.,.
B. GAS, AIR, AND VAPOR SYSTEMS;
The Contractor shall test steam lines hydrostatically in accordance with the ASME
procedure far"festing Pressure piping
.
Testing medium. and procedures for chlorine and sulfur dioxide systems are specified in-
paragraph.15050-3.05. D:
Unless.otherwise specified, the testing medium for other gas; air and vaporsystems shall lie
as follows:
am
Pi eline Size Specified
Test Pressure
Testing Medium
2 inch and "smaller
75 psi or less
Air or water
2 inch and smaller
Greater than 75 psi
Water
Greater than 2 inch
3 psi or less
Air or water
Greater than 2 inch
Greater than 3 psi
Water
The allowable leakage rate for hazardous gas systems, insulated systems, and systems tested
with water shall be zero at the specified test pressure throughout the specified test period.
Hazardous gas systems shall include sulfur dioxide, chlorine, propane, sludge gas and natural gas
systems.
The allowable leakage rate for other systems tested with air shall be based on a maximum
pressure drop of 5 percent of the specified test pressure for the duration of the period. Prior to
starting a test interval using air, the air shall be at ambient temperature and specified test pressure.
15050-11 MOUNTAIRE'FARMS - LUMBER BRIDGE
WWTS UPGRADE

C. LIQUID SYSTEMS: _
i
Leakage shall be zero at the specified test pressure throughout the specified. duration forth"
following. s stems: exPosedpiping,buried insulated piping, and buried or exposed. piping carrying
liquid chemicals. Testing procedures for chlorine and sulfur dioxide systems are specified in'
ara graph 15050-3A5 D. Testing rocedures for-h draulic and lube oil: systems are s ecified in
p g' p g P' Y Y p
paragraph.15050-3.05 E. Unless otherwise:specified, leakage from other buried liquid piping
systems shall be less than 0.02 gallon per liou -per 'inch diameter per 100'feet of buried piping:
D. CHLORINE AND SULFUR DIOXIDE SYSTEMS: (NOT USED) .
AND FLUID POWER OIL SYSTEMS: E: HYDRAULIC
Upon completioh of all .field piping; but before connection to any. control components,
hydraulic and fluid power.oil systems shall be flushed and cleaned by circulating special flushing oil
tluough;the system. Flushing oil and; procedures shall comply with ASTM D4174. System. shall be
cleaned such that internal contamination of system, when tested using procedures specified in SAE
.1227, Section 2.3, shall not exceed the Allowable Cleanliness _Level (ACL): Unless'otherwise .
specified, the ACL value shall be established by the manufacturer of the major hydraulic system
components in,•accordance with SAE J1227, Section 9.1. System supplier shall provide Certificate
of Compliance.as product data (paiagraph:15050-2.04)'that the:ACL has been met.. .
F. DRAINS:,
Drain systems, other than pumped :drain systems, shall be tested iii accordance with UPC;:
: 3.06.: CLEANING AND: FLUSHING
. A. GENERAL:
Piping systems shall be cleaned following completion of testing and prior to connection -to
operating, control, regulating or instrumentation equipment. The Contractor may, at his option,. .
clean and test sections of buried or exposed piping systems. Use of this procedure, however, will
not waive the requirement for a full. pressure test of the completed system. Unless specified
otherwise; piping 24 inches in diameter and smaller shall first be cleaned by pulling a tightly fitting
cleaning ball or swab through the system. Piping larger than 24 inches in diameter may be cleaned
manually or with a clearing ball or swab.
B. TEMPORARY SCREENS:
Upon completion of the cleaning, the Contractor shall connect the piping systems to related
process equipment. Temporary screens, provided with locator tabs which remain visible from the
outside when the screens are in place, shall be inserted in pipelines at the suction of pumps and ,
compressors in accordance with the following table:
150 50-12 MOUNTA1RE FARMS- LUMBER BRIDGE
W WTS UPGRADE

Equipment suction or piping size, , Maximum screen opening,
inches znches
- I
..0 -1 1116.
A -1 /4 — 3 1/4
3-1/2 - 6 1/2.
Over $ 1
The Contractor shall maintain the -screens during testing,. initial start-up, and initial operating
as of.the. commissionin rocess. Ins ecial cases .screens may be removed as required for...
.
P g P '. A Y q I
performance tests._ The Contractor shall -remove the temporary screens and make -the final -piping
connections after the screens have remained clean for at least 24 consecutive hours of operation. ...
Liquid systems handling solids shall have screens in' place for. clear water.testing and -operation.: - _I
Initial operation on solids following pleat water testing inay be without screens.
C. - GAS .AND AIR SYSTEMS:
Unless otherwise specified, gas, and air system piping 6 inches. in diameter and smaller shall -
be blown out, using air or the testing medium specified. Piping larger than 6 inches shall: be cleaned
by having a swab or. ".pig" drawn through the separatexeaches, of pipe. After connection to the
equipment; it shall then be blown out using the equipment. Upon completion of cleaning, the piping
shall be drained and dried with an airstream. Sludge gas; natural gas and propane systems shall be : -
... ...
purged with nitrogen and a nitrogen pad maintained at 10 psi until put in sei vice. Chlorine and
:sulfiu dioxide systems shall be cleaned in accordance with paragraph 150:50-3.06 E.
D. LIQUID SYSTEMS:..
After completion of cleaning, liquid systems, unless otherwise specified, shall be flushed
with.clean water. With temporary screens in place, the liquid shall be circulated throughthe piping
system using connected equipment for a minimum period of 15 minutes and until no debris is
collected on the screens. Liquid chlorine and sulfur dioxide lines shall be: cleaned in accordance
with paragraph 15050-3.06 E.
E. CHLORINE AND SULFUR DIOXIDE SYSTEMS: (NOT USED) .
F. STEAM SYSTEMS: (NOT USED)
G. HYDRAULIC AND FLUID POWER OIL SYSTEMS:
Upon completion of all field piping, but before connection to any control components,
hydraulic and fluid power oil systems shall be flushed and cleaned by circulating special flushing oil
through the system. Flushing oil and procedures shall comply with ASTM D4174. System shall be
cleaned such that internal contamination of system, when tested using procedures specified. in SAE
J1227, Section 2.3, shall not exceed the Allowable Cleanliness Level (ACL). Unless otherwise
specified, the ACL value shall be established by the manufacturer of the major hydraulic system
15050-13 MOUNTAIRE FARMS -LUMBER BRIDGE
WWTS UPGRADE

components in accordance with SAE J 1227,' Section 9.1. - System supplier shall provide Certificate.
of Compliance.as product data (paragraph 1505.0-2.04) that the ACL has been met.
H , POTABLE WATER SYSTEMS:
Potable water piping systems shall be flushed and disinfected in accordance with AWWA• ==
C651.
3.07 PIPING SPECIFICATION SHEETS (PiPESPEC)
{_ Piping and valves for groupings of similar plant processes. or types of service lines are::
specified on individual piping specification sheets (PIPESPECS). Piping services 'are grouped
according to the chemical and=physical properties •of the fluid conveyed .and/or by the temperature of
-pressure requirements.: Each grouping of services (PZPESPEC): is identified by a piping system:
number. Piping services specified in the PIPESPECS and on the diawirigs areal liabetically-
P ..
arranged.by designated service symbols as shown:in Table A. Table A -also indicates the system
number; fluid.category, and pipe marker background color of each service....
-- Table A, Piping Services
r:
�..
Pipe mar ei
15050-14 MOUNTAIRE FARMS -LUMBER BRIDGE
WWTS UPGRADE

Symbol
Service
Syste
in
:: :..
Fluid category
Pipe marker
background:
color-.
FCS
Ferric Chloride Solution
19
Chemical
Yellow :
FE ....
Final Effluent :
I M.
Wastewater...
Gray:
OR
Grit
17
-Grit Sh4ry
Tan
Glycol°Reservoir'Returri
8
Chemical
Yellow
GRS­..
Glycol: Reservoir Supply ..
8.. ....
Chemical
Yellow
HPHW
High Pressure.Hof Water
-1 lA
Water _
Green .
HW..:
Potable Hot Water
7... - '
Water
Green
HRR
Heat Reservoir Return
8
Water
Green
HRS
Heat Reservoir Supply
8
Water
Green
IA = '
Instrument Air
2-:
Air=
Green,
IRR
haigation :
-29
Water ..
Purple
LSG. _ -
Low Pressure: Sludge Gas .
4 _:
Gas: -Red
-
ME
Methanol
18
Gas
Red
MES
Methanol Solution
19
Chemical
Yellow
MEV
Methanol Vapor
18:
Gas
Yellow
ML
Mixed Liquor
14
:Sludge .:
Gray
MS
Mixed Sludge ..
16
Sludge%Scum
Brown
MSG: .--
Medium Pressure Sludge Gas :.
4::: ..
Gas ... : -
Red: .. :
NER
Nitrified: Effluent -Return
12
Wastewater.
Gray
NG
Natural Gas
S '
Gas
Red
NTFE
Nitrifying Trickling Filter Effluent
13,
Wastewater.:
Gray
NTFI
NTF Influent
13
Wastewater
Gray
OF
Overflow
13
Wastewater
Gray
OF/LSG
Overflow/Low Pressure Sludge Gas
4
Gas/Sludge
Red
PD
Pumped Drainage
12
Wastewater
Gray
PE
Primary Effluent
13A
Wastewater
Gray
PF
Pressurized Fluid
14
Sludge
Brown
PI
Primary Influent
13A
Wastewater
Gray
POL
Polyelectrolyte
19
Chemical
Yellow
PS
Primary Sludge
16
Sludge/Scum
Brown
PSC
Primary Scum
16
Sludge/Scum,
Tan
RD
Roof Drain
24
Drain
Gray
RS
Raw Sewage
12
Wastewater
Gray
15050-15 MOUN'rA1RL' FARMS - LUMBER BRIDGE I
WWTS UPGRADE l

..
Symbol
...
Service
Syste
in
Fluid category
Pipe marker
background.: .
color.
RSS
Return Secondary Sludge (Metal/FRP)
-14,
'Sludge'.:
Brown
14A
RWP
Rainwater Pipe
24=
D"raiti/Vent::
Gray"''
SA -
Service Air
2
Air
Green "
SBS:
Sodium Bisulfite Solution.
19
Chemical
Yellow
SCR
Screenings.
17
Screenings
Tan '
...
Slurry .:
SD— .:
Sanitary Drain: .....
24 ::
Drain/Venf .:`- :
Gray
SE :
Secondary Effluent .:
13A
Wast' tea --
Gray
SEB
Secondary Effluent -Bypass
-13A �
Wastewater
Gray
SHC
Sodium Hypochlorite
19 -
Chemical ' - ..
Yellow
SHD:
Sodium Hydroxide
19
Chemical
Yellow
SNT
Subnatant,
I3
Sludge
Gray
SSC
Secondary Scum -: =
16
Sludge/Scum
Tan
STD..
Storm Drain..:
24.:
Drain/Veat -..
Gr:ay.-
TBS
Thickened; Bottom Sludge ::
:16
Sludge
Brown
TD
Tank Drain
12 ..
Wastewater
Giay" .
TFE;: ...
Ti7cklin Filter.Effluent .-: g :::
3B. _
Wastewater-; ..,
Gray.:
TFI
Trickling Filter Influent
13B
Wastewater
Gray
THS
Thickened Sludge
16
Sludge- �
Brown.
TS . - :
Transfer Sludge,
16.:
Sludge
Brown
TW
Tempered Water .
7
Water
Blue
UD
Underdrain
34
Groundwater .. '
Gray...
V
Vent
24
Drain/Vent '
Gray
VC
Chemical Vent
25
Drain/Vent
Yellow.
VP
Petroleum Vent
18
Petroleum
Red
WSS
Waste Secondary Sludge
14
Sludge =
Brown
WW
Wastewater
12
Wastewater
Gray
1W
Potable Water (City water)
7
Water
Blue
1WIRR
Landscape Irrigation (Potable)
29
Water
Blue
2W
Nonpotable City Water
11
Water
Blue
3W
No. 3 Water (secondary effluent)
I I
Water
Purple
3WIRR
Landscape Irrigation (Non -potable)
29'
Water
Blue
3WLP
No. 3 Water Low Pressure
10
Water
Purple
15050-16 MDUNTAiRE PARMS -LUMBER BRIDGE
WWTS UPGRADE

3.07 PIPING SPECIFICATION SHEET-�-PIPESPEC t
i
... ... ... ...
Piping Symbol/Service:
.
A --Aeration Air, (Interior).: System--t
L
AA:_Agitation Air. (Interior) : a.1
BA --Backwash Air (Interior)
.Test Requirements:...: '
..
Medium:
Air- ref. s ec ara rah ] 5050-3.05 B-..
p P g p
'Pressure:
Pressure:
20 sig
p
...
" Duration:
...
120 minutes
Gasket -Requirements:
Flange; : =
Compressed gasketing. consisting of organic fibers: (Kevlar) :'
and. neoprene. binder
Push-onWech Cpl:
EPDIVI .
... ... ... ..
Exposed Pine. and Valves:
(See drawings for pipe size aiid'valve type).: . �-
(3 and smaller) .
Pipe:
Steel; ASTM.A53, galvanized. Ref.: spec Section 150b1, _
Conn; taper. threaded, ANSI B 1.20.1.
..:"
' ' : Ft s; malleable iron, ASTM:E11:97, ANSI B 16.3, Class 150;
galvanized. _ .
_.
Valves:
Ball; Jamesbuty Fig.: 351, Nibco T-580; or -equal.
Globe• Crane 7TF or "1:7TF Lunkenheiiner -123 or. 214 or
equal: " l
Lift check; Crane 27TF; Lunkenheitmer.231, "or equal.
(4"thru 8")
Pipe:
Steel; ASTM A53, ERW, Grade B black, lined with coaling
system HH-1. Ref. spec Section 15061.
Conn; butt weld, grooved mechanical pipe coupling or
flanged.
Ftas; malleable iron, ductile iron, or steel per spec Section '
15061; ends to match pipe. r
Valves:
iI
Butterfly; ref. Spec Section 15103.
Double -disc check; ref spec Section 15119.
(10" thru 24")
Pipe:
Steel; same as 8 inch or AWWA C200, 0.375 inch thick,
lined with coating system HH-1. Ref: spec Section 15061.
Conn; same as 8 inch. .
15050-17 MOUNTAIRE FARMS -LUMBER BRIDGE
WWTS UPGRADE

1 SOS 0-18 MOUNTAIRE FARMS - LUMBER BRIDGE
WWTS UPGRADE

..
so
-:I
3,07 PIPING SPECIFICATION SBEET-"PIPESPEC ,a
i
Piping Symbol/Service:
... ... ... ... .
A --Aeration Air (Exterior) System--lA
Agitation -Air (Exterior) AA---
BA --Backwash Air (Exterior)
Test Requirements:...: "
.
Medium:. ::
Air; ref spec paragraph 15050=3.05 B.
Pressure;:: ...
20 P sig .
Duration:
120 minutes. .
Gasket Requirements:
i
: ..
Flange:,::: , :
g
Neoprene,:
Neo ; C.I. :
p.
Push-on/Mech:Cpl:
EPDM
Exposed Pipe and Valves:
(See drawings -for pipe size and valve type)'
(2-1:/2" and smaller)
Pipe:
Stainless steel; ASTM A3125, type 3,04L; Sch._ 40S;
...
welded or seam Ref spec Sectio 15067
-less. n
.
Conn; screwed:
..
..FtgS; nippiest ASTM A312, type 3 04L; stainless steel,
ch,
S ,
40S, seamless; bushings, plugs, stainless steel;-
.- .
..
elbows caps, reducers cou lin s and teas forged
p . g
stainless steel; 3000 psi, screwed, ASTM A182, Grade .
...
F .
304:
Valves:'
Ball; Jamesbury.21-1100TT, Worcester .4211T, Jenkins
32A, or equal.
Swingcheck; Jenkins 352, Crane 141, or equal.
(3" and larger)
Pipe:
Stainless steel; ASTM, A778, type 304L, stainless steel:
welded, ERW, pickled. Ref. spec Section 15067.
Conn; butt weld, stainless steel flanges, arched band
couplings, bolting, gaskets, same as 2" and smaller. See 1
Remarks.
F- tgs; Elbows, caps, reducers, ASTM A403, Grade WP
304, or fabricated from pipe.
Valves:
Butterfly; Type B or Type C, ref. spec Section 15103. j
I
Buried and Encased Pipe and Valves:
(See drawings for pipe size and valve type. Omit coating on
encased pipe.)
15050-19 MOUNTAIRE FARMS -LUMBER BRIDGE
WWTS UPGRADE
i
i
I
i

Piping System:
IA (continued) .
(2,": and smaller)
Pipe:
Steel; ASTM'A120, Grade B, coated with: Type 2 cold -
..applied tape, AWWA C209 and lined with coating 'system.
-'
HH-L: Ref. spec Sections 09900 and'15061.
.
Conn; taper. threaded, ANSI 111.201.
I
rl ;malleable iron,:ASTM A197, ANSI B16.3, Class
. .150, lined and coated same:as.pipe.
Valves-:
-: Ball; same as exP osedwith extension stem and valve box.
Coating M-1 per; spec Section 09900.
.. .(2-1/2" thru 8")
.. .. . .
Pipe:
Steel; ASTIVI A120 or'ASTM A53, ERW; Grade B;
coated.with Typo:2:cold-applied tape.; AWWAC209 and::
lined with coating system `HH-L ' Ref spec Sections . -
09900 and 15061.
- ..: ,..
Conn;, grooved nriechanical:pipe coupling or flanged.
Ftgs; malleable iron; ductile iron, or: steel per spec Section
15061; end to match pipe, lined,:and coated.same as pipe.
Valves:
:: . Butterfly`.same as exposed with extension stem: and valve :.
box... Coating M-1 per spec Section 09900. .-
(107. thru 36°) .
pipe:
Steel;.AWWA C200, 0.375 inchthick, coated with Type -
2 cold -applied tape, AWWA C209 and lined with coating
system HH-1. Ref. spec Sections 09900 and 15061°.
k
Conn; butt weld or flange.': See remarks:
Ftgs; fabricated steel, AWWA C208. Lining; coating, and
ends to match pipe.
Valves:
Butterfly; ref spec. Section :15103 with extension stem .
f
and valve box. Coating M-1 per spec Section 09900.
Remarks:
1. Cnooved mechanical pipe couplings, 10 to 22 inch size, may be used with
standard weight or heavier pipe; grooved or shouldered mechanical pipe
couplings are permitted with fabricated pipe if the rated working pressure
of the coupling exceeds the specified test pressure.
15050-20 MOUNTAIRE FARMS -LUMBER BRIDGE
WWTS UPGRADE

i
15 050-21 MOUNTAIRE FARMS - LUMBER BRIDGE
WWTS UPGRADE

3.07 PIPING SPECIFICATION SHEET--PIPESPEC
Piping mbol/Service: p g S y
CA --Compressed° Air -System--2
SA--Service:Air..
I
IA --Instrument Air -
Test Requirements:...: ..:
..
Medium:
Water;:Ref, spec paragraph 15050-3.05 B. ,
Pressure: ::
200 psig : .
:Duration::
120 minutes
Gasket Requirements:
Flange: =
Compressed gasketing consisting of organic fibers.(Kevlar)
E
; ' and neoprene. binder
Push-on/Mech:Cpl
N/A
Exposed Pipe and Valves:
:
:::(See drawings for pipe:size and valve type)
..
(1/2" and smaller)
. .
Pi e::
P
Co Ler tube; ASTM 88' T Be L, drawn. Ref, s
p� YP Pee Section
15066. See i6iixks. :
Conn; Brass, compression type:...
. '
Ftgs; .Brass compression type, Swage.lok, Gyrolok, or equal.
(3/4" thru 2" ).
:Pipe:
Cop ep ntube; ASTM 1388, Type L, drawn. - See reniarics. ;
Conn; Solder type with threaded adapters or valves.
Ftas; Wrought copper or bronze, ANSI B 16.22. .
(2": and smaller)
Valves:
Ball; J"amesbury Fig. 351, Nibco T-580, or.equal.
Globe; Crane 7TF or 17TF, Lunkenheimer 123 or 214, or
equal.
Lift check; Lunkenheimer 1616, Craine 366E, or equal.
(21 /2" thru 6")
Pipe:
Steel; ASTM A53, ERW, Grade B, black, no lining. Ref.
spec Section 15061.
Conn; Butt weld, flanged for valves.
-
FtRs; Steel, ASTM A234, ANSI 1316.9; ends to match pipe.
4
x
15050-22 MOUNTAIRE FARMS - LUMBER BRIDGE
WWTS UPGRADE

Piping System:
.I
iI
2 (continued)
°Valves; . °
Ball;.Jamesbury.51'50-31-2200TT, Nibco F-510; or equal:
Check; Ported plate style designed for use With.pulsati.hg.
flow; Hoerbiger Depend -A -Check or Compact -A -Check,
Dienes T e DL-RF; or equal.
yp
Buried and Encased Pipe and:Valves:
See_drawin s for pipe size. and valve type. Omit coatin s on
encased pipe:)
(2 and smaller)
I
Pape; =
Copper tube; ASTM B88, Type K, annealed or drawn.
Conn; Solder.type. -
Ftgs; Wrought copper b 22 -or bronze,- B16. -
Valves:
Ball; .Same as exposed with extension stem and valve box.
(2 1/2" thru 6")
Pipe:
Steel; Same as exposed withpolyethyle'ne tape coating.
'
of o I . Field o coating t all coilpl'ngs :Ref. spec
Section 15061. I-
.
Conn; Same as exposed with coating. -
d with
Fts;.Same as exosepcoating.,.
Valves:
Ball; Sam as exposed with extension stem and valve box.: .
Coating M=1 per spec Section 09900.
I
Remarks:
1.
Alternate piping materials for service air piping 2 inches and smaller
include:
Pipe: Steel; ASTM A120, Sch. 40, galvanized. Ref: spec I
Section 15061.
i
Conn; taper threaded, ANSI 131.20.1. I
Flgs; Malleable iron, ASTM Al97, ANSI B16.3, Class
150, galvanized, ends to match pipe. l _
Coating; Buried --same as 2-1/2" thru 6" pipe.
2.
Piping installed exposed outdoors or in process areas subject to washdown
and corrosive environment shall meet system IA requirements. i
I
15 050-23 MOUNTAIRE FARMS - LUMBER BRIDGE
WWI'S UPGRADE
i
r

15050-24 MOUNTAIRE FARMS - LUMBER BRIDGE
WWTS UPGRADE

I
3.07 . PIPING SPECIFICATION SHEET�=PIPESPEC
Piping Symbol/Serv'ice: °
LSG--Low Pressure Sludge Gas System--4 . .
DS/LSG--Digested Sludge/Low Pressure Sludge Gag.: ;
OF/LSG--Overflow/Low Pressure Sludge Gas
MSG --Medium Pressure Sludge Gas
Test Requirements:'
L
Medium:
Air; Ref spec paragraph 15050-3.05 B. :.
'Pressure:
30 psig`
Duration: :
120 minutes ::
Gasket Requirements:
Flange:
Vitori gasketing
Push-on/Mech Cpl:.
N/A I
Exposed Pipe and Valves:
::(See drawings for pipe size and
valve type) See remarks.
(2��; and smaller) ..
i
Pipe:.:
Stainless steel ASTM A3-12 Type 316 Schedule 40S.: Ref.
:
..
Sped. Section 15067. j
:.: Conn ; Threaded, ANSI B 1.20. L.
Ftas; ASTM A4.03, material, ends and wall thickness to. LI
match pipe.::
.Valves:
a
Ball; Jariiesbur Fig. '351, Nibco T-580; 6r equal.
Y IT
Globe; Crane 7TF or 17TF, Lunkenheimer'123 or 214, or
equal.
Lift check; Crane 27TF, Lunkenheimer 231, or equal.
(3 and larger•)
Pipe:
Stainless steel; ASTM A778, Type 316L. Ref, spec.
Section 15067.
Conn; Butt weld or flanged, couplings where specified.
Ftgs; ASTM A774, material, ends and wall thickness to
match pipe.
Valves:
Butterfly; ref. spec Section 15103.
Check; ref. spec Section 15119.
e
15050-25 MOUNTAIRE FARMS - LUMBER BRIDGE
WWTS UPGRADE

Piping System:- 4 (continued)
Buried and Encased Pipe and Valves: _
-(See drawings for pipe:size and.valve type)
..
(211 emu: 6") . .. . .. . .
Pipe:. Potyeth lene; ASTM D1248, Type III, Grade:3. Class-
C,;8DR-11. ReLspec,Section 15064: Provide
magnetic tracer to e
Conn; Theirnal-socket fusion or butt-fiision.welded with,:
I ..
... Ives .. ..
... flanged ada ters.for valves.
flan � p .. ..
_f
Ftas; Polyethylene,.molded; ends and SDR to match'
pipe
��.
Valves: Bali; Same as:exposed.'With extension steni and valve
box. Coating M-1: per spec Section 09900.
Butterfly; Salve as exp osed°with extension stem and'
. valye.box. Coating M4 per spee'Section 09900.
(8", and larger): -- _ _ ::
Pipe:.: Polyeth llene; ASTM D1248, Type:III, Grade.3, Class.
C,SDR43.5 :: Ref. spec Section:15064. Provide
magnetic tracer tape.
Conn;.Therinal.butt-fusion welded with flanged
adapters for valves.
Etgs; Polyethylene, fabricated; .ends and -SDR to match
�.;
. pipe.
Valves: Butterfly; Same as exposed with extension stem and,
valve box.- Coating M-1 per spec Section 09900.:
Remarks:
I
1. All exterior System 4 piping shall be insulated as specified in
Section 15250.
2..: LSG pipe shall be all welded. fittings when running through
i
non -classified areas.
3. Except as noted, to provide access for piping maintenance in
exterior and classified spaces, provide threaded or flanged
connections as applicable at a maximum spacing of 10 feet
apart in all exposed piping.
15050-26 21-21767/P6ase 2
July 2018

3.07 PIPING. SPECIFICATION SHEET--PIPESPEC
Piping Symbol/Service.:
NG--Natural Gas' System=-5
Test .Requirements:
:Medium::
Air; Ref: spec paragraph 15050=3.05 B
- Pressure:
20-psig
-
Duration:
120 minutes
Gasket Requirements: .
e:
Compressed asketin consiso
tin f or anic:fibers Kevlar)Flan
:
.. and neoprene binder :.
Push--on/Wch Cpl: ,"
N/A
Exposed Pipe and Valves:
(See: drawings:: for, pipe size and valve type)::
(2" and smaller)
_ Pipe:
Steel; ASTM A106 :seamless :Grade B black no linin .
g
5
: Re£ spec Sectional 061.
Conn; Taper -threaded, ANSI B1.20:1.
Ftgs; Malleable iron, ASTM A197, ANSI.B16.3, Class 150;
ends to snatch pipe' -
- Valves:
Ball; Jamesbuiy Fig. 351, Nibco T-580, or equal.
E.
Globe; Crane 7TF.or 17TF, Lunkenhehner 123 or 214, or . .
equal.
Lift check; Crane 366E., Lunkenheinier 1616; or equal.:
(2 1/2" thtu 9")
:
Pipe:.
Steel; ASTM A53, seamless, Grade B, black, no lining.
Ref, spec Section 15061.
_
Conn; Butt weld, .flanged for valves.
FtLss; Steel, ASTM A234, ANSI B16.9; ends to,match pipe.
f
_.` Valves:
Lubricated plug; Cast iron, flanged, Teflon or moiydisulfide
coated plug, Nordstrom Fig. 143, Walworth Fig. 1797F, or`
equal, thru 5 inch; worm gear operator, Nordstrom Fig. 149,
I
Walworth Fig. 1727F, or equal, 6 to 8 inch.
Buried and Encased Pipe and Valves:
(See drawings for pipe size and valve type. Omit coating on
encased pipe.)
i
15050-28 21-217671Pi,ase 2
July 2018

Piping System: -
5 (continued) `
(2" and smaller)
- --:Pipe:,:
Steel; Same as exposed: with polyethylene tape coating... -
Field application of coating to all couplings. Re£ spec
Section,15061. Provide plastic tracer tape.
Conn; Same as:exposed:With coating.
Ftas; Same as exposed with coating.
- 'Valves:
V
Ball; Same as exposed with extension s tem and:valve box.'
Coating M-1-per- spec Section 09900..
(2 1%2" �thru 8") ..
-
Pipe:
Steel; Same as exposed. with coating specified above. - =
Provide plastic tracer tape. .
Conn; Same. as exposed with:coating...: ... :-
Ftgs; Same as exposed with coating..
Valves:
Lubricated plug; Same as exposed with extension stem and
valve box. Coating M-1 per -spec Section 09900; j
1
i
:r
I
15050-29 21-21767rnhase 2
July 2018

3.07 PIPING SPECIFICATION SHEET-PIPESPEC
.
Piping Symbol/Service
HW--Potable. Hot Water - System--7
... 1 W--Potable: Water
TW--Tempeied Water
Test Requirements:...:.
='
Medium. =
Water; Ref spec paragraph. 15050 3.05 C.
Pressure: -:
150 psig
M
Duration: °
60 minutes
Gasket Requirements:
Flange:..
Compressed gasketing consisting of organic fibers (Kevlary:
1
... ..
.. and neoprene hinder
Push=on/Mech:Cpl:
EPDIVI
Exposed Pipe and Valves:
"(See drawings for pipe;size aiid.vaive, type.: See Remarks for ...
insulation requirements)
(3.:and smaller)
Pipe:
Cori er tube; ASTM B88, Type L; drawn.:Ref. spec;
'
Section 15066.
Conn; .Solder type with threaded or :hanged adapters for
...
valves.:
Fes; Wrouglit copper br bronze; ANSI B16.22.
(2" and smaller)
Valves:
Ball Jamesbur Fi . 351 Nibco T-580 or: a ual, -
Y g... ,
_1
.
Globe; Cane 7TF or' l7TF, Lunkenheimer 123 or 214, or,
equal. .:
Swing check; Crane 137, Lunkenheimer 230, or equal.-
(4",, and -larger)
Pipe:
Steel; ASTM A53, seamless, Grade B, black_, with cement
mortar lining: Ref. spec Section 15061.
Conn; Grooved mechanical pipe coupling or flanged.
Ft-s; Malleable iron, ductile iron, or steel per spec Section
N"
15061; ends and lining to match pipe.
(2 1/2" and larger)
Valves:
Butterfly; Ref. spec Section 15103. Substitute Type B on 2
y
1/2-inch lines.
i
Swingcheck; heck; Spring loaded.per,spec Section 15118.
15050-30 21-21767/Phase 2
July 2018

:I
.: ...
Piping System . 7 (continued)
:.
Buried and Encased Pipe and Valves:
n sfor ' i e size and valve tYe Omit coating on -
-(See drawip . .
encased pipe..: See Remarks for insulation requirements.)
{3,and smaller)
Pipe: Copper tube; ASTM B88, Type K.; annealed of 'drawn:
Conn; Solder type;:w.ith threaded or flanged adapters for
valves.
Ftgs; Wrought copper of bronze, ANSI B 1622.
Valves: Gate; Ref. spec Section 151.01, with extension ste'm-and
= valve box. Coating M-1: per spec.Section 09900.
so
(4" :and .larger):
Pie Ductile iron; AWWA C 15 1 with cement mortar lining.. .
R spec Section 15062.
.. , . of e
Conn; Grooved end or restrained push on rubber gasket
joint. Flanged adapters, for -valves.
Ftgs; Duct on per spee -Section 062; coating, lining,
..
ile it S ion 15
and'ends to match pipe:
p.
Valves: Butterfly (12" and smaller; Section 15102); and Gate -
_ {14" and larger; Section 15103); Same as exposed with
extension stem and valve box.: Coating M-1 per'spec
Sectiori 09900. {
j
Remarks:
- 1. Manual air vents shall be provided at the high points and drains provided at
the low.points of each reach of pipeline as specified in paragraph
15095-3.03. i
2. Exposed and concealed piping for potable hot water (HW) shall be
insulated per spec Section 15250. Buried lines shall be insulated as
specified in spec Section 15256.
i
3. System 7 piping installed in areas and locations subject to freezing
(including ceiling areas which are not heated) shall be insulated per spec
Section 15250.
15050-31 21-21767/Phase 2
July 2018 `

3.07 PIPING SPECIFICATION SHEET-PIPESPEC
Piping Symbol/Service:
CWR--Chilled Water Return System-,8
CWS;-Chilled Water Supply
..
GRR -Glycol Reservoir'Retuln.
GRS--Glycol Reservoir Supply.
HRR--Heat Reservoir Return
i
NR;S-=Heat Reservoir Supply
Test Requirements:
Medium:. ; ; :--
:. Water; Ref. specparagraph 15050-3.05 C.:: :-
Pressure:
7S psig
- Duration::: - :
120 minutes
J .Gasket Requirements: .:
Flange: --:
Compressed gasketing consisting of organic fibers Kevlar
and neopre ne.binder
Push-on/Mech :CpL
Exposed:Pipe and Valves:
(See drawings for pipe size and:valve type)
(2„ and smaller) ...
. _ .
Pipe:
Coppertube; ASTM B88, Type L, drawn. Ref Section
15066.. Insulation per Section 15250.
-
Conn; Solder type with threaded adapters for valves.
Insulation per Section. 15250: ---
Ft gs;:Wrought copper or bronze, ANSI B16.22. Insulation
per Section 15250.
Valves:.
Ball; Jamesbury Fig. 351, Nibco T-580', or equal. Insulate.
Globe; Crane 7TF or 17TF, Lunkenheimer 123 or 214, or
equal. Insulate. (See Remarks)
Swing check; Crane 137, Lunkenheimer 230, or equal.
Insulate. (See.Remarks)
(2 1/2" and larger)
Wipe:
Steel; ASTM A53,:seamless, Grade B, black, no lining.
Ref. spec Section 15061:. insulation per Section 15250.
Conn; Butt weld, grooved mechanical joint coupling or
flanged. Insulate per Section 15250.
j
Ftgs; Malleable iron, ductile iron, or steel per spec Section
15061; endsto match pipe. Insulation per Section 15250.
'}
V
(See Remarks)
15050-32 21-21767/Please 2
July 2018

Piping System .
8 (continued)
Valves:
Buttelfly; Ref. spec Section 15103. Insulate. (See
Remarks)
Swing check; Spring loaded per Section 15118. Insulate.
(See Remarks)
Buried and Encased Pipe
and.Valves: Ives: • .. :
See: dawin s fo> i e size, and valve type)
( g..: P P Yp ) . .. .
... (2" and smaller)
Pipe.
Copper tube; Same as exposed. Run in insulated conduit;
ref. spec Section 1:5256. Provide magnetic tracer'. tape.
_
C onri; Same.as:exposed, insulated. conduit....
Ft&s; Same as exposed, insulated conduit.
..
Valves:.
Gate; Ref s' ec Section 15101, with extension stem and
p
valve .box. Coating M' l per spec Section 09900.
(2 1 /2" and larger)
I
Pipe: -: =
Steel; Same as exposed. Run in insulated conduit; ref. spec
Section 15256. Provide ma netic tracer tape.
g
Conn, Sable as exposed, insulated conduit.
F#s; Same as exposed, insulated conduit.
Valves:
Butterfly Q2" and smaller,• Section 15102), and Gate
(14" and larger; Section 15103) Same as exposed with
extension stem and valve box. Coating M4 per spec.
o Sec 'dn 09900.
Remarks:
1.
Manual air vents shall be provided. at the high points and drains provided
at the low points of each reach of pipeline as specified in paragraph
15095-3.03.
2.
Refer to drawings for location of expansion loops or joints. Refer to
specification Section 15090 for expansion joints.
15050-33 21 21767/Phase 2
duly 2018

3.07 - PIPING SPECIFICATION SHEET--PIPESPEC
J Piping Symbol/Service:
3.W.LP--No. 3 Water,,L;P. . System--10:
Test. Requirements:
Medium:
Water; ref spec paragraph 15050-3.05 C.
Pressure: :::
... 125. psig
Duration:
120 minutes
Gasket Requirements: ....
... .
Flange: :'
Neoprene,: C.I.
Push-on/Mech C 1
Nitrile :or Neoprene,
Exposed Pipe and Valves:
.. .
(See drawings for"pipe size and valve type)
(2" and smaller}
Pipe: : : :
Steel; ASTM A53, galvanized: Ref..spec Section 1 SQ61.
,.
Conn;Gaper tlueaded, ANSI B1.20.1. '
- - -
Fttss; liialleable°iron; ASTM A197, ANSI-B1.6:3, Class"
150,. galvanized. . .
Valves:
"Ball; Jamesbuly:Fig. 351, Nibco T-580; or equal. -
Globe; Crane 7TF or 17TF, Lunkenheimer 123 or 214, or
..
equa ..
F .
.. Swing check, Crarie.137, Luilkenheimer.230, or equal.
Ball.check; where shown; per Section 15120, or equal..
(2 1 /2" thru 8") ..
:.: .
i Pipe:
Steel; ASTM A120 or ASTM A53,.ERW, Grade B, black,
ceramic epoxy lining._ Ref, spec Section 15061.
Conn; grooved: mech pipe coupling or flanged.
Figs; malleable iron, ductile iron, or steel per spec Section
_
15061; ends to match pipe.
Valves:
Butterfly; Ref. spec Section B103. Substitute Type B on
21/24neh lines.
Swingcheck; spring loaded per spec Section 15118.
Ball check, where shown; per Section 15120, or equal.
15050-34
21 21767/Please 2
July 2018

Piping System:
i
:
10 (continued) r
1
• Buried and Encased Pipe and Valves:
::(See drawings for pipe size and valve type.: Omit coating on .�
encased pipe.):
and smaller)
Pipe;
..
PVC; ASTM D1784; Class 12454-B, ASTM D1785; Sch..
Section r
80 Ref spec Sect' 15064' - Provide inagnet ,. tracer
tape.
Conn; plain: end; solvent weld with threaded -or flanged .
ada pters To i • valves:
FtRs; PVC; Sch. 80; socket weld.
..Valves:'
Gate; ref. spec Section 15101, with extension stem and
valve box.. Coating.M-1 p&-spec Section 09900:.-. 1�
:(4'� thru ; l2")
Pipe:
Ductile iron; AWWA C15i; Ref. spec Section.15062
i cement mortar lining and polyethylene encasement.- i
with
C or1n; grooved end or. push -on rubber gasket joint.
.Flanged adapters for valves. .
Ftgs; ductile iroiiper spec -Section 15062• coatin , limn
g : 9:
and ends to match pipe.. ll.
Valves:
Gate (12" and smaller, Section 15102); same as exposed.
:.
stem v Co 1 c
with extensions and val e box.: ating M�1 pe • spec
Section 900.
09
Remarks:
1.
3W (non -potable water) spray water piping for scum removal, foam
suppressing, etc., which is installed over water surface in water -bearing
tanks or channels should be Schedule 40 steel, ASTM A53, ERW, Grade
B, fusion epoxy lined and coated with 3M Scotchcoat C203, or equal.
2.
Manual air vents shall be provided at the high points and drains provided
at the low points of each reach of pipeline as specified in paragraph
15095-3.01 C.
r "
s`
1505 0-3 5 21-21767/Phase 2
July 2018

3.07 PIPING SPECIFICATION SHEET-=PIPESPEC
Piping Symbol/Service:
2W- Nonpotable City Water System-41
3W- -No. 3 Water.
Test:Requirements: .
Medium: -
Water;, Ref spec paragraph 15050-105 C.
Pressure:
200 psig
Duration::::.
:: _ 1.20 minutes.
Gasket Requirements:
Flange:
Compressed gasketing consisting of organic fbers:(Kevlar)
.
:. _.
..d .. . binder
an neoprene.
.
: Push-on/Mech Cpl:-
Nitrile orNeopz•ene
Exposed Pipe and Valves:
- (See drawings for pipe size and .valve Type)
(2 and smaller):
Pipe:. -
Steel; ASTMA53 galvanized.'Ref.spec Section 1506L
-
_ Conn;: Taper threaded, ANSI B 1.20 J. .
Ft s; Malleable iron, ASTM A1.97, ANSI B16.3; Class 150, . .
...
::
galvanized..
Valves:
Ball; JamesburY Fig. 351, Nibco T-580, or.equal.
Globe; Crane 7TF. or. 17TF, Lunkenheinier 123 or 214, or ..
equal.
Swing check;: Crane 137., Lunkenheirner 230, or equal.;
-
Ball check, where shown, per Section 15120, or equal.
(2 1/2" thru 8")
Pipe:
Steel; ASTM A53, ERW, Grade B, black, ceramic epoxy
lining. Ref. spec Section 15061.
Conn; Butt weld, grooved meth pipe coupling or flanged.
Ftgs; Malleable iron, ductile iron, or steel per spec Section
15061; lining and ends to match pipe.
j
(2 1/2" thru 8")
Valves:
Butterfly; Ref. spec Section 15103. Substitute Type B on 2
1/2-inch lines.
Swingcheck; heck; Spring'loaded per spec Section 15118.
-
Ball check, where shown, per Section 15120, or equal:
,
s.
is
15050-36 21-21767/PLase 2
July 2018

Piping System:
l T (continued)
(10" and larger)
Pipe:
„
Steel; Same as 8 or AWWA C200, 1/4 inch thick, with
ceramic epoxy lining.. Ref. spec Section. 15061. .
P g. p... -. .. y
..
Conn; Butt weld.,:mech pipe coupling; or flanged. See ..
... Remarks.
I't>?5; Steel, ASTM:A234, or:fabricatedsteel, AWWA
...
... ' ' C20.8;1ining2nd ends to match pipe: ,
Valves:
Butterfly; Ref spec Section. 1. 51.03.
Swin cg heSpring loaded per spec Section.15118.
Buried -arid Encased Pipe -and -Valves: .
for i e size
(See -drawings pp
.,
and valve type. Omit coating on encased ie.) =
Yh •sepp
: (2 l /2" and smaller)
Pipe:
Copper• tube; ASTM B88, Type.K, annealed or drawn.
am
Conn; Solder type, with threaded or flanged adapters for..;
... valves:.
F ro SI.B16 2
tgq; Wrought copper or b nze, AN .2
...
Gate;: Ref. Spec-Section:15101,with-extension stem and
valve box. Coating M-1 per .spec Section 09900.
Valves: ,
Gate;. Ref. spec Section 15101, with, extension, stem and..
valve box. Coating M-1 per spec:Section 09900.
(3 „, thru 12")
Pipe:
Ductile iron; AWWA C151. Ref spec Section 15062 with
cement mortar lining and polyethylene encasement.
Conn; Grooved end or restrained push-on.rubber. gasket
joint. Flanged adapters for valves.
Ft;;s; Ductile iron per spec Section 15062; lining and ends
to match pipe.
f
Valves:
Gate (12" and smaller; Section 15192); flanged with i
extension stem and valve box. Coating per M-1 spec
Section 09900.
(14" and larger)
Pipe:
Ductile iron; same as 12 inch for pipe and ftgs, or.
Concrete cylinder, ref. Spec Section 15057.
Conn; restrained bell and spigot with O-ring rubber gasket
joint. Flanged adapters for valves.
15050-37 21-21767/Phase 2
July 2018

15050-38
2121767/Phase 2
July 2018

-1
3.07 PIPING SPECIFICATION SHEET--PIPESPEC
1
Piping Symbol/Service: :. HPHW-•-High Pressure Hot Water System-=11A
1
Test Requirements:
Medium:: Water; Ref. spec paragraph 15050-3.05 C.
... Pressure: :. :.:... 3000'psi a :.
Duration: 15 Minutes
W.
...
Gasket Re.quiremenfs::
Flange:.. N/A
Push-on/Mech Cpl; N/A.
j
Exposed Pipe and. Valves:
See drawin s for pipe.sizeand valve type).-::
(1/2") Pipe: - Steel; ASTM A53, SCH 80,-galvanized. Ref. Spec Section
... 15061.
Conn;.taper threaded, ANSI B
Ft s; malleable.iron, ASTM A197, ANSI 13,163, class 150,
galvanized:
_.
Valves:: Ball; Jamesbury, series SH, or equal. Capable of meeting
operating conditions �-
{
Remarks:
1. All pipe and appurtenances shall bedesigned, to handle pressure and
operating conditions..
2. Insulate all piping per Section 15250.
i
I`
r
i
15050-39 21-21767/Phase 2
July 2018 Im
. I
I

: 3.07 PIPING SPECIFICATION SHEET--PIPESPEC
Piping Symbol/Service: `
DBW--Denitrification Backwash . System--12
NER--Nitrified- Effluent Return
PD --.Pa aped Drainage ..
•
RS--Raw Sewage •
... ...
TD=-Tank Drain
WW--Wastewater.
Test Requirements:
Medium: .`
Water; ref.- spec paragraph 15050-105 C:
.Pressure:.
125 si hose exce ted
p g( P ) ..
Duration:
-120 minutes
Gasket. Requirements;
::Flange: ::
:' Neoprene,: C.I. - ..
Pusb-on/Mech Cpl :
Ni#ile or Neoprene
Exposed Pipe and Valves:.
(Seedrawings'for' pipe size and valve, type):
(4" and smaller)
-Hose:
-: Smooth wall, clear PVC suction hose; 50 psi. Spiralite
1,1,5.or equal.: .
Conn; barbed black, glass -filled; poly propylene hose
'barb to -coupler fitting (camlock). For connection to sump
pumps on PD.
(2" and smaller)..:
Pipe:
Steel; ASTM A53, galvanized. Ref spec Section 1506L .
-
Conn; taper threaded,'ANSI BL20.1.
i
Fes; malleable iron,:ASTM A197, ANSI B16.3,,Class
150, galvanized.
Valves:
Eccentric plug;.per spec Section 15110. Install valve with
seat upstream.
Swin cg_ heck; Lunkenheimer 230, Crane 137, or equal.
(2 1/2" thru 811
)
Pipe: Steel; ASTM A53 ERW, Grade B, black, no lining. Ref.
spec Section 15061.
Conn; butt weld, grooved mech pipe coupling or flanged.
{. Ftas; malleable iron, ductile iron, or steel per spec Section
15061; ends to match pipe.
15050-40 - 21-21767rnhase z
July 2018

Piping System:
.12 (continued)
: ..
Valves: �
I
Eccentric lug; per spec. 15110. histall valve with
plug; p' -
seat upstream.'
Ball check or swing check "as"shown; Ref. spec Section
15120 or Section' 15118.. '
I
(10" thru 24")
f
Pipe:
Steel; same as 8-inch or AWWA C200,-with ceramic I
epoxy lining.: -Ref. spec: Section 15061.
_.
Conri; mech pipe coupling, or flanged. See Remarks.
Ftgs; steel, ASTM A234, or fabricated steel, AWWA ...
C208; lining and ends to match pipe.
Valves:
Eccentric "plug; ref.. spec Section 15 110.-
Sec 11
Swim .61' eck; springloaded per spec tion 15 8.
(26" and Larger).;`
pipe:
Steel; AW WA C200, with .ceramic epoxy lining. Ref.
spec.Section Section 15061.
Conn; sleeve or: shouldered rnmh pipe coupling, flanged,
.
n end Butt welded or sli oint fillet.we welded... .
pla i pJ
Ftgs; f abricated.sieel, AWWA C208; lining and ends to.
match pipe.-
Valves:::
Butterfly; ref. spec Section:1 5 103. "
Swing check; spring loaded per spec Section.15118: "
Buried and Encased Pipe and Valves:.
(See "drawings for pipe size and valve type. Omit coating on
encased pipe.)
(3" and smaller)
Pipe:
PVC; ASTMD1784, Class 12454-B, ASTM D1785, Sch.
80. Ref. spec Section 15064. Provide magnetic tracer
tape.
Conn; plain end; solvent weld with threaded or flanged
adapters for valves.
Ftgs; PVC, Sch. 80, socket weld.
Valves:
Eccentric plug; saine as exposed with extension stem and
valve box. Coating per spec Section 09900.
E.
15050-41
21-21767/Aliase 2
July 2018

r
Piping System:
12 (continued)
' (4" thin 12')
... '
�. Pipe:
Dtictile iron; AWWA,C151 with ceramic epoxy lining
--.and p($yethylene:encasement: Ref. spec Section.15062.
Conn; -grooved. end or restrained push-ori rubber gasket
joint.: Flanged adapte s;for valves. .
Ftgs; ductile iron, pe spec Section 15062; coating, lining
..a s t . ..and end o match pipe. . ,:: :
E. Valves:
Eccerihic plug; same as exposed With extension stem acid
valve box. C ating M-1 per Spe Section 0 900
v o c 9
✓ '.J14" thrui 24')
.,. :: ... ...
Pie
Ductile iron; same as 12 inch, for pipe and fts or..:
Steel;: AWWA C200; with Type 2 cold=applied tape,
AWWA C209'and lined -with ceramic epoxy. Ref. Spec
Section 15061: .
Steel c onn; sleeve of shouldered rnech pipe coupling, . .
flanged, plain end butt Welded or slip joint: fillet welded.
-Ft s fabricated steel', AWWA C208; with Type 2 cold-
.��
tape, ape, AWWA C209 and lined with ceramic
pplied .
_
epoxy.
:Valves:::: :.
:: : Eccentric plug; same as exposed with extension stem and:
. '
valve:box. Coating M-1.per Spec Section 09900.
(26".and Larger)
Pipe:
Ductile iron; same as 12 inch for pipe and ftgs or
Steel; AWWA C200; with Type:2 cold -applied tape,
AWWA C209 and lined with ceramic epoxy. Ref. -Spec
Section 15061.
Steel cone; sleeve or shouldered:mech pipe coupling,
flanged, pfain end butt welded or slip joint fillet welded.
Fes; fabricated steel, AWWA: C208;:with Type 2 cold -
applied tape, AWWA C209 and lined with ceramic
epoxy.
a
15050-42
21-21767/Phase 2
July 2018

15050-43 21-21767/Phase 2
July 2018

3.07 PIPING SPECIFICATION SHEET--PIPESPEC
Piping Symbol/Service:
DFI--Denitiification Filter Influent ...: -System-=13
..
I y kll tet NTFE Nif'if ing Tric 'ng Fi •'
Effluent ..
NTFI-' Nitiifyhig Trickling Filter .
'Influent
" J
OF--Over-flow
:'Test Requirements:;
-Medium... .
Water;,ref spec.paragraph 15050-3.05 C. -
Pressure:.
125 psig "
Duration:
120.zninutes
„:.
Gasket Requirements:
...
Flange:
Neoprene, C.I:
Push-6n/Mech:Cpl:.
Nitrile. or Neo gene
p
I
Exposed Pipe and Valves:
..
- See drawin s for pipe: size and valve type)
( g p�p � .yp)
.: ...
(2": and smaller) . .
Pipe;
Steel; ASTM.A53, galvanized._. Ref. spec.Section 1.5061.
Conn;.taper threaded, ANSI B1:20.1.
Ftgs; malleable iron, ASTM Al 97, ANSI B16.3, Class
j
150,. galvanized.
Valves:
Ball; Jamesb Fig: 351, Nibco T-580; o: re ual:.
-J
'Globe;'Clane 7TF or 17TF: Lunkenhe'imer 123 or 214, or
equal.
Swing check; Lunkenheimer 230, Crane -I37, or equal.
(2 1 /2" thru 8 ")
Pipe:
Steel; ASTM A53, ERW, Grade B,.black, no lining. Ref.
"-'
spec Section 15061.
Conn; butt weld; grooved mech pipe,coupling or flanged.
Fes; malleable iron, ductile iron, or steel per spec Section
_
15061; ends to snatch pipe.
Valves:
Butterfly; ref. spec Section 15103. Substitute Type B on 2
1/2-inch lines.
Swingcheck; heck; spring loaded per spec.Section 15113.
15050-44 21 21767/Pliase 2
July 2018

Piping System
13 (continued)
(1:0" thru. 24")
Pipe: ...
Steel; same as 8" or AWWA C200' , with ceramic epoxy
lining::Ref. spee;Section 15061.
Conn; butt weld, mech pipe coupling, or flanged. See
.... Rerxrarks:.... :.
Ftgs; steel; ASTM A234, or fabricated steel, AWWA
C208; dining and :ends to match pipe.
Valves:
I
Butterfly; ref. spec Section 15103:
Swing_check; spring loaded per spec Section 15118.
:. (26' andLarger) ..
... .. .1
Pipe:
-Steel; AWWA C200, with ceramic epoxy lining... Ref.
.
spe Section 15061
e
Conn; sleeve :or shouldered mech:pipe coupling, flanged,
plain end butt welded or slip joint fillet welded. .
Figs; fabricated steel, AWWA C208;:lining and ends to
match pipe:
Valves:
Butterfl ;ref spec.Section.15103.
_Swim check; spring- loaded per spec. Section 15118.
Buried and Encased Pipe
and -Valves.
(See: drawings .for pipe size and valve type. ; Omit coating. on
encased pipe:)
(3,; and smaller) .:..
Pipe:
PVC; ASTM D1784, Class 12454-B; ASTM D1785, Sch.
80.. Ref. spec Section 15064. Provide magnetic tracer
tape.
Conn; plain end; _solvent weld with threaded or flanged
adapters for valves.
FtRs; PVC, Sch. 80, socket weld.
Valves:
Gate; ref. spec Section 15101, with extension stem and
valve box. Coating M-1 per spec Section 09900.
(4" thru 12")
Pipe: Ductile iron; AWWA C151 with ceramic epoxy lining
and polyethylene encasement. Ref. spec Section 15062.
15050-45 ' 21-21767/Phase 2
July 2018

Piping System
13 (continued)
Conn; grooved end or restrained push -on Tubber gasket
joint: Flaniged adapters for valves..
-FtQs; ductile ironper spec Section 15062; coating,'lining
and.ends to: in ch pipe
I
J. ..
Valves:
-Butte rfl ; same as exposed with extension stem and valve
..:
box:- Coating A44 per spec Section 09900, ;
(14" thru 24") . .. :: ...
i Pipe:.
Ductile iron; same as .12 inch for pipe and ftgs br
... ..:
... St2:cold-a lied tape:
.:: eel• AWWA C200•;with T P Yp.ePp
AWWA n
A A C209 and lined with ceramic epoxy. Ref. Spec
.. ..
--Section 15061. .,
Steel:conn, sleeve or: shouldered riiech pipe coupling,
flan n end butt welded or t fillet welded flanged, Alai slip
Ftgs• fabricated° steel AWWA C208; with Type 2 cold -
applied tape. AWWA::C209 andained with ceramic::: ...
Valves:
Butterfly; same as exposed with.extension stem and valve
Coattri IVI-1 pe • spec
ox g 1 Section' 0.
(26" thru 72"}
Pipe: =
= Ductile iron; same as :12 inch for pipe and.. ftgs, or .:
Steel; AWWA C200; with -Type 2told-applied tape,
AWWA C209 and lined with ceramic epoxy. Ref. spec
Section 15061.
_ Steel Conn; sleeve or shouldered meth pipe coupling,
flanged, plain eind butt welded or slip joint fillet welded:
FF�; fabricated steel, AWWA C208; with Type 2 cold-
_�
applied tape, AWWA C209 and lined with ceramic
epoxy.
_ Valves:
Butterfly; with extension stem and valve box. Ref. spec
Section 15103. Coating M--1 per spec Section 09900.
1:
(78" and Larger) .
Pipe: Steel; AWWA C200; with Type 2 cold -applied tape,
AWWA C209 and lined with ceramic epoxy. Ref. spec.
Section 15061.
15050-46 21 21767/Phase 2
July 2018

Piping system.:13 (continued)
Steel conn; sleeve or shouldered mach pipe coupling,
flanged, plain end butt welded or slip joint fillet welded. �.
:
Figs; fabricated steel, AW. A C208;. with Type 2 cold-...
Applied tape, AWWA C209 aiid lined with ceramic -
epoxy, ..
Valves; .- :: .. Butterfly; with extension stein and valve box.: Ref. spec
Section 15103. Coating M-1 per spec Section 09900.
Remarks: ..
1. Grooved mechanical pipe couplings, 10 to 24 inch size, maybe used with
standard weight -or heavier pipe; grooved or shouldered mechanical°pipe
couplings are permitted with fabricated pipe if :the ratedworking pressure:
. i
of the coupling exceeds the specified test -pressure.. Butt weld connections
are permitted lined pip ifrepairs=to lining canbe made after
welding. ..
2.. be provided e high points and drains provided
Manual air vents shall ed at fh
at the low points of each reach of pipeline as specified in Section.15095.
f
�r
I
sp
F
15050-47 21-21767/rilasc 2
July 2018

.: 3.07 PIPING SPECIFICATION SHEET--PIPESPEC
Piping Symbol/Service, `
DFE-=Denitrification.Filter Effluent System-43A
FE--Final Effluent ...
�.: ...:
'PE --Primary Effluent
..
-
PI--Piim , Influent.
SE- Secondary Effluent
.SEB--Secondary Effluent Bypass
,.
Test. Requirements:
I Medium:
f.
Water; ref spec paragraph 15050-3: 05 Q.
...Pressure:
15 psig
:`Duration:
'120 minutes
Gasket. Requirements:
Flange::: ..
Neoprene, C.I. ..
Push-on/Mecl Cpl:
Nitrile or Neoprene
Exposed Pipe and Valves::: .
... ..
. . :
drawings for type):'
..' (S.ee pipe size and valve
_
-,... (21/2". and smaller) — FE ONLY
_.
Pipe: .:
Stainfess steel; ASTM A311 Type 316 Schedule 405. Ref
spec. Section:15067....
threaded; ANSI B L20.1.- See Remarks 1.
..:
e s to Fts, ASTM A403, mat rial,-end and wall thickness match
pipe....
Valves:
Diaphragm; ASAIII,-Type 14; flanged, PVC bodywithPTFE'
7 .
diaphragm, or equal..
Tubing:
Cleaf PVC tubing, embedded braid reinforcing, mina
__-
3/16" wall, NSF 51, 70 psi:
Conn, stainless steel clamps. For connection to sample
pumps on FE. .
F- ts; barbed and threaded stainless steel adapters
(2" and smaller) --- ALL NON-FE SYSTEMS
Pipe:
Steel; ASTM A53, galvanized. Ref. spec Section 15061.
Conn; taper threaded, ANSI B1.20.1.
_f
Ftgs; malleable iron, ASTM Al97, ANSI B16.3, Class
150, galvanized.
1
15050-48 2 1 m21767/Phase 2
July 2018

Piping System
13A (continued)
Valves:
Ball; Jamesbury Fig. 351, Nibco T=580, or equal.
Globe; Crarie 7TF or 17TF, Lunk&iheirner 123. or. 214, or
equal.:: :.. .
Swing check; Lunkenheime'r 230, Crane 137, or equal.
(21 /T -thru 8")
Pipe:
--Steel;:- r ASTM A53, ERW, Grade B; black, ceramic
y lining.: Ref. spec Section.15061.
epos 1
Conn; butt.vweld, grooved mech pipe.coupling or. flanged.
Ftgs; malleable iron, ductile iron, or: steel per spec S ection
15061; ends to, match pipe.
Valves:
Butterfl ;ref. spec Section 15103. Substitute Type Bon 2
1/2-inch lines.
..
1 g p Se 11 .
Swing check, spring loaded per spec:Section 15 8
0 0" thru. 24 ")
Pipe:
Steel; same as 8" or AWWA C200, with ceramic epoxy .
lining, spec.S' etion 15061.
.:
Conn; butt weld, meth pipe coupling, or flanged. See '
.. Remarks.
Ftgs; steel, ASTM A234, or fabricated steel, AWWA
-C208; lining and'ends to match pipe.
L
Valves:
Butterflyjef. spec Section 15103.
-Swing_check; spring loaded per spec Section 15.118.
(26" and :Larger)
Pipe:
Steel;.AWWA C200, with ceramic epoxy lining.: Ref.
Spec Section 15061.
Conn; sleeve or shouldered meth pipe coupling, flanged,
plain end butt welded or slip joint fillet welded.
Fes; fabricated steel, AWWA C208; lining and ends to
match pipe:
Valves:
Butterfly; ref. spec Section 15103.
Swing check; spring loaded per spec Section 15118.
a
15050-49 21-217671P1iase 2
July 2018

Piping System
.13A (continued) .
Buried and Encased Pipe
and Valves:
(See drawings for,' 'pipe size and valve :type: Omiucoating on
encased pipe;)::..
(3." and smaller)
Pipe:
PVC; ASTM D 1784, Class 12454-B, ASTM D 1785, Sch. - -'
-
.. 80. Ref. "spec Se' 'on 1506 ::Provid magnetic .:
Section 4 e c tracer
tape:
Conn;.plain eiid; solvent weld with tlir aded or flanged
- ' adapters for valves-.
7
Ftgs; PVC, Sch-.'80.'socket weld.. .
Valves:
Gate; ref. spec Section 15I01; with extension stem" and
valve box. Coating M-1 per spec Section-09900.
.. (411 thru: 1:21t
:Pipe:
Ductile iron; AWWA C151 with cement mortar lining
and polyethylene encasement: Ret:° spec Section 15062.
.. ..
-Conn; grooved end or restrained push-ori rubber gasket
joint., Flanged adapters for valves.
FTS; ductile iron per spec Section 15062; coating, lining
k ...
f
and ends. to match pipe.
.
_ Valves::
Butterfly; same as exposed with: extension: stem and valve
f
box. Coating M=I per spec Section 09900.
. 04" thlu 24") .
Pipe:
Ductile iron, same as 12 inch for pipe and ftgs or
--
Concrete cylinder; ref. spec Section 15057, or
Steel; AWWA C260; with Type 2 cold -applied tape, AWWA
C209 and lined with cement mortar. Ref. spec Section
15061, or
Reinforced concrete low -head pressure pipe (RCP-LHP);
Ref. spec Section 15056.
Concrete and ductile iron conn; restrained bell and spigot
with O ring rubber gasket joint. Flanged adapters for valves.
.
Steel cone; sleeve or shouldered mech pipe coupling,
flanged, plain end butt welded or slip joint fillet welded.
Ftgs; fabricated steel, mortar lined and coated with Type 2
cold -applied tape, AWWA C209. Ref. spec Section 15057.
15050-50 21-21767/Piw�se 2
hdy 2018

Piping System
i
13A (continued)
.... Valves:
Butterfly; salve as exposed with extension stem and valve
. box. Coating M-1 per spec Section 09900..
(30" thru 7211) .
Pipe:
... Ductile iron; same as 12inch for pipe and ftgs;.or
Concrete cylinder; ref spec Section 15057. or
Steel: AWWA C200 minimum thickness -to match pipe with
Type 2 cold -applied tape, AWWA.C209 and .lined with.
cementmortai. Ref. spec Section-1506.1, or
Reinforced concrete low -head pressure pipe (RCP7LHPI; ref l
Spec Section 15056.
Concrete and ductile iron conn;-restrained bell and spigot
with 0-ring rubber:gaslcet joints and flanged adapters for ..
valves.
� pp ... p. ..
Steel riich ii d ld h sleeve l Conn• seeor shouldered ree col n ,
g
.. ..
flanged;:plain end butt welded or slip joint fillet welded. 1
F gi ,r fabricated steel, AWWA C208; minimum thickness to
inatch pipe, with Type'2 cold -applied tape, AWWA C209
and lined with cement mortar:
Valves:
Butterfly; with extension stem and'valve box. Ref. spec
-
Section 15103. Coating M-1: per spec Section 09900.
(78" thm 969)
f
Pipe:
Concrete cylinder; ref spec Section 15057 or
Steel; AWWA C200; with Type 2 cold; -applied tape, AWWA
C209 and lined with cement mortar. Ref. spec Section .
15061, or Reinforced concrete low -head pressure pipe (RCP-
LHP); ref spec Section 15056.
Concrete Conn; bell and spigot with 0-ring rubber gasket
joints and flanged adapters for valves.
Steel conn; sleeve or shouldered mech pipe coupling,
flanged, plain end butt welded or slip joint fillet welded.
Ftgs; fabricated steel, AWWA C208; minimum thickness to
match pipe, with Type 2 cold -applied tape, AWWA C209
and lined with cement mortar.
Valves:
Butterfly; with extension stem and valve box. Ref.' spec
Section 15103. Coating M-1 per spec Section 09000.
15050-51 21-21767/Phase 2
hily 2018

15050-52
21-21767/Pliase 2
July 2018

1
i
3.07 PIPING SPECIFICATION SHEET--PIPESPEC
.Piping Symbol/Service: ..
TFE=-Trickling Filter Effluent :.. System-=13B
TFI—Trickling Filter Influent .
Test Requirements:
Medium:
Water; ref, spec paragraph 15050L3.05 C.. ...
Pressure:
20 psig
Duration: =
- 120 minutes :.
Gasket Requirements:
... Flange: ..:.
Neoprene, C.I.
Push-on/Mech Cpl:
Nitrile or Neoprene
Exposed Pipe and Valves: .
See drawin s size and valve type),
( for -pipe e g p p Yp ):
(2" and smaller)
Pipe:
Steel, ASTM A53; galvanized. Ref. spec Section 15061:
Conn; taper threaded, -ANSI BL20.1.
Ftgs; malleable iron, ASTM A 197, ANSI B 16.3, Class .
150, galvanized.
Valves:
a
Ball; Jamesbury Fig..351, Nibco- T-580, or. equal.
Globe; Crane 7TF or f7TF, Lunlcenh Gleimer 123 or 214, or
equal..:
Swim check; L-unkenheimer 230, Crane 137, 'or equal..
(2 1/2" thru 8")
Pipe:
Steel; or ASTM A53, ERW, Grade B black, no lining.
Ref spec Section 15061.
Conn; butt weld, grooved leech pipe coupling or flanged.
Ftas; malleable iron, ductile iron, or steel per spec Section
15 06 1; ends to match pipe.
Valves:
Butterfly; ref. spec Section 15103. Substitute Type B on 2
1/2-inch lines.
Swing _checic; spring loaded per spec Section 15118.
(10" thru 24")
-
Pipe:
Steel; same as 8" or AWWA C200, with ceramic epoxy i
lining. Ref. spec Section 15061.
Conn; butt weld, mech pipe coupling, or flanged. See
Remarks.
i
15050-53 21-21767/Phase 2
July 2018

Piping System
. 13B (continued)
Ftas; steel, ASTM A234, or fabricated steel.-A.WWA ;--
:... ..
.
C208, liniri and ends to match pipe.,
g. p.
Valves:.
Butterfly; ief.- spec Section 'l5103,
Swing check; spring loaded per Sp Section.15118:.:
(20" and Larger).
Pipe:: .::
Steel; AWWA-C200, .with ceramic epoxy.lining. Ref.
Se ..
spec ctiori 1SD61 .
Conn; sleeve or shouldered:mech pipe coupling; flanged;:
plain end butt welded or slip joint: fillet welded.
Ft�s; fabricated steel; AWWA C208; lining and ends to.
..:
-match pipe.
Valves: ...
Butterfly; re£ spec Section 151.03.
Swifi check; spring loaded per spec,Sectiori 15118:
... .... . ... ...
Buried and Eneased Pipe and Valves:
:(See drawing's for pipe :size and valve type.: Omit: coating on
encased pipe.) - ..:
..
- (3and smaller)
Pipe:
PVC; ASTM D1.784; Class 12454-B, ASTM D1785: Sch.
..80. Ref. -spec Section 15064:.Provide magnetic tracer
tape..
Conn; plain end; solvent _weld with threaded or flanged -
G
adapters for valves.
Ftgs; PVC, Sch: 80; socket weld.
Valves:
Gate; ref. spec Section 15101, with extension stem and
valve box. Coating M-1 per spec Section 09900. -
(4" thru 8")
Pipe: Ductile iron; AWWA C151 with ceramic epoxy lining
and polyethylene encasement. Ref. spec Section 15062.
f Conn; grooved end or restrained push -on rubber gasket
joint. Flanged adapters for valves.
Ftas; ductile iron per spec Section 15062; coating, lining
and ends to match pipe.
i
Valves: Butterfly; same as exposed with extension steal and valve
box. Coating M-1 per- spec Section 09900.
15050-54 21-21767/Pliase 2
July 2018

Piping System 13B (continued)
(10" and.larger)
Pipe: Steel; AWWA C200;-with Type 2 cold -applied tape;
AWWA C209 and lined with ceramic epoxy. ;Ref. Spec
Section 15061.
so
Steel cone; sleeve or shouldered mech pipe coupling,
flanged', plain end butt welded: or slip joint fillet
. . flan lIet welded.
Ftgs; fabricated steel, -AWWA C208; with. Type 2 cold=
applied tape; AWWA C209 and Hired with ceramic
epoxy..:
Butt Valves:. erfly; same as exposed witli:extensiori stem and valve
box. Coating M=T per spec Seetion 09900.
Remarks:
1... - Grooved mechanical pipe couplings, 10 to 24 inch size, may be used with.
standard weight or heavier pipe; grooved or shouldered mechanical pipe
couplings are permitted with: fabricated pipe if the rated working pressure
of the coupling exceeds the specified test pressure. Butt weld connections
are Permitted with lined pipe if repairs to lining can be made after
welding..
2. Manual.air vents shall be provided at the high points and drains provided at
the low points of each reach of pipeline as specified in Section 1:5095.
- i
15050-55 21-21767/Phase 2
July 2018
it

3.07 PIPING SPECIFICATION SHEET--PIPESPEC
Piping Symbol/Service:
ML--Mixed. Liquor . ; .: System--14
PF Pre sst6zed Fluid
i
RSS--Return Secondary Sludge
.
WSS='aste-Secon ary Sludge
Test Requirements:
Medium:=' ::a
Water;Tef specparagrap4:15050-3.05 C.
:.:
Pressure: :.:
100 psig
Duration;
120 minutes
Gasket Requirements;
:.. Flange:.:
Compressed asketiri consisting of organic- fibers
g g ..
a ne e
:. -(Kev r) and opreri binder
-onV
-Nitrile or Neoprene,Push
Exposed Pipe'and Valves:
(See: dawings for pipe size and valve, type),:: ;
(2" and smaller)
Pipe:
:. Steel;.ASTM A53;.galvanized: Ref :spec Section 15061.
{ . ..:
Conn• . _.
,taper threaded, ANSI B 1.20.1:
E!gi malleable iron,.ASTMA1.97; ANSIB16.3, Class-
150, galvanized..
Valves::
Eccentric plug; per spec Section 15110. Install'valve with
seat upstreamr
Swing- check; heck; Lunlcenheirner 230, Crane 'I37, or equal.
(21 /2" thru 8")
Piper
Steel; ASTM A53, ERW, Grade B, black, no lining. Ref.
f .
spec Section 15061.
_
Conn; grooved mechanical pipe coupling or flanged. .
Figs; malleable iron, ductile iron, or steel per spec
Section 15061; ends to match pipe.
Valves:
Eccentric plug; per spec Section 15110. Install valve with
seat up stream.
Swingcheck; heck; spring loaded per spec Section 1511.8.
f
t
15050-56 21-21767/Phase 2
July 2018

Piping System:
14 (continued)
..(10" tbru.24")
Pipe:
Steel; same as 8" or AWWA C200; with:cerainic epoxy .
lining. Ref. spec:Section 15061.
Conn; butt weld, mech pipe coupling; or flanged. See .
Remarks. ..: .-.
Ftgs; steel; ASTM.A234, or fabricated -steel, AWWA
pipe
-C208;Aining and ends to matchX;
Valves:
Butterflref, s ec Section 15103.-
p
ecic; spring loaded per spec Section Swing cli ecti 15118.
.: (26" and :Larger) -
Pipe:
Steel; AWWA WA C200, with ceramic epoxy lining.. Ref.
_ -- spec Section 15061:: .•.
Conn; sleeve or shouldered mech:pipe coupling, flanged,
plain end butwelded or"lip joint fillet welded.
Ft s; fabr7cated steel AWWA C208; limn and ends to
... i
match pipe: .
Valves:.
P -.
Butterfly; -refs ec;Section15103.
Swin eheck; spring loaded per spec=Section 15118.
g
Buried and Encased Pipe
and: Valves:
(See drawings:for pipe size and valve type.. Omit coating on encased pipe:)
(3" and smaller)
Pipe:
PVC; ASTM D1784, Class 12454-B,.ASTM D1785, Scli.:.
80. Ref. spec Section 15064. Provide magnetic tracer
tape.
Conn; plain end; solvent weld with threaded or flanged
adapters for valves.
Ftgs; PVC, Sch: 80, socket weld.
Valves:
Eccentric plug; same as exposed with extension stem and _ ll
valve box. Coating M-1 per spec Section 09900. i
(4" tbru 12")
Pipe:
Ductile iron; AWWA C151 with ceramic epoxy lining
and polyethylene encasement. Ref. spec Section 15062.
15050-57 21-21767/Pliase 2
Ady 2018

Piping System:
14 (continued)
Conn; grooved end or restrained push -on rubber gasket
joint., Flan ed adapters for. valves:
g
R _ :
F- tgs; ductile iron per spec. Section 15062; coating; lining
T
and ends`to_match pipe.
Valves:
Eccentric plu1:; same as exposed with extension stem and .
valve box.: Coating-M-1 pdr'spec Section 09900:.
(14" thiu. 24") ..:
. .
.Piper
Ductile iron;• same: as 12 inch for pipe and ftgs or
'Concrete cylinder; re£ spec Sectiona l-5057 or:'
Steel; AWWA. C200;-with Type:2:cold-applied tape;
AWWA C209 and lined with .ceramic epoxy. Ref. spec
...
-�
ectioii 15061.
Concrete cylinder cone; restrained -bell and spigot with
Flanged adapters . ' g:rubber gasket joint..: F for:valves .
}
..O-rm
Ftlrs; fabricated steel,.mortar lined and coated: 'Ref spec
Section 15057.
Steel cone; sleeve or shouldered mech.pipe coupling,,
r :
flanged, plain end butt welded: or slip: joint fillet welded:
-- ... .
Ftgs; fabricated steel, AWWA C208; with. Type 2 cold--
C 1
applied tape; AWWA 209 and hied with ceramic:
.:
epoxy..:
Valves:.
Butterfly; same as exposed with:extension stem and valve
�k
box. Coating M-1 per spec Section 09900.
_ (26" and Larger)
Pipe:
Ductile iron; same as* 12 inch for: pipe and ftgs or .
T"
Concrete cylinder; ref spec. Section 15057 or
Steel; AWWA C200;.with'Type 2 cold -applied tape,
AWWA C209 and lined with ceramic epoxy. Ref. spec
Section 15061.
r
Concrete cylinder Conn; restrained bell and spigot with 0-
'
ring rubber gasket joints and flanged adapters for valves.
Ftgs; Fabricated steel, mortar lined and coated. Ref. Spec.
Section 15057.
Steel conn; sleeve or shouldered mech pipe coupling,
flanged, plain end butt welded or slip joint fillet welded.
Figs; fabricated steel, AWWA C208; with Type 2 cold -
applied tape, AW WA' C209 and lined with ceramic
epoxy.
15050-58 2121767/Phone 2
July 2018

I
15050-59 21-21767/Pnase 2
July 2018

_ 3.07 PIPING SPECIFICATION SHEETS--PIPESPEC
Piping.Symliol/Service:
RSS= Retum.Secondary. Sludge(FRP) System- -14A
Test Requirements: ...
... ... .. -
Medium:
Water; ref. spec paragraph 15050-3.05: C.
Pressure:
60 psi g
Duration:.
120 minutes
.Gasket Requirements;
Flange.
g
Colnpressed gasketing consisting of organic fibers QI ovlar) and
—...
A e 1 eopr ne binder
�, ... P1ish�on/Mecli Cpl:
Nitiile of Neoprene ...
Exposed Pipe and Valves::
(See drawings for pipe size and valve type)
:.. (18" and.larger):: ...
.. .
Pipe:. °
Reinforced thermosetting resin pipe (RTRP); Type 4, ref. .
...
spec Section:15058.
- ..
Conn; butt and wrap or flanged. -
..:
Ffigs; RTRP to match -pipe, glass filament wound reinforcing
only.:.
..
.
Expansion joi»ts;Ref. spec Section 15058wo
Valves:
Butterfl ref. s p ec Section.15103.
v,
Buried and Encased Pipe and Valves:
.
(See, drawings for pipe size and valve
type)
Not Used
Remarks:
I . Manual air vents shall be provided at the high points and drains provided at the
T; low points of each reach of pipeline as specified in Section 15095.
15050-60 21-21767/Phase 2
MI
LJ
July 2018

3.07; PIPING SPECIFICATION SHEET--PIPESPEC
Piping Symbol/Service:
CEN--Centrate System-46 .
CS --Circulating Sludge
DS--Digested Sludge
DWS=-Dewateled Sludge'
MS --Mixed Sludge
PS --Primary Sludge
PSC-.P1•imaly Scum
THS--Thickened Sludge
SSC-=Secondary. Scum
TBS-=Thickened Bottom Sludge I
TS--Transfer• Sludge
Test.Requirements:
Mediumi
Water; ref; spec paragraph15050-3.05 C.
Pressure:
200psig (25.0 PO for DWS)
Duration:
120 minutes
Gasket Requirements:.
Flange: --
Neoprene .
Push-on/Mech Cpl:.:
wr
Nitrile; or Neoprene
Exposed Pipe and Valves:
(See drawings for pipe size. and valve. type)
(3 and smaller)
Pipe:
Steel; ASTM A53, galvanized.:Ref. spec:Section 15061.
Conn; taper threaded, ANSI B1.20.1. Flanged.adapters for
2 1/2";3" valves.
Ft�s; malleable iron, ASTM A197, ANSI B 16.3, Class
150, galvanized.
Valves:
Eccentric plug; per spec Section 15110. Install valve with
seat upstream.
(2" and smaller)
Swin cg heck; Lunkenheimer 230, Crane 137, or equal.
(4" thin 12")
Pipe:
Steel; ASTM A53, ERW, Grade B, black, with glass
lining Ferrocic MEH-32, Ervite SG-14, or equal. Ref.
spec Section 15061.
Conn; grooved mechanical pipe coupling, flanged
adaptors for valves.
15050-61 21-217671Phase 2
tidy 2018

Piping System:
16 (continued)
.. '
..: Ftgs; malleable iron,. ductile iron,: or segmented welded
steel per spec Section 15061; ends and lining to match'
sw
remarks:
..pipe. See .
" Valves:: =: --:
Eccentric plug;, per spec .Section 15110. Install valve'with
seat upstream.
r (2 1/2" thru 1211) ..- :
Ball check; Ref. spec Section 15120.
(14": hru 24") ::..
:..
Pipe: - . '
Steel; same as.12" o' -AWWA'C20.0, with glass lining .
..
".; feliock MEH-32, Ervite. SG -I kor :equal:_ Ref spec:
SectionI1 061.
-°
Conn; grooved mech pipe coupling,- Ranged adaptors for:
valves. See remarks..
Ffas; SteeI,-ASTM A234 or fabricated steel, AWWA ...
C208;:-Iihing and: ends to match pipe.; See remarks.
.. .
Valvees:.
Eccentric Au a; per spec Section 15110. Install valy_ e with
i
seat upstream. See remarks;.
Buried and Encased Pipe
and Valves:
fe size and valve type. Omit .on encased' i e.
}.(See drawingsori
_ (3" and smaller)
Pipe;
PVC ; ASTIVI A1784; Class 12454-B, ASTM D1785 Sch.
80. Ref, spec Section 15064. - Provide magnetic tracer
tape.. .. .
Conn; plain -end; solvent weld with threaded or flanged
adapters for valves.
Ftas; PVC, Sch..80, socket:weld :
Valves:
Eccentric plug; same, as exposed with extension stem and
valve box. Coating M-1 per spec Section 09900.
(4" thru 12 ")
_ j Pipe:
Ductile iron; AWWA C151, with polyethylene
encasement,and glass lining,. Ferrock MEH-32, Ervite
SG-14, or equal. Ref. spec Section 15062.
Conn; grooved end or restrained push -on rubber gasket
joint. Flanged adapters for valves.
Ftas; Auctile iron per Spec Section 15062; coating, ends
and lining to match pipe.
15050-62 21-21767/Phase 2
hily 2018

Piping System -
16 (continued)
1
Valves:
Eccentric plug;'same as.exposed with extension stem and
valve box. Coating M-1 per spee Section.09900.
(14" thru 24")
Pipe:
Ductile iron; same as 12 inch for pipe and ftgs or
Steel; AWWA-C200, with type 2 cold -applied tape,
.. -
A WWA. C209 and glass li)4rng fenocic.MEH-32,.Ervite::
SG-14, or equal. Ref. Spec Section 15061.
Conn; Sleeve or shouldered mechpipe coupling, flanged, a
... plain end butt weld or slip. joint fillet welded.. See l
Remarks. I
FtS; Fabricated steel; AWWA C208, with type 2 cold-
applied tape, AW WA C209. Lining and ends to, match
pipe....
-Rernarks: .
I.
Grooved mechanical pipe couplings, 10 to 24 inch size, may be used with
standard: weight or heavier pipe; grooved or shouldered mechanical _pipe
couplings aie permitted with fabricated pipe if the rated working pressure
of the coupling exceeds: the specified test pressure,
2.
All exposed pipe bends shall belong radius type; except as otherwise
approved by the Construction Manager.
3.
Manual airy vents shall be provided at the high points and drains provided
at the low points of each reach of pipeline as specified in paragraph
15095-3.01 C. f.
4.
CS piping on and in the digester dome shall be provided as System 4
piping.
5.
For exposed valves greater than 20", use butterfly valves per Section-
15103, Type A.
15050-63 21-21767/Phase 2
July 2018

3.07 -PIPING SPECIFICATION SHEETS--PIPESPEC
Piping Syinbol/Service:
GR -Grit System--17
-
SCR —Screeriirigs
Test Requirem6fits:
-
Medium: :: ...
Water;:ref. spee.paragraph.15050;P5 C.
'
Pressure:.,. , '
-120 psig
Duration:.
120 minutes
Gasket Requirements:
...
Flan a ::
Compressed gasket g consisting of organic fiber (Kevlar)
and neoprene binder
Push Cpl:
Nitrile or Neoprene :: ... .
Exposed Pipe and Valves:
(See drawings for pipe'size and valve type)
(2 112". and large )-
Pipe:. -
Steel; ASTM.A53, ERW,` Grade B, black; with glass ..
lining Ferrock MEH=32,-Ervite SG-14, or:equal. Ref.
spec Section 1506L
- Conn; grooved mechanical pipe coupling, flanged-
adaptors for: valves.
Ft s, malleable iron, ductile iron, or segmented welded .
steel per spec Section 1506:1; ends and lining to match
pipe. See remarks.
Valves; ... :.:
Lubricated plug;; cast iron, flanged, PTFE or molydisulfide.
coated plug, Nordstrom Fig. 143, Walworth Fig. 1797F, or
equal, thru- 5 inch; worm gear operator, Nordstrom Fig.
'inch.
149, Walworth Fig. 1727F, or equal, 6 to 8
Swing check; spring loaded per spec Section 15118. -
Buried and Encased Pipe and Valves:
_f
(See drawings for pipe size and valve type)
^'
(Y and larger)
Pipe:
N/A
E
Valves:
N/A
1505 0-64 21 21767/Phase 2
July 2018

15050-65 21-21767/Phase 2
July 2018
If

3.07 PIPING SPECIFICATION SHEETS--PIPESPEC
.Piping SynaboI%Service: :..
ME - Methanol- System"-18
MEV - Methanol Vapor
Test Requirements: :
.
.. .. ...
Medium.
Fuel oil; ref.. spec -paragraph 15050-3.05E. "
-m Pressure: ::
150: psig (pressure i in,
5.psig (nonpiessure piping)
Duration:
60 minutes : _ _ ... .
GasketRequirements:
Flange: :.
: Com ressed aslcetin consistin' of or aiuc fibers: Ievlar
p g g g s(... )... ..
and neoprene -binder
Ptish=.On/Mech Cpl:
.. N/A ... ... _
Exposed Pipe and Valves:: -
-:(See drawings for pipe size and
valve type)or
(2" and_smaller)..-
...
... ... ': :: -..
P
Pipe:
Sfeel; ASTM A106, seamless, Grade B, black,.pickled.- Ref
spec Section :15061., . .
Conn; threaded or socket weld with threaded adapters 'for
valves.:
...
Ftgsjorged steel, ASTM Al05, ANSI B 16..11; pressure. "
Class 3000, pickled.
Valves:
Lubricated pluf;;.cast iron, PTFE coated plug, Nordstrom Fig.
..
142, Walworih Fig. 1796, or equal,
g
Lift check; Crane 27TF, Lunkenlieimer 231 or equal:
(2 1/2" thlu 12")
pipe:
Steel; ASTM A53, seamless, Grade B; black; pickled. Ref. .
Spec Section 15061.
Conn; butt weld, flanged for valves,
Fes; steel, ASTM A234; seamless; ANSI B 16.9, pickled;
-
ends shall match pipe.
Valves:
Lubricated plug; cast iron with PTFE or molydisulfide coated
plug, Nordstrom Fig. 143, Walworth Fig. 1797F, or equal,
thru 5 inch; worm gear operator Rockwell Fig. 149,
Walwoifli Fig. 1727F, or equal, 6 to 12 inches.
Swingcheck; heck; cast iron, flanged, Jenkins 1025-B2; �Walworth
5344F, or equal.
15050-66 21-21767/Phase 2
July 2018

1
Piping Sy. stem: 18 (continued)
Buried and Encased Pipe and Valves:
(See drawings fvalve type.
)
size and .
(2 and larger}
Pipe PVC; ASTM _D1784, Class 12454-B, AST1V1 D1785; :Bela.
80. Ref. spec Section 15064. Double containment unless
otherwise specified. Provide magnetic tracer tape.
Conn; plain end; solvent weld with -threaded or flanged: -
adapters for valves..
Fts; PVC;. Sch. 80, socket weld.
Valves: Lubricated nlu; same as exposed with extension stein alid:
valve
alv box.
:
Remarks:
1.'., Thecleanin . icklin solution used. shall comply with Mil-H-1:3528B.
g (h g) :.
. pY
immediately following pickling and rinsing procedures, steel pipe and -
fittings shall be coated inside and outside with a rust and corrosion
1
'I
preventative system, and the ends sealed to prevent the entry of dirt.
15050-67 21-2a767/Phase 2 -
hdy 2013
f

3,07 - PIPING SPECIFICATION SHEET--PIPESPEC
Piping Symbol/Service:
CHS--Chemical Solution System--19.
y;
FCS"-Ferric Chloride Solution'::
E"
MES--Methanol Solution...
.
OL=-Polyelectrolyte
SBS--Sodium. Bisulfite Solution (see remarks)
}
SHC--Sodium Hypochlorite (see remarks)
SHD--S odium Hydroxide- (see remarks) :
Test Requirements:
Exposed Pipe:
Medium:""
Water; ref spec paragraph 1505073:05 C.
Pressure: _
150.ps1g .
Duration:
120 minutes
Buried Pipe:
Medium:
Water; ref -spec paragraph 15050=3.05 C...
Pressure:
Carrier; 100 psig
..Duration::
-" 120 minutes
Remarks:
Containment pipe shall,be felted separately.in accordance
With Section 15073.
(:
Gasket Requirements:
J
Flange:
TFE"bonded EPDM,.full=face gaskets, ANSI* B16.1.,:: "
Garlock Gylon,3.504; or equal : '
:Push-on/Mech Cpl;
N/A :.
Exposed Pipe:and Valves:
(See drawings "for pipe size and valve type).' "
(less than Y2")
.. .
Tubing:
Low pressure — as recommended by pump manufacturer
--
(see Section 11381)
Conn and Ftgs; swage -style PVDF with threaded end,
Jaco Vibra-Piuf, or equal.
High pressure - Polyethylene; 100% virgin material,
j
natural color, 130 psig minimum working pressure.
_1
Conn and Ftas; swage -style PVDF with threaded end,
Jaco Vibra-Pruf with 220 psig trim, or equal.
.
(All sizes)
Pipe:
CPVC; ASTM D1784, Class 23477-13, NSF certified, t
ASTM D1785, .Sch. 80. Pipe and fittings exposed to
sunlight shall be painted. Ref. spec Section 15064.
Conn; plain end, solvent weld, flanged for valves 3 inch
15050-68 21-21767/Phase 2
Aily 2018

and larger;

Piping -system:
19 (continued)
Ball,check;.PVC body, Chemtrol:Series BC,
e ' ual with EPDM or Teflon
As . ahi/America,orq
- seats/seals.
: (5 ; and larger)
Valves: :'
Diaphra m;1TT Dia-Flo 2558=2-M,:Hilts-McCanna
649�T�38, or equal: �
Swing or ball check; -fully linedvalve body, -fully coated
swing.check flapper:or bull check ball; lihingand coating
shall be Hypalon_or fluorinated ethylene propylene.
Valve and Primer Co: APCO Series 100R, Peabody Dore
M6del 770; or.equal.:: ..
Encased Pipe arid Valves.
(See drawings for pipe size and -Valve type)
(All :: ...
_sizes)
Pipe:
CPVC; same as exposed. `Provide magnetic tracer tape.`
-
Run in insulated condiiit;,ref. spec Sectio.n.. 15256.
—
--Conn; salve as exposed, insulated conduit.
j - -
Tt;7s; same as exposed, insulated conduit.
""(2" and less)'
::Valves::: ...
:. Ball; same as exposed with extension stem and :valve box....
(2:1/2" and larger):: ...
E Valves:
Diaphragm; same as exposed with extension stein and
Valve. box.
I Buried Pipe and Valves:
(See drawings for pipe size and valve type)
" See Remark 3.
(All sizes)
-- Pipe:
PVC; ASTM D1784, Class 12454-B, ASTM D2665, Sch,
80.; Ref. spec Section 15064; double -contained for buried
f
per Section 15073. Provide magnetic tracer tape. See
-_
remarks.
15050-70 21-21767/Pliase 2
July 2018

I
Piping _System - 19 (continued)
Conn; solvent. welded. Flanged at. valves.
Ftgs; to match pipe.
(2".and less) .
Valves; Ball or diaphragm as shown; same as exposed with .
extension stein and.valve'box.
(.2 1 /2" and .larger).. .
Valves: Ball or diaphragm, as. shown; same as exposed with:
extension stem and 'valve .box.
:Remarks:.:: .. .
L . For sodium hypochlorite -and sodium hydroxide service; -the following
-shall app1Y:
a. Ball valves are not permitted, use only diaphragm valves.:
1
b. Diaphragm valves 4 inches and smaller shall be provided with
..
Teflon diaphragms; valves 5.inches and larger shall be with
Hypalon or PVDF linings with Teflon diaphragms.
c. Suction lines to metering pumps shall be installed, with uniform
- slope to- ump with no high: points. _
2. For Sodium hydroxide pipe. supports shall be 60'percent closer than:
maximum spacing indicated for plastic piping.
3. For sodium hydroxide, sodium bisulfite; and sodium hypochlorite, solvent
welding shall be done by plumbers certified in accordance with ASTM
D2855-96. Use only IPS 724 weld -on cement developed for caustic soda
.and sodium hypochlorite service.
4. All exposed exterior piping and buried piping within 5 feet of ground
surface shall be insulated per Section 15250 requirements.
S. Provide continuous insulated double -contained piping for sodium bisulfite
service. Insulation shall meet the requirements of Section 15256.
15050-71 21-21767/Phase 2
July 2018
Il.

3.07 PIPING SPECIFICATION
SHEET--PIPESPEC
Piping Symbol/Service:
FAIN -Foul Air Duct System--22
- ..
(SeeRemaiks)'.
:.
Fou1 Air Pipe
Test Requirements:::
' Medium:
Aft; Ref. spec paragraph 15050-3.05 B. .
- Pressure:
1 psig and negative 5 inches water column
Duration:
60.minutes ...:
Gaslcet Requirements:
--, Flange:..
Neoprene
--- Push- on/Mech Cpl:
Neoprene .
Exposed Pipe/Duct- and Dampers:
'
See drawings for pipe size
`... (2,:and larger)
..
Pipe:
Fiberglass reinforced plastic (FRP); re£ spec Section
...
1323k-
Valves:-
Dampers; Ref, spec Section 15913. and 1586.1'
Buried and Encased Pipe and Valves: (See- drawings for pipe size and valve type)
'.. (6.thru 24") .
.. .
. :Pipe: -
Steel; AWWA C200; with Type 2 cold-applied:tape;
AWWA C209 and lined with ceramic epoxy. Ref. spec
Section 15061.
Conn; sleeve or shouldered mech pipe: coupling,.flanged,
plain end butt welded or slip joint fillet welded: See
remarks.
Ftgs; fabricated steel; AWWA C208; with Type 2 cold -
applied tape, AWWA C209 and lined with ceramic epoxy.
Valves:
Butterfly; reference Section 15103, with extension stem and
valve box. Coating M-1 per spec Section 09900.
(26" and larger)
_ 1 Pipe:
Steel; AWWA C200; with Type 2 cold -applied tape,
'h
AWWA C209 and lined with ceramic. epoxy. Ref spec
Section 15061.
15050-72 21-21767/Phase 2
July 2018

3.07 PIPING SPECIFICATION SHEET--PIPESPEC
Piping Symbol/Service:
D-=Drain System-=24
WOP--Rainwater Pipe
SD --Sanitary Drain
STD--Sfori fi Drain
-.
V==Vent
MD --Roof Drain
Test Requirements: :.
l
Medium:
In accordance with Section 318, Uniform Plumbin Code.
g
Pressure::
in accordance with 9ection:318, Uniform Plumbing Code:
Duration:
In: accordance with Section 31.8,'Uniform.Plumbing Code.
Gasket Requirements:.
Flange:
Compressed gasketingconsisting of organic fibers (Ievlar)
and neoprene binder
:Push-on/Mech Cpl-.:
Nitrile or neoprene
Exposed Pipe and .Valves:. .
(See. drawings:fbr: pipe size
(3and jgmaller)
... ...
Pipe: - .:..
Steel; ASTM A53;:galvanized-. Ref spec:Section 15061.
Conn; Taper threaded; ANSI-131.20.1:'
..
.. Ft�s; Cast iron, threaded drainage fittings, ASTM A126,.
`
ANSI B 16.12, galvanized.
s
PVC DVVV -(only where shown; see remarks); Ref. spec
^C
Section 15064.- -
Conn; plain.end, solvent weld.
-s
Ftas; PVC, socket type, DWV, ASTM D2665.
Valves:
None
(4" thru 12")
Pipe:
Cast iron soil pipe CISP ; ASTM A74.
-
Conn; Service hub and spigot compression type or hubless
cast iron sanitary system per CISPI 301.
(
Ftas; CISP, ASTM A74, joint options to match pipe.
f
PVC DWV (only where shown; see remarks); Ref. spec
i
Section 15064.
Conn; plain end, solvent weld.
Fes; PVC, socket type, DWV, ASTM D2665.
15050774 21-21767mhase2
Judy 2018

Piping System:
24 (continued)
I
Valves:
None.
(I W! and larger)
Pipe:.
Ductile iron; AWWA CI51. Ref, spec Seetion 15062.
Conn;.Flanged-or mechanical.
Fes; Ductile iron; per spec Section 15062; ends to match
..
a >, _.
pP
r
Valves: -
Norte .
Buried and Encased Pipe and Valves
"Under and Five Feet Outside Building :. .
(See drawings for pipe size.)
(12" and. smaller) ..
Pipe:
Cast iron soil pipe (CISP); Same as ekposed. I
PVC only where shown; see remarks); ASTM D1784, Class: l
12454-B, ASTM °D2665, Sch. 40. Ref.spec Section 15064.
Provide magnetic tracer tape.
Conn lain end solvent weld. .
Fes; PVC; socket type, DWV, ASTM D2665.
Valves:
None
(1.4" and larger)
_
Pipe:.:
Ductile iron; Same as exposed.
Valves:
None
Buried and Encased Pipe and Valves
Beyond Five Feet Outside Building:
I
(See drawings for pipe size.)
E
(8".and smaller)
I
Pipe:
PVC; ASTM D1784, Class 12454.13, ASTM D2665, Sch. f
40. Ref. spec Section 15064. Provide magnetic tracer tape.
Conn; Plain end, solvent weld.
F. �tgs; PVC, socket type, DWV, ASTM D2665.
Valves:
None
1.
15050-75 21-21767/Please 2
t
July 2018 I
�l

:Piping System:
.24 (continued)
(1.0)
Pipe:
PVC; ASTM D3034, SDR:35. Provide magnetic tracer
tape.
Conn;.Push=on.with nitrile gasket.
:: '... :. .,
.:. ... Ftgs;,P.VC or. IPS cast iron; ends: to- thatch pipe.
... Valves:
:: ... None
(12" and larger)..
Pipe:
Reinforced, concrete pipe RCPI; Ref spec Section 15056.-: j
Conn;.ASTM C443, rubber gasket type.
Ftg;' Concrete manhole: asspecified . on the :drawin s
Valves:
- None
Remarks: .
1.
Piping installed in ceiling areas which are: not heated shall be. insulated per
spec Section 15250'..
. 2. -
HVAC equipment condensate drains shall -be copper tube; ASTM B88,
..:Type M, drawn. Fittings shall be wrought copper: or bronze; ANSI...
-,.
816.22:' Connections shall'be solder:type with:threaded adapters for-
equipment connectionswhere required. Products and: fabrication:shall be.
as specifie.6in Section 15066.. -
3.
PVC DWV piping shall only be used in areas where. specifically called for
on the drawings:
15050-76 21-21767/Phase 2
July 2018

3.07 PIPING SPECIFICATION
SHEET-PIPESPEC
Piping Symbol/Service::
CD --Chemical Drain System--25 _
VC —Chemical Vent .
Test -Requirements:
Medium:
In accordance with Section 318, Uniform Plumbing Code:
Pressure:
In accordance: with Section. 318, Uniform Plumbing Code.
Duration:
In accordance with Section 318; Uniform -Plumbing Code. :.
Gasket Requirements::
Flange: N/A
Push-on/Mech Cpl:::
; : N/A 11
-Exposed Pipe and Valves:
,I
(See drawings for pipe size -and valve type)
(All sizes} .
Pipe:
PP; ASTM D4101, Sch.40; flame retardant: Ref. spec
I.
:: Section:15064.
Conn; .Ref. spec Section 15064.
Ftgs, PP, socket type coil fused DWV. Ref..Spec Section
15064...
Valves:
None I
i_
Buried and Encased Pipe :and Valves:.. . ... ...
(See drawings for pipe size and valve type)
(All sizes)
Pipe:
PVC;. ASTM D1784, Class 12454-B;-ASTM D2665, Sch:
40; Ref. spec Section 15064; double -contained for buried _�-
per Section 15073. Provide magnetic tracer tape.
Conn; solvent welded.
Ftas; to match pipe.
Valves:
None
Remarks:
1. Insulate all exterior System 25 piping per Section 15250 requirements. I/
15050 77 21-21767/Phase2
July 2018 �-
r
r

3.07 PIPING SPECIFICATION SHEET--PIPESPEC
Piping Symbol/Service:: ::
1 W IRR - Landscape Irrigation (Potable): :System-729
..:
3W:IRR - Landscape.Irrigation.(Non-potable)
Test Requirements:,
Medium:-
Water; ref spec.paragraph.15050-3.0.5 C.
Pressure:
125 psig
Duration: ..
-
120.minutes
Gasket Requirements'
..: Flange: ..: ...
Neoprene, C.I. ..
Flush-on/Mech COI:
Nitrite: or Neoprene
Exposed Pipe and Valves:
(See drawings for pipe.size and valve type)
.. (2": and smaller) .
.
Pipe::
Refer to Section 0281.0:= Landscape Irrigation. S
stem
:Valves:::: : :. ,:
:.Refer -to IrrigationSection02810— Landscape -System
(2 1/2" tliru. 8")
- Pipe: : - : -
. Refer to Section 02810. — Landscape -Irrigation 'System
Valves:
Refer to Section 0281.0:= Landscape Irrigation System
Buried -and Encased Pipe and Valves:..
(See drawings for pipe size and. -Valve type.: Omit coating on encased pipe.)
(6".and smaller)
Pipe:
' Refer.to Section'02810 — Landscape Irrigation System
(All sizes)
Valves:
Refer to Section 02810 — Landscape Irrigation System
Remarks:
1. Refer'to Section 02810 Landscape Irrigation System for pipe; valves and
appurtenances for the landscape irrigations systems.
i
<M1 4
15050-78 21-21767/Phase 2
auiy 2018

_: ... ..:
3.07 PIPING SPECIPICATION SHEET--PIPESPEC
Piping Symbol/Service:
UD--Underdraiii System--34
Test Requirements:.
Pipe stiffness, impact resistance, pipe flattening, ;and
,=..
solvent cement joint tightness in accordance with ASTM`
F758.
m.
Gasket Requirements
.. .
:. Flange: ...
Neoprene, C.I.
Push' on/Mech 'Cpl: ::
Nitrite or neoprene.
Buried Pipe:
- See drawings for pipe size
(4"; V', and 8") . .
Pipe:. ;- :.:
PVC; ASTM F758
Conn; Solvent=cemezit type joints of gasket type joints;
... : 'ASTM.D3212 .. . '
Ftas; PVC, molded type, ABTM D3034. -
"
* *END. ,OF: SECTION**
rm
J
15050-80 21-21767/Phase 2
July 2018

SECTION 15061
STEEL PIPE
PART 1--GENERAL
1.01. DESCRIPTION
This section specifies steel pipe'and fittings. I
.. ° 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE -
A. . - REFERENCES : .
:This section contains references to the following documents.. They area pant of this -section .
as specified and modified'.: Where a refeienced document coiitains:iefeiences to other standards,
those documents are included as references under this section as if referenced directly: In the event
of conflict between the requirements of this section and those:of the listed documents, the
requirements of this, section shall prevail..
Unless otherwise specified-, references to documents shall mean the docur►ien -s in effect .
at the time of Notice to Proceed. If.referenced documents have been discontinued by.ihe issuing .
organization, references to those documents shall mean the replacement documents issued or
otherwise identified: by that organization of, if there are no replacement: documents, the last
version of the document before it was discontinued.
Reference Title
am
ANSI B16.3 Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings, Class 150 and 300
ANSI B16.9 Factory -Made Wrought Steel Buttwelding Fittings
ANSI 1316.11 Forged Steel Fittings, Socket-Welding_and Threaded
ASTM A36/A36M Structural Steel
ASTM A47 Ferritic Malleable Iron Castings
ASTM A53 Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot -Dipped, Zinc -Coated Welded
and Seamless
ASTM A105/A105M Forgings, Carbon Steel, for Piping Components
ASTM A106 REV A Seamless Carbon Steel Pipe for High -Temperature Service L
ASTM A197 Cupola Malleable Iron
ASTM A234/A234M ; Pipe Fittings of Wrought Carbon Steel and Alloy Steel for
Moderate and Elevated Temperatures
15061-1 MOUNTAIRE FARMS -LUMBER BRLDGE
WWTS UPGRADE

Reference .
Title
ASTMA283/A283M.
Low: and Intermediate Tensile Strength Carbon. Steel ..:
REV A
Plates, Shapes and Bars
ASTM A536
'Ductile Iron Castings
ASTMA570/A570M:
Hot=Rolled Carbon Steer Sheet and Strip, Structural
-
_ASTM A572/A572M
High Strength. LOW Alloy Columbium -Vanadium Steels of
" REV B
Structural Quality
AWWA C200 ..
Steel Water. Pipe 6 Inches and Larger :: ' ..
AWWA C205
Cement -Mortar Protective Lining. and Coating for Steel
Water Pipe-74' hi. and L ftei-- Shop Applied
AWWA C206 :
Field Welding of SteelWaterPipe
AWWA:C207 ::
Steel Pipe Flanges for Waterworh6Services==Sizes 4 In.
Throug4144 In.
AWWA C208
Dimensions for Fabricated Steel Water Pipe Fittings
AWWA C209
Cold -Applied Tape. Coating for Special. Sections,
Connections, and Fittings for Steel Water Pipelines
AWWA C210
Liquid.Epoxy:Coating Systems for the Interior and
r:
Exterior of Steel'Water:Pipe
AWWA C214 '
::Tape Coating Systems for the'Exterimof Steel Water
W,
Pipelines
AWWA C600 .
Installation of Ductile -Iron Water Mains and Their . .
Appurtenances ..
-AWWA M11
Steel Pipe--A:Guide for Design and Installation
.. SSPC-SP10
Near -White BIast Cleaning
B. TESTING:
-, Factory testing shall confor
n to the requirements of ASTM A53, ASTM A106,'or AWWA
C200 as applicable.
i
15 061-2 MOUNTAIRE' FARMS - LUMBER BRIDGE
WWTS UPGRADE

PART 2--PRODUCTS
2.01 PIPE MATERIALS
Steel pipe_ and fittings shall be provided in accordance with ASTM A53, ASTM A106, or
AWWA C200 as specified in Section 15050, Piping Systems.
Steel for pipe fabricatedto meet requirements of AWWA C200 shall: conform to the
requirements of ASTM A36, ASTM A572, Grade 42, ASTM A570, Grades 33 and 36, orASTM .
A283, Grade D. Steel for ASTM A53 and ASTM A106 pipe shall, be Grade H.
2.02 PIPE MANUFACTURE
Unless otherwise'specified, ASTM A53 pipe shall be Type E, electric resistance welded or
Type S. seamless pipe as. specified in Section:15050.. The minimum wall thickness.for ASTM: A53
or ASTM A106 pipe shall be Schedule 40 for pipe 10 inch diameter and less and 3/8 inch for pipe.
12 inch through 24 inch diameter. Increased shell thickness shall beprovided where specified.
AWWA C200 pipe shall be straight of spiral seam. The muumuni wall thickness shall be 7
gage. for pipe 6inch through 24 inch diameter and 1/4 inch for pipe 26 inch through 36 inch. For
pipe 42 inch and larger, the pipe diameter to wall thickness shall not exceed 165 (D/t <_ 165).
Increased shell thickness shall be provided where specified.
2.03: CONNECTIONS
.Connections shall be as specified in Section 15050 and shall conform to Section 15085.
Coating for buried connections shall. as specified in paragraph 15085-2.06:
2.04 FITTINGS AND APPURTENANCES
Malleable iron threaded fittings and appurtenances shall conform to the requirements of
ASTM A47 or ASTM A197, ANSI B 16.3.
Unless otherwise specified, steel fittings and appurtenances shall conform to the
requirements of ASTM A234, ASTM Al05, or ANSI B16.11; and fabricated steel fittings and
appurtenances shall conform to AWWA C208.
Fittings for grooved end piping systems shall be full flow cast fittings, steel fittings, or
segmentally welded fittings with grooves or shoulders designed to accept grooved end couplings.
Cast fittings shall be cast of ductile iron conforming to ASTM A536 or malleable iron conforming
to ASTM A47. Standard steel fittings, including large size elbows, shall be forged steel conforming
to ASTM A106. Standard segmentally welded fittings shall be fabricated of Schedule 40 carbon
steel pipe.
pipe.
Unless otherwise specified, all fittings shall be rated for pressure and loadings equal to the
15061-3 MOUNTAIRE FARMS -LUMBER BRIDGE
wwTS UPGRADE

2.05. : PIPE LINING
A.": . CERAMIC EPDXY:
Unless otherwise:specified, interior surfaces ofpipe. and fittings shall be lined with a
ceramic-filled'amine-cured novalac epoxy, Protecto 401 as manufactured by Induron. of NovoCoat
SM000 by Superior Environmental Products, Inc.; for equal. The lining thickness shall be 46-nuls
i . minimum.
Pie a aration (including. solvent washing, abrasive blast cleaning) and application
... ... P. p.' P . { g. ... ..
shall be performed. by an applicator approved' by the coating.manufacturer, in accordance with
manufacturer's :instructions and under controlled conditions at the applicator's shop or the pipe
manufacturer's plant: Applicator shall subnut a certified affidavit of compliance with.
manufacturer's instructions and-requirem6nts:specifred-herein:
B. CEMENT MORTAR:
... ... ... ... ... ...
Where specified,'pipe and fittings shall- be.lined with cement mortar as specified in AW WA .
C205.: Fittings and specials'larger than 24 inch not fabricated fiom centrifugally lined straight
sections, shall require 2-inch by.4-inch by _1.3-gage self -furring wire mesh reinforcement for
hand -applied lining,
C. HIGH TEMPERATURE SERVICE. EPDXY:
Where specified, steel pipe and. fittings -shall be epoxy lined -with not less than 10 mils of
epoxy suitable for temperatures of 225 degrees: F: - Epoxy lining shall be 3M Scotchlcote 306, Porter
MCR 65 High Solids.Epoxy, of equal. Surfaces shall be prepared in accordance with.SSPC-SP 16
Near White Blast Cleaning, and the lining applied as: recommended by the manufacturer.
D.. GLASS LINING: (NOT USED)
2.06 PIPE COATING
A. EPDXY:
Unless otherwise specified, pipe and fittings shall be coated with a liquid epoxy as specified
in AWWA C210 with the following exceptions:
1. No coal tar products shall be incorporated in the liquid epoxy.
2. The curing agent may be an amidoamine as well as the other curing agents
listed in AW WA C210.
The coating shall be applied to a minimum thickness of 16 mils in not less than two coats.
15061-4 MOUNrAIRE FARMS - LUMBER BRIDGE
WWTS UPGRADE

B. POLYETHYLENE TAPE:
Where specified, pipe and fittings shall be coated. and wrapped with prefabricated multilayer
cold applied polyethylene tape coating in accordance with AWWA C214.:The coating application
shall be a continuous step operation in conformance with. AWWA C214; Section 3. The total
coating thickness shall be not less than 50 mils foi pipe 24 inches and smaller and not less than 80;
mils! for pipe 26 inches and larger..
' 2.07 -FUSION EPDXY COATING AND LINING
Where specified; steel pipe and fittings shall -be fusion epoxy coated and lined. The fission
epoxy coatin shall be 3M Scoichkote 203 ore equal. Surface re aration shall be in accordance
-
with Y:. g
�. P ' p
with SSPC-SP 10 Near White-Blast_Cleaning. ,The application method. shall be by the fluidized bed .
method and shall attain 12 mils minimum-dry`Min thiclaiess.
_Field welds, connections and otherwise damaged areas shall; be coated and patched . I
acco.rding to the manufacturer's instructions with 3M Scofchkote 306, or equal: i.
- 2.08 . JOINT GASKETS
Joint gaskets shall be as specified in Section 15075.
2.09 :. PRODUCT DATA
The following information shall be provided hr accordance with Section 01300
:. L . , Affidavits of .Compliance with AWWA C200, ASTM A53, or ASTM A106
as applicable.
2. Contractor's layout drawings as specified in paragraph 15050-2.04.
PART 3--EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION I.
A. GENERAL: ll
I
Pipe shall be installed in accordance with AWWA M11, Chapter 16. Welded joints shall be
in accordance with AWWA C206 and Section 15085.
Sleeve -type mechanical pipe couplings shall be provided in accordance with AWWA M11
and paragraph 15085-2.02 A.
Pipe lining and coatings at field joints shall be applied as specified in paragraphs 15061-2.05
and 2.06.
15061-5 MOUNTAIRE FARMS - LUMBER BRIDGE
WWTS UPGRADE
l

15061-6 MOUNTAIRF.. FARMS - LUMBER BRIDGE
WWTS UPGRADE
�f

SECTION..15062
DUCTILE IRON PIPE
-. PART 1--GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION
A. SCOPE:
.This seetio a specifies ductile iron pipe', -ductile fittings and gaskets.
B. 'DEFINITION:
...:Where cast iron pipe is specified, the term and symbol shall.rriean ductile iron pipe.
1.02 REFERENCES..
.1
This section contains references to the'following documents._ They are a part of this -section
as: specified and modified. Where a referenced document contains references to other.standards, i
those documents are included as references under this section as if referenced directly. In the event
of conflict between the requirements of this section and those of the listed documents, the
requirements of this section shall prevail. .
Unless otherwise specified, references to documents shall mean the documents in effect
at the:time of Notice to Proceed. If referenced documents have been -discontinued by the issuing
organization; references to those documents shall mean the replacement documents issued, or. 1
otherwise identified by that organization'or,-if there ale no replacement documents, the last
version of the document before it was discontinued.
Reference Title
ANSI A21.14 Ductile -Iron Fittings 3 In. Through 24 In., for Gas
ANSI A21.52 Ductile -Iron Pipe, CentlifugalIy Cast, in Metal Molds or Sand
Lined Molds for Gas "
ANSI B16.1 Cast Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings Class 25, 125, 250, 1
and 800
ANSI B16.5 Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings
ASTM A716 Ductile -Iron Culvert Pipe
ASTM C150 Portland Cement
AWWA C104 Cement -Mortar Lining for Ductile- Iron and Gray -Iron Pipe and
(ANSI A21.4) Fittings for Water
1
15062-1 MOUNTAIRE FARMS -LUMBER BRIDGE
WWTS UPGRADE,
,r

Reference.
Title:: ..
AWWA:C105
: Polyethylene Encasement for: Ductile-Iron.Piping Systems
(ANSI A21.5) ..
AWWA C110
Ductile -Iron and Gray -Iron Fittings; 3 In. Through 48 In., for . .
... '(ANSI A21.10)
Water and:' Other Liquids
AWWA C111 . '
Rubber -Gasket Joints for Ductile- Iron and Gray -Iron Pressure -
.. .. ... .
.(ANSI'A21.11)
-Pipe and Fittings
AWWA C115
=Flanged Ductile -Iron and Gray -Iron Pipe With Threaded
-'� (ANSI A21.15)
Flanges : .
AWWA C.150
Thickness Design of Ductile -Iron Pipe
(ANSI A21:50)
AWWA C15:1 '.-:
Ductile -iron Pipe, Centrifiigally Cast,.inMetal 1Vlolds of Sand-
a_.
.. (ANSI A21.51)
'Lined Molds; or Water'or Other Liquids-. '
AWWA C153 ..
Ductile -Iron Compact Fittings; 3 In. Through 12 In. for. Water
(ANSI.A21.53)..
and Other Liquids .
. AWWA.C600
Installation of Ductile -Iron Watei Mains: and Their
Appurtenances.
AWWA C606
Grooved and Shouldered Type Joints'
:PART 2--PRODUCTS_ .
.
2.01 .: GENERAL.
Pipe design, materials and manufacture shall comply with the following documents:
Thickness design
Manufacturing requirements
Water or other liquid
Gas
Gravity service pipe
Joints
Rubber gasket.
Threaded flange
AWWA C150
AWWA C151
ANSI A21.52
ASTM A716
AWWA C111 -
AWWA C115
15062-2 MOUNTAIRE FARMS - LUMBER BRIDGE
WWTS UPGRADL:

�a
Item Document
Fittings
Water or other liquid.. AWWA C110/AWWA C153
Gas ANSI A21.14
ai
Cement mortar lining AWWA C104
Polyethylene encasement AWWA C105
2.02 PIPE .
:Unless otherwise specified, ductile iron pipe shall be Class 50 and have nominal laying
.I
lengths of 18 or 20 feet. For'grooved-end pipe, wall thickness shall be minimum Class S3 except
where the specified pressure requires heavier pipe.
2.03: GASKETS
Unless otherwise specified, gasket stock shall be a synthetic rubber compound in which the
elast ' ar is nitrile or neoprene. The compound shall contain not less: than 50 percent by volume
nitrile or neoprene'and shall be freefrom factice, reclaimed rubber -and other deleterious'substances
Gaskets shall, in addition, comply with AWWA C11,1 for push -on and mechanical joints and with
AWWA.C606 for grooved end joints.
2.04 FITTINGS
...Unless otherwise specified, fittings shall eonformto AWWA C110. Ends shall be:flanged,
restrained mechanical joint, restrained push -on, or grooved to suit the conditions specified. The ,
AWWA C153 compact ductile -iron fittings in sizes 3 through 12 inches are an acceptable substitute
for standard fittings unless otherwise specified. Long -radius elbows shall be provided where
specified. Grooved end fittings shall comply with paragraph 150504.02 B. 11
J.
2.05 JOINTS
A. UNRESTRAINED JOINTS:
1. PUSH -ON JOINTS: Unrestrained joints, where specified, shall be the
rubber ring compression, push -on type joint suitable for buried service. Unrestrained joints shall be
the Fastite Joint as manufactured by American Cast Iron Pipe Company, the Tyton Joint as
manufactured by U.S. Pipe, or equal. This joint is not permitted on fittings or specials, unless other-
wise specified. Unless otherwise specified, joints shall have an allowable deflection up to 5 degrees
at specified pressures. Joint assembly and field cut joints shall be made in strict conformance with
AWWA C600 and manufacturer's recommendations.
15062-3 MOUNfAM- rARMS—LUMBER BRIDGE
WWTS UPGRADE

2. MECHANICAL JOINTS: Where specified, mechanical joints for above or
below ground service shall meet the requirements of ANSI/AWWA A21.10/C1:10 and
ANSUAWWA A21.l l/C1'11. Gaskets and bolts and nuts shall comply with paragraphs:15062-2.03
and 2.05 D, respectively. _
... B. RESTRAINED JOINTS:
1. :: GENERAL: Unless otherwise specified; restrained joints are required for all
exposed and buried piping. Unless otherwise specified, restrained joints shall.be flanged: or- grooved.
end for exposed service and push -on or grooved end for:buried service:
2... ° PUSH -;ON JOINTS: Restrained push�on joints. shall be as specified -in'
paragraph 15062-2.05 A.L, modified for restraint. Joints shall be the Flex -Ring or Lok-Ring Joint
as manufactured by American Cast Tron Pipe Company, TR Flex. Joint as manufactured by US Pipe,
or equal. 'Restrained. joints shall be: capable of being deflected after full assembly. ,-Joint assembly
shall be in strict. conformance with AW WA C600'and manufacturer's:recornmendations... No field;..
cuts:* f restrained pipe arepermitted .without prior approval of the Construction Manager:
... ... ... ...
3... ; FLANGE ASSEMBLIES:.. Unless otherwise specified, flanges shall be
ductile iron and shall be threaded -on: flanges coiifoiming :fo ANS AW WA A21:15 C 1 I5, or cast-ori
flanges conforming to ANSI/AWWA A21.1 O/C110' Flanges shall .be adequate for 250 psi working
-pressure..-Bolt circle and bolt holes shall snatch those of ANSI: B16.1, Class 125 flanges and ANSI
B 16.5, Class 150 Ranges.. Where specified, flanges shall be threaded -on or cast -on flanges
confotxningto:ANSLB16:1, Class 250.
Unless otherwise'specifiedanmis f , or flange assemblies shall!.
eonfoim with paragraph 15085-2.01:C:.Gaskets shall be'as specified in paragraph 15085-2.01 B.
4. GROOVED END:JOINTS:, Grooved:end,couplings'shall conform to.
AWWA C606 and'shall be Gustin-Bacon 500 Series, Victaulic Style 31, or equal with flush seal --
type gasket designed, for ductile iron pipe. Unless otherwise specified, grooved end couplings shall
be rigid joint for exposed service and flexible. joint for buried service. Unless otherwise specified,
i
bolts and nuts shall comply with paragraph Ik62-2.05 D.
5. -MECHANICAL JOINTS: Where warranted for tie-ins, and,approved by
-.Construction Manager; mechanical joint pipe restraints shall be positive restraint type. Mechanical
joints with follower glands that utilize wedges and setting bolts shall only be used at tie-ins to
existing piping or as approved by the Construction Manager. Follower glands shall be EBAA, Inc.,
Megulug Series 1100- or equal for ductile iron pipe and Series 2000 PV for PVC pipe.
Locked mechanical hydrant tees, bends and adapters air, an acceptable
substitute for anchoring -fire hydrants and valves to the pipe main.
15062-4 MOUNTAIRE FARMS - LUMBER BRIDGE
WWTS UPGRADE

i
C. BALL AND SOCKET FLEXIBLE JOINT PIPE: "
Ball and socl{et flexible joint pipe shaRbefihe boltless type, and shall allow amaximum joint
deflection of 15 degrees,. Each joint shall -be provided with a retainer lock to prevent rotation after
assembly: Joints shall be- the Flex-Lok Joint as manufactured° by American Cast Iron Pipe i
Company, USlflex.as manufactured by U.S. Pipe, or equal:.. ...
D.,:: BOLTS -AND NUTS:
Corrosion -resistant bblts and nuts for use with ductile izon 'pints shall lie high -siren
J gth, low ..
alloy steel.as:specifred in ANS1/AWWA C111/A21:11.
'Bolts and nuts for= submerged: service shall be as specified iri Section 15085. l
-2.06 PIPE COATING:
A.. BURIED -PIPE:.
Pipe and fittings shall be coated with asphaltic material, Specified in AWWA Cl S 1.
All buried pipe; and fittings shall be wrapped with polyethylene film in tube form as
specified in A:WWA C105. "
B.. .. EXPOSED AND SUBMERGED PIPE:
Pipe and fittings shall be shop primed and field coated prior -to final installation.
Pipe and fittings shall be prepared in accordance with SSPS SP-10 (near white blast) and
epoxy -primed:
2.07PIPE LINING
4l
A. CERAMIC EPDXY LINING:
Unless otherwise specified, interior surfaces of pipe and fittings shall be lined with a
ceramic -filled amine -cured novalac epoxy, Protecto 401 as manufactured: by Induron or NovoCoat
SP-2000 by Superior Environmental Products, Inc, or equal. The liiung thickness shall.be 40 mils
minimum.
Pipe preparation(including solvent washing and abrasive blast cleaning) and application
shall be performed by an applicator approved by the coating manufacturer, in accordance with
manufacturer's instructions and under controlled conditions at the applicator's shop or the pipe
manufacturer's;plant. Applicator shall submit a certified affidavit of compliance with
manufacturer's'instructions and requirements specified herein.
15062-5 MOUNTA(RF. FARMS -LUMBER BRIDGE
WWTS UPGRADE

B. CEMENT MORTAR LINING:
Where specified, interior surfaces of pipe and fittings shall be cement.xriortar lined in
accordance with AWWA C104. Cement shall be ASTM C150, Type II or.V, low allcali, containing
—� less than 0'.60 percent Aalies..
C. GLASS LINING:. (NOT USED)
2.08 PRODUCT DATA
. The following information shall be provided in accordance with Section 01300:
:1... Shop drawings.- -
-: 2. Alignment drawings.
3. Certifications specified in the following documents:
SI A21.14, paragraph 14-4.2 ' -
ANSI A21.52; paragraph 52-4.2
ASTM A716, paragraph 4.2
AWWA C110, paragraph 10=5:3:
AWWA Cl 11,:paragraph:ll-7.1
l.. AWW.A, C115, paragraph'15-4.2
AWWA C151, paragraph 51-5.2
AWWA C153 ara h 53 6 3
' ,ra
P gp _.�. ,
AWWA C606 ara a h 4.1.1.1.
P. gT p
PART 3--EXECUTION
( 3.01 INSTALLATION
A. GENERAL:
Piping ions specified on the drawings shall be followed as closely as possible. Proposed
deviations shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01300.
Pipe shall be installed in accordance with AWWA C600.
Connections to existing structures and manholes shall be made so that the finished work will
conform as nearly as practicable to the requirements specified for the new manholes, including
necessary concrete work, cutting and shaping. Concrete mortar shaping within any structure and
manhole shall be as specified.
15062-6 MOUNTAkP FARMS - LUMBER BRIDGE
W W'I's UPGRADE

B. INSULATING SECTIONS:
Where a metallic ionferrous.pipe or appurtenance is 'connected to feirous'pipe or
-appurtenance, an insulating section shall be provided as specified in paragraph 15085 3.05.
'C. ANCHORAGE:
Anchorage shall be provided as specified. Calculations and drawings for proposed . .
alternative anchorage shall.be submitted in accordance with -Section 0,1300.
-3.02 POLYETHYLENE TUBE
Polyethylene encasement shal l ' be used :for. all buried .piping.; Installation .of polyethylene
shall be as -specified in AWWA C105 and these specifications: Pipe, fittings; valves and couplings
;shall be wrapped. Fittings than require concrete backing shall.be wrapped: prior to placing the::
concrete.
The polyethylene tube seams and, overlaps shall be wrapped and.held in place by means of a
. -2-inch wide plastic.baciced adhesive tape. The tape shall be Polyken No.'900 (polyethylene);
Scotchwrap No, :50 .(polyvinyl), or equal. The: tape shall .be such that the adhesive shall bond {
securely to both metal surfaces and polyethylene film.:. Bedding and initial backfill for polyethylene
wrapped
wra epipe shall be a well -graded granular material which will not cut or damage the
. p
polyethylene tube during placement and backhlling. Sharp. angular material over 0.5 inch shall not
be used with polyethylene' encasement." - -
.. ` 3.03 ACCEPTANCE TESTING
Hydrostatic pressure tests, shall be conducted in accordance with Section 4 of AWWA C600
.-except that test pressures. and allowable leakage shall be as listed in Section 15050.
The Contractor shall conduct the tests :in the presence of the Construction Manager.
.**END OF SECTION**
I
I_.
15062-7 MOUNTAIRE FARMS - LUMBER BRIDGE
WWTS UPGRADE
i
IC

SECTION 15064
PLASTIC PIPE
PART 1:--GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION: .
A. .SCOPE:.:: ..:
This sectionspecifies.po.. f vin lc.hloride, chlorinated podyvinylchloride, po.f etiYlone 'and .
polypropylene pip' :and fittings.
B. PIPE DESIGNATIONS: .:.
For use in the Piping System Specification Sheets (PIPESPEC) in Section 15050 and in this
section, the following plastic pipe designations are defined:
Designation..: Definition .
- PVC : PolyvinylchloLide
CPVC ..: Chlorinated polyvinylehloride
_} PE Polyethylene
PP Polypropylene.
E 1.02: QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. REFERENCES:
This section contains references to.the following documents. They are a part of this section
�I as specified•and modified. -Where a referenced document contains references to other standards,
those documents are included as references under this section as if referenced directly. In the event
of conflict between the requirements of this section and those of the listed documents, the
requirements of this. section shall prevail.
Unless otherwise specified, references to documents shall mean the documents- in effect
j at the time.ofNotice to Proceed. If referenced documents have been discontinued by the issuing
organization, references to those documents shall mean the replacement documents issued or
otherwise identified by that organization or, if there are no replacement documents, the last
k
version of the document before it was discontinued.
J
Reference ` Title
ASTM D1248 Polyethylene Plastics Molding and Extrusion Materials
15064-1 MOUNTAIRE FARMS - LUMBER -BRIDGE
WWTS UPGRADE

Reference:
: Title.:
ASTM:D1:784
Rigid Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Compounds and...
Chlorinated Poly_(Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Compounds
ASTM D1795
.Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe, Schedules 40, 80,
and 120
ASTM D2241:
Poly. (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe (SDR-�PR) .. .
.ASTM D2464
Threaded Poly (Vinyl Chloride).(PVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings; - -
:Schedule 80
.. . ASTM D2466 , ..
Pol (Vinyl Chloride PVC Plastic'Pi e Fittings, Schedule 40 ... ...
y( y )( .. ) p g�
ASTM D2467
Socket -Type Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings,
.
Schedule 80 .
ASTM D2564
Solvent Cements for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic -Pipe
and Fittings
ASTM D2657 .
Heat -Joining Polyolefin Pipe and Fittings
ASTM D2665
Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Drain, Waste, and Vent
•
::Pipe and Fittings
ASTM D2855
Malting Solvent=Cement ed Joints with Poly (Vinyl Chloride)
... ...
.(PVC) Pipe. and Fittings
ASTM.D3034
Type PSM Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC)'- Sewer Pipe and
Fittings .. '
-ASTM D4.101
Propylene Plastic Injection and Extrusion Materials.. 1
ASTM--F402.
'Safe -Handling of Solvent Cements-and:Primers Used for -
Joining .Thermoplastic Pipe and Fittings
ASTM F437
Threaded Chlorinated' Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic,
•
Pipe Fittings, Schedule 80 f
ASTM F438
Socket -Type Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic.
Pipe Fittings, Schedule 40
ASTM F439
Socket -Type Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic r
Pipe Fittings, Schedule 80
ASTM F441
Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic Pipe, I
Schedules 40 and 80
ASTM F477
Elastomeric Seals (Gaskets) for Joining Plastic Pipe
ASTM F493
Solvent Cements for Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl Chloride) <
(CPVC) Plastic Pipe and Fittings
i.
r
PART 2--PRODUCTS
15064-2 MOUNTAIRE FARMS -LUMBER BRIDGE
WWTS UPGRADE
i

.2.01 PVC PIPE
A. PRESSURE PIPE:
PVC material for pipe.and fittings shall confonii to ASTM D 1784, Class 12454-13. Pipe and
f ttings shall either be in accordance -with ASTM -D 1785-oi shall conform to ASTM D224I for
.. ... .. ... .. .. . _
standard `dimension ratios: 160 psi pipe--SDR'26; 200 psi pipe--SDR 21.; 250 psi--SDR 17.
Pressure rating for pipeshall be in, excess: of test pressure specified in Section 15050..Neoprene..
I gaskets.with push -on joints shall conforin to ASTM F477. .
Schedule 80.PVC socket type fittings shall conforan to.ASTM D24:67. Schedule 40 PVC
fittings shall conform to ASTM D2466.:PVC solvent weld cement for socket. connections shall
meet: the' requirements ofASTM D2564. Schedule 80 PVC:threaded fittings shall conform .to .
ASTM 1)2464. Fittings.for gasketed'pipe shall be ductile iron.or steel push -on IPS-sized'pressure
fittings rated for use:with the specified class of PVC pipe. Unless otherwise specifi,ed,fittings: shall
be lined and coated in accordance with. Section 15061 or Section 15062:as applicable.
B.•. NONPRESSURE PIPE:...
�.
1;.:.. GRAVITY SEWER PIPE:_. PVGmaterial for sewer vivo and fittings.shall
conform to Class 12454-8, as defined in ASTM D1784: Pipe and fittings shall meet the require- .
ments of ASTM D3034 for SDR 35. Neoprene gaskets -with push -on joints shall conform to':: ...
ASTM F477:
2. - DRAIN, WASTE AND VENT PIPE: _ PVC material' for drain waste and -
vent pipe. and fittings shall conf6hn'to Class 12454-B ASTM D1784. Pipe and.fittings
� ��pp . , g. .
shall :conform to: ASTM D2665. Unless.otherwise-specified, connections shall: be solvent weld.
Connections to traps; closet flanges, and nonpiastic pipe shall be with approved adapter type fittings
.. designed for intended use. Solvent -weld cement for; socket coririeetions shall meet requirements of
ASTM D2564..
2.02 CPVC PIPE
CPVC material for pipe and fittings shall conform to. ASTM: D 1784, Class 23447-B.: Pipe,
and fittings sball be in accordance With ASTM F441. Neoprene gaskets with push -on joints shall;
conform to ASTM F477:
Schedule 80 CPVC socket type fittings shall conform to ASTM F439. Schedule 40 CPVC
socket type fittings shall conform to,ASTM F438. CPVC solvent weld cement for socket connec-
tions shall ineet the requirements of ASTM F493. Schedule 80 CPVC threaded type fittings shall
conform to ASTM F437. -
f; '
G 15064-3 MOUNTAIRE FARMS -LUMBER BRIDGE
WWTS UPGRADE
I
J

:-1
2.03 PE PIPE
i
- PE pipe:shall meet:the requirements of-ASTM D1248, TypeI1I, GradeP 34, Class C,
100 psi or as specified in Section:15050, whichever is -hi gh
er. Fittings shall be of the same material,
molded socket fusion for sizes 4 inch diameter and,sinaller and molded or fabricated butt fusion'for
sizes 6 inch and larger. Fittings shall be 125 psi or as specified in Section 15050., whichever is
higher. Heat fusion welding shall be in conformance with ASTM D2657.
PP PIPE
..: A...: PRESSURE PIPE:
PP pipe:and fittings shall be-formulated:of polypropylene conforming: to ASTM D4101,
SDR 11, butt fusion type. Pipe shall be 150 psi -rated in all sizes. Heat fusion welding.shall be in
.. .- ..
conformance with manufacturd's recommendation::. ... ... ... ... ...
B. DRAIN, WASTE AND-VENTPIPE:
PP diai , n, waste and vent (DWV) pipe and fittings shall be made fiom flame retardant r
Schedule.40, polypropylene (PPFR) plastic as -defined in ASTM D4101. Pipe and fittings used for:
buried piping and in concealed locations shall'be joined by electrical fusion coils energized by a .
variable low-voltage:power supply to completely fdse the interface between the pipe and socket. and
:
forma completely homogenous structure. Unless otherwise -specified, mechanical joint.fittirigs may . !
= be used under bench or in exposed locations where future disassembly is desired: The mechanical
method shall -be in conformance with the.manufacturei's recommendation. :
2.05 PRODUCT DATA .
The following information shall be provided. in accordance with Section 01300: l-
i
1'. Manufacturer's certificates of compliance with the specified standards and. T
Contractor's layout drawings.
PART 3--EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
Unless otherwise specified; PVC and CPVC pipe 3 inches -in diameter and smaller shall be
joined by means of socket fittings and solvent welding in conformance with ASTM F402. Solvent -
cemented joints shall be made in strict compliance with the manufacturer's/supplier's instructions
and recommended procedures.
For sodium hydroxide, sodium bisulfite, and sodium hypoemorite, solvenfwelding shall
be performed by installers certified in accordance with ASTM D2855-96. Use only IPS 724
weld -on cement developed for caustic soda and sodium hypochlorite services.
15064-4 MOUNTAIRE FARMS - LUMBER BRIDGE
WWTS UPGRADE

Unless otherwise specified, PVC pipe 4 inches in diameter and -greater shall be joined by
means of gasketed push -on joints and steel or ductile iron_ push -on or, mechanical joint fittings.
Fittings shall be lined .and coated as specified in Section 15061: or 15062.:.Unless otherwise .._ _-
:specified,:'PVC and GPVC piping exposedto starlight shall be painted with coating system.
�..
Connections to different types of pipe shall be by means of flanges, specified adapters. or .
:::
... transition fittings. Where sleeve type couplings are:used, bothshall be uniformly to in
accordance with pipe manufacturer's -recommendation. Foreign material shall be, removed from the ...
pipe iri#error prior to assembly.
Urilessotherwise specified; PE pipe and fittings 4,inch,:diameter and'smaller shall be joined
by means of thermal socket fusion and - pipe 6 inch and larger by therxirai butt fusion. Butt -fusion . :: . .
-j
f
joining of the pipes and .fittings shall be perforr red with special joining equipment"in accordance,
'Tensile
:With procedures recommended by pipe manufacturer: strength at yield ofbutt- fusion j oints
shall not be less than pipe. Flanged adapters sha11. be provided connection tayalves and. where
specified: ...
3.02' TESTING ... ...
Testing of plastic piping shall be as specified in Section 15050,
:,. .
... , . .. :: .. END OF SECTION*.*
*
f
1
t
15064-5 MOUNTAIRE T•ARMS - LUMBER BRIDGE
WWTS UPGRADE

r
1
L
SECTION 15067 :.
4I.
i
STAINLESS STEEL: PIPING ..
PART: I-mGENERAI
.. :1 01 DESCRIPTION : -:
A. SCOPE:
l
.-
This section specifies stainless steel pipe and fittings..
... B...: TYPES OF SERVICE:
. Stainless stccl piping- specified in this section shall :be used for above grout nd piping:
. _.
1::02. QUALITY .ASSURANCE:. ..
A. REFERENCES:
This section contains references to-the'following documents. They are a pant of this section
_ as specified and. Modified.. Where a referenced document contains references to other standards,
those documents are included as references under this section as if referenced directly, -In the event'
of conilict:b:etween the requirements of this sectionand those of the listed:docuaments; the
requirements of this section shall prevail.
Unless otherwise specified. references to documents shall meanthe documents ill effect
I.
at the time oiNotice to Proceed. If referenced docuffi its have been discontinued by'the issuing
organization, references to those doctuments shall mean the replacement documents issued or
otherwise identified'by that organization or, if there are no. replacement -documents, the last -
version of the document before :it was discontinued.
�-
Reference
Title J
ANSI B16.1
Cast Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings Classes
25, 125, 250, and 800
ANSI B16.11.80
Forged Steel Fittings, Socket Welding and Threaded.
ANSI B31..1
Power Piping
ANSI B36.19M
Stainless Steel Pipe
ASME Section IX (1989)
Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code; Welding and
Brazing Qualifications
tl
ASTM A 182/A182M -.
Forged or Rolled Alloy --Steel Pipe Flanges, Forged
Fittings, and Valves and Parts for High -Temperature
Service
15067-1 MOUNTAIRE FARMS -LUMBLR BRIDGE
W WTS UPGRADE
•
ti.
Y

Title
ASTM AI93/A193M: Alloy -Steel and Stainless Steel Bolting Materials for
:. Higl)=Temperature Service.-
ASTM A194/A194M : Carbon and.Alloy Steel Nuts for Bolts for.High .
Pressure aild_IIigh-Teiilperatuie Service::
AST M.A240 . Heat-Resisting-Cliromium and Chromium Nickel
... ...
.
Stainless Steel Plate, Sheet, and. Strip for Pressure
Vessels _.. -.
ASTM A276 : Stainless and Meat -Resisting Steel:Bars and Shapes
ws
ASTM A312/A312M Seamless.and Welded: Austenitic Stainlcss.Steel Pi
p.
es
... .
"ASTMA320/A320M Al1oy.Stee1 Bolting Materials for Low. -Temperature
Service.. a : ..
ASTM A403/A403M. : Wrought Aiistctiitic:StainlessSteel Piping Fittings:
..: ASTM A409%A409M ...: Welded Large. Diameter.Austenitic:Sceel PipC. for
Corrosive. or I-iigli Tcmperature Service
ASTM A480/A480M: "General Requirements- Flat, Stainless and
a ..
_i Heat -Resisting Steel Plate,: Sheet and. Strip ,
ASTM A774/A774M As-Welded.Wrought Austenitic.Stauiless Steel
Fi
ttings for General -Corrosive Service at Low and:
Moderate Temperatures ..
ASTM A778 Welded, Unannealed Austenitic Stainless Steel
:Tubular Products
- B.; -QUALIFICATIONS:
All shop fabricated stainless steel pipe and fittings shall be furnished by a single ilmnufac-:
tuner who is experienced and qualified in the manufacture and fabrication: of the items to be
furnished. The pipe'and fittings shall be shop -fabricated and field -installed in accordance with
comnion industrywide practices and methods and shall comply with these specifications.:
Only weld procedures which have been qualified underASME Section 1X.and only welders
who have successfully completed performance qualification tests per ASME Section IX on these
qualified procedures shall be utilized.
l
C. TESTING:
Factory testing shall conform to the requirements of ASTM A312, ASTM A409 HT-0, or
ASTM A778, depending.on the size and type of stainless steel pipe provided.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
I .
1 5067-2 MOUNTAIRU FARMS -LUMBER BRIDGE
WWTS UPGRADE

The following information shall be provided in accordance with Section 01300: f
1 Shop fabrication drawings showing details. of materials, piping, fittings,
couplings; dielectric'connectioris, joint -locations aird. details, types and.:
locations of supports.
2. Other data necessary to show conformance of the complete piping system to I_
these specifications.
... ....
PART 2- PRODUCTS
. . :2.01 PIPE
Unless otherwise specified in Section 15050.or on the ;drawings, stainless steel pipe 2-1/2-
inches and smaller shall' be 'type 3041., seamless, tlreaded joints conforming to ASTM A312: The
minini m wall thicluiess shall be Schedule 405.,
Unless otherwisespecified.in Section .15050 or on the drawings, :stainless steel .piping 3 -
inches and larger shall be manufactured.f1ornASTM A240 annealed and pickled sheets and -plates,
Type 304L, in accordance -with ASTM A778 or ASTM A409 HT-0. Only extra -low caibon:(ELC)
materials with 0.030,percent maximum carbon shall be used. Pipe shall be"manufactured to .:
noniuial pipe sizes as listed in ANSI 1336.: P9, Table, 2 and shall have the followingbohlinal wall
tluclaiess:
Nominal --i- Schedule--- -Wall tluckhess,
size, inches gage/plate inches
3-8 Schedule 1.05
10 Schedule 10S 0.165
:12 Schedule 10S 0.1"80
14-18. Schedule 10S 0.188 a
20 Schedule IOS 0.218
24 Schedule 10S 0.250 lY
36 3/16-inch plate 0.188
42-48 1/4-inch plate 0.250
54-60 1 5/ 16-inch plate 0.312
2.02 FITTINGS
Unless otherwise specified, stainless steel fittings, 2-1/2-inches and smaller, shall be
ASTM A403, of the same material and pressure rating as the pipe, threaded long radius with
dimensions conforming to ANSI B16.11.
1.5067-3 MOUNTAIRE FARMS -LUMBER BRll)GE
WWTS UPGRADE
I

1'
- UrZless-otherwise specified;:stainless steel fittings, 3-inch and larger; -shall be butt -weld -type
G - manufactured in. accordance:with ASTM A774. of the same:ltiaterial and in the same thicknesses as.:
the pipe. Long i�adiu's elbows up to 24 inches in diarrieteishall,be shiooih flow: All shorn radius, .
special radius' and reducing elbows. and long radius. elbows greater than 24:inches in diameter shall
be of mitered construction.: Reducers shall be straight tapered: cone -type. Tees,.ciosse', laterals, -
and ... .
wycs steall be shop-fabiicated froi�i pipe. .
2A3: JOINTS =
Stainless steel pipe fahricated into.spool pieces shaa11"have sliop�welded:cii rnfeiential butt-
weld joints or. flanges:: Unless otherwise specified, flanged jointsahall be _Van Stone joints made up
of stainless steel slip: type rolled -angle face rings and ductile iron backup flanges drilled to ANSI
B16.1: Class,115 standard: Tlie angle face ring Ahicknesssliall-be equal:to or greater than: the wall:;
{ of the pipe or fitting to which it:is: welded, and it shall be continuously welded on both sides to the
P p �
i e fitting. The angle leg shalt'not interfere with: the flange bolt holes. For submerged joints,
- .of ' g��� .
::.. ...
backup flanges shall be stainless steel, plate flanges. The:babkup flanges shall. be'supplied with the
following nominal thicknesses.. .
Nominal pipe _. 'Flange thickness,
size, inches.:: mches ...
3 :;: 1/2:
..
4
.. :9/16
T 6-10 5/8'
1246 3/4 .
18-20 7/8.
..
24-30: 1 '
-3.6
2.04 COUPLINGS
I A. GENERAL:
Fabricated stainless steel piping shall be shop -prepared for pipe coup' lings where specified.
-Unless otherwise specified, couplings shall be arched -band orgrooved type.
B. SLEEVE TYPE:
Sleeve type couplings, where specified, shall be of standard steel construction as specified in
paragraph 15085-2.02 A. Pipe shall be plain -end with external weld beads groiind smooth, to ensure
proper gasket seating. For pressure pipe lines, sleeve coupling joints shall be restrained by the. use
of harness rods connecting across the joint to flange lugs on adjacent flange joints. Where no
adjacent flange joints exist, stainless steel harness Ilugs shall be welded to the pipe to receive the
harness rods.
15067-4 MGUNTAIRE FARMS __ LUMBER BRIDGE:
WWTS UPGRADLi

i
d
C. ARCHED --BAND TYPE:::
Arched -band type: couplings shall be stainless steel of the same material and wall thickness
as the pipe and shall be Depend-.O�-Lok type as manufactured by Brico or equal. Couplings shall be
:Fixed--FxF,'Expansion--ExE,. of Fixed- by Expansio6--FxE as specified_ ar as"required. The pipe
-shall be'plain-end with external weld beads gr6und.smooth and with:S.S. restraining rings shop -
welded to the. i in for_iixed type cou lin s:
p P g.:.. YP. p .. g.
D. GROOVED -END TYPE:
- Grooved -end or split type couplings -shall be malleable iron or ductile iron as specified in
paragraph' 15085-2.02'C except that submerged couplings shall be the sari' a xiiaterral as the pipe.
.:The pipe ends shall be roll -grooved to the coupling anandfacturer's specifieations.".Where:toll
grooving is: in3practical;.the pipe shall have heavy -wall "machine -grooved pipe nipples of machined
rin 'collars full welded to the,pipe: pe or fitting.-: Ni les shall be taper -bored to the I.D. of the
" g Y ,! 1Nipples p
adjoining pipe to:allow full -weld penetration. Collars shall be welded on both.sides to the piping..:
Nipples and collars shall be of the saiiie alloy asthe piping.
E.: EXPANSION"TYPE: .
Unless otherwise specified; expansion couplings shall be.the flanged rubber arch type as
i
specified inSectiorn 15090. Pipe flanges shall be provided for these couplings._ I
`I
2.05 THREADED.CONNECTIONS " .
Threaded pipe, gage,. or instrunieint coruiections shall .be made using stainless steel, -
Threaded pipe, threaded half couplings Coi"nforminig to ASTM*A182 or'ASTM A276,. shop welded to
the pipe at -the locations specified...
.. _. ...
2.06 GASKETS _ "
Unless otherwise specified, gaskets shall be as specified in the PIPESPECS and in
paragraph 15085-2.03. For air, lines, gaskets shall be neoprene or EPDM'suitable for use at
temperatures to 240 -degrees F. 1.
,2.07 BOLTS k
Bolts, nuts, and washers for stainless steel flange assemblies and stainless steel couplings `
shall be the same material, conforming to ASTM A320 for low -temperature service and
ASTM A193 and ASTM A194 for high -temperature service. Bolts, nuts and washers for other
couplings shall be as specified in referenced paragraphs for the couplings.
2.08 PIPE SUPPORT SYSTEMS j
• " Y, 1
15067-5 MOUNTAIRE FARMS LUMBER BRIDGE
WWTS UPGRADE

Unless othei wise specifcd'.- all hangers, rods','.structural: attachments; and other components
of support systems for stainless steel pipe shall be of the same materials as the pipe and conform to
:Section 15096.:'-
-2.09 FINISH
era hav i nipleted -pipe and fittings shall be pickled and
Aft..r�all shop"pp ' tions e beei co'
-i' manufa6turer's pla"t and scrubbed and' shed until- discoloration and' possible iron
passivated n 11, ubb washed
picked, up from manufacturing proces.s.are removed. The-standard finish for 16-gAge throtigh 8-
gage material shall be No or 2B per ASTM A"48*0;. 3/16''inch. and=licavier;plaie'materia'l'sli'alI be
No.. I mill :finish or better. per AS. TM A480.
2.10 PRODUCT DATA::
Th e.
:f6ilowing1riformation, and data shall be provided in accordance -with Section 0 13.00:,
i d: h the following. documents: C.extifidations specife
ASTM A403, paragraph 14. 1::
ASTM A774, paragraph 14.1
... AS T KA778, paragraph: 14.1 ... ...
- ASTM A409, paragraph 17.1'
2. Test res.iiits:specified iiiparagtapli.15067-l'.02 C..­
elders.
1 Names and qualification records of proposedwelders.
PART 3--EXECunoN. .. . ...
3.01 PIPE CUTTING, THREADING- ANDJOINTING
Pipe cutting,:tfire'ading, and jointing sba.11 conf6fin to the fequireffients of ANSI B3 1. L: All
pipe threads shall be lubricated with Teflon tape
3.02 WELDING
A. GENERAL:
Piping with wall -thickness tip to 11 gage (0.120 inch) shall be welded with the TIG
(GTAW) process. Unless otherwise specified, heavier walls -shall be -property beveled and,have a
root pass with the TIG (GTAW) process followed by subsequent passes with the TIG (GTAW),
MIG (GMAW), or Metallic Are (SMAW) process.. Tiller wire of ELC grades only Shall be added to
all welds to provide a cross section at the weld equal to or greater than the parent metal. Weld
deposit shall be smooth and evenly distributed and have a crown of no more than 1/16 inch on the
I.D.- and 3/32 inch on the O.D. of the piping. Concavity, undercut, cracks, or crevices shall not be
allowed. Butt welds shall have full penetration to the interior surface, and inert gas shielding shall
be provided to the interior and,exterior of the joint. Excessive weld deposits, slag, spatter, and
projections shall be removed by grinding. Welds on gasket surfaces shall be ground smooth.
15067-6 MOUNTAIREi FARMS -- LUMBER BRIDGE
WWTS UPGRADE

B. FIELD WELDING:
Field welding shall be minimized to the greatest extent.possible'by use of coupliirgs and
prefabrication of pipe:systems at the factory. Pipe butt'welds may be performed at. the job site;
pioviding'the but welds are performed.only with an inert gas shielded.process and that other.
applicable specified welding requirements are rigidly adhered. to.
All residue, oxide, and 11eat stain is to be remotpved froany type df f eld weld -arid the
affected areas adjacent by.the'use of stainless steel wire brushes, followed by cleaning with an agent
such:as Eutectic Com an 's ' Eucleen;" or.e ua1 followed b com lete removal of the a . ... .
.. P..Y q. , Y P g 1
C.' PREPARATION OF -SURFACES .TO BE WELDED:. .
Surfaces of joints to be welded shall be free from mill scale, slag, grease; oil, paint, rust, -and it
other foreign material: Joints to be welded shall be wire=brushed with stainless steel: wire brushes
and precisely fitted before welding.
D.::: WEATHER CONDITIONS:..
Welding- shall be done:onlywhen the surfaces are:cornpletely free of aiiy moistre Welding
of the pipe shall not be done during
7 periods of high winds or rani; unless the areas beinguwelded are
properly shielded.
I
E.' TACK WELDS, CLIPS, AND OTHER ATTACHMENTS:
N. icks, gouges, notches; and depressions in the base metal in -the area of the joint shall be
repaiied before the joint weld is made. Tack welds, clips, and other attachments shall bexemoved
and defects repaired,.except where the tack welds occur within the weld area and these -tack welds . . l
do not exceed the sizeof the completed weld. Cracked tack welds shall be removed: Areas to be
repaired shall be ground to clean metal -and then -repaired by building. tip with weld metal.. The
repaired areas shall be ground smooth to form a plane surface with the base, metal. `I
F. DEFECTS AND REPAIRS:
Welds with cracks, slag inclusions, porosity, undercutting, incomplete penetration, or which
are otherwise deficient in quality or made contrary to any provisions of these specifications shall be
removed b chipping or grinding throughout their depth to clean base metal. Calking or peening of it
Y PP g g g g P g P g
welds to correct defects shall not be done. Welds found deficient in dimension but not in quality
shall be enlarged by additional welding after thoroughly cleaning the surface of previously
deposited metal and the adjoining plate. Weld deposits, slag, weld spatter, and projections into the
interior of the pipe shall be removed by grinding.
15067-7 MOUNTAIRF. FARMS - LUMBER BRIDGE-,
WWTS UPGRADE

3.03 MARKING, SHIPPINQ; AND STORAGE
All, i e: fifths s and'fabrications shall be Properly rriarked:with type, a e and. lieaf _
pP g, p p, Y Y1? ,g g ,
number. All fabricated.pipung shall have opeinings plugged and flanges seciired for storage and/or
u... ...
ransport after fabrication. Allfibricated°piping shall be piece -marked with identifying numbers or
codes.which coftespond to: the: Contractor's layout and installation drawings. The marks 'Will be
located on the spools at. opposite ends and- 180 degrees apart. Pipe spools shall be loaded and.
blocked and lagged as necessary to ensure protection:from damage during shipping:: Stainless steel
.:: pipe and fittings. shall be stored per manufacturer' s'recornmeindation:. Deists, gouges, and. scratches..
in stainlesssteel pipe and:fttings are no acceptable and are reason:for rejecting pipe and fittings.
3,04 FABRICATION/INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
The piping supplier during inanufacturing,.fabricatiiig and-haiidlingstages, and the ;.
Contractor during handling and :instal lation stages, sliall- use extreme care to avoid the contact of any
ferrous materials.with the.stainless steel piping.: All saws, drills, files,:wire brushes, etc.ahall be
used for stainless steel piping only.:Pipe storage'hd fabrication racks shall be' noriferroiis or .
stainless steel:or rubber -lined. Nylon slings -or straps -shall be used for handling stainless steel.:
piping. Contact with ferrousiteii�s inay.cause rusting of iron.particles.ennbedded in the piping
walls.:: After installation; the'Contracloi, shall wash and rinse all fore%gn matter: from. the piping
surface. All welded joints shall:be tieated:witli a pickling Solution brushed .with stainless steel wire
brushes and rinsed clean: If rusting of embedded iron occurs, tlie-Contracior shall pickle the
affected surface with Oakite Deoxidi?er SS, or. equal, scrub:with stainless steel:brushes, and rinse
.: ...
clean... :..
3.05 WkriNGS " . .
After: installation- the Contractor shall paint all:steel or iron flanges;.couplings, and
appurtenances.: Painting'of the: stainless steel pipe is inoticquired: -However; the Contractor shall be
responsible for supplying and installing the stainless steel piping with a consistently clean- surface.
Identifying spool piece marks shall be removed with paint thinner.or solvents And the -entire
stainless steel surface:shall be washed with detergent:and hot water and rinsed clean:
"END OF SECTION"
15067-8
MOUNPAIRE FARMS -LUMBER BRIDGE
W WTS UPGRADE

SECTION:15075
JOINT GASKETS
PART 1--GENERAL
.1.01. DESCRIPTION : :: . ... ... ...
This section specifies -rubber-gaskets for push -on compression type j oints used with
...
fabricated_ steel pipe, steel pipe, reinforced.concrete.pipe, concrete cylinder:pipe, and cement mortar
lined and coafed steel pipe.
1.02' QUALITY ASSURANCE.!
A. REFERENCES:
This section contains references to:the following documents. They.are a part of this section
as specified and modified. Wlieie a referenced document contains references to other standards,
those:documents axe included as references under this section, as if referenced.directly. In the event:
of conflict between the -requirements ofthis .section and those of the listed documents, the {
requirements of this. section shall prevail.
Unless :otherwise. specified, references to docur tints shall mean the. documents in effect
at the time of Notice to Proceed. �-If referenced documents have been discontinued by the issuing
organization, references -to those documents shall rhean-the replacement documents issued or
otherwise identified by that organization or, if:there are no. replacement documents, the last
version of the document before it was discontinued..
i
Reference Title
ASTM D395 Rubber Property --Compression Set, Test for
ASTM D412 Rubber Properties in Tension, Test for
ASTM D471 Rubber Property --Effect of Liquids, Test for
ASTM D573 Rubber --Deterioration in an Air Oven, Test for
ASTM D1149 Rubber Deterioration --Surface Ozone Cracking in a Chamber
(Flat Specimens), Test for
ASTM D2240 Rubber Pro erty--Durometer Hardness, Test for
B. TESTING:
Certified copies of test reports''indicating that the gasket material has been tested and that the
results of the tests comply with the requirements specified in paragraph 15075-2.02 shall be
provided as product data.
15075-1 MOUNTAIRE FARMS -LUMBER BRIDGE
WWTS UPGRADE

PART 2--PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
Gasket:stock shall be a synthetic, rubber: compound in which:the elastomer is neoprene. The
.
compound -shall contain no less than 50 percent by volume neoprene and shall be flee from factice,
reclaimed dubber and: other deleterious substances.::
2.02 :: PHYSICAL REQUIREMENTS
..
..... .
i.
The compound shall meet the followiiig physical requiiernents when tested'in accordance' .
with:thespecified ASTM standards::: ...
A.:: ..:TENSILE (ASTM-D412)::
The tensile strength shall be 1500-psi minimum aiid'the ultimate elongation, shall be
350 percent minimum. -
f .
-B. ;HARDNESS (ASTM 02240, TYPE A DUROMETER):
— ma
The compound shall have -a hardness -in the range of 35 o 50 for concrete spigots and S0 to
^f ..
65 for. steel spigots:
5.}:
Cl:- COMPRESSION:SET (ASTM D39ma
'The compression Set shall not exceed 20 percent when compressed for 22 hours:at 70
degrees C.
G ..
as
: The test specimens shall be circular dises cut fl•om the gaskets. 'Test specimens shall be
0.500.C+ 0,005 - 0.025) inches in height.' The diameter ofthe test specimen shall be that of the
gasket but not to exceed 1.129 + 0.010 inches in diameter.
D. AGING ASTM D573 :
The test specimen deterioration shall be less than 20 percent reduction in tensile strength, 40
percent reduction in ultimate elongation, and 15 points increase in hardness..
E. EFFECT OF LIQUIDS (ASTM D471):
The maximum volume change in oil and in water shall be as follows:
1. Oil: 100 percent.in ASTM oil No. 3.
{
2. Water: 15 percent.
15075-2 MOUNTAIRE FARMS — LUMBER BRIDGE
WWTS UPGRADE

15 075 -3 MOUNTAiRE PARMS - LUMBER BRIDGE
WWTS UPGRADE

E 150 S CTION. 85
PIPING CONNECTIONS.
PART i--GENERAL ... ...
1.01 DESCRIPTION--
This sectioir specifies'the following methods of connecting:!hetallic piping:. flanges.,":
:threading, mechanical couplings, equipment_connection finings, dielectric unions, and welding.--
Duciile.iron pipe connections,are specified in Sectioia 15062.. :
1.02- REFERENCES. ;
.. ;This section contains referenceslo the following documents'. They are apart of this -section- .
as specified andmodified: Where a'refeienceddocument coxitainsreferences to other standards,
those documents are: included as references under this section as if referenced directly. In the event
of conflict between the requirements. of this section and those °of the listed documents, the . .
r requirements of this section shall prevail.
Unless otherwise specified, references to documents, shall mean:the documents in effect
at the time of Notice to Proceed. If:referenced documents have been discontinued by.the issuing .
organization references to those documents shall mean the re lacelrient documents issued or
p
-otherwise. identified: by that organization, or;. if there are no replacement, documents, the last
' version of the document before it was discontinued.
Reference _.. ; Title.
f ANSI B1.1 Unified Inch. Screw Threads (UN and UNR Thread Form)
ANSI 131.20.1 Pipe Threads, General Purpose (Inch)
-� ANSI B16.1 Cast Iron Pipe Tlanges and Flanged Fittings .
ANSI B16.5; �P' e:Flanges- and Flanged Fittings .
ANSI B18.2.1 Square and Hex Bolts and:Screws Inch Series .
ANSI B18:2.2 Square and Hex Nuts (Inch Series)
ANSI B31.1 Power Piping
ANSI B31.3 Chemical Plant and Petroleum Refinery Piping
ASME Section IX Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code; Welding and Brazing Procedures,
r Welders, Brazers, and Welding and Brazing Operators Qualifications
ASTM B98 Copper -Silicon Alloy Rod, Bar and Shapes
ASTM F37 Standard Test Methods for Sealability of Gasket Materials
ASTM F104 Standard Classification System for Nonmetallic Gasket Materials
15085-1 MOUNTAIRE FARMS - LUMBER BRIDGE
WWTS UPGRADE

I
Reference Title
ASTM F152 •. Standard Test.Methods.for Tension Testing ofNontnetallic Gasket
Materials
ASTM F593 _ Stainless Steel Bolts, Hex Cap Screws, and Studs
AWWA C111- Rubber -Gasket Joints for Ductile -Iron Pressure Pipe and Fittings
AWWA 0206 Field_ Welding of Steel Water Pipe
AWWA C207 Steel Pipe Flanges for Waterworks Service -Size 4 in: through:144 in.
AWWA C219 Bolted, :Sleeve -Type Couplings for Plain -End Pipe
AWWA C550 Protective Epoxy Coatings for Valves and Hydrants
AWWA C606 Grooved and Shouldered Joints
AWWA Ml l Steel Pipe -A Guide=for Design and.installation
NSE 61 Drinking Water System .Components - Health Effects ' .
.. _.
PART 2-�-PRODUCTS
2.01 FLANGE ASSEMBLIES
A. FLANGES'.
.00 1. GENERAL: Flanges shall either be flat flanges or convoluted ring flanges �-
as specified in the following paragraphs:
2. FLAT FLANGES: Cast iron flanges shall be facedin accordance with: L
ANSI B16.1. Where companion flanges are used, the flanges on pipe shall be refaced to be flush
with the companion flange face. Class 150 and Class 300:forged steel flanges shall be raised face
conforming to ANSI B 16.5. Lightweight slip-on flanges shall be plain face conforming to AWWA.
C207, Class Band ANSI B16.5. Unless otherwise specified, steel flanges shall be ANSI B16.5,
Class .150 or AWWA C207, Class D. Class E AWWA flanges shall be provided where test
pressure exceeds 175 psi. Plain faced,flanges shall not be bolted to raised face flanges.
3. CONVOLUTED RING FLANGES: Convoluted ring flanges shall be -
ductile iron, forged steel or cast stainless steel, designed to bear on hubs welded to the pipe and shall
be as manufactured by Improved Piping Products, or equal. The flange joints shall be rated for not j
less than 150 percent of the test pressures listed in Section 15050 and shall conform to the
requirements of ANSI B 16.5 and AWWA C207. The flange manufacturer shall be prepared to
demonstrate, by certified pressure test that the flanges will meet these requirements.
B. GASKETS:
Gasket material shall be as specified in paragraph 15085-2.03.
15085-2 MOUNTAIRE FARMS -LUMBER. BRIDGE
W WTS UPGRADE t�

Gaskets for plain faced flanges shall e the ace type. T is ness s a e :1 me or
pipe 10, inches and less in diameter and 1/8 inch for pipe.l2 inches and larger, in -diameter. -Unless
otherwise Specified, gaslcets,for raised face flanges shall.match the_raised face and Shall. be 1/16 inch .
thick for pipe-3-1/2 inches and less in diameter and 1/8 inch thick' -for pipe 4 inches and larger..
C. BOLTS:
I
Flange assembly bolts shall be ANSI B 18.2.1 standard: square or -hexagon head :bolts with:
ANSI, B18.2.2 standard hexagon nuts.: Threads.shall be ANSI Bl.l,-standard coarse thread series;
bolts shall be Class 2A, nuts shall be Class 2R Bolt length shall conform to ANSI B16.5.
Unless otherwise specified, boltsmshall be carbon steel machined bolts with hot pressed
hexagon. nuts. Bolts for subin erg edservice shall be made:of.Type 3.16 stainless steel in::: :..
conformance.with ASTM F593, marking F593F. Nuts for submerged service shall -be made of -.
copper-silicon:alloy.b •onze conforming to:ASTM B98, alloy C65100, designation.-H04: or all
C65500, designation H04... Bolts and.nuts for buried service shall be.inade of noncorrosive -high- .
strength, low -alloy steel having the characteristics specifred'iii ANSI/AWWACl I1/A21 regardless
of any other protective coating:. Where washers are required, they shall be of the same material as
the associated bolts.°
2.02' MECHANICAL COUPLINGS
—..
A. SLEEVE -TYPE COUPLINGS.'.
Unless otherwise specified, sleeve -type mechanical pi.9c ouplings shall beSmith-Blair
...
Type 411, Dresser Style 38,.or equal-, with the stop removed from the middle ring.: Reducing
couplings shall be Smith -Blair Type 415, Dresser Style 62, or equal.: Sleeve -type. flanged coupling •
adapters shall be Smith -Blair Type 913, Dresser Style 128, or equal. -Insulating couplings shall be
Smith -Blair Type 416, Dresser Style 39, or equal.
Bolts for submerged serviceShall be made of Type 316 stainless steel in conformance with
�(
ASTM F593, markingF593F. Nuts for submerged service shall be made .of copper -silicon alloy
bronze conforming to ASTM B98, alloy C65100, designation H04, or alloy C65500, designation
-
H04. Bolts and nuts for buried service shall be: made of noncorrosive high -strength, low -alloy steel
having the'characteristics specified in ANSI/AWWA C111/A21, regardless of any other protective
be: the bolts.
coating. Where washers are required, they shall of the same. material as associated
I
Gaskets shall be as specified in paragraph 15085-2.03 and AWWA C111.
G
1
15085-3 MOUNTAIRE FARMS -LUMBER BRIDGE
WWTS UPGRADE

Plain end pipe couplings for pipe sizes 6 inches and smaller shall be Gustin-Bacon 200,
Victaulic Style 99, or.equal for Schedule 80 pipe and Gustin-Bacon 205; Victaulic Style 90, or equal
for lighter weightpilie. Plain end couplings for pipe sizes 8 inches and larger shall be Gustin-Bacon
:. 200, Victaulic Style 99, or. equal. Unless otherwise specified, bolts and nuts shall comply with
AWWA C606:
:Gaskets.shall be as -specified in paragraph 15085-2.03 and AWWA C606.
C.— GROOVED END COUPLINGS:
. Grooved_ end flexible -type couplings shall.be Gustiri-Baeori:10.0, Victaulic Style.77,.or
equal. Grooved end rigid -type couplings shall be Gustin-Bacon 120 Rigi-Grip, Victaulic Style 07
Zero -Flex; or equal., Flexible -type couplings shall be used for all piping greater than 12 inches in.
diameter; for pipe 12 inches in diameter and less .in rackmounted tunnel piping applications; and ..
for grooved joints adjacent to pump'or blower:'§uction and discharge where grooved couplings are
:used for noise and vibration control. All other applications for. piping 12:inches in diameter and less
shall utilize rigid -type couplings. Grooved end flanged coupling adapters shall be eitherGustin-
Bacon 154, Victaulic Style: 74:1, or equal. Snap: joint grooved end couplings sball be Gustin-Bacon:_ ..
115, Victaulic Style 78, or equal..Cut or rolled grooves are not permitted on fabricated 'or lightwall
pipe.
Unless otheiwise:specified, :bolts and nuts shall comply with AWWA C606, Bolts for
submerged: service shall.be Type 316 stainless steel in conformance with ASTM F593, marking
F593F.. Nuts for submerged service shall be made of copper -silicon alloy bronze.c6nf6r7ning to
ASTIM B98, alloy C65100; designation H04 of :alloy C65500, designation H04. Bolts and nuts for: ..
buried service shall be made of noncorrosive high -strength, low -alloy steel having the.
characteristics specified in ANSI%AWWA C111/A21, regardless of any other protective coating.
Where washers are required, -they shall be of the same material as the associated bolts. . .
Gaskets shall be as specified in paragraph 15085-2.03 and AWWA C 606.
D. ARCHED -BAND TYPE:
Arched -band type couplings shall be stainless steel of the same material and wall thickness
as the: pipe and shall be Depend-O-Lok type as manufactured by Brico or equal. Couplings shall be
Fixed--FxF, Expansion--ExE, or Fixed by Expansion--FxE as specified or as required. The pipe
shall be plain -end with external.weld beads ground smooth and with S.S. restraining rings shop -
welded to the piping for fixed type couplings. Bolts shall meet or exceed the standards for grooved
end couplings.
Arched band type,couplings, suitable for direct burial, may be used to provide flexibility
and expansion and contraction capabilities in buried piping systems.
1508 5-4 MOUNTATRE FARMS - LUMBER BRIDGE
WWTS UPGRADE

Arched-bandaype couplings may not be used on the following piping systems:
I..'Piping with LSG designations
2. Glass -lined piping systems.
'E. :EQUIPMENT CONNECTION -FITTINGS
Z Equipment connection:fittings shall- provide both lateral and angular misalignment
adjustment between equipment connection flanges and.the connection to field piping.systems by- .
providing individually adjustable flexible joints 'at each connection. 'In addition; equipment
connection fittings shall provide full pressure thrust restraint between the -field piping connection
and equipment connection flanges:
Equipment connection fittings shall. consist of -two flanged coupling adapters; a plain end
section of pipe and thrust restraint:rods and associated- fittings designed: to transmit thrust without
transmitting shear to the thrust restraint rods and,without compromising provisions for.
accommodating' angular and parallel ihisaligrimerit. Materials and: features: shall conf6hil to the:
requirements established in this paragraph:: ,Equipment connection fittings shall be Viking_
Johnson, Romac,.or equal, modified as specified, to'providethe required features:
Equipment connection fittings shall. each consist of a single sleeve of plain end piping
conforming to the requirements of the specified piping system of sufficient length to span,the
f gap between the connection at the equipment and the connection at the field .piping with gashceted
flange adapteriat each end. Thrust iestraint hall be provided by means of all threaded rod
spanning between flanges and male rod nuts. and female washers that are founded_ to provide a
ball-joint`type self. aligning. feature. All threaded restraint rod shall .project through flange and
mating flange coupling adapter bolt Tholes or through holes. in restraint lug plates that extend
above the flanges and are secured to the flanges with -a minimum of two flange bolts: Where the
all threaded rods project through flange bolt holes; ball joint type nut and washer combinations
t and lock washers shall be provided at each face; each end: Where. restraint lug*platesare
employed, ball joint.type nuts and _washers shall be provided. only on'the outside faces of the
plates and the nuts shall have a: self locking feature that prevents. nut movement due to vibration
or other operational or environmental causes. Double nutting with non -locking nuts shall not be
an acceptable method of providing -the self locking feature; Thrust rod diameter and material
shall be selected to provide sufficient freedom of movement through all bolt holes to allow
unrestricted maximum adjustment of equipment connection fittings to accommodate piping
misalignment without transmitting any shear to the thrust rods and also to permit full
development ofthrust restraint at all thrust rod tension take-ups. Design of equipment
I
connection fittings shall conform to AWWA C219.
Thrust rods, restraint lug plates, nuts, washers and lock washers shall be Type 316
stainless steel, all selected to develop full rated piping system pressure thrust forces. Dry film
_.r molybdenum di -sulfide anti -galling compound shall be factory applied to ends of thrust rods,
covering all threads subject to nut travel and tightening. Gaskets shall be as specified in.
paragraph 15085-2.03. Flange gaskets shall be full face type. Follower gaskets shall be
compression wedge type.
15085-5 MOUNTAIRE FARMS-LUMBL'-R BRIDGE
WWTS UPGRADE

r
l
Sleeves: shall be carbon steel or as specified for the specific piping system. Pressure I
rating -of flange adapters: shall equal or exceed the pressure rating -of mating flanges. All metal
:portions of equipment connectiori fittings, with the.exception_of 316 stainless steel components,
shall be coated and tuned with fusion bonded epoxy conforming to AWWA .C550 aud.NSF 6l .'
2.01 GASKETS
:Gaslcets'designated in Section 15050 shalI-be as follows:
1. EPDM: :ethylene-propylene-diene teipolymer.
... 2. Neoprene: neoprene.
3. Nitrile: -:nitrite (Buna N).
4.
Compressed-gasketing corisishng of organic fibers (Kevlar) and Noprene
binder; _ASTM F104 (F712400), 2500 psi (ASTM T152), 0:2 ML/HR j
LEAKAGE FUEL A (A8TM F37). -
.._
5. -Compressed gasketing consisting of organic fibers (Kevlar) and'SBR binder;
ASTM-F104 (F712400), 2500 PSI (ASTM:F152),=0a ml/hr leakage Fuel A ° 4f
(ASTM F37).
6. Qylon gpsketing,Garlock Sty.163500,2000 psi ASTM F152 0.22 ml/hr
Fuel A: (ASTM F37).
7. Gylon gasketing, Garlock Style. 5510, 2000 psi (ASTM F152), 0.04 ml/hr _
Fuel A (ASTM F37).
8. Gylon gasketing; Garlock Style 3504, 2000 psi (ASTM F152), 0.12 ml/hr
Fuel A (ASTM F37).
9. TFE: noncreeping tetrafluoroethylene (TFE) with insert filler.
10. PTFE bonded EPDM: PTFE bonded to EPDM in' full -face gasket having
concentric -convex molded rings; Garlock Stress Saver 370 or equal h
r
2.04 THREAD rr
Pipe thread dimensions and size limits shall conform to ANSI 131.20.1. I_
.I
15085-6 MOUNTAIRL FARMS -LUMBER BRIDGE
WWTS UPGRADE
i

2.05 DIELECTRIC UNIONS
A. DIELECTRIC UNIONS:
r
Dielecfric unions shall be EPCO, Capitol.Manufacturing, or equal.
B. .. . 'FLANGE INSULATING SYSTEM:
Flange insulating system shall be comprised of insulating full -face gaskets, separate or one- -
piece insulating sleeves and washers; as manufactured by:PSI, Inc.,'Faiwest Corrosion Control
Company, or.gqual.::: ...
2.06 COATINGS
.
Unless otherwise specified, flange assemblies and mechanicallype couplings for.buried
installation shall be field coated.
2.07 PRODUCT DATA .. `
In. accordance. with Section 01300; the Contractor shall provide for each welder, a welder
qualification certificate indicating the welder is certified for pipe welding in accordance with-ASME
Boiler. and Pressuie Vessel, Section IX: ' Each welder's certificate shall be provided to the.:: .
Construction Manager prior to that welder Working on the job..
PART 3--EXECUTION
3.01 PIPE CUTTING; THREADING AND JOINTING
Pipe cutting; threading and jointing shall conform to the requirements of AN. 1331.1.
4
3.02 PIPE WELDING
Pipe shall be welded by ASME-certified welders using shielded metal arc, gas shielded are
4
or submerged arc welding methods: Welds shall be made in accordance with the requirements of
--d
ANSI-1331.1 for piping Systems 8, 26, and 28 specified in Section 15050. Welds'shall be made in
i
accordance with the requirements of ANSI B31:3 for piping System 20 specified in Section 15050.
i
-
Welds for piping systems not specified above shall be made in accordance with AWWA
�kk
C206.
-..I
3.03 TAKEDOWN COUPLINGS
Takedown couplings shall be screw unions, flanged or grooved end mechanical coupling
type joints and shall be provided as specified. Flanged or grooved end joints shall be employed
'
.15085-7 MOUNTAiRE FARMS - LUMBER BRIDGE
WWTS UPGRADE

on pipelines 2-1/2 inches in diameter and larger.
Where piping passes through walls, takedown couplings shall be provided within3 feet of.:.
the wall, unless specified otherwise.
Takedown couplings shall be.provided within 2 feet of all valves, flow meters or, other
similar devices in either buried or exposed services.
For natural gas and digester gas services, a 2-foot long, flanged spool piece shall be -
provided in lieu of a takedown coupling :in classified areas only.
A union or flanged connection shall be provided within- 2 feet of each threaded end valve::
Takedown couplings shall. be.provided'at maximum 25' spacing to facilitate installation and
removal of pipe systems.
3.04 -FLEXIBILITY
Unless otherwise specified', piping-2 inches in diameter and larger passing from concrete to
earth shall be provided with two pipe couplings or flexible joints as specified within 2 feet or -one
pipe diameter of the structure, whichever is greater. Where required: for resistance to pressure,
mechanical couplings shall be restrained in accordance with AW WA MI.1, paragraph 13.10,
Tables 13-6 and 13-7. and Figure 13-17.
3.05. DIELECTRIC CONNECTIONS
Where a copper pipe is connected to steel or cast iron pipe; an insulating section of rubber or
plastic pipe shall be. provided., The insulating section shall have a minimum length of 12 pipe
diameters. Dielectric unions as specified in paragraph 15085-2.05 "may be used instead`of the
specified uisulating sections. Where copper pipe is supported from hangers, :it shall :be insulated .
from the hangers, or copper plated hangers shall be used.
Where flanged connections are made in which dissimilar metals, such as stainless steel and
carbon steel, would otherwise come in contact (coatings not considered), a flange insulating system
as specified in paragraph 15085-2.05 shall be provided to. separate the dissimilar materials. Full -
face insulating gaskets shall separate dissimilar flanges, and insulating washers and sleeves shall .
separate the bolt, washer and nut from dissimilar flange(s).
3.06 GROOVED END COUPLINGS -- GLASS LINED PIPE (NOT USED)
3.07 EQUIPMENT CONNECTION FITTINGS
Where shown, equipment connection fittings shall be provided between field piping
systems and equipment inlet and outlet connections.
**END OF SECTION**
15085-8 MOUNTAIRE FARMS -LUMBER BRIDGE.
WW9•S UPGRADE

Y,
SECTION :15090
EXPANSION JOINTS AND FLEXIBhE METAL HOSE
PART 1--GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION:
This section specihes:piping expansion joints and flexible inetaI hose.
1.02 QUALITY. ASSURANCE
A. REFERENCES: .:
..:This section contains references to the following .documents.. They are a part of this section.
as specified and inodified.:: Where a referenced' document' c6ntains:ref6fences to other standards,
those documents are included as references under this section as if referenced directly: In the event
of conflict between the requirements of this section° and those°of the listed documents, the
requirements of this section shall prevail.
Unless otherwise specified, references to documents, -shall meanthe documents in effect
at the time ofNotice to Proceed. If referenced.documents1ave been discontinued by the issuing
organization, references to those docui Tents shall mean the replacement dociuiients issued or
otherwise: identified; by that organization; or, if there are no replacement: documents,: the last
version of the document before it was discontinued.
Reference
Section 1.01 .. Title
ASTM A276 , .
Stainless and Heat, Resisting Steel Bars and Shapes
EJMA STDS
Standards of Expansion'Joint Maniif icturers' Association; Edition No. 5
"-'
B. SELECTION CRITERIA:
MThe
selection and installation of expansion joints and flexible metal hose shall be in
conformance with the expansion control system designed by the Design Professional, retained
under the -requirements of paragraph I5050-1:01 A, and the criteria specified herein. This
!
requirement, however, shall not be construed as relieving the Contractor of responsibility for this
portion of the work.
C. DESIGN CRITERIA:
="
1. GENERAL: Expansion joints shall be designed in accordance with EJMA
Standards for pressure, temperature and service as specified in the Piping System Specification
r
Sheets (PIPESPEC) without crimping of corrugations.
15090-1 MouNTAIRE PARMs -- LUMBER BRIDGE
WWTS UPGRADE

i,
1
2. FLEXIBLE METAL HOSE: Flexible metal hose shall be suitable for a: a�
line pressure equal to the test pressure listed in the PIPESPEC.
Live lengths for flexible metal hose shall be based upon the service J
conditions specified and a design life of 1,000,000' full displacement cycles.
3. EXPANSION JOINTS: Corrugated type expansionjoints shall be suitable
for a minimum of 10 000 pressure, temp_ erature and deflection cycles (non -concurrent).
1.03. SUBMITTALS
l
:The following submittals shall be provideddin accordance with Section 01300:.
1. Design and construction details of formed metal bellows type expansion
J
'oints. ..
2. Pressure thrust force and spring rm rate data for fornied:'metal bellows.
p g i
J
. expansion -Joints,
-3. -. Details for installation of all expansion joints..:
4. Listing -of all flexible metalhose applications.
.1
5. A copy of this specification sectionwith addenda updates, and all
referenced sections with each paragraph :check marked to show .
specification compliance or maiked to show deviations.
PART 2-7-PRODUCTS l
2.01 EXPANSION JOINTS
A. METAL CONSTRUCTION: ' f
1. FORMED BELLOWS TYPE:
a. MEDIUM TEMPERATURE: Formed bellows type expansion
joints for temperatures up to 800 degrees F shall have 300 series stainless steel multi -ply bellows i
rated for the specified design temperature and pressure. Test pressures are specified in Section
.15050. Each expansion joint shall be factory tested at the test pressure. Ductwork expansion
joints may be rated at less than 50 psig but must be rated equal to the design pressure and, in no
case, less than 2 psig.
Expansion joint design shall be determined by'Ithe amount and kind
of movement specified (axial, lateral, angular). Unless otherwise specified, end connections
15090-2 MOUNfAlRE FARMS -LUMBER BRIDGE
WWTS UPGRADE..

.:
= .
shall be flanged. Formed bellows: type expansion joints shall be as manufactured: by Flexailics,
Inc., Hyspan Precision Products, Inc.; American.BOA Inca or equal..
as
..
.. b. HIGH TEMPERATURE: Engine and gas turbine exhaust -..
expansion joints for temperatures up to:1300 .degrees F.shall: be the multi -ply bellows.type
designed for 15;psig. Bellows shall; be constructed of 300- series stainless steel. Unless :..
otherwise -specified, - end connections shall. be either the fixed flange or- Vanstone flange
+
configuration: Flange material shall be carbon steel for temperatures i 'to 10004egrees F: and
J
stainless steel for -temperatures 1000-1300 degrees F. Vanstone riiaterials and.flow liners; where
specified, shall>be'the same as bellows material: � -Exhaust expansion joints shall be Flexonics _
—
DEX Series ;-Hyspali. Series 2500; American BOA. Series 025E;'or equal.'-'
2. , STEEL EXPANSION; COMPENSATOR TYPE: Steel: expansion..
compensator type expansion joints shall be FlexonicsModel- H Expansion Compensator, .Hyspan
Series 8500,:Keflex'.7Q; or equal.: Compensators shall have 2-ply stainless steel bellows and
carbon -steel shroud and end fittings.. Compensators shall -be rated for'] 75 psi. maximumworking
pressure 'and 750. degrees F."
_.
3. BRONZE EXPANSION COMPENSATOR TYPE: Bronze expansion
compensator type: expansion j oints: shall be Flex'onics Model HB :Expansion Compensator,
Hyspan Series 8500, Keflex,7Q, American BOA Inc., or equal,. - Compensators shall have multi-
*'Iy phosphor bronze or stainless steel bellows and:copper tulle end fittings. Compensators: shall
berated for 150 psi maximum working pressure and 400 degrees, F.
vp
B. ELASTOMERAND FABRIC CONSTRUCTION;
1. - . GENERAL::: Elastomer and fabric -ex ansion joints shall be the -standard: p
=
spool arch type or the precision molded spherical design type as indicated or specified.
Expansionjoint connectors shall have control units (restraints) to prevent excessive axial .:
elongation and to accept the static pressure thrust in the piping system. Number and sizes of
control rods or restraints shall be as determined by the .manufacturer. Unless otherwise specified,
single arch and sphere type expansion joints shall have 6-inch face-to-face dimension for pipe up
dimension for 10 12 inches.
to 8 inches and 8-inch face-to-face pipe and
_
The cover elastolner shall be chlorobutyl, neoprene or EPDM. For
temperatures between 180 and 240 degrees F, the tube elastomer shall. be chlorobutyl or EPDM.
Neoprene or Buna N liners are acceptable for temperatures to 180 degrees F.
Elastomer and fabric type expansion joints used for exterior service shall
have ultra -violet light protection.
Elastomer and fabric type expansion joints shall not be used for pump
discharge piping and where surge forces.may be expected.
r
15090-3 MOUNTAIRE FARMS - LUMBER BRIDGE
WWTS UPGRADE

2. SPOOL TYPE: Spool type "expansion joints shall be of the resilient.arch
type -and shall be -standard or tapered_ as specified. Unless otherwise. specified, all tapered .
connectors shall be eccentric:
Spool type expansion joints shall be constructed of multiple plies of
woven fabric impregnated with elastomer and:reinforced with steel rings or wire embedded in
the body. Standard arch type expansion joints suitable for the specified temperature and pressure
shall be provided with retaining rings or:backup rings... Retaining rings shall be 3/8-inch thick
steel, split, eithergalvanizedor zinc shield coated. Expansion joints; single; multiple; or filled .
arch, shall. be Mason Style EJBN, Garlock Style 204, Mercer Style 500, Goodall Style E=1462,:
General Style 1025; or equal.
.. Filled arch type .shall be used on: all piping systems carrying fluids. .
containing solids. High pressure couplings suitable for 240 degree F operating temperatures shall
be Mason Style EJBN-HD, Mercer Style'510, Garlock Style204-HP, Goodall Style E-1489,
General Style 1.015, or equal.
3. SPHERICAL MOLDED TYPE: Spherical molded type expansion joints
shall be -precision molded of_multiple -plys of nylon tire cord fabric and elastomei suitable --for
-:specified temperature and3pressure.:Spherical. molded type: expansion joints shall have steel or:
ductile iron floating flanges, and no metal parts shall come in contact with the fluid, Single
sphere molded connectors shall be Mason Type MFNC, Mercer Type 5500, Goodall Type E- :.
611,.General Type 1010, Garlock Style 8100,. or equal.. Double sphere or triple sphere.
connectors shall be provided where re uiied:to rovide fox the specified movement.
p q provide P
C: POLYVINYLCHLORIDE CONSTRUCTION:
Polyvinylchloride expansion joints. shall be Celanese "Chemtrol CPVC slip type with-
Teflonimpregnated seal rings; Certain -teed -Fluid Tite PVC, Johns -Manville PVC double bell
expansion joint, or equal. -
D. TEFLON CONSTRUCTION:
Teflon expansion joints shall be molded TFE bellows and shall be Metraflex T-2,
Garlock Style 215, Resistoflex R-6905, EGC Style M-150, or equal.
2.02 FLEXIBLE METAL HOSE
A. GENERAL:
Flexible metal hose shall be corrugated type 321 stainless steel with stainless steel fittings
and shall be provided with stainless steel single braid, unless otherwise specified. End
connections shall be attached by the heliarc welding process using stainless steel welding rod.
Bronze flexible metal hose shall be provided for copper and brass systems.
15090-4 MOUNTAIRL: FARMS -LUMBER BRIDGE
WWTS UPGRADE

B: BRAIDED TYPE:: _ . ..
J. TYPE A: Type'A (stainless steel) braided flexible metal hose shall be
Flexonies Series 401M/402M; Fle'xweld USFWSS-31'/32, American BOA Series B; or equal:
... ... ... 2. TYPE B: Type B (bronze) braided flexible metal hose shall be:Flexonics:
Series 301, Flexweld USFVJB=31;'American BOA Series B, or.equal.
2.03 ... TEFLON.FLEXIBLECONNECTORS
- Teflon flexible connectors shall consist of molded teflon bellows and 1507pound ductile
iron flanges. The flanges shall -be -completely. isolated from the chemical by. the :riiolded tflon .
bellows, Integral steel limit bolts aiid.MoncLreinforcing rings shallbe provided on the
} connectors. The connectors shall -be provided with nonasbestos gaskets. ..The connectors shall.,
J allow for an axial transverse movement: of at least 1/2-inch, and an offset of at least 3/8-inch.
The connectors. shall be rated for a.pressure of 130 psi,.at:a temperature of 70:degrees T. -The
connectors shall be Metrafle'k Teflon Expansion Joint, :Garlock, modified as n6dessary-to provide _
:. the.specified features, or equal
Article IL' PART 3--EXECUTION =
3.0 L - =INSTALLATION .
.. ...
Expansion joints_ and anchors shall be located as specified. Location and number of
guides shall be determined from EJMA°Standards.
Expansion joints shall not be installed during times of temperature extreme or in a fully
compressed or fully expanded condition:'
Unless otherwise specified; expansion joints 4 inches and larger shall be furnished with
control rods.
.3.02 ALIGNMENT
Piping systems shall be aligned prior to installation of expansion joints. Expansion joints .
shall not be used to correct piping misalignment during installations. Expansion joints normally
preset at the factory for rated axial compression and expansion shall be installed in this preset
condition.
15090-5 MOUNTAIRE FARMS -LUMBER BRIDGE
WWTS UPGRADE

-3.03 EXPANSION JOINT AND CONNECTOR SCHEDULE
Expansion joints and/or flexible metal Bose connectors provided for.specific equipment:.
items or piping systems are specified on the following schedule. The location of piping system
expansion joints and design criteria, including temperature,:pressure and movement -for each
joint;: are specified on the drawings.
Expansion Joint. and Connector Schedule .::
Type. of Expansion
Joint/Connector
Tyivice
pe ofSe•. ' /Use- ++
Formed metal bellows; medium
-Boiler exhaust, hot water, high pressure. air, -and gas
temperature .(2.01 A.l.a)
and steel lines subjected to ambient.temperature. ...
differentials sufficient to -require expansion joints. .
- Steel expansion compensator
Same type, service/use as for " foirned metal bellows
(2.01 -A.2.) .. .
type expansion joint" except size of piping is.limited ...
to 3 inch diameter or less.
Bronze: expansion compensator.
Copper piping.
(2101 A.3.) ......
Elastomer Spool arch (2.01 B.2.)
Blower connectors and expansion_ joints for.piping
14 inch diameter and larger.
Elastomer spherical molded
Blower connectors and expansion joints for piping
(2.01 B.3.)
12 incli diameter and less".
PVC (2.01 C.)
PVC piping.
Teflon (2.01 R)
FRP.piping.
Bronze braided hose (2.02 B.2.) Air.conipressor discharge and -pump connectors for
copper lines.
Teflon flexible connector (2.03) Connection of PVC piping to chemical storage tanks
**END OF SECTION**
15090-6 MOUNTAIRE FARMS - LUMBER BRIDGE
WWTS UPGRADE

SECTION 15095
'PIPING APPURTENANCES -
..PART
1--GENERAL ...
1.01 DESCRIPTION.
A. SCOPE
This section specifies pipeline thermometers; flow and" level gages, pressure -devices,
` . strainers,:purge;water,control. units, steam traps: vents and drains, tapping saddles and corporation
stops/curb stops.
B. EXCLUSIONS:.
Temperature; pressure and flow measuring devices used for instrumentation: are specified in
Division 17.
PART 2--PRODUCTS
2.01 ...PIPELINE THERMOMETERS
A.GENERAL:
f Pipeline thermometers shall -be suitable for the following teriiperature:range:
J
y Piping Service: Temperature=Range Degrees.F .
HRR, HRS, HW, GLR and GLS . 50-300 .
MSG; IA, LSG,:DS and CS 0-200
-1 W and 2W 0-150-
Pipeline thermometers. shall indicate fluid temperatures within the pipeline to an accuracy of
plus or minus 1 _percent of thermometer full scale.
Pipeline thermometers shall be provided with threaded thermowell mountings, designed to
permit removal of the thermometer without depressurization or loss of process fluid. For insulated
pipes a thermowell with a lagging extension shall be provided.
B. BIMETALLIC THERMOMETERS: (NOT USED)
15095-1
MOUNTAIRE FARMS -LUMBER BRIDGE
WWTS UPGRADE

C: FILLED THERMOMETERS: (NOT -USED):.' . =I
2.02 FLOW: AND, LEVEL GAGES I
. i
A. ROTAMETERS:
Unless'otherwise specified, iotameters for purges and other low capacity services shall be
,Brooks Sho-Rate "50" Wallace=& Tiernan 34nch purge. meter,- Schulte & Koerting;or equal; with
integral needle valve and flow controller. Meter tubes shall be glass, floats shall be stainless steel,..:: .. .
and cases shall: be aluminum or. stainless: steel:' Unless otherwise specified, meter sizes shall be
-Selected so that the flow .rate recommended by the manufacturer of the purged equipment or shown
' falls within*the middle thild.of the meter scale. Units shall have a 3-inch i-ninunum scale direct Lr
reading in the units of flow.
Rofameters for high capacity service shall be -glass tube --type with a 5-inch scale and.:'
stainless steel frame. Flow range shall be as specified and scales shall indicate.the units.of flow.
Rotameters shall be- as manufactured by Brooks, Wallace& Tiernan; Schute:& Koerting, or equal:
B.' SIGHT GAGES:
Sight gages shall be 3/4-inch Penberthy 205 Series, Lunkenheimer Fig. 589; or equal,
'automatic water gage 'complete with pyrex gage glass and gage: glass protector, Overall length of ,
gages; type of mounting, and orientation of set shall be as specified.. a
C. FLOW INDICATORS:
Flow indicators shall be provided where specified: Each indicator shall consist of a bronze:
_body with threaded ends and a :sight glass' with rotary wheel. Pressure ratings for flow indicators
-shall match pipe pressure ratings. Indicators shallbe as manufactured by Jacoby -Tarbox, Schulte &
Koerting, Eugene Ernst Products, or equal.
2.03 PRESSURE DEVICES
A. GAGE COCKS:
Unless otherwise specified, gage: cocks shall be Robertshaw 1303; Ashcroft 1095, or equal.
The exposed threads of each gage cock shall be protected by a brass plug.
B. PRESSURE GAGES:
Unless otherwise specified, pressure gage scales shall be selected so that the normal
operating pressure falls between 50 and 80 percent of full scale.
C. DIAPHRAGM SEALS: (NOT USED)
D. CONCENTRIC CHEMICAL SEALS (PRESSURE SENSORS): (NOT USED)
15095-2
MOUNTAIRE FARMS - LUMBER BRIDGE.
WWTS UPGRADE
' I
r

I
2.04 , - . STRAINERS
A;-. AIR AND GAS :STRAINERS:
Unless otherwise specified, air and gas line strainers shall be Y-patter; cast iron:body, with
40.mesh Monel screens packed, with Everdui wool. -Bronze bodies shall be -provided -with copper
piping. Air line strainers shall be fitted with a brass blowoff cock:- Strainers shall lie Mueller;
Armstrong, or equal.
B. STEAM AND WATER STRAINERS:
Steam And water strainers shall be of Y: pattern, unless otherwise specified: Steam strainers:
shall have carbon steel body; water strainers.shall'haveeast iron body. Bronze bodies shall be -
_.
provided with copper:piping. Strainers shall have 304 stainless steel screens and tapped and.-:.
plugged blowoff connections. Screen perforations shall be.0.020 inch for steam: service. and
0.045 'inch for water service.' Strainers shall be Mueller,' strong; of equal:
C: FUEL OIL STRAINERS: (NOT USED)
2.05 PURGE WATER CONTROL UNITS:(NOT USED)
2.06.. :TAPPING SADDLES
Tapping saddles. shall be Ford Meter: Box Company model, FS202 or approved. equal.
2.07 . CORPORATION :STOPS/CURB STOPS
Corporation. stops/eurb'stops and -valve boxes small conform to AWWA 800 and shall' -be
maintained by Ford Meter Box'Company.
2.08 PRODUCT DATA
Manufacturer's product data shall be provided in accordance -with Section 01300.
I PART 3--EXECUTION
3.01 PIPELINE THERMOMETERS
Thermometers shall be provided for all -water and process stream inlets and outlets at each
j heat exchanger, heat extractor, and, chiller; where shown, and adjacent to process taps for.
- temperature sensing or transmitting instrumentation.
p r,
Thermometers for sludge service shall be provided at elbows with the process sensor
- oriented inahe direction of sludge flow.
15095-3
MOUNTAIRL FARMS - LUMBER BRIDGE
WWTS UPGRADE

. .Upon written approval by Construction M_ anager,jfilled thermometers shall be installed
where vibration or unstable mounting conditions exist. Mercury filled devices shall not be used.
3.02 1NSTRUMENTATION
.
Instruments shall be installed per Division 17 requirements.
3.03.. .GAGE TAPS
Gage taps shall be rovided on the suction and dischar e of pumps, fans compressors,
1
p g P p. P .
vacuum pumps and blowers, and as shown on the drawings.. Gage taps shall be 1-inch threaded or .
welded connection to the pipeline, duct or equipment with reducing bushing and'a 1/4-inch gage
cock.
3.04... 'VENTS. AND DRAINS
Manual air vents shall be provided; at the high points of each reach of pipeline where
specified,' or shown on the drawings. Air vents shall consist of bronze cock and copper tubing J
return: Mr vents shall be to the nearest floor with cock mounted 4 feet above the floor. Vents !
M-piping systems for fluids containing solids shall be 1-inch with eccentric plug valves'fitted with
quick couplers. 1
- Drains shall be piped to a sump; gutter; floor drain oiother. collection. point with a valve
mounted 4 feet above the floor; :;Unless otherwise shown, drain taps shall be 2-inch and drain valves
- ' shall be threaded end gate valves. When drains cannot be run to collection. points,°they shall be
routed to .a point of easy access and shall have' a finale quick coupler` on the open end.
. 3.05 FLUSHING CONNECTIONS
Flushing connections shall be provided where shown. Unless otherwise shown, flushing `I
connections shall be 1 %2- inch, with threaded nipple and plug valve. A 1 '%z-inch female hose
connection shall be installed on the open end.
15095-4
MOUNTATRE FARMS -LUMBER BRIDGE..
WWTS UPGRADE
1
i-

15095-5
MOUNTATRF. FARMS -LUMBER BRIDGE
WWTS UPGRADE

SECTION 15096
PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
PART 1--GENERAL
..
1.01 DESCRIPTION -
A. SCOPE:
1. GENERAL: .This section specifies harigeis.and supports for all.exposed .
piping systems specified inSection 15050. This' section: doe_ s not include pipe supports for Ere t
spriiilcler systems or seismic restraints. I
2. SCOPE OF CONTRACTOR DESIGN: The Contractor shall provide the
services of a "Design Professional" as specified in paragraph :110504.01 A to:conduct all necessary - -
piping and support design for exposed piping.
= Whether a design or general arrangement is shown or not; Contractor's
Design Professional shall design all pipe supports, anchorage; restraints' and expansion control, as
:specified.: Where a conflict arises,.Contractor's Design Professional shall present any conflict to..
Construction Manager for resolution..
The Design Professional's work shall incorporate design criteria and other `I
conditions as specified herein, in related sections and as shown on the drawings.
I
Additional -requirements are specified in related sections.
3. SCOPE OF WORK BY DESIGN ENGINEER: Design Engineer has
undertaken design details for supports and anchors for:,selected discharge and intake manifolds; 1
selected special installation requirements, and, selected piping 48-inclies.and larger..
Contractor's Design Professional shall incorporate these features into the Contractor's design. i(
Where shown, Design Engineer has also provided guidance in the form of
general arrangements that may include specific types of supports or anchorage details. In addition, i
allowable anchor points and load capacities for potential support structures are shown or otherwise
described herein. i
B. OPERATING CONDITIONS:
The hangers and supports specified in this section are provided to resist pipe loads occurring _
primarily in the downward (gravity) direction. For the purpose of pipe hanger and support
selection, this section establishes pipe support classifications based on the operating temperatures of
the piping contents. Pipe support classifications are as follows:
15096-1 MOUN*rAIRc FARMS - LUMBER BRIDGE
WWTS UPGRADE

1. Hot Systems
A:=:1, ' :120 degrees F to:450 degrees F
'A-2, 451- degrees:F to 750.degrees F..:
A 3. Over 750 degrees F
2. Ambient Systems
B.: 60 degrees F to 119 :degrees F.
3. Cold Systems ..
C - L L. 33 degrees F to 59'degrees. F ...
C:- 2. -20 degrees F. to 32 degrees F
C. .HANGER AND SUPPORT SELECTION:,
The Contractor's hall cause the pipe hangers and supports to be designed and selected by
.. a
the Desi ri Professional retained under the provisions of paragraph 15050-1.01- A 2:. This
g
provision, however, shalt not. relieve the Contractor of overall responsibility:for this portion of
the work. Hanger and support selection shall be base.d'on the following: .
..L The Contractor shall se.lect'pipe hangers and supports as -specified in the
project manual: Selections shall b6-based upon the pipe support
:classifications specified in MSS-SP 69, the piping insulatiori-thickness
- specified in Section 15250; and any special re q . ... nts:which m. ' be .
specified in the:project manual.
2. :: The Contractor shall review. the -piping: layout in relation to. the
(. surrounding structure and •adjacent piping and equipment'before selecting
the'type of support to be used at, each hanger point.
3. Where, a particular pipe support arrangement is. shown, a design
incorporating, that arrangement shall be used.
4. Where a. particular pipe support design is shown, that design shall be used.
5. Pipe supports, shall be.spaced such that pipe span deflections do: not
exceed 0.1-inch.
6. Pipe support design shall incorporate applicable criteria of ASME or other
recognized standard.
15096-2 MOUNTADZE FARMS - LUMBER BRIDGE
W WTS UPGRADE

1
. j
8.
Hangersand supports. shall withstand all static and specified dynamic
conditions of loading to. which the piping and -associated equipment may,
be subj ected. As a minimum, consideration. shall be, given to the following r
conditions: I
a.:.. Weights of pipe; valves, fittings, insulating materials, suspended
hanger components, and normal fluid contents.
b. Weight of hydrostatic test fluid or cleaning fluid_ if normal..
operating fluid contents are lighter:.:
Reaction forces due to test and- operational conditions.:
d.: Reaction forces due to the opezatioriof safety; relief, or other_
valves.
r
e. Wind,_ snow oraee loadings on outdoor. piping. I
f.. Supports shall: be designed to prevent transfer of the weight of
piping, valves and piping appurtenances to equipment piping I
connections. All supports:adjacent at equipment connections to
.piping systems shall .have provisions for vertical and:horizontal i
adjustment: Two flexible. piping connections not less than one
pipe diameter apart shall be provided between piping supports and.
any equipment piping connection.
10.
Hangers and supports shall be sized to fit the outside diameter of pipe,
tubing; or, where specified; the outside diaii�eter of insulation.:;
11.
Where negligible movement occurs at hanger locations, rod hangers=shall
be used for suspended lines, wherever practical. For piping supported
from below, bases, brackets. or structural cross members shall be used. f
12.
Hangers for the suspension of size 2 1/2 inches and larger pipe and tubing
shall be capable of vertical hanger component adjustment under. load.
J
13.
..
The supporting systems shall provide for and control the free or intended
movement of the piping including its movement in relation to that of
connected equipment.
14.
Where there is horizontal movement at a suspended type hanger location,
hanger components shall be selected to allow for swing. The vertical
angle of the hanger rod shall not, at any time, exceed 4 degrees.
15.
There shall be no contact between a pipe and hanger or support component i
of dissimilar metals. Prevent contact between dissimilar metals when
supporting copper tubing by use of copper -plated, rubber, plastic or vinyl
coated, or stainless steel hanger and support components.
15096-3 MOUNTAIRE FARMS - LUMBER BRIDGE
WWTS UPGRADE
1
�f

16.
Stock hanger and support componentsshall be used.wherever.practical.
-17:.
Fiberglass framing channel shall.be provided where specified.::
The following
structural criteria,:shall also be applied::
L
Unless otherwise specified; existing pipes and supports shall not be used.
..
to support new piping.
2
Unless otherwise specified, pipe: Support components. shall not be attached
to pressure,vessels..
3.. '
Where critical support Load requirements have -been identified, limiting
structural load requirements are shown.
4.
Pipe support hangers;:brackets etc. shall be of suitable capacity and. shall
be appropriate to the individual shlictural nieinber that is used to 'support.
_.
the pipe.
5.
The structural integrity. of existing and new. members. shall in no waybe .
impacted bythe.placement. of connections for.pipe supports. For example,
'
the tension reinforcement in reinforced concrete methbers shall not be-
:: impacted in: any way by the placement :of fasteners- for pipe supports::
6.
Spacing and arrangement of han ers su potting pipe shall be provided in:.
p g � g pp. gPP
such a manner that the loads fibre the.pipes on existing and new structural
members shall be quasi -uniform.. These quasi -uniform loads shall not
r
exceed the allowable design loads for mechanical equi ment as _shown on: , ..
p
existing (not necessarily contract) drawings and as. listed under Design . ' i
Live Loads;in the General Notes.
--� 7.
For new construction,,unless otherwise shown -:pipe maybe supported
'from nearest structural element'(floor; ceiling, or. wall). The -Design Loads
for mechanical equipment, as listed in the General Notes sheet of the
Structural drawings shall not be exceeded.
8.
The loads and specific attachment requirements for pipe supports on new
concrete Tees shall be coordinated with the Tee manufacturer and
incorporated: into the design of the Tees.
i 9.
Unless. otherwise specified, pipe supports from existing Tees or other roof
types shall not be constructed without an evaluation of capacity and
- i
appropriate design from Contractor's Design Professional.
The following, project -specific criterion shall also,be applied:
i 1.
The spacing for pipe hangers shall not -be less than S feet and shall not
exceed 375 lbs of load for all existing:pre-cast, Double Tee roof elements.
15 096-4 MOUNTAIRE FARMS - LUMBER BRIDGE
WWTS UPGRADE

For hangers off flanges of existing Tees, a washer shall be provided
l
having minimum dimensions of 1/4 inch thick -by 4 inch long and inch
wide. The design and:projectiori ofthose hangers above the roof shall be:
coordinated with the architectural roofing system.
2. ' For -.sodium hydroxide systems, pipe. supports shall be: 60. percent closer ---
than the maximum spacing indicated for plastic piping for water service.
... 1,02 _.:QUALITY ASSURANCE
A:: REFERENCES
vw_.
= ; This section contains references. to the:following -documents.: They area part of this. section:
as specified and modified. Where a referenced document contains references to other -standards,.
those documents are included as references under this section as if referenced directly. -:In the.event
of conflict between the requirements of this section and those of the: listed documents, the
requirements of this section shall prevail..
Unless refereinces to
ts shall
at the tinne ofNotice for Proceed. redf referenced document nhave been ediscon discontinue by the, issuing : ..
organization, references 'to those documents shall mean the replacement documents. issued or. '
otherwise identified by that organization or, if there are no replacement documents; the last:
version of the document. before it was discontinued.
Reference Title
4I
AISC Manual of Steel American Institute of Steel Construction' Manual of
Construction Steel Construction; Allowable Stress Design - 9fh Ed.
FEDSPEC WW-H-171e-78 Hangers and; Supports,, Pi
g pP e p
MFMA-2-91 Metal Framing Standards Publication
MSS SP-69-91 Pipe Hangers and Supports -Selection and
Application
MSS SP-58-93 Pipe Hangers and Supports Materials; Design and
Manufacture
B. DESIGN:
The Contractor shall cause the design of pipe hanger and support systems to be developed
in conjunction with preparation of the design seismic restraints and expansion control system by
the Design Professional selected in accordance with Paragraph 15050-1.01 A. The pipe system
drawings specified in paragraph 15050-2.04 shall show the hanger and support locations as well
as the details of the seismic restraints and expansion control systems. The pipe hanger and
support design drawings and calculations shall be prepared and signed by the design professional
and shall bear the Design Professional's registration seal.
15096-5 MOUNTAIRE FARMS - LUMBER BRIDGE
WWTS UPGRADE

is
PART 2--PRODUCTS
2.01 ACCEPTABLE PRODUCTS .
Standard pipe supports and components; shall be r ianufactured. by B-Line,_ Carpenter.&
Patterson, Kin -Line, Grinnell, Michigan, Pipe'Shields Incorporated, Superstclit, Unistrut, or equal.
,Pipe support components shall. conform to=the requirements of:MSS SP-69 and FEDSPEC WW-H
= 171 e..: Pipe support materials steal l conform to .the requirements of MS S SP-58. Metalframing
System componentsshall:conform to -the metal framing manufacturers' Association Standard`
MFMA-2;
: 2.02 - MATERIALS
A-:. .. GENERAL:
Unless otherwise specified,-pipehangers and suppoils,,structural attachtn"ents, fittings ,and:
accessories -shall be hot -dip or mechanically galvanized after fabrication Nuts, bolts and washers
maybe zinc-platedexcept for those subject to moisture or corrosive atmosphere, as specified in
f. paragraph 16000-1:05 B as shown 6'' the drawings, which shall be type FRP of 304 stainless steel..: --.
B. = PIPE DANGERS AND SUPPORTS:
1. TYPE 1. - CLEVIS PIPE HANGER: Clevis hangers shall be carbon steel
:with configuration an components equivalent to MSS and FEDSPEC Type,1.
a. : Steel pipe (insulated) - shall be B-Line B3100 Grinnell Fig. 260, or::
equal, with jnsulation d shield;
b. : Steel pipe (uninsulated) - shall be B-Line B3100, Grinnell•Fig. 260,. .
or equal.
I c. Cast and ductile iron pipe - shall be B-Line B3102, Grinnell, Fig. 590, or equal.
Vryi . d. Copper pipe (uninsulated) - shall be B-Line B3104.CT, Grinnell Fig.
CT-65, or equal..
e. Copper pipe (insulated) - shall be B-Line 133100, Grinnell Fig. 260,
_J or equal, with insulation shield.
` f. Plastic pipe - shall be B-Line B3100 C, Carpenter & Patterson Fig.
100PVC, or equal.
~! 2. TYPE 2 "I" PIPE HANGER: Hangers shall be carbon steel with
configuration and components equivalent to MSS Type 5.
15096-6 MOUNTAllLE FARMS -LUMBER BRIDGE
WWTS UPGRADE
I

1
a. -" Steel pipe - shall, be B-Line B3690, Grinnell Fig.:67, Michigan
model 418, or equal.
b. - Copper and plastic pipe - shall be Michigan model 419 Unistrut J
1205N series, or: equal. .. ...
: 3. TYPE 3: _ DOUBLE BOLT PIPE CLAMP: Pipe .clamp shall be carbon '
steel, with configuration and components equivalent to MSS and FEDSPEC Type 3.
- a. Steel pipe (insulated) - shall be B-Line B3144, Grinnell'Fig, 295;-or a
- equal, with insulation shield. Insulation shield is optional for hot and
ambient. systems. '..
b Steel pipe (uninsulated)"-: shall be B-Line B3144, Grinnell Fig. 295,
or equal:
C. Copper pipe (insulated only) - shall be B-Line B3144, Grinnell.
:Fig. 295, or equal, with insulation shield.
4. TYPE 4 - ADJUSTABLE ROLLER HANGER: Rollers shall be cast iron;
yoke and cross bolt shall:be carbon steel.. Configuration and components shall be equivalent to
MSS Type 43 and FEDSPEC Type-44."
a. - ine 110, Grinnell Fig. 181; or
_.. Steel pipe:{insuiatedj shall be B-I,' B3
equal; with insulation shield. J
b. Steel pipe (uninsulated). -shall be B-Line B3.110, Grinnell Fig. 181,
or equal....
C. Copper pipe (insulated only) - shall be R-Line B3110, Grinnell Fig.
181, or equal; with insulation shield. ~I
d. Plastic pipe - shall be B-Line B3110, Grinnell Fig. 181, or, equal.
5. TYPE 5 - SINGLE PIPE ROLL: Rollers and sockets shall be cast iron,
cross rod shall be steel. Configuration and components shall be equivalent to MSS Type 41 and
FEDSPEC Type 42. �.
a. Steel pipe (insulated) - shall be B-Line B3114, Grinnell Fig. 171, or
equal, with insulation shield.
b. Steel pipe (uninsulated) - shall be B-Lhie B3114, Grinnell Fig. 171, I
or equal. '1
C. Plastic pipe - shall be B-Line B3114, Grinnell Fig. 171, or equal. i4 _
i
15096-7 MOUNTAIRE FARMS - LUMBER BRIDGE
WWTS UPGRADE

is
6..: - TYPE 6 - FRAMING CHANNEL PIPE CLAMP: Pipe clamps shall be steel.- -
with galvanized finish and material:thickness as listed below:
" a.. Steel pipe (uninsulated) - Pipe size 3/8 inch and I/2 inch shallbe 16
.. gage; 3/4 inch through 1 1/4 inches shallbe 14 gage; 1 1/2 inches
through 3 inches shall be 12 gage;.31/2 inches through 5 inches shall
be l :I gage;: 6 and 8 inches shall be -10 gage; Michigan model 431; ::
Powestrut PS 1:100, Unistrut P 1109 series, or equal.
. b. Steel I e nlSulated -Pipe clam shall be, as described inparagraph
as
1? ..
115096-2.02' B.6.a with insulation shield.
..
c. Copper (uninsulated)- arid' plastic pipe - Pipe size 3/8-inch and 1 inch
= shall be 16:gage; 1-1/4 inches arid-1-1/2 inches shallbe 14 gage;
2 inches through.3-inches.shall be 12 gage; 4 inches shall .be 11 gage;
clamp:shall be copper -plated; plastic'coated or lined with dielectric: .
material Michi an model 432, Powersirut:PS 1200 Unistrut P : -
... ._. ; _.. l ... _ _. _ . ... ...
_ 1024C and P 2024PC'series, or'equal.. .
d. Co er pipe insulated Pipe clam shall be as described in
Cop: p p. { ).- p p
paragraph 15096-2.02 B:6.a with insulation shield..-:'
i T TYPE 7 - U-BOLT: U- bolts. shall be..carbori steel- with corif guration= -
equivalent:to:MSS and FEDSPEC.Type 24:
a.: Steel Oi e uninsulated shall be Grinnell Fig.: 137 B-Line B3188,
or equal.
b. _ Steel pipe (insulated) - shallbe Grinnell Fig. 137, B-Line.133188, or.. .
equal, with insulation shield.
'Cast and ductile iron pipe - shall be Grinnell Fig. 137, B-Line B3188,
`a or equal..
d. Copper pipe (uninsulated) - shall be Carpenter & Patterson Fig. 222
CT, B-Line B3501 CT, Grinnell Fig. 137C, or equal.
e. Copper pipe (insulated) - shall be Grinnell.Fig.137, B-Line B3188,
-} or equal, with insulation shield.
f. Plastic pipe - shall be Grinnell Fig. 137C, Michigan model 151, B-
- Line B3188 C, or equal.
8. TYPE 8 - ADNSTABLE PIPE ROLL SUPPORT: Rollers and sockets
shall be cast iron, cross rod and -support rods shall be carbon steel.
15096-8 MOUNTAM FARMS — LUMBER BRIDGE
WWTS UPGRADE

a.. Steel pipe (insulated) - shall be B-Line: B3122, Grinnell Fig. 177, or
equal, With insulation shield.
b. Steel pipe (iminsulated) shall be B-Line B3122, Grinnell Fig. 177,
or equal. .
- C. Copper pipe e insulated Only) g. p (' y) -shall be B-Line B3122, Grinnell Fi ,
177, or equal, with insulation shield...
d., Plastic pipe - shall be B=Line 1331-22, Grinnell Fig. 177, or equal:
9. TYPE 9 -WELDED PIPE -STANCHION: Minunum material thickness
pipe;- Pip
shall be standard schedule carbon steel i e .cut to match contour of the pipe elbow. Use of this.
Support shall lie limited to ambient systems only.
10. TYPE 1.0 - PIPE STANCHION SADDLE:: Saddles and yokes shallbe
carbon steel.and comply with MSS.Type:37 and FEDSPEC Type 38. Type:10 supports shall -not be
used in.thrust restraint (e.g. pump discharge elbow) service. . !
_.
I
a. Steel pipe (insulated) - shall be Carpenter_ & Patterson Fig. 125, B-
.Line 133090, or equal, with insulation shield.- `I
b.: Steel pipe (uninsulated) -_shall be Carpenter & Patterson Fig.* 125, B=
- Lime 133090, or equal.:
c. Cast and ductile iron pipe - shall be Carpenter & Patterson Fig. 125,
B�.Line 133090 NS, or equal.
d. Copper pipe (unirisulated) - shall be Carpenter &-Patterson Fig. 125, l
B-Line 133090; or equal, with insulation shield or lined with L�
dielectric material.
e. Copper pipe (insulated) - shall be Carpenter & Patterson Fig. 125, B-
Line B3090, or equal, with insulation shield. -
f. Plastic pipe - shall be Carpenter & Patterson Fig. 125, B-Line 133090,
or equal.
11. TYPE 11 - OFFSET PIPE CLAMP: Pipe clamp shall be carbon steel with
configuration and components as specified and shall be of standard design manufactured by,a pipe
hanger component manufacturer.
a. Steel pipe (insulated) - shall be B-Line B3148, Grinnell Fig. 103, or I .
equal, with insulation shield.
t_
15096-9 MOUNTAIRE FARMS-LUMBRR BRIDGE
WWTS UPGRADE
1
I

b. Steel pipe (uninsulated) -. shall be B-Line B3.148, Grinnell Fig:103,
or equal.
c. Cast and ductile iron pipe - shall be B-Line B3148 NS;- Gunnell Fig.
103; or equal:
... ... ..
Copper pipe .(insulated) -shall be.B=Line B3148, Grinnell Fig. 103;
:or equal, withinsulationshield:
e.: - : Copper pipe (uninsulated) shall be B-Line B3:148- Grinnell Fig.
103, or equal; lined with dielectric material..
f Plastic pipe - shall be B-Line: B3148; _Grinnell Fig. 103, or: equal.
Vertical: pipe support applications shall:be as specified above except that -
:, ;. insulation shields shall not be used for -insulated pipe.
12. 'TYPE 12 RISER CLAMP: .:Riser clamp shall be carbon steel with ...
configuration and com onents a uivalenfto MSS and FEDSPEC -Type 8.:
a.. Steel pipe (insulated) - shA be B-Line 83373 Grinnell. Fig. 261, or
b.. Steel pipe (uninsulated) -,shall be B-lLine B3373, Grinnell Fig. 261;
or equal....: ..: ._
c.:.: ... Cast:and-ductile iron pipe--: shall be B-Line B3373, Grinnell Fig. 261,
or equal.
{ . d... Copper pipe (hnsulated) - shall be B-Line B 3373 CT, Grinnell Fig..'
CT- 121 ''Michigan model 511; or equal.
M! e. Copper pipe (uninsulated) - shall be B-Line B337.3 CT, Grinnell Fig.
CT-121, -Michigan model 511, or equal.
f. Plastic pipe -shall be-B-Line B3373, Grinnell Fig. 261c, or equal.
_ 13. - TYPE 13 - FRAMING CHANNEL PIPE STRAP: Pipe strap shall be
carbon steel, with configuration equivalent to MSS Type 26.
a. Steel pipe (uninsulated) - shall be Superstut No. C-708-U,
rPowerstrut PS 3126, Kin -Line No. 477,'or equal.
b. Steel pipe (insulated) - shall be Superstrut No, C7708-U, Powerst ut
PS 3126, Kin -Line No. 477, or equal, with insulation shield.
15096-10 MUUNTAIRE FARMS - LUMBER BRIDGE
WWTS UPGRADE

C. Copper pipe (uninsulated) - shall be Superstrut No. C-708-U,
Powerstrut PS 3126, Kin -Line No. 477; or equal, with insulation
shield or lined with dielectric inaterial.
d. Copper pipe (insulated) - shall be Superstrut No. C408-U, " -
= " Powe strut PS 3126, Kin -Line No. 477, or equal, with insulation
shield.
...
e.... Plastic pipe - shall be Superstrut No. C-708-U, Powerstrut.PS 3126,
Kin -Line No. 477, equal.
C. RACK AND TRAPEZE SUPPORTS:
1. GENERAL: Unless_ otherwise: specified, trapeze and pipe rack components
shall have a minimum steel thickness of 12 gage, with a maximum deflection 1/240:ofthe span.
2. TYPE 20 - TRAPEZE:PIPE SUPPORT: Tiapeze pipe support cross
members shall. be framing channel. as specified in paragraph 15096-2.02-E.5. Flat plate fittings shall
be 1 5/87inch square carbon steel of standard design manufactured by framing channel
manufacturer, Unistrut P2471; B-Line B202-2;; or equal.
i
3. TYPE 21 PIPE RACK SUPPORT: Post -and cross members shall be::
framing channel as specified in paragraph 15096-2.02 E.S.:Pipe rack -fittings shall be carbon steel, .;
of standard design manufactured by framing channel manufacturer. 90-degree fittings shall be
gusseted Unistrut P2484, B-Line B844, or. equal. Post base fittings shall be: as specified in
paragraph 15096-2.02 D.S. .
D.. STRUCTURAL ATTACHMENTS: .
1. TYPE A - MALLEABLE IRON CONCRETE INSERT: -Concrete inserts
shall be malleable iron and comply with MSS and FEDSPEC Type 18. Grinnell Fig. 282,
Carpenter & Patterson Fig. 108, or equal.
2. TYPE B - SIDE BEAM BRACKET: Bracket shall be malleable iron and
comply with MSS Type 34 and FEDSPEC Type 35. Grinnell Fig. 202, B-Line B3062, or equal.
3. TYPE C - MALLEABLE BEAM CLAMP WITH EXTENSION PIECE:
Clamp and extension piece shall be malleable iron, tie rod shall be steel. Beam clamp shall comply
with MSS and FEDSPEC Type 30. Grinnell Fig. 218 with Fig. 157 extension piece, B-Line B3054,
or equal. f
4. TYPE D - STEEL BEAM CLAMP WITH EYE NUT: Beam clamp and eye I
nut shall be forged steel. Configuration and components shall comply with MSS and FEDSPEC 44
Type 28. Grinnell Fig. 292, Carpenter & Patterson Fig. 297, or equal. I
15096-11 MOUNTAIRE FARMS - LUMBER BRIDGE
WWTS UPGRADE
I

. 5. TYPE E :- FRAMING CHANNEL POSTBASE: Post bases. shall be carbon :.. .
steel, of standard design manufacturdd:by framing -channel manufacturer. Single.channel: Unistrut
P2072A, B-Line B280, or equal. Double channel: Unistrut P2073A, B-Line B281, or equal:
6. TYPE F - WELDED BEAMATTACIIMENT: Beam.attacliment shall be.
... carbon steel and:comply with.MSS and FEDSPEC.Type_22; B-Line B3083, Grinnell Fig. 66, or
equal.
..: Z.. TYPE G - WELDED STEEL BRACKET: Bracket shall be carbon steel and .
comply with MSS Type 32 and FEDSPEC Type 33 for medium welded bracket. Heavy welded
bracket shall complyydth MSS Type 33 and FEDSPEC Type 34:
8.... TYPE H - CAST IRON :BRACKET; . Bracket -shall be cast iron, Carpenter :&'...
Patterson Fig: 340, or equal.
9.: TYPE J -ADJUSTABLE BEAM -ATTACHMENT: Beam attachment shall .
. .
be carbon steel; Carpenter• & Patterson Fig. 151; .B=Line 93082, or_equal.
10..: TYPE. K - DOUBLE CHANNEL. BRACKET: Wall channel shall be single
channel.framing channel as specified:1h.paragraph:15096-2.02 E.5.-:Cantilever:biacket shall be a
..
carbon steel double framing channel assembly,. Unistiut P2542 through P2546, B-Line B297-12 .
through 13297-36, or equal.
11.' .. TYPE L - SINGLE CHANNEL BRACKET: Wall channel shall`be-single
channel framing channel. as specified in paragraph 15096-2.02 E.5. Cantilever bracket shall be a
carbon steel single.framiug channel assembly; Unistrut P223.1 through P2234,.B-Line B198-6;
13198-12; B196�-18 and B19624, or equal.
}
12. TYPE M - WALL MOUNTED CHANNEL: Wall channel .shall be single .
I
channel framing channel as specified in paragraph 15096 2.02 E.5. .
13. TYPE N - PIPE STANCHION FLOOR ATTACHMENT: Baseplate shall
be carbon steel with 1/2 inch minimum thickness. Anchor bolt holes shall be 1/16 inch larger than
the anchor bolt diameter. The space between the baseplate and the floor shall be filled with
nonshrink grout.
J -
14. TYPE Q - CONTINUOUS CONCRETE INSERTS: shall be 1 5/8 by 13/8 .
Channel, cold formed 12 Ga. steel conforming to ASTM A 1001, stainless steel GR 33.or ASTM
GR 33 A., hot dip galvanized_ conforming to ASTM A123 or Al53, UNISTRUT P3200 Series, or
approved equal.
E. ACCESSORIES: .
_
1. HANGER RODS: Rods shall be carbon steel, threaded on both ends or
continuous threaded and sized as specified.
1
15096-12 MOUNTAIRE FARMS -LUMBER BRIDGE
1
WWTS UPGRADE

. 2. WELDLESS EYE NUT: Eye nut shall be- forged.steel and shall comply _
with MSS and FEDSPEC Type 17. Eye nut shall. be GrinnellFig. 290, B-Line B3200, or equal.
3. WELDED EYE ROD: Eye rod shall be carbon steel with eye -welded..
closed. inside diameter of eye: shall accorhtn6date a bolt diameter 1/8 inch larger than the rod
diameter. Eye rod shall be:Giinmell-Fig.- 278, B-Line B3211, or equal.
TURNBUCKLE: Turnbuckle shall be. forged steel and shall. comply with.
.:MSS and FEDSPEC Type 13.' Turnbuckle shall be Grinnell.Fig. 230, B-Line B3202, or equal.
5. FRAMING CHANNEL: Framing channel shall be-1 5/8 inches square, roll
formed, 12-gage carbon..steel.: Channel shall have a continuous slot along one side'with in-tunied
clamping ridges. Single channel: Unistrut P1000 B-Line.1322 or equal. Double channel Unistrut
..: p. g. g g q ... ... .
P 1001, B-Line 1122A, or equal. Triple channel; Unistrut P1004A, B-Line 1322X, or equal.
2.03 THERMAL PIPE HANGER SHIELD !
Thermal shields shall be.provided.at hanger,. support and: guide locations on pipe requiring
insulation. The.shield shall consist of an:insdlation layer encircling the entire circulnfefence of the
..pipe and -a steel jacket encircling the insulation layer. The; thermal shield shall be the same
��.
thickness as the piping system insulation' specified in Section 15250: The standard shield shall be
used for hot systems and.the vapor barrier shield shall be used for .cold systems. Stai111. steel band i
..'clamps -shall be used where specified to ensure'against slippage between the pipe wall and the
1
thermal shield.
A. STANDARD SHIELD:
1. INSULATION:
l
a. _ Hydrous calcium silicate, high density, waterproof
b.. Compressive strength: 100 psi average
c. Flexural strength: 75 psi average
d. K. factor: 0.38 at 100 degrees F mean
C. Temperature range: 20 degrees F to 500 degrees F
2. STEEL JACKET: Galvanized steel. Gage shall be the manufacturer's
standard supplied for the given pipe size.
3. CONNECTION: Shield shall have butt connection to pipe insulation. Steel
jacket and insulation shall be flush with end.
B. VAPOR BARRIER SHIELD:
1. INSULATION:
a. Hydrous calcium silicate, high density, waterproof
15096-13 MOUNTAIRF. FARMS - LUMBER 13RIDGE
i
WWTS UPGRADE
if

b: Compressive strength: 100 psiaverage
c..: Flexural -strength:..75 psi average
d.. K factor:' 0.3 8at 100 degrees F mean -
e.Telxlperature range:.20 degrees F to 500 degrees F ..
2. STEEL JACKET: Galvanized steel.:: Gage shall. be the manufacturer's
standard supplied for the given pipe size. ;
..
3.. CONNECTION: Shield shall have butt connection to pipe insulation.
Insulation shall extend 1 inch each side of steel jacket for vapor tight connection to pipe insulation
vapor barrier:
2.04 `; PRODUCT. DATA _
The following information: shall be providedin accordance with Section Q1300:
Hanger and support locations and components shall be indicate_ d on the
piping layout drawings required by paragraph 1.5050=2.04..
2. Design Professional's re orts ass ecified in O ara rah 15096-3..05.
p p.:. p.. g p ..
PART 3--EXECUTION
.3.01 HANGER AND SUPPORT LOCATIONS.:"
The Contractor shall locate hangers and sup orts as near as possible to: concentrated loads
such as valves; flanges, etc. Locate hangers, -supports. and accessories within the maximum span"
lengths specified in the .Droiect manual to support continuous pipeline runs unaffected by
1 " concentrated loads: .
At least one hanger or support shall -be located -within 2 feet froni apipe change indirection.
The Contractor shall locate hangers and supports to ensure that connections to equipment,
tanks, etc.; are: substantially flee from loads, transmitted by the piping. .
i
_ [ Where piping is connected to equipment;,a valve, piping assembly, etc., -that will require.
removal for maintenance; the piping shall be supported in such a manner that temporary supports
shall not be necessary for this procedure.
Pipe shall not have pockets formed in the span due to sagging of the pipe between supports
caused by the weight of the pipe, medium in the pipe, insulation, valves and fittings.
3.02 INSTALLATION
15096-14 MOUNTAIRE FARMS -- LUMBER BRIDGE
WWTS UPGRADE

Welded and bolted attachrirrents to: the.building structural steel shall be in accordance with i
the requirements of the AISC Manual of Steel Conshuction.. Unless otherwise specified; there shall
be no. drilling or:burning of holes in the building structural steel.
Hanger components shall not be used for purposes other than for which they were designed.
They shall not be used for rigging and erection purposes:
The Contractor shall install.items be embedded before' concrete' is.poured. Fasten ...
embedded items securely to prevent movement when concrete is poured.
Embedded anchor bolts. shall be used -instead .ofconcrete: inserts for support installations in
areas below water surface or noiTdally subject to submerging.:
The Contractor shall install thermal pipe hanger shields on insulated piping at required
:locations during hanger. and support installation. Butt joint connections to pipe insulation shall be
made- at the time of insulation installation in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. .
.. 1
Hanger and support components in contact with plastic pipe shall be Tree of burrs and sharp
edges.
Rollers shall roll freely without binding:
Finished floor beneath Type N. structural attachments 'and framing channel post bases shall
be roughed prior- to grouting: - Grout between base plate and floor shall be freeof voids and foreign:
material...
Baseplates shall be cut and drilled to specified dimensions prior.to welding stanchions or
other attachments and prior to setting anchor bolts.
Plastic or rubber end.caps shall be provided at the exposed ends of all framing channels that
are located up to 7 feet above the floor.
3.03 ADJUSTMENTS
The Contractor shall adjust hangers and supports to obtain required pipe slope and elevation. f
Shims made of material that is compatible with the piping material may be used. Stanchions shall
be adjusted prior to grouting their baseplates.
3.04 ANCHOR BOLTS
Anchor bolts in new concrete shall be cast in place.
3.05 INSPECTION AND CERTIFICATION
The design professional retained by the Contractor under the provisions of paragraphs ;
15050-1.02 C and 15096-1.02 B shall inspect the pipe hangers and support systems at not more
15096-15 MOUNTA[RE FARMS -LUMBER BRIDGE
WWTS UPGRADE
l_

15096-16 MOUNTAIRE FARMS - LUMBER BRIDGE
WWTS UPGRADE

SECTION 15101
GATE VALVES
P
.1.01 DESCRIPTION:
This sectioti specifies bronzo�body, solid-Wedge:gate valves in sizes 34rich and smaller.
l
. 1.02 QUALITYASSURANcE
,I
A. REFERENCES:
This section contains references to the following.documents.. They area part of this section.:
as specified and modified. Where a referenced document contains.. references to other standards,
those documents are included as references under this section as.if referenced directly. In the event
of conflict between the requirements of this section and those of the listed documents, the
requirements of this section shall prevail.
Unless otherwise specified, references to documents shall mean: the documents in effect
at the time ofNotice to Proceed. If ref have been discontinued by the issuing
organization, references to those doctunents shall mean the replacement documents issued or
'otherwise identified by that organization. or,.if there are no replacement documents; the last
version of the docum* ent before it was discontinued.
Reference Title - :I
ANSI B16;1 Cast Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings -Class 25, 125, 250.
and 800
AWWA C500' Gate Valves for Water and Sewerage Systems
B. DESIGN CRITERIA:
Gate valves 3 inches in size shall comply with AWWA C500, including applicable
hydrostatic testing. Gate valves smaller than 3 inches shall be subject to hydrostatic tests at the test
pressure.
PART 2--PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
Materials of construction shall be as follows:
15101-1 MOUNfAIRE FARMS - LUMBER BRIDGE
WWTS UPGRADE

Component :
Material
f : Body:
Bronze
Wedge:..
Bronze. .
i Mounting
Bronze
Stem
Bronze, AWWA C500'
= Seat rings
-Bronze; Grade A; 'AWWA-0500
Materials specified are considered the Iniriimum acceptable for .the purposes of durability,
strength, arid.resistance.to erosion and corrosion. The Contractor may. propose alternative: :.
materials'for the purpose of providing. greater strength or to meet required stress' limitations.
However, alternative materials must provide at least the. same qualities as those specified for the
purpose.... ... '
2.02 : MANUFACTURE:
A.. GENERAL:
Unless otherwise specified, bronze gate valves shall be provided with integral seats.
-- Exposed gatevalves shall lie rising stem type. Buriedbr submerged'gate valves shall be of
the nonrising stem: type. Rising stem_valves and brass nonrising stem valves shall be provided with
a Teflon braid packing..
B.' END CONNECTIONS:
Gate valve end connections shall be:flanged or -threaded as specified. End flanges shall be
1 integral with the gate faced' and body and be. facand drilled in accordance with ANSI-1116.1 for 125- =
pound flanges..
C. MANUAL OPERATORS:
i
Unless specified otherwise, .valves shall be provided with handwheels.
2.03 PRODUCT DATA
The following information shall be provided in accordance with Section 01300:
4
1. Affidavits of compliance, as required by AWWA C500.
2. Hydrostatic test results.
J
PART 3--EXECUTION
Gate valves shall'be installed in the closed position.
**END OF SECTION**'
15101-2 MOUNTATRE FARMS - LUMBER BRIDGE
W WTS UPGRADE

SECTION 15103
BUTTERFLY VALVES
PART: I --GENERAL ... l
LOV DESCRIPTION
A:. SCOPE:
This -'section specifies bLitterfly valves for air, gas; steam and water service. Valve type to be
wafer type withAh ough bolting.
1. TYPE A:: Valves Use the followiii > in stems shall designated
gpg sys
tems g
Type A: Air Service
L02 REFERENCES
This section contains references to the following documents: They area part of this section .
as specified and modified. Where.a referenced document contains references to other standards,
those documents are included as references under this section as if referenced directly. In the event
of conflict" between the requirements of this section and those of the listed documents, the,
requirements of thissection shall prevail.
Unless otherwise specified, references to documents shall mean the documents in effect `
-,at the time ofNotice: to Proceed. if iefereilced documents have been discontinued by the is
organization, .references io those documchts-shall mean the replacement documents issued or
otherwise identified.by that organization or; if there are no replacement documents, the last
version of the document before it was discontinued.
_I
Reference Title
ANSI B16.1 Cast Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings Class 25,
125, 250 and 800
ANSI B16.5. Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings
ASTM A48 Gray Iron Castings
ASTM A108 Steel Bars, Carbon, Cold -Finished, Standard Quality
ASTM A126 Gray Iron Castings for Valves, Flanges, and Pipe Fittings
ASTM A216/A216M Steel Castings, Carbon, Suitable for Fusion Welding, for
High Temperature Service
ASTM A276 Stainless and Heat -Resisting Steel Bars and Shapes
ASTM A436 Austenitic Gray Iron Castings
15103-1 MOUNTA1RE FARMS -(.UMBER BRIDGE
WWTS UPGRADE
1
T

7
Reference : Title.
ASTM A536 Ductile.Iron Castings
AW:WA C504 . Rubber -Seated Butterfly Valves-.
1.03:: ENVIRONMENT L.CONDITIONS::;
T11e equipment furnished under this -section: Will be located as shown and:shall be suitable ::. ..
for exposure to. the environmental conditions.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
The following submittals information shall be provided in accordance with Section 01300:
1. A: copy of this specification section, with addendufti .updates :included; and:
all.ieferenced: and applicable sections; with addendum updates included,
with each paragraph check_marked to indicate specification compliance or
- niarked-to�iindicate.requested-deviations front specification requirements:.-
Check marks.shall denote (till coinplian.ce with a paragraph as a -whole: lf .
deviations from the specifications :are. indicated;, and therefore requested by: .
the Contractor, each deviation shall be underlined and: denoted by'a number
in the margin to the right of the identified paragrapl-i; referenced -to a detailed
written explanation of the:reasons:for requesting -the deviation. The.
Construction MMager:shall' be the final authority for determining
_.. acceptability of requested deviations. The'reniainih portions=of the
paragraph not underlined will signify.compliance on the part of the
Contractor with.the specifications.: Failure to: include a copy of the marked
up specification sections, along with justification(s).for any requested
deviations to the s ecif ion require 'ents, with:the submittal shall be
sufficient cause for rejection of the entire submittal with no further .
consideration:
2. Manufacturer's catalogue, shop drawing and/or other data confirming
conformance to specified requirements
3. Schedule of valve and operator type by- piping system and tog no.
PART 2--PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
Materials specified are considered the minimum acceptable for the purposes -of durability,
strength, and resistance to erosion and corrosion. The Contractor may propose alternative
inaterials- for the purpose of providing greater strength or to meet required stress limitations.
15103-2 MOUNTAIRE FARMS - LUMBER BRIDGE
WWTS UPGRADE

However, alternative materials must provide. at least the same qualities as those specified for the
ptu-pose.
A.. TYPE A:
Type A -valves are specified according to size as, follows:
1•
TWE. A; SIZE 3 THROUGI=I 24 INCHES.: Type: A. valves:froin 3 thrciugh
24 inches in size shall be constructed,of the following materials unless f
otherwise specified:
Component Material
. .
= Shaft Stainless steel,: ASTM A276; Type: 316
Stainless steel, ASTM :A410, with stainless steel journals
Disc Duetile iron, ASTM A536; nickel plates
Seh.t sealing surface NBR or EPDM
:
:Body Ductile.lron, ASTM A126, Class B
2.05. MANUFACTURERS
... A: GENERAL:
Valves of each Type provided under this Section shall: be the product of a single
manufacturer. Valves provided under this section. shall be.th . product of a nianufactu erwith not
less than 10 years producing the specified -type of valves and not.less than five (5) years: of sales and �.
distribution in North AmeiIca.
B. MANuFAC"TUBERS --- TYPE 'A
The Owner and Construction Manager believe the .following caiadidatemaiiufacturers are
capable of producing equipment and/or products that will satisfy -the requirements of this Section.
This statement, however, shall not be construed as an endorsement of a particular manufacturer's
products; nor shall it be construed that named manufacturers' standard equipment or products will +-
comply with the requirements of this Section. Unless otherwise specified, candidate manufacturers
include De7urik resilent seat or engineer approved equal.
2.02 CONSTRUCTION
A. GENERAL: �-
v
Valves shall be the stub: or through shaft design. Wafer type valves are not acceptable for
buried service. Unless otherwise specified, valve flange drilling shall be per ANSI B16.1,
Class 125.
15103-3 MOUNTAIRE FARMS - LUMBER BRIDGE
WWTS UPGRADE I-
I
17

13.7 TYPE A:
Type.A valves. . shall .bedesigned in:accordance with AWYiWA C504. 'Shafts shall be turned,
" toiiild and ohshed: Shaft diriiensions arid o' eratof for ue shall be.chosen for the pressure
g'. p
p-' . ' q
specified in Section 15050-and Class B as specified in AWVIWA C504.-:When carbon steel shafts and
stainless steel journals are,i.ised,�static,seals shall be provided to isolate the interior of the disc and
the -shaft from the process fluid:: = ...
:= Type A valves, siz&3 through72:inches shall have seats thatare vulcanized, bonded- =
mechanically: secured,. or'cl amped to the body or disc, .
2.03 MANTJAL'OPERATORS
A. GENERAL:
Manual operators shall be designed in accordance with AW.WA C504,'and shall Have a disc
position indicator designating the opened and closed position of the valve,:
C.. TYPES A ::
Operators' for:Type A valves 6 inches in diameter: and s iialler shall be latch loclr levers:
Valves -shall be capable of being locked inat least: five intermediate positions between fully open
and fully -closed. . .
Operators for Type A valves 8 inches' in. diameter and larger shall be the traveling nut or
". worn gear Type:: Operators for exposed.servic&shall be gasketed f.ojc weatherproof service:_: - ..
2:04 . POWERED OPERATORS (NOT USED)
J.:2.05 . 'COA'iINUS _
�f Unless provided with factory coating suitable for the. in conditions all exposed
valve equipment shall be shop primed prior to shipment from the factory with a primer compatible
with.the field applied coating.
^� Valve equipment for direct burial shall be factory primed with a primer compatible with the
field applied coating:
2.06 PRODUCT DATA
The following product data shall be provided in accordance with Section 01300:
1. Installation requirements, showing clearances required for maintenance
f purposes.:
2. Operation and maintenance information specified in Section 01720.
151034 MOUNTAIRE FARMS-LUMi3ER BRIDGE'',
WWTS UPGRADE

15107-1
SECTION 15107
VALVES: KNIFE GATE
1. GENERAL'
This section shall .include all lsnil-e gate. valves of -the size indicated to be installed in
the piping inside structures or buildings.
Knife gate: -valves ends shall: be wafer style with through bolting. All manually
operated'Imife gate valves shall open, by turning counterclockwise unless otherwise
specified.
2. VALVE- CONSTkiJCTION..
Body materials.for knife gate valves =6" and smaller shall 'be one-piece cast 304
=- --stainless steel wafer style_with through boltin Gate materials ;for: knife --.gate valves
6" and smaller shall be 304 stainless steel.
Body iiiaterials: for luiife,gate valves 8%24" shall be ASTM A126, Class B Cast Iron,
with ANSI -flanged drillings. Gate materials for;gate valves2%36 shall be-ASTM
{ A240 Type 304 staiill.ess steel.
Seat materials for lcriife 'gate valves 8 24" shall be ASTM A743. Grade CF:8- 304
stainless- steel.
_.} Knife g atevalves shall be designed and constructed with a'relieved groove around the
seat which allows the gate'to push. -solid particles aside to prevent consolidation of .
materials in the seat area.
Knife gate valves shall be installed in the position that makes operation of the valve
_ easiest for the operator,
Knife gate valves shall be designed for a working pressure of 150 psi for 2"-24" inch
valves. Each valve shall be hydrostatically tested to twice the designed working
pressure in accordance with applicable ANSI/AWWA standards. All valves shall have
I two coats of asphaltic varnish applied to both the inside and outside ferrous metal
surfaces (except for finished or bearing surfaces). Knife gate valves fiirnished under
i
_a

:SECTION 15118
SWING CHECK VALVES
PART I -=-GENERAL :; ...
L01. DESCRIPTION.- .
'
A.
GENERAL-. - ..
This section specifics spring -loaded and cushioned swing check' alves.
B. :APPLICATION:.. `
Unless otherwise specified, sprung -loaded: swung check_ valves.shall be.: Bray/Rite-Rite Pro:
check rite stainless steel wafer check valves.
"...1.02 --:REFERENCES
This:scctiOn contains (references to Cho following docuiiicnts.. They ate a palt of this section
as specified and modified..Where a referenced doeunnent contains references to other stalidv ds,
-those .documents are included as references under this section as if referenced directly. . In the even
of conflict between the requirements of this: section and,those ofthe listed:documents, the
requiiernenf§,of this section shall prevail. '
f..:'
Unless otherwise specified, ieferecices to documents shall mean
the documents in effect
at:the'time olNotice to: Proceed.' If referenced docuiieiits have been discontinued by the issuing
organization, references to those documents shall iinean the replacement documents issiied or
otherwise identified'by that organization or, there ate no replacement documents, the last
version oft he document before it was discontinued..
Reference Title
ASTM A126 Gray Iron Castings for Valves, Flanges, and,Pipe Fittungs
ASTM A276 Stainless and heat -Resisting Steel Bars and ShaP
. . es
ASTM A536 Ductile Iron Castings
- 4 ASTM B 148 Aluminum-Bron' ze Sand Castings
AWWA C508 Swing -Check Valves for Waterworks Service, 2,In. Through
24 In. NPS
{I R,
I .
PART 2--PRODUCTS
151 18-1 -IVIOUNTAIRF. FARMS -LUMBER BRIDGE
NEWTS UPGRADE'

2.01 MANUFACTURERS
The Owner and Construction Manager believe the following candidate manufacturers are
cap p g q p. able of roducin � e ui anent and/or products that will, satisfy the requirciiients of this Section. I'
This statement,.however, shall not be: construed_ as an endorsement of a particular manufacturer's
products, nor shall it. be construed.that named manufacturers' standard equipment or products win l
-comply with the reqirements of this Section. Candidate maniifacturers include Biay/Rite Check,
or equal.
2.02 MATERIALS
Materials of construction shall be as follows:
as
Component.. �_ :Material
Body, cover, Disc: ... 304: SS
Disc Arm ASTM A351-CF8M
.... O-Ring . EPDM
Hinge shafts and hinge pins Stainless steel, ASTM A479-31.6
Materials specified are considered the rninimum. acceptable for the purposes of durability,-.
strength, and resistance to erosion and corrosion. The Contractor may propose alternative materials
for the purpose of providing greater strength or to meet required stress limitations. However, i
alternative materials must provide at least the same qualities as those specified for the purpose. i
2.03' MANUFACTURE I
I
A. GENERAL:
Disc, disc arm, shaft, keyways, lever and spring shall be capable of closing .within .05-
seconds of pump stoppage and fluid moving at velocity of 8 feet per second. Spring tension shall be
adjustable. The valve design shall permit mounting levers and springs on either side of the valve.
The design of the spring attachuncnt shall permit adjustment of closing force by tensioning the
spring or replacement with different active length springs.
Valves shall be provided with a full port opening at no more than 25 degrees equal to or
greater than the connecting piping, with no raised seating surface. Seats shall be threaded onto the
body or fitted with an O-ring seal and locked in place with stainless steel screws or pins and shall be
replaceable. Shafts shall be provided with stuffing box and packing or O-ring seals at each end.
Seals shall be externally replaceable.
15118-2 MOUNTAIRE FARMS -LUMBER BRIDGE
W WTS UPGRADE

151 ] 8-3
f
t
MOUNTAIRE -ARMS-LUMBER BRIDGE
WWI'S UPGRADE

SECTION '15.140
PINCH VALVES
PART:1=-GENERAL
1.01. DESCRIPTION .
A. SCOPE:
This section Specifies nlchvalves of the full ort s nthetic.rubber sleeve e, for use in':a
... p y type,- p p
municipal wastewater treatment plant: The valves will be used for isolation in both screenings
qr
slurry pumping: and grit slurry' inpmg systems. These valves may also be exposed to industrial "
solvents, chemicals, oils and greases. --
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.: REFERENCES:
This section contains references to the following'documents. They -are apart ofthis section
as' SP
ecified:and modified. Where a referenced document contains references to other standards,
those documents are included as references under.this section as if referenced directly. In the event
of conflict between the requirements of this section and those of the listed documents, the
requirements of this section shall prevail.
Unless otherwise specified, -references to' documents shall mean the documents in effect
at the time of Notice to Proceed. If referenced documents have been discontinued by the issuing
organization, references to those documents shall mean the replacement documents issuedor
otherwise identified by that organization or, if there are no replacement documents, the last
version of the document before it was discontinued.
B. FACTORY TESTING:
The valve shall be factory tested at .the specified operating conditions prior to shipment.
1.03 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS
The equipment furnished under this section will be located indoors and shall be suitable
for the environmental conditions.
Minor quantities of commercial and industrial wastes may be present in the wastewater.
All components shall be suitable for exposure to industrial solvents and petroleum products.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
15140-1 MOUNTAIRE FARMS - LUMBER BRIDGE
WWTS UPGRADE

The following submittals shall be provided in accordance with:Section 01300:
t Manufacturer's catalog;:shop drawings and/or other data -confirming
conformance to specified requirements.
2: Construction details and materials: of construction.
...3. :: Installation. requirements, showing clearances required fonnaintenarice..
purposes.
PART 2--PRODUCTS:
2.01 MANUFACTURER
. .. The :Owner and: Construction Manager: require the following candidate manufacturer.: to
provide the equipment and/or products to be furnished under this section. The Owner and
Construction Manager believe the manufacturer is capable of producing equipment and/or
i g
products that will satisfy the requirements of this Section. This. statement; however,' shall not be
consirued:to mean that the named manufacturer's standard product will -comply with the
requirements of this Section:. For the purpose -of standardization, the .manufacturer shall be Onyx
1 Valves or an.engineer-approved equivalent.. '
2.02 . PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Operating Pressures: The valves shall be designed to operate at pressures of up to 125 psi.
Valves shall be capable of zero leakage against a maximum line pressure of.75 psi.
2.03 MATERIALS
Materials_ specified.are considered the minimum acceptable for the purposes of durability,
strength; and resistance to erosion and corrosion.' The Contractor may propose alternative
- materials for the purpose of providing greater strength or to meet required'stress limitations.
f However, alternative. materials must provide at least the same qualities as those specified for the
purpose.
TheTollowin materials of construction shall be used:
Component Material.
Sleeve Inner Tube Elastomer Polyurethane
Housing Cast Iron, ASTM A48 or A126
Pinch Mechanism, Bars and Stem Type 316 Stainless Steel
2.04 EQUIPMENT
A. GENERAL:
15140-2 MOUNTAIRE FARMS - LUMBER BRIDGE
WWTS UPGRADE
�1

Pinch valves shall be fully enclosed, comprised of an. external housing and an internal
:flexible sleeve to: provide drip -tight closure for isolation service. Valve :sleeves shall be designed to. ,
prevent the sleeve from: forming a: permanent deflection after long periods in a closed: position.
Pinch valves shall have double-acting capabilities or other mechanical means to ensure that pinch
valve sleeves return to a full round configuration. Sleeves shall be full port and of one-piece
construction.. Valves shall be designed to allow use of reducing Sleeves. A. stem seal or washer.
shall. be provided at the stem -housing interface. End connections shall be:ANSI B16.1.125 pound
flanges...
Certification by: an authorized representative.of the valve manufacturer that .the valve .will
withstand .1.5 times the specified Working pressure.
B. OPERATORS.
Pinch valves'shall be manually operated with handwhe'els. A 40-pound maximumpull on
handwheel shall operate the valve under working pressure. Grease lubricated geared operators shall j
be providedwhere needed to meet this requirement.. Stems shall'be the non -rising type. Valve
position indicator shall be- provided: .
C. DOUBLE*ACTING OPERATION
Pinch valves shall include a positive means to ensure that the main sleeve returns to its
original round shape in the fully opened position. This feature should include a mechanism that
attaches the exterior of the sleeve to the pinch mechanism. This feature shall include a nylon.
reinforced strap or band around the outside of the sleeve body that is also attached to the pinch bars
per the manufacturer's recommendation.
2.05 COATINGS
Unless otherwise specified, each item of equipment shall be shipped to the site'of the
Work with the manufacturer's shop applied epoxy prime coating. All prime coats applied by the
manufacturer shall be compatible with the intended finish coats as specified. If not compatible,
the manufacturer shall notify the Contractor via the submittal information and recommend
substitutions. The prime coating shall be applied over clean dry surfaces in accordance with the
coating manufacturer's recommendations. The prime coating will serve as a base for field -
applied finish coats. V
2.06 SPARE PARTS
The following spare parts shall be provided for each valve size: -
1. One sleeve.
2. Special tools required for maintenance or operation
15140-3 MOUNTAIRE FARMS - LUMBER BRIDGE
WWTS UPGRADE

15140-4 MOUNTAIRE FARM_ S - LUMBER BRIDGE
WWTS UPGRADE

SECTION 16050 - BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND M
... :PART I
- GENERAL
L1 .
RELATED DOCUMENTS.:,
A.
as
Drawings-. and general provisions of the Contract, including General. and Supplementary,._:
Conditions -and Division 1 Specification Sections, :apply to this Section.::: ..-
1.2
.. . ..
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes the following:. "
1. Electrical equipment coordination and installation.
- 2. Sleeves for -raceways and cables.:: "
3... Sleeve. seals.
4:: Connmori electrical installation requirements.
: L.3
ALLOWANCES
A.::
= The Contractor shall provide. for" the supply and installation of ari additional"500 feet of 3/4 inch.
-
rigid steel conduit with 3#12AWG .power conductors: The application of the additional circuits
shall be determined and approved: by the Owner or Owner?S Representative during. construction.
sm
B.
The Contractor shall provide for the supply, installation and -termination of an additional 500
.. .. ..
feet of 3/4 .inch rigid steel conduit with 10#14AWG control circuits: The application. of the
additional circuits shall: be "determined and approved by the Owner or Owner's" Representative
1
-during-construction...
C.
The Contractor. Shall "provide for the supply, installation and'tei ation of an additional 500
feet of 3/4 inch rigid steel conduit with two.Q) Shield Twisted Pair cable for Instrumentation
circuits. The application of the additional circuits shall be determined and approved by the
Owner or Owner's Representative during construction.
-1.4
DEFINITIONS
A.
ATS:' Acceptance Testing Specifications.
B.
EPDM: Ethylene-propylene-diene terpolymer rubber.
_l C.
NBR:. Acrylonitrile-butadiene rubber.
1.5..
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data:. For each type of product indicated.
16050-1 MOUNTATRE. FARMS - LUMBER BRIDGE
W WTS UPGRADE'
t

B. Working Drawings
1. The, Contractor shall -provide working drawings for each, location requiring additional
detail to .properly .plan, execute and document the work. Examples of areas requiring
additional detail include:
a. Areas in constrained spaces, where code required working space or free and clear .. .
panel door swings will be difficult to achieve.
b. Areas requiring coordination with installation work of other trades
c.. Areas in congested spaces, where existing conditions require the new work to
workaround the.existing installed systems.
d. Control acid interconnecting wiring indicated below tliat deviates from the Contract
drawings and is not provided by the equipment vendor; the System Integrator; or
the rower System Integrator;
e. Work that will be concealed at the conclusion of the project
f . Areas desiginated by. the Owner or Engineer during construction- to clarify the
means and methods that the Contractor intends to employ to complete the work.
2. Working Drawings shall consist of the. following levels of detail:
a. Location:of all conduit and conduit'size
b. Conductor size and number of wires inside conduit'
C. Location of all pull and junction boxes
d. Location of all electrical,equipmetit installed on the project.
e.. Locationof existing electrical equipment to be interfaced to items installed or. .
modified under.this Contract. .
f. Verification that new equipment will not interfere with working clearance around
existing equipment for operations and maintenance.
1) New equipment dimensions will be based'on_ submitted equipinent.-
2) - Equipment plans. Will include door swing markout showing both the proper
hinge placement and the space required for frilly open door: swings.
3) Location plans will include markout of required working space for the
electrical equipment; the mechanical equipment and the process: equipment.
4) , Provide section drawings indicating below slab and overhead raceways with
bending radius on elbows and working space for pull boxes and condulets.
5) Indicate housekeeping pad outside dimensions.
g. Modification details (both wiring and mechanical changes) to equipment to be
modified under this project
h. Preparation of point to point wiring diagrams showing interconnecting wiring
between new and existing equipment to be installedhnodified under this project.
i. Preparation of point to point wiring diagrams showing interconnecting wiring
between new and existing equipment to be installed/ modified under this project.
Point to point wiring shall give a unique terminal block number for each device or
conductor and its corresponding location.
3. Upon Completion of the project, a hardeopy "red -lined" sets of prints showing all work
deviating from the Contract drawings or provided as part of the working drawing work
shall be turned over to the ENGINEER for inspection and approval.
I6050-2 MOUNTAIRE FARMS -LUMBER BRIDGE
WWTS UPGRADE

4.. Equipment Location Plants: Working _drawings shall depict all of the wiring devices,
conduits, field.devices, and power distribution equipment on scaled.plan drawings. Detail. .
.all proposed concealed and under slab raceways.
5: 'Update Existing Panel Schedules
a. Provide an updated hardcopy.of the panel schedule inside the existing panel.
6. Provide.working drawing of .motor control schematics and interconnecting wiring for
each controlled motor.
7. Provide working drawings of switcltgear control schematics and interconnecting -wiling.
_.
8. -Provide working drawings of underground :raceways„ and ductbanks.: Working drawings
.... shall include:
a.: Updated duct bank section,.includ ng sections of each manhole.entrance wall,
b. Updated location plans :of 'manholes 'and ductbanks drawn" to -scale depicting
outside dimensions,.. coordinated :with new. and existilg underground facilities.
Indicate :;all process piping :and otlier,' underground' facilities C ossings and
discovered conflicts. .
Indicate floor and manhole elevations for each manhole.
d. Indicate invert elevation and cover depth for each-:ductbank and underground
circult, '
.1.6-
QUALITY ASSURANCE.
A.::
h' of Test
.. Test E ui ment : Suitabili and: Calibration: Comply :: "Suitability. 1 withNETA ATS "Suita..
n p �' :. p
..
Equipment" and :"Test lnstrutnent Calibration.".
1.7...
COORDINATION ..: .. ...
A.
Coordinate arrangetuent, mounting, and support of electrical equipment:
-
1, To allow maximum possible lieadroom unless specific mounting heights Ghat reduce
headroom are indicated.
2: To provide for ease of disconnecting the equipment with minimum interference to other
installations.
3. To allow right of way for piping and conduitinstalled,at required slope.
4. So connecting raceways, cables, wireways, cable trays, and busways will be clear of
obstructions and of the working and access space -of other equipment. .
B.
Coordinate installation of required supporting devices and set sleeves in cast-in-place`concrete,
masonry walls, and other structural components as they are constructed.
C.
Coordinate location of access panels and doors for electrical items that are behind finished
surfaces or otherwise concealed.
D.
Coordinate electrical testing of electrical, mechanical, and architectural items, so equipment and
7
systems that are functionally interdependent are tested to demonstrate successful
?
interoperability.
l 6050-3 MOUNTAIRE FARMS --LUMBER BRIDGE
WWTS UPGRADE

:PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS -
A. 1n other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to -
product selection:
i
L' Available Manufacturers: : Subject to -compliance with requirements, - manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not -limited to,. ui
manufacturers specified.
2, Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
manufacturers specified.
i
.2.2, SLEEVES FOR RACEWAYS AND CABLES j
A. Steel Pipe Sleeves:. ASTM A 53/A 53M,:Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, galvanized steel, plain
ends..
B. Sleeves for Rectangular Openings: Galvanized sheet steel m witli iniirium 0.052� or 0.13S-inch
thickness as indicated and of length to suit application.
'C. Coordinate sleeve selection and :application with selection and. -application of firestopping
specified in Division,'% Section, "Through -Penetration Firestop Systems:"
.2.3.. SLEEVE SEALS
A:: Description: Modular sealing device, designed for field assembly, to fill annular spacebetween
sleeve and raceway or cable.
1. Available Manufacturers:
a. Advance Products & Systems, Inc, i
b. Calpico, Inc. .
C. Metraflex Co.
d. Pipeline Seal and Insulator; Inc.
C. Approved equal.
2. Sealing Elements: EPDM interlocking links shaped to fit surface of cable or conduit. i
include type and number required for material and size of raceway or cable. - -
3. Pressure Plates: Plastic. Include two for each sealing element.
4. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Carbon steel with corrosion -resistant coating of length
required to secure pressure plates to sealing elements. Include one for each sealing
element.
1
i
1
16050-4 MOUNTAIRE FARMS - LUMBER BRIDGE
W WTS UPGRADF
u�_

...
PART 3 - EXECUTION...
. 3.1-.
COMMON REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
A.
Comply with NECA 1-.
B.
Measure indicated mounting heights.to bottom of unit for suspended. items and to 'center of unit
_.. foi• wall -mounting items. ...
C.::
Headroom. Maintenance: If mounting heights or other location criteria: are not indicated,
arrange and. install components' and equipment. to provide maximum possible headroom
consistent with these requirements:
D:
Equipment: Install to facilitate service; maintenance; and repair- or replacement of components
of both electrical equipment and. other nearby installations. Connect in such a way as to
facilitate future disconiiectiing witli niiinirnuni interference with other items in, the vicinity.:
E:
Right, of Way: Give to raceways and piping systems installed- at a required slope.: =
3.2
SLEEVE INSTALLATION. FOR ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS
Electrical penetrations: occur when raceways,. cables; wirewa s cable tra- s or buswa s
y.., ... y , :: ..
penetrate concrete slabs; concrete or inasomy walls, or el -rated floor and wall assemblies.
B.
Coordinate sleeve selection hd application with selection and'application offirestopping.
.. ...
C.
... ... ... ... ... ...
..Concrete Slabs and. Walls: Install sleeves, f6r penetrations unless core -drilled holes or formed
openings are used. Innstall sleeves during erection of slabs and walls.
- .D.
Use.pipe sleeves unless penetration arrangement. requires rectangular sleeved:opening.
-. E.' .
Rectangular Sleeve Minimum Metal Thickness:
1._ For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter less than 50 inches and no side greater. than
6 inches, thickness shall be 0.052 inch.
2. For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeterequal to, or greater than, 50 inches and I or
more sides equal to,. or greater. than, 16 inches, thickness shall be 0.138 inch.
F.
Fire -Rated Assemblies: Install sleeves for penetrations of fie -rated floor and wall assemblies
unless openings compatible with firestop system used are fabricated during construction of floor
c
or wall.
G.
Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces of walls.
H.
`I
Extend sleeves installed in floors 2 inches above finished floor level.
I.
Size pipe- sleeves to provide 1/4-inch annular clear space`•between sleeve and raceway or cable
unless sleeve seal is to be installed.
16050-5 MOUNTAIPLE FARMS -LUMBER BRIDGE
WWTS UPGRADE

J. Seal space :outside of sleeves with grout for penetrations of concrete and :masonry and with
approved joint compound for gypsum board assemblies.
K. Interior Penetrations of Non -Fire -Rated Walls -arid Floors: - Seal annular space. between sleeve
and raceway -or cable, using joint sealant appiopriate for size, depth;_ and locationof joint.: ...
L.. Fire-Rated-Assembly:Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls; :partitions, ceilings, .
and . floors at raceway and cable penetrations. Install sleeves and seal raceway and cable
penetration sleeves with firestop materials. ... I
1
M. -RoofPenetration- = Sleeves: Seal penetration of individual raceways and cables with: flexible
boot -type flashing units applied incoordination; with roofing work.
N.- Aboveground, Exterior -Wall. Penetrations: Seal penetrations using sleeves and. _ mechanical:
sleeve 'seals. Select sleeve size to allow. for 1-incli annular clear space .between pipe and sleeve '
for installing mechanical sleeve seals.
•
O: _ Underground, Exterior -Wall Penetrations: Install cast-iron. "Wall pipes" for sleeves. Size.
sleeves' to `allow for 1-inch annular :clear= space between: raceway or cable and sleeve for
installing mechanical sleeve seals.
3.3 SLEEVE -SEAL INSTALLATION
A. - .Install to, seal underground, exterior wall penetrations.
B. Use type and number"of sealing elemenits recommended by: manufacturer for raceway or cable
material and size. Position raceway or cable.in.center-of sleeve. ;.Assemble-me-chanical-sleeve
seals and install in annular space between raceway or cable and °sleeve. Tighten bolts against -
pressure plates that cause sealing elements. to expand and make watertight seal. . .
3.4 FIRESTOPPING
A. Apply firestopping to electrical penetrations of fire -rated floor and wall assemblies to restore
original fire -resistance rating of assembly.
3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. inspect installed sleeve and sleeve -seal installations and associated firestopping for damage and.
faulty work.
END OF SECTION 16050
I.
16050-6 MOUNTAIRE FARMS - LUMBER 13RIDGE
W WTS UPGRADE.
i

SECTION 16060 -.GROUNDING AND.BONDING.
—, PART 1
- GENERAL:: _: ...
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
.-Drawings.'and general provisioiis of the Contract,. including -'General and Supplementary...
Conditions:and Division I Specification :Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2
-SUMMARY
A.
This Section: includes methods and materials for g'ounding,systems: and equipment.
: 1.3
SUBMITTALS .
A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.-
B..::
Plans showing diineiisioned.'as-biiilt locations of grounding featttres specified in Part 3.4 of this
specification,; "Field Quality Control,' including the following:
.:
1. Ground rods.: ..
I :Bonding to water pipes.
3:. Bonding to foundation reinforcing steel..
4'.Grounding arrangements and connections for separately derived systems.
C.
Field quality -control test reports." .
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE ;
A.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed_ and labeled as defined in NFPA.: 70 by
P
a qualified testing agency and marked for intended use.`
-- B.
Comply with UL 467 for grounding and bonding materials and equipment.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
CONDUCTORS
A.
Insulated Conductors: Copper or tinned -copper wire or cable insulated for 600 V unless
otherwise,required by applicable Code or authorities having jurisdiction.
B.
Bare Copper Conductors:
1. Solid Conductors: ASTM B 3.
16060-1 MOUNTAIRE FARMS - LUMBER BRIDGE
t
WWTS UPGRADE

I
i
2. Stranded Conductors: ASTM B 8.
3. Tinned Conductors: ASTM B 33.. .
2.2. CONNECTORS
A:: Listed and labeled:by a nationally recognized testing laboratory acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction for applications in which used, and for specific types, sizes, and combinations of
conductors and other items connected:.
I
B. Bolted Connectors for Conductors and Pipes: Copper -or copper alloy; bolted pressure -type,
... with at least.two bolts....
1. Pipe Connectors: Clamp -type, sized for pipe.
C. Welded Connectors: Exothermic -Welding kits: of types recommended by kit.manufactUrer for
materials bein gJ oined:and iustallatioii conditi6tis.
2.3 GROUNDING ELECTRODES
A.. Ground: Rods: Copper -clad steel; 3/4 inch byl0 feet:
PART 3 - EXECUTION
I
3.1... APPLICATIONS
A.: Conductors: Install .solid conductor for. No. 12 AWG and smaller, and stranded conductors for
No..10 AWG.and larger,, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Underground Grounding Conductors: Install bare copper conductor, No: 2/0 AWG minimum.
1. Bury at least 24 inches below.grade.
2..' Ground rings shall be buried a minimum of 30 inches below grade.
C. Conductor Terminations and: Connections:
.1. Pipe and Equipment Grounding Conductor Terminations: Bolted connectors.
2. Underground Connections: Welded connectors.
3. Connections to Structural Steel: Welded connectors. l
4. Connection to Foundation Reinforcing Steel: Welded connectors, j
3.2 EQUIPMENT GROUNDING
A. Install insulated equipment grounding conductors with all feeders and branch circuits.
B. Signal and Communication Equipment: For telephone, alarm, voice and data, and other
communication equipment, provide No. 4 AWG minimum insulated grounding conductor in
16060-2 MOUNTAIRE FARMS -LUMBER BRIDGF.
WWTS UPGRADE

.. raceway fr6hf grounding electrode system :to each service location,. terminal - cabinet,- : wiring
a. closet, and central equipment location.
C. Poles" Supporting Outdoor Lighting. Fixtures:. Install .grounding. electrode -arid a separate
insulated enuipnnent grounding coliductor in addition; :to grounding: _ conductor. installed with
branch=circuit conductors.
3.3 : INSTALLATION
A.' Grounding. Conductors: Route'along.shortest and: straightest paths possible, unless otherwise -
indicated or.required by, Code. Avoid obstructing access or placing conductors where they may
be subjectedto strain, impact, or damage.
B. Ground' Rods: Drive rods -,until tops ai-e,2 inches below finished floor or final .grade, unless
�otherwise indicated. ...:
1. -Interconnect : ground .gods with ..grounding: electrode.. conductor. below grade and .as:
otherwise :idicated.: Make connections without exposing- steel or damaging coating; if
any. ::
2. For grounding electrode system, install a .sufficient number of, ground mods to obtain
_desired ground. resistance, spaced at least one -rod length from each other and located ..
.:least the, same distance from. other grounding electrodes,. and connect to the service
grounding electrode conductor....
v' a.... At service entrance, provide. a mininnuin of three: ground: rods buried in ground .
roughly 10 feet apart from each .other forming an triangle and connecting them
.. ... with copper conductors. -
C.: -:Bonding to Concrete Foundation. Reinforcing Steel: Use exothermic -welded; connectors to band .
to 20 ft or more of 1/ 2 in. foundation and/or. footing -reinforcing steel at each buildings, and
structure. Where 20 ft of reinforcing steel is: not. available, imbed 20 ft or more of bare: copper
not smaller than 4 AWG.
D. Bonding Straps and Jumpers: Install in locatioins accessible for inspection and maintenance,
except where routed through short lengths of -conduit.
1. Bonding to Structure: Bond straps directly to basic structure, taking care nofto penetrate
any adjacent parts.
2. Bonding to Equipment Mounted on Vibration Isolation Hangers and Supports: Install so
vibration is not transmitted to rigidly mounted equipment.
3. Use exothermic -welded connectors for oiltdoor locations, but if a disconnect type
comiection is required, use a bolted clamp.
E. Grounding and Bonding for Piping:
1. Install insulated copper grounding conductors, in conduit, from building's main service
equipment or electrical grounding bus to metal piping entrances to building. Connect
grounding conductors to metal water pipes using a bolted clamp connector or by bolting a
lug -type connector to a pipe flange, using one of the lug bolts of the flange. Bond metal
grounding conductor conduit or sleeve to conductor at each end.
16060-3 MOUNTAIRE FARMS - LUMBER BRIDGE
WWTS UPGRADE

• `I
2.. Use braided -type: bonding jumpers to electrically :bypass water meters. Connect to ,pipe
with a bolted. connector.
3. Bond each: abovegroundportion of gas piping system .:downstream from equipment
shutoff valve.
F. ' Bonding Interior Metal Ducts: Bond metal air ducts to equipment grounding conductors of
associated fans, blowers, electric heateis; and air cleaners.. Install tinned bonding jumper to -I bond across ;flexible duot connections to achieve continuity.
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform the following, tests and inspections and prepare test reports: 1
1. After installing grounding system but before permanent electrical circuits have been
energized, test for compliance with requirements. .
2: Test.00iripleted,grounding system at :each location where a• maximumground-resistance
level is specified, at service disconnect enclosure -grounding terminal, and.at:individual.
ground rods. Make tests at ground rods before any conductors are connected: I.
a. Measure: -ground resistance not less than two full days after last trace of
precipitation and without soil being moistened_ by any means other than natural
drainage or .seepage .and without chemical treatment or. other' artificial means of
reducing natural ground. resistance: .
b. Perform tests by fall -of -potential method according to IEEE 8.1.
1 Prepare -dimensioned drawings locating each ground rod and ground rod,assembly, and
other :grounding _electrodes. Identify 'each by letter. in alphabetical order, and key to, the
record of tests and observations. Include the number of rods driven and their depth at.
each location, and include observations of weather and' other phenomena that may affect' -
test results. Describe measures taken to improve test -results.
B. Report measured ground resistances that exceed 10 ohms and include recommendations to .
reduce ground resistance.
END OF SECTION 16060
16060-4 MOUNTAIRE FARMS - LUMBER BRIDGE
WWTS UPGRADE
i
L

SECTION 16073 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS ..
-PART 1
- GENERAL
I . I
RELATED DOCUMENTS
' A:
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General.. and Supplementary.
Conditions and Division 1 Speclfication:Sections, apply to this Section.::
' 1.2
SUMMARY ;
1 A.
This Section,includes the;following::.
1. Hangers and supports, for electrical;equipment:and systems.
^...
2. Construction requirements for concrete bases.
1.3 ...:
' DEFINITIONS
r A.
RNC: Rigid,rion-metallic conduit.
�.. B.:
RMC: Rigid metal conduit...:
- 1.4
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS .
A.
Design ' supports_ for multiple raceways capable :of supporting coinbiiied 'weiglit of supported ,
systems and its contents.
.. B..:
Design: equipment supports:caPable of su ortin combined, o eratin weight of suPportedPP
equipment and connected systems and -components:
C.
Rated Strength: Adequate in, :tension, shear, and pullout force 'to resist maximum. loads-
:calculated or imposed for this Project, with a minimum structural safety factor of five times the
r :
applied force.
1.5
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For the following:
1. Steel slotted support systems.
I
2. Nonmetallic slotted support systems.
B.
Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details and include calculations for the
`
j'
following:
1. Trapeze hangers. Include Product Data for components.
16073-1 MOUNTAIRE FARMS -LUMBER BRIDGE
1
WWTS UPGRADE

2:: ... Steel§lotted channel systenis..Includd'Product Data for components.
3. Nonmetallic slotted channel systems. 'Include .Product Data for components.
A. Equipment :supports.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Comply with,NFPA70:
..
1.7 COORDINATION • -
A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor=bolt inserts into bases..
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SUPPORT; ANCHORAGE; -AND ATTACHMENT COMPONENTS
A. Steel Slotted Support Systeins: Comply with: MFMA-4; factory -fabricated components for field
ii
assembly.
1: Available Manufacturers: • Subject to: compliance with .requirements; 'manufacturers
offeruig products that.may be incorporated into the Work iiiclude, but are not lirriited to,
the followin
g
:a
Cooper B-Line; Ina; a division of Cooper Industries. .
b. Thomas &:Betts Corporation.
c. , . ° yUnistt•ut;-T co International,.Ltd. 1
cl.... Approved equal: ..
2.: ... Metallic .Coatings:. Hot -dip. galvanized after 'fabrication and applied. according: to
MFMA-4.
3. Nonmetallic Coatings. Manufacturer's standard PVC, polyurethane, or polyester coating
applied according to MFMA-4.
4. Painted'Coatings: Manufacturer's standard painted coating applied according to MFMA-
4.
5. Channel Dimensions: Selected for applicable load criteria.
B. Nonmetallic Slotted . Support Systems: Structural -grade, factory -formed, glass -fiber -resin
channels and angles with 9/16-inch- diameter holes at a maximum of 8 inches o.c.jn.at least 1
surface.
i
1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited -to,
the following:
a. Allied Tube & Conduit. `I
b. Cooper B-Line, Inc.; `a division of Cooper Industries.
C. Fabco Plastics Wholesale Limited.
d. Seasafe, Inc.
f
16073-2 MOUNTAl[C- FARMS - LUMBER BRIDGE
WWTS UPGRADE
J� i

Fittings and Accessories: Products of channel and angle manufacturer and designed. for
use with those. items.
-Fitting and:Accessory:Materials:: Same as q a4ncls and angles, except metal items may
be stainless steel:
4:: Rated- Strength: Selected to. snit applicable: load criteria.
C. Raceway and Cable Supports: As described in NECA. I and N. 101 :
j
D. Conduit and: Cable Support Devices: . Steel and- irialleable=iron hangers, clamps, and associated
..'fittings, designed. for types acid sizes of i�aceway or -cable to be supported:
-' E. Support for. Conductors- in Vertical Conduit: Factory:fabricated - assembly..consisting of
threaded body and insulating wedging plug or plugs for non -armored electrical conductors or
cables in. riser conduits. Plugs:shall have:number,:size, and shape of conductor gripping pieces.
as requiredto suit: individual conductors or oables:supported.; Body shall be malleable'iron.
F.. Structural Steel for Fabricated Supports and Restraints:: ASTM A 36/A 36M: steel' plates,
shapes; _and bars; -black and galvanized.
G. Mounting, Anchoring,. and Attachment Components:::Items for €astening electrical items or
their supports to building surfaces •include the following:
.. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ...
l; .:Powder -Actuated Fastener's: -Threaded-steel stud, for' use in hardened portland cement
... conciete,..steel, or wood, :with tension -and. : and. pullout capacities appropriate' for
supported loads: and building materials where used.
a. Available Manufacturersr Subject to compliance with requirements,.manufacturer's
offering products that "may be incorporated . into the: Work include, but are. not
limited to, the follow' mg:
1) - Hilti Inc.
- . : 2) : ITW Ramset/Red Head; ad ivision of Illinois Tool Works, Inc.-
3) MKT Fastening, LLC.
J 4) Simpson Strong -Tie Co., Inc.; Masterset Fastening Systems Unit.
2. Mechanical -Expansion Anchors: Insert -wedge -type, stainless steel, foruse in hardened
portland cement concrete with tension, shear, and pullout capacities appropriate for
supportedaoads and building materials in which used..
a. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with kequiremerits, manufacturers
offering products that may lie incorporated into the Work. include, ,but are not
Iimited to, the following:
J 1) Cooper B-Line, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries.
2) Empire Tool and Manufacturing Co., Inc.
3) Hilti Inc.
4) ITW Ramset/Red Head; a division of Illinois Tool Works, Inc.
5) MKT Fastening, LLC.
3. Concrete Inserts: Steel or malleable -iron, slotted support system units similar to -MSS
Type 18; complying with MFMA-4 or MSS SP-58.
j 16073-3 MOUNTAIRE FARMS -LUMBER BRIDGE
WWTS UPGRADE
i

4.: '... Clamps ' for Attachment to :Steel Structural Elements: MSS SP-58, :type suitable. for
attached structural element.
5. Through Bolts: Structural type,. _hex :Head, and .:High strength. Comply with ... .
ASTM A 325.
6. Toggle Bolts: All -steel springhead type.
- 7. Hanger Rods: Threaded steel.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3..1 APPLICATION
A.. 'Comply with NECA 1 and.NECA 101..for application of hangers and supports for. electrical
equipiiient and systems except if requirements in this Section are stricter:
B. Maximum Sbppor•t Spacing and Nlinifnum Hanger Rod- Size for Raceway: Space supports for
RNC and RMC as.required by NFPA 70.:Minimum rod size shall be 1/4. inch in diameter.
C. M.ultiple Raceways or Cables: Install trapeze -type supports fabricated with steel- slotted or. non-
e _
metallic slotted support system, sized so capacity can be increased liy at Teast 25 peiceiit in
future without exceeding specified design -load limits:
1.: .. Secure raceways and cables tolliese supports with: single -bolt conduit clainps.
D.:: Spring=steel clamps .designed for supporting single conduits without bolts may be, used for 1.-1/2-inoli and smaller raceways serving branch: oirciiits. and communication, systems. above
suspended ceilings and'for.fastening raceways to- trap eze_supports.:: ll
3.2 SUPPORT INSTALLATION
A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for installation requirements except as specified in this j
Article. f
B. Strength of Support Assemblies: Where not indicated, -select size's of components so strength
will be adequate to carry present and future static loads within specified loading limits.
Minimum static design load used for strength determination shall be weight of supported
components plus 2001b.
C. Mounting and Anchorage of Surface -Mounted Equipment and Components: Anchor and fasten
electrical items and their supports to building structural elements by the following methods
unless otherwise indicated by code:
1. To Wood: Fasten with lag screws or through bolts.
2. To New Concrete: Bolt to concrete inserts. 1
3. To Masonry: Approved toggle -type bolts on hollow masonry units and expansion anchor
fasteners on solid masonry units.
4. To Existing Concrete: Expansion anchor fasteners.
5. Instead of expansion anchors, powder -actuated driven threaded studs provided with lock
washers and nuts may be used in existing standard -weight concrete 4 inches thick or
16073-4 MOUNTAIRE FARMS -LUMBER BRIDGE
WWTS UPGRADE
I

greater.: -Do not'b,se for anchorage to lightweight -aggregate concrete or:. slabs less.than
4 inches thick..
6. To. Steel: Beam clamps. (MSS Type:19, 2I 23, 25, or 27) complying with MSS SP-69,-..
-
-
Spring -tension clamps.
-
7.: To Light -Steel: Sheet metalscrews.
E
8. Items Mounted on Hollow Walls and Nonstructural Building Surfaces: Mount cabinets,..
•panelboards, disconnect: switches,: control --enclosures,: pull ::and junction boxes,
- ...
d. otlie • devices o otted ch nel rack attached .t ubstrafe
transformers,. an t d n sl . - an s a o substrate.
_r..:
D....:- Drill holes for expansion anchors in concrete at locations and.to depths that avoid reinforcing::
bars.:.. , : .:. .. .. .. .. ..
..
- 3.3 - - .: CONCRETE BASES .... - -
A. Construct concrete bases of dimensions indicated but not less .than 4 inches 'larger.in: both
�..
directions than' supported imit, and so -anchors will be° a inininniin of 10 bolt diameteis from
edge of the base.
--B. Use:3000-psi, 28-day compressive -strength concrete.
C.. Anchor equipment to concrete base.
-1
1; ' .. Place: and secure anchorage devices..:: Use supported equipment manufacturer's - setting
_.
drawings, templates, diagrams; instructions, ,and directions furnished' -with. items to' be
embedded... ...
J
2. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper atfachment.to supported equipment.
3'.: : Install: anchor bolts•accorduig to anchor -bolt manufacturer's -written instructions.
3.4 PAINTING ...
A. . Touchup: - Comply with Coating Systems :for cleaning and touchup painting of field welds,
bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint on miscellaneous metal. -
B. Galvanized ::Surfaces:.: Clean welds, bolted connections, and: abraded areas and apply
.
galvanizing -repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780.
END OF SECTION 16073
-
t
16073-5 MOUNTAIRF. FARMS - LUMBER BRIDGE
WWTS UPGRADE

-
I
SECTION 16075 — ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION
.PART 1-GENERAL.: ... ... ... -
1.1. RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings.- and general provisions of the Contract; including. -General . and Supplementary ..
Conditions: and Division I Specification Sections, apply to this Sectiotx
...
.-.
1.2 SUMMARY
as
-.:A. This Section includes the_following
L: Identification for raceway.:
2. Identification for conductors and .communication and control cable.:
3. Underground -line warning tape.:
4. Warning labels acid signs. ..
5'. Instruction signs:
6. :Equipment -identification, labels.
7. Miscellaneous identification products..
1.3 . SUBMITTALS
- A. Product Data:: For each:electrical;rdentification product indicated.
B.. Wire and cable labeling scheme...
1. Submit table detailing wire scheme for each control. cireiut installed under this Contract.
2.: Table.shalI inchide each terminating endpoint with terminal.number, signal type,:conduit
number, and a unique wire identification number.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Comply with ANSI A13.1 and ANSI C2.
B. Comply with NFPA 70.
C. Comply with 29 CFR 1910.145.
1.5 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate identification names, abbreviations, colors, and other features with requirements in
the Contract Documents, Shop Drawings, manufacturer's wiring diagrams, and the Operation
and Maintenance Manual, and with those required by codes, standards, and 29 CFR 1910.145.
Use consistent designations throughout Project. .
16075-1 MOUNTAIRB CARMS -LUMBER BRIDGE
WWTS UPGRADE

B.
...
Coordinate :=installation: of: identifying devices- with coiripletion :of -covering and painting of
surfaces where devices are to be applied.
C.
Coordinate installation of identifying devices with location of access panels and doors.
PART 2 -: PRODUCTS ... ... -
- 2.1 :.
RACEWAY IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS
A.
Comply with ANSI A13.4 for minimum size of letters; for legend and for minimum length of
color field for each raceway and cable size.:
B'..
:.
Color.for Printed Legend:
1.. Power. Circuits:.Black letteis:on an orange field..,:: _
... ...
2-. Legend:' -Indicate system or service and voltage,:if applicable. "
l' C.
Self -Adhesive Vinyl Labels: Preprinted; flexible label lariiinated with a'clear,:weather- acid
chemical -resistant coatijrg and matching wraparound adhesive tape for securing'ends of .legend
label:
D.
Self -Adhesive Viiiyl Tape:_ 'Colored, lieavy duty; waterproof, fade resistant; 2 inches (50 Initi)
wide; compounded for outdoor use.
;.: ..
2.2
... ... ... : .:. ..: .
CONDUCTOR, AND COMMUNICATION- AND CONTROL -CABLE IDENTIFICATION
MATERIALS ... :. ... .
::
A.
Color -Coding Conductor. Tape:. Colored, self.adhesive vinyl tape not less: than 3 mils (0.08
imn) thick by 1 to 2 inches (25. to 50 mm) wide.
B.
Marker Tapes:. Vinyl or. vinyl -cloth, 'Self-adhesive wraparound type, .with circuit identification
i
legend machine :printed:by .thet•mal transfer or equivalent process. - - -
C.
Write -On Tags: Polyester tag, 0.010 inch thick, with corrosion -resistant grommet and polyester
or nylon tie for attachment to conductor or.cable.
1 Marker for Tags: Permanent, waterproof, black ink marker recommended by tag
-'
manufacturer.
2.3
UNDERGROUND -LINE WARNING TAPE
} A.
Description: Permanent, bright -colored, continuous polyethylene tape.
f
.printed,
1. Not less than 6 inches wide by 4 mils thick.
'
2. Compounded for perinaneut direct -burial service.
-
3. Embedded continuous metallic strip or core.,
'
4. Printed legend'shall indicate type of underground line.
16075-2 MOUNTAIRE FARMS — LUMBER BRIDGE
WWTS UPGRADE

2.4 WARNING LABELS AND SIGNS .
A.:. Comply with NFPA 70 and 29 CFR 1910.'1.45.
-B. 8.e1f Adhesive Warning Labels: Factory printed; multicolor, pressu' re -sensitive adhesive Labels,
confi med for dis lay on front cover' door, or other: access to equipment, unless otherwise
indicated: .
f
C. Warning label and sign- shall include; but are not, limited: to; the following legends::
.... .... 1. Multiple Power Source .Warning "DANGER - ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD
EQUIPMENT HAS MULTlPLB POWER SOURCES:"
2. Workspace Clearance Warning: "WARNING. _ OSHA ,REGULATION - AREA IN
.FRONT OF. ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT MUST BE.KEPT CLEAR FOR 3.6 INCHES.":
2.5 INSTRUCTION SIGNS
A. Engraved, laminated acrylic- or melamine plastic, minimum 1/16 incli:thick for signs"up to:20
sq. in, and 1/8-inch thick for largersizes. -
.
I: Engraved legend with black letters on whiteface.
-Punched or, drilled for mechanical f
... : 2. asteners.. ..
3: Framed. with mitered acrylic molding _ and 'arranged for. attachment at applicable
equipment.
I-
2.6 . EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION LABELS
A: Engraved,Laminated' Acrylic or Melamine Label: .Punched.ok drilled.for screw. mounting. .'
White letters on a: dark -gray background:. 'Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch.:
PART 3 -:EXECUTION
3.1 APPLICATION
A. Accessible. Raceways and Metal -Clad Cables, 600 V or Less, for Service, Feeder; and Branch I
Circuits More Than 30 A: Identify with orange self-adhesive vinyl label.
B. Power -Circuit Conductor Identification: For conductors No. 1/0 AWG and larger in vaults,
pull and junction boxes, inar-lioles, and handholds -use color -coding conductor tape and marker
tape. Identify source and circuit number of each set of conductors. For single conductor cables,
identify phase in addition to the above.
C. Branch -Circuit Conductor Identification: Where there are conductors for more than three
branch circuits in same junction or pull box, use marker tape. Identify each ungrounded L
conductor according to source and, circuit number.
r
D. AuxiIiary Electrical; Systems Conductor Identification: Identify field -installed alarm, control, j
signal, sound, intercommunications, voice, and data connections. -
1-6075-3 MOUNTAIRE FARMS - LUMBER BRIDGE
WWTS UPGRADE

1: ..-Identify' conductors, cables, and terminals in enclosures arid; at junctions,.terminals,. and
pull, points: Identify by system andcircuit designation.
2. Use systetriof marker tape designations that is unifotYii and consistent with system used -
by manufacturer for factory -installed connections:
3:: Coordinate identification with -:Project: Drawings; manufacturer's wiring diagramis, - and
Operation and Maintenance Manual.
E. Control Circuit Point to Point Identification and Labeling
1: Wire label to coiitaun unique -wire number and shall identifying each terminating- end
point.
'2. : Wire Label: shall be applied at each end of each circuit; and: shall include:
a. Each terminating end point with.terminal number.
b. : Signal type (DI, DO, AI or.AO):: "
C. Conduit number
. ... ... .
A. A unique wit identification number:
F. Locations of Utdet•groind Lines. Ide ttfy 'with under round-luie Warning- tope for 'power,
lighting, communication, and control wiring and optical fiber cable..
G. Warning Labels for Indoor, Cabinets,.Boxes;. acid, Enclosures for Power and Lighting: Comply
with 29 CFR 1910.145 and apply self-adhesive warning labels..; Identify. system voltage with.
- = black letters on an:orange background.: Apply to exterior of door,.cover; or.otlier access.
I: .,.,Equipment with Multiple Tower or Control Sources: "Apply to door or cover. of
equipment including, but not limited to,: the following:
a. Power transfer switches.
b. Controls:with external control powerconnections.
2: Equipment Requiring Workspace Clearance According to NFPA 70: Unless otherwise
indicated; apply to door or cover of equipment but not on flush: panelboards and similar
equipment in finished :spaces.
" H. Instruction Signs:
1: Operating Instructions: Install instruction signs to facilitate proper 'operation and
maintenance of electrical- systems and items to which they connect: Install instruction
signs with approved legend where instructions, are: needed for' system or equipment
operation. '
2: Emergency Operating Instructions: Install instruction sigris 'with.white legend on a red
backgroun&with minimum 3/8-inch- high letters for emergency instructions at equipment
used for power transfer.
I. Equipment. Identification Labels: On each unit of equipment, install unique designation label
that is consistent with wiring diagrams, schedules, and Operation and Maintenance Manual.
Apply labels to disconnect switches and protection equipment, central or master units, control
panels, control stations, termitnal cabinets, and racks of each system. .Systems include power,
lighting, control, -communication, signal, monitoring, and alarm systems unless equipment is
provided with its own identification.
1. Labeling Instructions:
a. Indoor Equipment: ' Engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine label. . Unless
otherwise indicated, provide a single line of text with 1/2-inch- high letters on 1-
1/2-inch- high label; where 2 lines of text are required, use labels 2 inches high.
b. Outdoor Equipment: Engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine label.
16075-4 MOUNTAIRE FARMS - LUMBFR BRIDGE
W WTS UPGRADE
7
f
J

C. Elevated Components: 'Increase sizes of labels and letters to those appropriate. for : ~I
viewing from the floor.
2. -Equipment to Be Labeled:;
a. 'Panelboards; electrical cabinets, and enclosures:
b. :Transformers.
c. Disconnect switches.
d. Enclosed circuit breakers..:
e. Motor starters.
..J
f
. Push-button stations:: .
� g.: Power transfer egiripmer t.
-b. Power -generating units.
i. Voice and data cable teiffiinal equipment...
j. Monitoring aiid control equipment.
-3.2 INSTALLATION
...
A:: . Verify identity of each item before installing identification products.
B. Location: Install identification materials and Aevices at locations:for most convenient viewing
Without interference_ with operation and maintenance of equipment.
C. Apply identification devices to surfaces that require finish after completing finish work. .
D.- .-.Self Adhesive Identification Products: Clean surfaces before application, using -materials and
methods recommended by manufacturer;of.identification device...
E. Attach nonadhesive sighs and plastic, labelswith screws and auxiliary: hardware.appropf ate to
the location and substrate. I`
F. System Identification Color Banding for Raceways and Cables:. Each color band shall
completely encircle cable or conduit.. Place: adjacent bands of two-color markings in contact,
side by side. Locate -bands at changes in direction, at.penetrations of walls and floors, at 50-foot .
maximum intervals in straight runs, and at 25-foot maximum intervals incongested areas, i
G. Color -Coding for Phase .Identification, 600 V and Less: Use the colors listed below for
ungrounded service, feeder, and branch -circuit conductors.
I. Color shall be factory applied or, for sizes larger than No. 10 AWG if authorities having
jurisdiction permit, field applied.
2. Colors for 208/120-V Circuits:
a. Phase A: Black.
b. Phase B: Red..
C. Phase C: Blue.
3. Colors for 480/277-V Circuits:
a. Phase A: Brow
b. Phase B: Orange.
16075-5 MOUNTAME FARMS -LUMBER BRIDGE
WWTS UPGRADE
it

16075-6 MOUNTAIRE FARMS - LUMBER BRIDGE
WWTS UPGRADE

PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. American Insulated Wire Corp.; a Leviton Company.
2. General Cable Corporation.
3. Southwire Company.
4. Approved equal.
B. Copper Conductors: Comply with NEMA WC 70.
16120-1 MOUNTAIRE FARMS - LUMBER BRIDGE
wwTS UPGRADE

C: Conductor Insulation:::Comply with NEMA WC 70 foi: Types THW, T14HN7*THWN, XHHW
. and SO.
D. Multiconduator. Cable: Comply with NEMA WC 70 for arinored cable; Type AC'and Type SO
ff
.. .
with ground *ire.
2.2_ CONNECTORS AND SPLICES
A._ Available Mantnfacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, lnanufactuters- offering:.
-products that maybe incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited -to, the following:"::
I.. = O-Z/Gedney; EGS Electrical Group LIX. E.
2. 3M; Electrical Products Division...: ..:
.: ...
:Tyco Electronics Corp:
4.: Approved equal, .
B:: Description; Factory -fabricated connectors and splices of size; ampacity rating, material, type,
and class for. application and service indicated.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 CONDUCTOR MATERIAL APPLICATIONS
... ... ... ...
A. Feeders: Copper, Stranded,.°
B. :.Branch Circuits to wiring devices: Copper. Solid for No. 14 AWG and,smallei; -stranded for
{
.-No. 12;AWG and:lat et
:J
I: - - For circuits terminating at wiring devices:: Provide. spade lugs on stranded conductors if
-wiring device is; not_ provided .with a: screw and :clamp back Wire, termination listed for
stranded wire..
}
2. For other electrical.loads: Provide: crimped ferrule or spade lugs on stranded coinductors if
terminating end is not a box lug or other similar compression.connection.
.
3.2 CONDUCTOR INSULATION AND MULTICONDUCTOR'CABLE APPLICATIONS AND
--�
WIRING METHODS.
-
A. Type THW, THHN-THWN, or XHHW.single conductors in raceway.
B. Cord Drops and Portable Appliance Connections: Type SO, hard. service cord with stainless -
steel, wire -mesh, strain relief device at terminations to suit application.
'
3.3 INSTALLATION OF CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
A. Use manufacturer -approved pulling compound 'or. lubricant where necessary; compound used
'
must not deteriorate conductor or insulation. Do not exceed manufacturer's recommended
maximum pulling tensions and sidewall pressure values.
16120-2 MOUWAIRE FARMS - LUMBER BRIDGE
WWTS UPGRADE
1

B. Use pulling -means, including fish tape, cable; rope, and basket -weave. wire/cable.grips, that will
-not damage cables or. raceway. (
.:I
.C. Inistall exposed cables parallel and perpendicular to surfaces of exposed structural. members, and
follow surface contours where possible.
D. Identify and color -code conductors :and: cables according to Section 16075 "Electrical
Identification.
3.4 CONNECTIONS I
f
A.. t . 'ghtening' val'ues., If manufacturer'sonnectrs. ande rminatorque valuesaare not indicated,'use hoseslspec fed . in
UL 486A-and UL 486B.
B.. Make splices arid. taps that=are compatible with conductor material aiid that;possess equivalent I
or better mechanical strength:and insulation ratings than unspliced conductors.
-C. Wiring at Outlets: Install conductor at each outlet, with at least 6 inches of slack
=I
3.5.FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. ..Perform tests and inspections and prepare tesfreports.
B. Tests and Inspections:
1. After mstallingconduetors and cables and before electrical circiiitry.has been.eneigized,
nest service entrance and.feeder conductors for -compliance with requirements.: •. :;
2.: ... Perform.. each visual and • :mechanical: inspection and electrical test., stated in:: NETA
:I
Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters.
3. Infrared Scanning: After.Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after Final
Acceptance, perform an infrared scan of each splice in cables and conductors No. 3 AWG
and larger. Remove box and equipment covers so splices are accessible to portable
scanner.
a. Follow-up Infi•ared Scanning: Perform an additional follow-up infrared scan of
each splice 11 months after date of Substantial Completion.
b. Instrument: Use an infrared scanning device designed to measure temperature or
to detect significant deviations from normal values. Provide calibration record for
device.
C. Record of Infrared Scanning: Prepare a certified report that identifies splices
checked and that describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies
detected, remedial action -taken and observations after remedial action.
'I
C. Test Reports: Prepare a written report to record the following: j
1. Test procedures used. {
2. Test results that comply with requirements. �.
16120-3 MOUNTAIRE FARMS - LUMBER BRIDGE..
WWTS UPGRADE
�I

... .
SECTION 16123 - FIBER OPTIC AND INSTRUMENTATION CABLES.
:PART I - GENERAL
... ... . ... ... ...
1..1 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE
A.' Fiber Optic Patch Cords & Cat-5 Patch Cables: Section 17100, Control Equipment.
B. PLC RIO Cable: Section 17100, Control Equipment.
1.2 SUBMITTALS:'
A. . Product Data: For each type of product indicated:
B: 'Field quality control -test reports.
C. Subinit fibei`optic cable installation plan
1, :Cable -pulling plan that sp ' ifies:the sequence of work task's, materials- and equipinent. ,
2:: Provide an optical link analysis for each fiber optic link.
a-. Calculate �tlansmit/receive o tical ower _ loss of each: fiber link: "
point-to-point : p ..: .p
using proposed installed cable lengths.
b. Include all .losses through, connectors.
C., Submit calculated .values incliidnig sketches graphically .showing'the proposed
cable:route.
.. PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 INSTRUMENTATION CABLES
i
A. These cables shall be used for all. analogsignal wiring installed under this contract.
B. Single Pair or Triad - Overall Shield .
1. Conductors shall be single twisted pair or triad tinned copper with an overall shield. The
insulation shall be rated at 300V. Conductors shall be bare soft annealed copper, Class B,
19 strand concentric.. Insulation shall be 15 mil nominal thickness, 90 C temperature
rating and flame retardant.
2. Cable shield shall be 1.35 mil blue aluminum -polyester tape overlapped to provide 100% I -
coverage, and a 7 strand tinned copper drain wire, two sizes smaller than the conductor.
3. Overall jacket shall be flame retardant, 90 C temperature rated and UL listed.
4. The minimum size conductor shall be 18 AWG for shielded instrumentation cable unless
otherwise noted.
C. Multi Pairs or Triads - Overall Shield
16123-1 MOUNTAIRF. FARMS - LUMBER BRIDGE
WWTS UPGRADE
I

_i
L: ... Conductor shall: be. tinned: copper, :19-strand :concentric.: 'Insulationi shall be: flame ...
retardant PVC insulation, 115 mils .nominal -thickness and. a nylon jacket, 4 -mil nominal
thickness rated 300 volts;,:Insulation sliall have 90 C temperature:iating per UL.1277.
. 1.
2Cable `shield shall be 2.35 mil blue aluminum polyester tape: overlapped to provide 100% ..
coverage and: a 7-strand tinned cover drain wire same as conductors.-.
3. Overall jacket shall be flame retardant, 90 C temperature rated and:UL listed.::
4.: The .mbaiinum size conductor for shielded pairs: 'or triad. shall be:-18- AWG:.unless
kk
otherwise -noted::
D: Acceptable Manufacturer
All instrumentation cable and conductors shall be as rnanufactdtbd by :Okonite Company,
Belden Electronic Wire" and Cable Company ' or equal. - All instrumentation. cable and:-
conductors to be. installed in cable trays shall'be NEC approved foi� this use.
2.2 : FIBER- OPTIC -CABLES
A. 6-Strand Fiber Optic Cable
- 1. _Fiber optic;:cables shall be tight-briffered, -riser-rated; multifiber breakout cables which
_.
meet the following requirements:
a.. FDDI . rated cable ° suitable . for both . indoor and outdoor : Iocations : in wet.
environments ....
_I . b. PVC outer jacket which. permits pulling with .direct attachment of wire mesh grip
C. : Breakoutcable with r 6cord to assist in jacket.removal: ...
d. -. 250 urn acrylate primary buffer coating over each optical fiber.
e. 900-um PVC secondary tight buffer coating oven each optical fiber
f. Short term tensile load rating of not less than 300 pounds (1300 newtons)
g Long term aensile load rating of :hot less than 90 pounds (500 newtons)
h. Suitable for direct field termination with most standard optical connectors
is -40,10 +85 C operating temperature
j. .6 fiber count
! k. Overall outside diameter not greater than 0.5 inches .
Minimum bend radius of 20X outside diameter under installation tensile load
M. Miniinum bend radios of:1 OX ouetsiddiaineter.undei• long�terrn tensile load
n. 62.5/125 micron Graded Index fibers
o. Attenuation of 3.0 dB/km and bandwidth of 160 M1I*km`at 850 n n
p. Attenuation of 1..0 dB/km and bandwidth of 500 MHz -km at 1300 nm
- q. Optical Cable Corporatiori BX series assembly cable, or approved equal.
�( B. 2-Strand Fiber~ Optic Cable
1. Fiber optic cables shall be duplex zipeord, type OFNR, 2 fiber breakout cables which
i meet the following requirements:
a. 62.5/125pra Graded Index Multimode Optical Fiber.
b. Meet or Exceeds TIA 568B requirements.
C. Min. Bandwidth Measured -in the Overfill ]Launch Method:
16123-2 MOUNTAIRF FARMS - LUMBER BRIDGE
WWTS UPGRADE
i
f

g. JAL VULMU6 U14111ULG1 1111111111L1111.UG1LU 1¢LU1UJ. -
h. Optical Cable Corporation AX series assembly cable, or approved equal.
C... Provide suitable ST-connectors for all -fiber optic cables. All .fibers, including spares, shall be
...terminated using -ST connectors- recommended by the cable manufacturer.,: Signal loss at any
connection point e. atch panel connection) shall not. exceed 1.S..dB er assembly.
P g• p. P n � p y
2.3 ETHERNET CABLE
A.. Unshielded Twisted -Pair Cabling
1. No. 24 AWG, 100 ohm, four pain. a
2.: Cable Jacket Color: Gray.
3 Comply with TIA/EIA-5688.2; Category Se
4.
Comply with UL 444_ _ :--
5. Belden Inc.; General Cable Technologies Corp, or A roved E ual
B. .. Terminal Connectors:: Modular, color -coded, RJ-45 plug.
l . .. AMP Company, Cooper Wiring Devices; or approved° equal .
PART 3 . EXECUTION
L
3.1 SIGNAL AND CONTROL CABLE
A. General
1. Size cable and its conduit to keep pulling tension within manufacturer's recommended
limits.
2. Use cable of sufficient length to make a continuous run. Splicing of shielded signal cable
will not be permitted.
3. Furnish a separate raceway system for shielded signal cable. Do not run in the same r
conduit with power cable.
4. Where telemetry cables are run in the same duct bank with power cables, use galvanized
steel conduit. Use junction boxes and "LB" fittings in manholes to maintain a continuous
steel raceway system for signal cables.
5. Ground cable shield at termination of instrumentation cabinet only. Ground connection (�
should be visible. i
B. Telemetry and Instrumentation Signal Systems
I
1. Separate conduit and wireway runs are required for this category. All wiring is to be
isolated from all power systems.
16123-3 MOUNTAIRE FARMS - LUMBER BRIDGE
WWTS UPGRADE
i

C. Control Wiring
1. Control wiring may be pulled inAhe.power:conduits grid Areways providing the highest..
voltage of the adjacei't wires is not more -than 120 volts.
I D. Power Control Systems
1'. The wiring of this category (single conductor, or multiple conductor) is to be installed' in
accordance with.tlre-NEC.
-, 3.2 FIBER OPTIC CABLE.
A...: - General
Install. fiber optic cable,: and connectors in .: accordance : with the manufacturer's
recommendations and as indicated on. the'Drawia' and as specified in, ,this -section.
2. All terminators required* to interface the .new cables. to the various devices shall .be:
furnished,.iiistalled, connected and tested as part of this contract.,:'
B. Tnstaflation:
-1. :'Install cables in the indicated raceway_systems. Inspect raceways prior to pulling cables.
_.� Rod and swab out conduits -and ducts prior to installing cables..
2: Pull cables .prior to attachment of connectors.
3. Pull. cables: using an indirect attachment : method such as a " Keliems Grip" which
distributes the pulling forces,ov" the outer portion- of the cable. Pulls. directly_ on. the
.. fiber:core.will not be. allowed.-.
.4. Do not exceed. maximum .pulling.strength limits of the cable duritng.the installation of the. .
.__ ... cable using a _remote: sensing:puller, strain..gauge or.rumung. line tensiometer. :If'... ..
electronic tension monitoring. equipment. is used, it shall be calibrated. or checkedfor
calibration on a daily. basis or prior to any cable pull:
5. To. reduce cable friction and muiimiie pulling- forces during installation, use -a polymer
based, water soluble lubricant when pulling cable.
6... Do not exceed the minimum bend radius of the cable. Tight loops, kinks, knots or tight
`b bends will not be allowed during installation.
f 7. For conduit installation; the minimum bending radius (under installation tensile load) -
shall be- 12 inches. :Use sweeping elbows at all transitions from horizontal to vertical'
conduit:rans.
f 8. Within matilioles; route and support.fiber optic cable along the inside wall and protect
using corrugated slit duct.
9. PuIl the cable in one continuous.mn. Do not make splices in cable. Provide adequate run
lengths on cable reels to make termination -to -termination runs without splices.
10. Provide junction boxes and pull boxes as required by the cable manufacturer.
11. Terminate all strands of cable; provide water resistant caps on unused terminated strands.
C. Identification
1. Tag each cable with a plastic laminated identification tag. Provide tags that are indelibly
marked, and which include the following information:
16123-4 MOUNTAME FARMS -- LUMBER BRIDGE
WWTS UPGRADE

a. Cable tag designation.
b. Fiber type and size.
c. Number of fibers per cable.
d. Cable length..
-2. 'Tag each cable in junction boxes; pull boxes, and trench duct every 100 feet. "
. D. Testing
1. Test each strand of fiber optic cables before and after field installation. Tests shall be
witnessed.by the Engineer.
:.
a. Upon receipt of the fiber optic cable reels;- test each- fiber separately with an
Optical Time Domain Reflectometer. (OTDR) .to: verify fiber length,: attenuation_
and:"continu ity
b. . After the. cable has been installed, visually: inspect each "fiber termination.for out- I
of -round: conditions and surface defects suclv as cracks and micro=chips, iising a
200x:inspection microscope. '
I
c.. " . After'connectors have been attached" at both ends, test each fiber with an. optical
power meter and calibrated light:source or OTDR. Tests shall be bi-directional.
2. Furnish certification documents : for each test and record the following data'. Include
printout from the OTDR with the certification documents.
a... ' Installer's company °name and, address.
. b. Installer'.s name: ..
C. Date of certification.
d. ' Attenuation of each frber.link.
e. Length of each fiber optic link measured..
f. Equipment used:to certify the fiber optic link.
g. Name of person(s) recording the test data.
3. Power meters shall have calibrations traceable to National Institute of Standards and
Technology (NISI) standards.
4.. The maximum total' loss including connectors and -cable attenuation for each fiber optic
link shall not exceed 5 dB.
3.3 ETHERNET CABLE
A. Installation
I . Comply with NECA 1.
B. Cable Installation:
1. Install exposed cables parallel and perpendicular to surfaces or exposed structural
members and follow surface contours where possible:
2. Make splices, taps, and terminations only at indicated outlets, terminals, and cross -
connect and patch panels.
16123-5 MOUNrAIRE FARMS - LUMBER BRIDGE
WWTS UPGRADE

3.; Pulling. Cable: Do not exceed manufacturer's writtenrecommended pulling tensions.. Do
not- install -bruised, kinked, scored,deformed, or abraded cable.. Do not splice cable..
between termination,... or junction points.. Remo.. _n discard cable'if .damaged .;
during installation and replace.if with new cable.. .
-
4:: Secure and support:cables:at intervals not exceeding 3l) inches and -:not more: than 6
:-
inches from cabinets; boxes, fittirigs,- outlets,yacks, frames; and terminals.
5. Install UT cables using: techniques, practices, and�:inetbods that -are consistent with - .
Category-5e ratitig:of components and'that ensure Category.Se: performance of completed
and linked signal'P aths, end io-end.
a. Do riot untwist iniore than: 1/2 inch of Categories"Se and6"cables,' at 'connector
'-
terminations:
6. Separation .:from EMI • Sources:::Comply *With BICS1 TDM. 'and T1A/E1A-569-A:
commendations for: separating unshielded copper voice and data communication cable
from: potential EMI sources, including electrical: power lines --and equipment. Comply
with the following minimum separation distances frorin.possible sources of EMI:
a, Separation between unshielded power'lines or electrical equipment in proximity to
.. . open cables or, cables m,nonmeta nonmetallic raceways is as follows:
-1) .: Electrical :Equipment Rating Less,Than 2 kVA: 5 inches.
2) . ' Electrical Equipment Rating Between 2 and 5 kVA: ; 12 inches.'
3) . Electrical Equipment Rating. More Than 5 kVA`: 24. inches: ...
. b. Sepaiation betrveen.unshielded powerlines or electrical equipment in proximity to ..
cables in grounded metallic raceways is as follows:
1) Electrical Equipment Rating Less Than 2 kVA: 2-1/2 inches.
�.:
2) ElechicalEquipment Rating between 2 and 5 kVA: 6: inches.
3) Electrical Equipment Rating More Than 5 kVA: 12 inches.
c.. Separation between power ;lines and electrical. equipment located. in- grounded-.
-I
metallic conduits or enclosures in : proximity to - cables: ' in grounded :metallic
raceways is as follows:
1) Electrical Equipment Rating Less Than 2IVA: No requirement.
2) Electrical Equipmert Rating between 2 and 5 kVA:. 3� inches.
3) ' Electrical Equipment Rating More Than 5 kVA:. 6 inches.
d. ElectricaI Motors and Transformers, 5. kVA or HP and Larger: 48 inch_ es:
_-T
e. Fluorescent Fixtures: 5 inches.
C. Conduit:
1. Comply with TIA/EiA-569-A for maximum Iength of conduit and bends between pull
k
points, and for pull -box sizing.
2. Use manufactured conduit sweeps and long -radius ells whenever possible.
-D. Testing
16123-6 MOUNTAIRF-FARMS -LUMBER BRIDGE
W WTS UPGRADE

Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare: test reports: -
2. Category 5e UTP Cabling Tests:
a. Test instruments shall .meet or exceed applicable requireinents-in .TIA/EIA7568-
13'.2. Perform:tests with a tester that complies with :performance i�equiremehts in
Annex I; complying with measurement accuracy specified in Annex H. Use only.,
..
test cords and adapters that are qualified by .test equipment manufacturer for
channel of: link test configuration. .
b. Visually :inspect cable - placement,- cable: termination, groundidg and bonding,
equipment and patch cords,.and labeling of all components.;..
a t
c: Wire-�map testa that reports open circuits, short circuits, crossed pairs, reversed
.I
-pairs, split pairs, and. improper terminations.
d. Channel :and 'permanent link tests for ,'cable length, insertion loss, dear=end
crosstalk lo
ss, power sum: near -end crosstalk loss, equal -level far -end crosstalk.
loss;'power sum equal -level far-end.''osstalk, return ,loss, propagation delay, and
delay skew. , Performance shall :comply with minimum criteria- in TIAMIA-568-
B.2. .
3. Data for each measurement shall be documented. Data for submittals shall be'pl•iilted ina
suminaiy repori.:that, is formatted similar..to Table :10.1 in.. BICSI TDM, or transferred
thm from e instruent to the comp uter,.saved as text files; and printed and subinitted.
A. Remove and replace'cabling where. test results indicate. that they -do not comply with
:..
specified -requirements.
5: Retestand inspect cabling 'to determine compliance .of replaced or additional work' with
specified requirements.
END OF SECTION 16123
r
I I.
16123-7 MOUNTAIRF, FARMS - LUMBER. BRIDGE
WWTS UPGRADE i

SECTION 16130 -RACEWAYS AND BOXES
PART 1-
GENERAL.: ..: .
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.'
...
Drawings and general provisions .of, the Contract; including `General:, and Supplementary._-
=
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.::
1.2
. - SUMMARY
A.
This Section .includes raceways, fittings, boxes, enclosures, and cabinets for electrical wiring.
awr
- ..:
1.3 ..
DEFINITIONS
A.
EMT: Electrical metallic tubing.. -
B'.
ENT:: Electrical:nonmetallictubing.
C,.
EPDM: Etliylene-piopyleiie-dierie'tercpolymer rubber.",':
C
:...
D.
RMC: Flexible metal conduit.
E.
IMC: Intermediate metal conduit.
R
LFMC: Liquidtight flexible metal conduit.
G.
...
LFNC: Ligi idtight.flexible nonmetallic conduit.
H.
NBR:: Acrylotiitrile-butadiene rubber.
I.
INC:' Rigid nonmetallic conduit.
1.4
SUBMITTALS
^.
A.:
.' Product Data: For surface; raceways, wireways: and fittings, hinged -cover enclosures, and
cabinets.
B.
Shop Drawings: For'the following raceway components. Include plans, elevations, sections,
details, and attachments to other work.
1 For handholes and boxes for underground wiring, including the following:
a. Duct entry provisions, including locations and duct sizes.
b. Frame and cover design.
16130-1 MOUNTAIM FARMS -LUMBER BRIDGE
I
6
'
WWTS UPGRADE

C. Grounding details.
d... Dimensioned locations of cable rack inserts, and pulling -in and lifting irons.
e. Joint details.
C. Coordination Drawings: Conduit routing plans;:drawn_to_scale, Oil which the following items
are shown and coordinated with each other; based on input from.installers of the items.involved:
1. ' Structural members in the paths of conduit groups with common supports..
2.: HVAC and plumbing items and architectural featores in the:paths of conduit groups with
common supports.
D. Source quality.-control.test*reports, .
1.5 . = QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Electrical Components; Devices, and- Accessories: Listed''and labeled as defined in NFPA: 70,
Article 100, by a.testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, andmarked foi-
intended use.
B.. Comply wftli NFPA 70'. .
i
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 METAL CONDUIT AND TUBING
A: Available.Manufactureirs: Subject to compliance with requirements; .manufacturers offering.
... ... products 'that may be uncorporated into the. Work include, but are .not limited. to, the. following:
1.: Allied:Tube & Conduit; a Tyco International Ltd:.Co.,
.2. Anaiinet Electrical, Inc.; Anaconda Metal Hose.
3. O-Z Gedney; a unit of General Signal.
4. . Wheatland Tube Company.
5. Approved equal.
B. Rigid Steel Conduit: ANSI C80.1.
C. PVC -Coated Steel Conduit: PVC -coated rigid steel conduit.
1. Comply with NEMA RN 1.
2. Coating Thickness: 0.040 inch, minimum.
D. LFMC: Flexible steel conduit with PVC jacket.
E. EMT: ANSI C80.3.
F. Fittings for Conduit (Includuig all Types and Flexible and Liquidtight), EMT, and Cable:
NEMA FB 1; listed for type and size raceway with which used, and for application and
environment in which installed.
J
1613 0-2 MOUNTA1RE FARMS - LUMBER BRIDGE
WWTS UPGRADE

C
L: ... Coating .for Fittings_ for PVC-Coated.:Conduit: " Minimum thickness,''O.040 inch, with
overlapping sleeves protectnig threaded joints..
2. Fittings for'EMT: Steel, compression type
G.
Joint Compound for Rigid, Steel Conduit or I1VIC: Listed for use in: cable connector assemblies,
and compounded' -for use to lubricate and protect threaded raceway joints -from corrosion and
enhance their conductivity.
2.2
NONMETALLIC CONDUIT .
A.
is
Available N[anufacturers; Subject -to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
wo
products that may be incorporated linto the Work include; but are. not limited to; the following:
_I
1. AFC Cabl&Systems,!Inc.'
2. Anamet Electrical,. Inc.; Anaconda Metal Hose. . .
_
3. Arnco Corporation.
:.:
4. CANTEX Inc:
5. Cei tainTeed Corp.; Pipe & Plastics Group.:':
i
6:: Condux International, Inc.
7- EIecSYS,-Inc.
S. Electri--Flex: Co.
9: Lainson, & Sessions; Carlon Electrical Products. -
10, ... Manhattan/CDT/Cole-Flex..'',
11. RACO; a Hubbell Company.
.
12. Thomas &:Betts Corporation.
-B.
RNC: NEMA TC 2, Type EPG40=PVC, unless otherwise indicated...
C.:
LFNC:::UL 1660.:: ..:
D.
Fittings for RNC: NEMA TC 3; match to conduit type and material.
-
f
-j E.::
Fittings for LFNC- UL 5144:
j 2.3
METAL WIREWAYS
-� A.
Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may, be incorporated into the Work include; but are not,, limited to; the following:
-
_x
1. Cooper B-Line; hic.
2. Hoffman.
3. Square D; Schneider Electric.
4. Approved equal.
} B.
Description: Sheet metal sized and shaped as indicated, NEMA 250, Type 1, unless otherwise
indicated.
16130-3 MOUNTAIRE FARMS -LUMBER BRIDGE
WWTS UPGRADE

C. Fittings and.Accessories::.Include couplings,: offsets, elbows, expansion joints; .adapters; hold- .
down straps, end caps, and other fittings to match and mate. with wireways as required for. .
complete system.-
D. Wireway Covers: Hinged type.
E.:. Finish: Manufacturer's standard -enamel finish.
2.4 .:.: BOXES, -ENCLOSURES, AND -CABINETS
A. Available Manufacturers; - Subject ao compliance with. requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated:into the Work -include but are not limited to, the following:
'I. Cooper Crouse -Hinds; Div. of Cooper Industries, Inc.
.. 2. EGS/Appleton Electric.
3: o an.
4. Hubbell Incorporated; _I�illark Electric Manufacturing Co.' Division.
5. O-Z/Gedney; a unit of General Signal..
6.: RACO; a Hubbell Company,
9: Robroy Industries, Inc.; Enclosure Division.
8. Thomas &;Betts Corp. .n..
9: 'Approved equal.
B. Sheet Metal Outlet and Device. Boxes: NEMA OS 1. .
C. Cast -Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: NEMA FB 1, ferrous alloy, .Type FD, with gasketed
cover.
1. Provide PVC -Coated pull and jtiiiction boxes on PVGCoated conduit runs'. PVC_ coated'..
boxes shall be supplied by the same manufacturer as the PVC -Coated conduit
D. Nonmetallic Outlet and Device Boxes: NEMA OS 2.
E. Small Sheet Metal Pull and Junction Boxes: NEMA OS 1.
F, Cast -Metal Access; PIull, and Junction Boxes: NEMA FB 1, cast aluminum with gasketed
cover.
G. Hinged -Cover Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1, with continuous -lunge cover with flush latch,
unless otherwise indicated.
1. ' Metal Enclosures: Steel, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel.
2. Nonmetallic Enclosures: UV resistant fiberglass.
H. Cabinets:
1. NEMA 250, Type 1, galvanized -steel box with removable interior ,panel and removable
front, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel.
2. Hinged door in front cover with flush latch and concealed hinge.
3. Key latch to match panelboards.
4. Metal barriers to separate wiring of different systems and voltage.
1613 0-4 MOUNTAIRE FARMS - LUMBEIt BRIDGE
WWTS UPGRADE

1
5: Accessory feet where required for freestanding equipment.
2.5.1 HANDHOLES.AND BOXES FOR EXTERIOR. UNDERGROUND WIRING . .
A. -Description': Comply with SCTE 77.
1: Color of.Fiame and Cover: Gray.
2:: Configuration: Units shall: be designed for flush .burial and have open bottom;: unless
otherwise indicated.
3. :Cover: Weatherproof;:secured by tamper -resistant locking: devices and having'structural
.. " load rating consistent with enclosure..:,
4: Cover Finish: Nonskid ,finish shall have a minimuin-coefficie'nt of friction of 0.50:
5. Cover Legend:' Molded lettering,. as indicated for each. service.
B. Polymer -Concrete Handholes and. Boxes with :Polymer-Conncrete .Cover: Molded of sand and
aggregate, bound. togetlnei� with :' olyiner resin, "and reinforced with steel .or fiberglass or a
combination of the fwo.
1. Basis -.of -Design .Piodtiict: ' Subject to. compliance with re uireinents,. provide Hubbell
J q.
Power:Systems Quazite or a comparable product by one of the following: '
a: Armorcast Products.Company,
b. Carson Industries LLC.. ,
c. ::CDR Systems Corporation.
d.. NewBasis.
I C. Source Quality"Control�ForUndergrotrnd Enclosures
1. Handhole and Pull -Box. Prototype Test: Test 'prototypes: of handlroles and. boxes for.: `
compliance with SCTE 77. Strength tests shall, be for: specified tier ratings::of.products
supplied..
a, Tests.of materials shall be performed by a independent testing agency.
'li. Strength tests of complete= boxes and covers :shall be by: either. an independeriY
testing agency or manufacturer. A qualified_registered professional engineer,shall
certify tests by manufacturer.
C. Testing machine" pressure gages shall have current calibration . certification
complying with ISO 9000 and ISO 10012, and traceable to NIST standards.
E
i
PART 3 - EXECUTION
_J 3.1 RACEWAY APPLICATION
A. Outdoors: Apply raceway products as specified below, unless otherwise indicated:
C -
1. Exposed Conduit: Rigid steel conduit.
2.. Underground Conduit, Direct Buried: Rigid ,steel conduit, PVC coated.
3. Underground, Concrete Encased: Rigid Nonmetallic Conduit
1613 0-5 MOUN,wm FARMS - LUMBER BRIDGE
WWTS UPGRADE

I
4; Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and flydraulic, Pneumatic,
Electric Solenoid, or Motot-Driven Equipment): LFMC.
5. Boxes and Enclosures; Aboveground:. NEMA 250, Type 4X 316 stainless steel.
6. AppIicatioin of Handholes and Boxes for Underground Wiring..
a.:. Handholes and -Pull Boxes. in. Driveway,.Parking Lot, and Off -Roadway Locations, .
I
Subject to Occasional, Non;deliberate Loading by Heavy Vehicles: Polymer
concrete, SCTE 77, Tier 15 structural load 'rating.
b. Ha dholes and Pull Boxes in, Sidewalk and- Similar- Applications with a:Safe I
tl'
Factor for Non -deliberate Loading by.V.ehicles: Polymer -concrete units.- SCTE 77,
Tier 8 structural load rating:
B. Indoors: Apply raceway products as specified below, unless otherwise indicated.
I
1. _Exposed, Dry Locatioii: Rigid Steel Conduit.
2:. Damp or Wet Locations: Rigid Steel Conduit, PVC Coated. I
a-. All Hazardous Locations and General Propose Locations with'open channels, open
aauks, or' process areas. subject to.washdown shall be considered a Damp or Wet
-: Location........
b. -' All areas'within vaults, pits or -otherwise below grade shall be considered a Damp.
or Wet'Location:
1: Concealed in Ceilings and interior Walls and Partitions: EMT-:
A. Embedded in.concrete floors and walls, and below concrete floors and'slabs: RNC
a. Use PVC -Coated Steel. Conduit where conduits pass through, stub -up or leave
concrete floors and walls.
b. Use- PVC -Coated Steel Conduit where conduits stub -up or leave outdoor grade
level.
S. Boxes and .Enclosures:: NEMA 250, Type 1, except. use NEMA 250, Type 4X, 316
stainless steel in damp or wet locations.
C. Minimum Raceway Size: 3/4-inch trade size.'
D. Raceway Fittings: ' Compatible with raceways and suitable for use and location.
1. Rigid and hntermediate Steel Conduit: Use threaded rigid steel conduit fittings; unless
otherwise indicated.
2. PVC Externally Coated, Rigid Steel Conduits: Use only fittings listed for use with that
material. Patch and seal all joints, nicks, and scrapes in PVC coating after installing
conduits and fittings. Use sealant recommended by fitting manufacturer.
r
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with NECA 1 for installation requirements applicable to products specified in Part 2
except where requirements on Drawings or in this Article are stricter.
16130-6 MOUNTAIRE FARMS - LUMBER BRIDGE
WWTS UPGRADE

y
B.
Keep:raceways .at least 6- inches away. from parallel runs of flues aild. steam or hot-water pipes. : ...
Install horizontal raceway runs above water and steam. piping: -
C.
Complete raceway installation before star ting conductor -installation. .
I D:
Support raceways_ as specified in Section 16073 "Hangers and Supports
E.
Arrange stub -tips so curved portions of bends are not visible *above -the finished slab:
..
K.
Install.:no more than the equivalent of three 907degree bendsin any conduit run except for
communications .conduits, fol` which fewer -bends are allowed.: .
'G.
Conceal conduit within finished walls, ceilings, and floors, unless otherwise indicated.
H.:
Raceways Embedded inn Slabs:
Run ; conduit larger than' = 1 inch trade... size, .' parallel of: at right angles to main j
reinforcement,' Whereat right angles to reinforcement,. place conduit close to slab'
:Support.
2:: Arrange, 'to cross: building. -ex a.nsion oat rangleswith exp:ansion
-,
..r:acewaYs .l:u.ts
fittings.
I:
Thieaded Conduit Joints, Exposed to Wet, Damp,' Corrosive, of .Outdoor Conditions:. Apply
listed. compound to threads. of raceway and fittings before making, up joints. Follow compound
manufacturer's written instructions.
..
J.'
.. ':
Raceway Terminations at Locations. Subject to. Moisture or Vibration:. Use insulating bushings
to: protect conductors, including conductors smaller than'No_ 4 AW.G:.
K.::
Install.' 11: wires: in empty raceways. Use .polypropylene or: inonofilatnent plastic: line .with not .. _
less than 200-lb tensile strength. Leave at least.12. inches of slack at each end of pull wire.. .
L.
Raceways for Optical Fiber and Communications. Cable: histall raceways, metallic and
nonmetallic, rigid and flexible, as follows:
I.: 3/4-hich Trade Size and Smaller: Install raceways in maximum lengths of 50 feet.
2. I. -Inch Trade. Size and. Larger: Install raceways in maximum lengths of 75 feet.
3. Install with a maximum of two 90-degree bends or equivalent for each length of -raceway
unless Drawings show stricter -requirements. Separate lengths `with pull or junction boxes
or teriininations at distribution frames or cabinets where necessary.to;comply with these
requirements:
M.
Install raceway sealing fittings at suitable, approved, and accessible locations and fill them with
listed sealing compound. For concealed raceways, install each fitting in a flush steel box with a
blank cover plate having a finish similar to that of adjacent plates or surfaces. Install raceway
sealing fittings at the following points:
1. Where conduits pass from warm to cold locations, such as boundaries of refrigerated
spaces.
2. Where otherwise required by NFPA 70.
16130-7 MQUNTAIRE FARMS -LUMBER BRIDGE
WWTS UPGRADE

I
N. Ekpansion-:loint Fittings'for RNC .Install in each run: of ,abovegrotiud conduit that is located ~
Where environmental temperature change. may exceed 30 deg F, and that has straight -run length
that exceeds 25 feef.
I.: Install- expansion joint fittings for each of the following locations, andprovide type -and
quantity of fittings that accommodate temperature change. listed for location:
a. Outdoor Locations Not Exposed. to Direct. Sunlight:. 125 deg F temperature
b.: Outdoor Locations Exposed to Direct Sunlight:.155 deg F temperature change.
c. Indoor Spaces: Connected with _ the Outdoors without Physical.: Separation;
.... temperature:change....: .
2. Install fitting(s) that provide expansion and.contraction for at least 0.00041 inch per foot:
of length of straight run per deg F'of temperature change. =
3. Install: each expansion joint fitting with position, mounting, and piston setting selected
according to manufacturer's written instructions: for conditions at specific location of the
time of installation.
'0. Flexible Conduit Connections: Use' maximum of 72 inches of flexible conduit for equipment
� sub'ect to vibration noise transmission,. or movement' and for transformers physical
motors. g
1. Use.LFMC or LFNC Tn dampor wet locations not subject to severe h sisal. damage.
P. Recessed Boxes. in Masonry Walls; Saw -cut opening for box in center of cell of masonry block,
and install box flush with surface of wall...
Q. Set_ metal fl.00r boxes level and flush with finished floor -surface.
... ..
R. Set nonmetallic floor boxes level. Trim after installation to fit flush with finished floor surface. .
-
3.3 INSTALLATION OF UNDERGROUND CONDUIT
A. Direct -Buried Conduit: i
1. Excavate trench bottom to provide fn-iii and uniform support for conduit. Prepare: trench
bottom as. specified in Division..2 Section 'Earthwork" for pipe less than 6 inches in
nominal diameter. I
2. Install backfill as specified in Division 2 Section "Earthwork,
3. After installing, conduit, backfilI and compact. Start at tie-in point; and work toward end
of conduit run, leaving conduit at end of run free to move with expansion and contraction
as temperature changes during this process. Firmly hand tamp backfill around conduit to
provide maximum supporting strength. After placing controlled backfill to within 12
inches of finished grade, make final conduit connection. at end of run and complete
backfilling with normal compaction as specified in Division 2 Section "Earthwork."
4. Install manufactured rigid steel conduit elbows for stub -ups at poles and equipment and
at building entrances through the floor.
a. Couple steel conduits to ducts with adapters designed for this purpose, and encase
coupling with 3 inches of concrete.
I.
16130-8 MOUNTAIRE FARMS -LUMBER BRIDGE
WWTS UPGRADE
III

b. For stub -ups at equipment mounted. on outdoor.coneretebases, extend steel. conduit
horizontally a miniinum of 60-inches fioin edge of equipmentpad or foundation....:
Install insulated grounding bushings our tenninations:at equipment.
5:: Warding Planks: Bury ,warning planks :approximately 12 inches above direct -buried
conduits, placing therm 24 inches.. o.e. Align planks along the width and .along the.
centerline of conduit.:: .
3.4
INSTALLATION, OF UNDERGROUND HANDHOLES AND_ BOXES:
'-, A.
Install handholes and boxes level_ and plumb. and with ;orientation.and depth -coordinated- with
cormecting;donduits to minimize bends and deflections required for proper entrances.
B.�
Unless otherwise indicated,;support units oft a level tied of cy : lied storie�orgravel; graded froth
1/2=inch sieve=to No. 4 sieve and conrpacted.to same density as adjacent undistui•tied earth.. '
C.:
Elevation:' In paved areas, set so cover surface will .be flush with finished gtade..Set covers of
"
other enclosures:'Finch,above finished:grade'..
D.
Install handholes and boxes with bottom below the, frost line"..
I " E.
Install removable hardware; including pulling eyes; cable stanchions, cable aims, and insulators,
-and... c e
as required for•, installation and support of cables and conductors as .u�dicafed. Select: arm :
.-, ..;
lengths to be long enough to provide spare.space for.fttture cables,'but'shortenough to. preserve. .
'
adequate working clearances in. the enclosure.
E.
Field -cut openings for conduits according to eiiclosureanainifacturer's. written:instructions:..Cut
Wall of enclosure with a tool designed for material to .be cut. Size holes for terminating fittings. .
. '
-to be used, and seal'around penetrations: after fittings are installed.
j 3.5
SLEEVE INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS
A.
Concrete Slabs and Walls:. Install sleeves for penetrations unless core -drilled holes or formed
openings are. -used. Install sleeves during erection of slabs and walls.
..
B.
-Use pipe sleeves: unless penetration arrangement requires rectangular sleeved opening. .
C.
Rectangular Sleeve Minimum Metal Thickness:
1. For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter: less than 50 inclies and no side'gteater than
16 inches, thickness shall be 0.052 inch.
2. For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter egnal.to; or greater than, 50 inches and 1 or
more sides equal to, or greater than,- 16 inches, thickness shall be 0.138 inch.
4 D.
Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces of walls. .
E.
Extend sleeves installed in floors 2 inches above finished floor level.
_ F.
Size pipe sleeves to provide 1/4-inch anilular clear space between sleeve and raceway. unless
sleeve seal is to be installed.
1613 0-9 MOUNTAIRI:_ (ARMS - LUMBER BRIDGE,
WWTS UPGRADE

G. Seal space outside of. sleeves with grout for penetrations of concrete and masonry and with : Y�
Approved joint compound for gypsum board assemblies.
H. Interior Penetrations of Noii-Fire-Rated Walls and Floors: Seal annular space. between sleeve
and raceway, using joint sealant appropriate for size,. depth, and location of joint....
I. Roof -Penetration- Sleeves: Seal penetration of individual -raceways with , flexible, boot -type
flashing units applied in coordination with roofing work:
J.. Aboveground, Exterior -Wall Penetrations: Seal penetrations wising sleeves and mechanical .
sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch :annular clear space between pipe and sleeve
for installing. mechanical sleeve seals,
K. Underground, Exterior -Wall.. Penetrations: Install cast-iron- "wall pipes for sleeves. Size:
sleeves to allow for 1-inch:=annular clean space between ,raceway and sleeve for installing
i
mechanical sleeve seals.
3.6 SLEEVE -SEAL INSTALLATION
A.. Install to seal underground, exterior wall penetrations..
B. Use type and nuiriber of sealingelementsrecommended by-maitiifactuier for raceway material
and size. Position raceway in center'of sleeve. Assemble mechanical sleeve seals and install in
aimular space between -raceway and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause
sealing elements to expand and'make watertight seal;' .
3.7 .. PROTECTION
A. Provide filial protection and maintain conditions that ensure coatings, finishes, and cabinets, are
without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.: .
l . Repair damage to galvanized. finishes _ with ziiica•ich paint . recommended by'
manufacturer.
2.. Repair damage to PVC or paint finishes with matching touchup coating recommended by
manufacturer.
END OF SECTION 16130
16130-10 MOUNTAIRE FARMS -LUMBER BRIDGE
WWTS UPGRADE
I
Y

SECTION 16140 -. WRUNG DEVICES --
:PART 1 -
GENERAL::: ..;
1.1.
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.-
Drawings. and general provisions of,the- Contract; including :Generaf .and Supplementary .
Conditions:and Division 1 Specification :Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2
SUMMARY
-A.
This Section. includes the following::
:. .--I.
Receptacles, receptacle'svith integral GFCI,'and associated device plates. .-
2. Twist -locking receptacles:
3..: Receptacles with. integral surge suppression units...
...
4:: Snap. sW khes.: . : : ...
5. Wall -switch: occupancy sensors. _
6. Telecommunications outle' dconnectoi's.
7: Communications outlets.
8: 'Service poles. -
1:.3..
DEFINITIONS..
is A::: ..EMI:
Electromagnetic interference.
B.
GFCI: Ground -fault circuit interrupter.
_ C::
Pigtail:: Short lead: used to connect a device to a branch -circuit conductor. ..
D.
RFI: Radio -frequency interference.
E.
TVSS:. .Transient voltage surge- suppressor,
F.
UTP:. Unshielded twisted pair.
1.4
SUBMITTALS
- A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B.
Shop Drawings: List of legends and description of materials and process used for premarking
-
wall plates.
C.
Field quality -control test reports.
16140-1 MOUNTAWX FARMS - LUMBER BRIDGE
WWTS UPGRADE

D. Operation and Maintenance Data:_ For wiring devices to include in all manufacturers' packing
label warnings and instruction manuals that include labeling conditions.
1.5 : QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type :of wiring. device and.associated wall plate through one I
source from a single manufacturer. Insofar as they are available, obtain all wiring devices and J
associated wall plates from a single manufacturer and one source.
B. Electrical Components, Devices; and Accessories: Listed and labeled. as defined -in NFPA 70,
�l
Article 100, by'a testing: agency.acceptable. to. authorities having jurisdiction, ;and marked for
intended use:
C 'Comply With NFPA 70.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
:2.1 MANUFACTURERS:
A. Manufacturers' Names: Shortened: versions (sliown i�i parentheses) of the following
manufacturers' names are used in other Part 2 articles:
_.1. Cooper Wiring Devices; a division of Cooper Industries, Inc, (Cooper).
I :Hubbell Incorporated;'Wiring Device-Kellems (Hubbell).
3:. Leviton Mfg. Company Inc ::(Leviton). .. 1
.4. Pass& Seymour/Legrand;-Wiring Devices & Accessories (Pass & Seymour): .
5. Approved equal.
2.2 STRAIGHT BLADE RECEPTACLES
A. Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A: Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6
configuration 5-20R, and UL 498.
-1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Cooper; 5351 (single), 5352 (duplex),
b. Hubbell; HBL5351 (single), CR5352 (duplex),
C. Leviton; 5891 (single), 5352 (duplex).
d. Pass & Seymour; 5381 (single), 5352 (duplex).
e. Approved equal.
23 GFCI RECEPTACLES
A. General Description: Straight blade, feed -through type. Comply with NEMA WD 1,
NEMA WD 6, UL 498, and UL 943, Class A, and include indicator light that is lighted when
device is tripped.
16140-2 MOUNTAIRE VARMS — LUMBFR BRIDGE
WWTS UPGRADE
d

B. Duplex GFCI Convenience.Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A:
1. -Available .Products: :'Subject to::compliance with regiirement_s, products: that may be .'.
incorporated into the 'Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Cooper; GF20.
b. Pass:& Seymour; 2084.
C. Approved equal. I
2.4 TWI$T=LOCKING RECEPTACLES
'A. Single Convenience Receptacle; 125 V, 20 A:: Comply with NElV1A Wll l; NEMA:WD 6
configuration 1,5 20R, and UL'498.
1..: Available Products: Subject to compliance wAh'requirelnents, products that maybe
incorporated into 146: Work include, but aie not liitiited to, the following:
a. Cooper; L520R;
b. Hubbell; BBL2310.
c. Leviton; 2310:.
d.:.. Pass.& Seymour; L520-R..
e. Approved equat:
2.5. SNAP SWITCHES
A. .. Comply with NEMA.WD 1 and.UL 20.
B. Switches, 120/277 V, 20 A: i
1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requireinents, products that may be...
_.!
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited. the foil :owing:
a. : -Cooper; 2221 (single. pole), 2222 (two pole),.2223 (three way), 2224 (four way).
b. ; Hubbell; CS 1221. (single pole), CS 1222 (two pole), CS 1223 (three way), CS 1224 .
(four way),
c. Leviton; 1221-2 (single pole), 1222-2 (two. pole), 1223-2 (three way), 1224-2 (four
way).
d. Pass .& Seymour; 20AC1 (single pole), 20AC2 (two pole), 20AC3 -(three way),
20AC4 (four way).
e. Approved equal.
- Article below From Etown
2.6 WALL PLATES
A. Single and combination types to match corresponding wiring devices.
.1. Plate -Securing Screws: Metal with head color to match plate finish.
16140-3 MOUNTAIRE FARMS - LUMBER BRIDGE
WWTS UPGRADE

i
2. Material for Finished Spaces: Steel with'white baked enamel; suitable for field painting.
3. Material for Unfinished Spaces: Galvanized steel.
4. Material far Damp Locations: Castaluminum:with spring -loaded. lift cover, and listed
and labeled for use in "wet locations,"
B. Wet -Location, Weatherproof Cover Plates: NEMA 250, complying with type 3R weather -
resistant, die-cast aluminum with lockable cover.
I
2.7 ...: 'FINISHES
A. Color: Wiring device catalog numbers in Section Text do not designate device, color.
1. Wiring Devices Connected to .Normal Power System, : unless ..otherwise indicated .or.
required by NFPA 70' or device listing.
a. In office areas: Ivory
b. In process areas: Brown
2. Wiring Devices Connected to Emergency Power System:` Red.
3. : TVSS Devices: Blue,
Id
PART: 3.- EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION I
A. Comply with NECA 1, including the -mounting heights listed in that. standard, unless otherwise
noted.
B. Coordination with: Other Trades:.
1. Take steps to insure:that devices and heir boxes. are .protected.. Do not place wall finish
materials over device boxes and do not cut holes for boxes with routers that are guided by.
riding against outside of the boxes.
2. Keep outlet boxes free of plaster, drywall joint compound, mortar, cement, concrete, dust,
paint, and other material that may contaminate the raceway system, conductors, and
cables.
3. Install device boxes in brick or,block walls so that the cover plate does not cross a joint
unless the joint is troweled flush with the face of the wall.
4. Install wiring devices after all wall preparation, including painting, is complete.
C. Conductors: I
I
1. Do not strip insulation from conductors until just before they are spliced or terminated on
devices.'
2. Strip insulation evenly around the conductor using tools designed for the purpose. Avoid
scoring or nicking of solid wire or cutting strands from stranded wire.
3. The length of free conductors at outlets for devices shall meet provisions of NFPA 70,
Article 300, without pigtails.
4. Existing Conductors:
f
16140-4 MOUNTAlltIs FARMS — LUMBER BRIDGE
WW'I's UPGRADE
�I
r

a. -:Cut back hd.pigtail, br replace All.damaged conductors:...
b.: Straighten conductors that remain and remove corrosion and foreign matter.
C.
Pigtailing existing conductors is permitted provided.the outlet box is l4r e,enougb:
D. Device Installation:
J. "1. Replace all: devices that'have been-in.temporary use -..'during construction -or that show
signs: that they Were''installed before briilding finishing operations were complete.
2. Keep each wiring device in:its .package or otherwise:protected until it:is time to -connect
_...:' conductors..: .
3. Do'not remove surface protection, such as -plastic filin:and smudge covers; until the last
possible moment.:'"
4. Connect_ devices to branch,circi its using pigtails:thafare not lessthan 6 inches in Iength.
5. When there: is'a choice, use side wiring with binding -heats screw.terminals.. Wrap solid:
conductor: tightly clockwise, 2/3: to 3/4. of the way, around terminal screw.
6.: Use a -tor ue screwdriver when a torque is recommended or required by the manufacturer.
.
7. When conductors Iarger.than 'No. 12 AWG. are:iiistalied on' 15- or 20-A circuits; splice
N6..12 AWG pigtails for: device _connections;
8. . ' Tighten. unused terminal screws°on the device.
9.: When;niounting:into.metal,boxes, remove the fiber .or plastic: ' shers used to hold:device
.
mounting screws in yokes; allowing metal -to -metal contact:
.E. Receptacle Orientation: ..
1. Install ground pin of vertically mounted receptacles down; and on .horizontally. inowited. .
receptacles to the right:
2. -.-'Install hospital -grade receptacles in patient -care areas with the ground-- in or neutral
blade:at the top.-:
F. -Device: Plates: Do not use :oversized or extra -deep plates.,-: Repair wall_ finishes and:remount
outlet boxes' when standard device plates do not fit flush or do not cover rough wall opening.
G. Adjust locations of service poles to suit.arrangemeilt:ofpartitions and furnishings..
3.2 'IDENTIFICATION
A. Comply with Division 16 Section "Electrical Identification.",
3.3 FIELD.QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform tests -and inspections and prepare test reports.
1. Test Instruments: Use instruments that comply with UL 1436.
2. Test Instrument for Convenience Receptacles: Digital wiring analyzer with digital
readout or illuminated LED indicators of measurement.
B. Tests for Convenience Receptacles:
16140-5 MOUNTAntE FARMS - LUMBER BRIDGE
WWTS UPGRADE

I
L. Line Voltage: Acceptable range is 105.0 132 V.
.2. Percent Voltage Drop under 15-A Load: A value of 6 percent or higher is not acceptable.. .
3. Ground Impedance: Values of up:to 2 ohms:are acceptable.
4. GFCI Trip: Test for tripping values specified in UL 1436 and UL 943.
5. - Using: the test plug, verify that the device and its outlet box are securely:nnounted.::
6. The -tests shall be diagnostic, indicating damaged conductors, high resistance at the circuit..
breaker, poor connections, inadequate fault: current path,: defective devices, or similar
problems. Correct: circuit conditions, remove malfunctioning units and. replace with new
ones,and-retest as specified above. "
C: Telecoiniiiimicatioii Performance Tests:
1: Test:for each outlet. Perform the following tests according to TIA/EIA-568-BA -'and
TiA/EIA-568-B.2:
a. Wire map.
b. Length (physical vs. electrical, and length requirements),
c; Insertion loss..:: .
.L
A. Near -end crosstalk (NEXT) loss.
e. Power sum near-end.arosstalk PSNEXT) loss...-
f.. Equal -level far -end crosstalk (ELFEXT).. '
m equal -level areiid.crosstalk (PSELFEXgPowersuT).
h. Return loss.. .
I. Propagation delay. .
j Delay skew.
.. I
2. Final Verification Tests: Perform verification tests. for UTP systems after the complete
communications:cabling and workstation outlet/connectors are installed:
a. Voice Tests: These tests assume that dial tone service has been installed; Connect
.to the network interface device'at the demarcation point. Go off -hook and listen
aAfl receive a dial tone. If a test number -is available, make and receive. a local,
long distance, and digital subscription line telephone call.
b. Data Tests: These tests assume the Information Technology Staff has a network
installed and is available to assist with testing. Connect to the network interface I -
device at:the demarcation point. Log onto the network to ensure proper connection
to the network.
D. Document data for each measurement. Data for submittals shall be printed in a summary report
that is formatted similar to Table 10.1 in BICSI TDMM, or transferred fiom the instrument to
the computer, saved as text files, and printed and submitted.
E. End -to -end cabling will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.
F. Prepare test and inspection reports.
END OF SECTION 16140
16140-6 MOUNTAIRF, FARMS -LUMBER BRIDGE
wWTS UPGRADE

SECTION 16269 —_ENCLOSED VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES
PART 1
- GENERAL:: ..:
1.1.
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
-Drawings., and general provisions of the ' Contract; including, General:. aid Supplementary
Conditions.and Division I Specification Sections, apply to this Section.:'
1.2 ...:
SUMMARY
Section includes separately enclosed, pre -assembled, combination VFDs, rated 600 V and: less,
for speed control ofthree-phase, squirrel -cage:= induction _motors. =
i J
DEFINITIONS
- .: A.
'CPT: Control.powei transformer•. ..... .
B.
EMI: Electromagnetic interference.
C: ;
IGBT:-:Insulated-gate bipolar: transistor,:
D.
LAN: Local :area network.
E.-,
LED: _Light -emitting diode.
F.
MCP; Motor -circuit protector.
.
G-.::
NC: Normally closed.
.:
H.
NO: Normally open.
- I..
OCPD: Overcurrent protective. device.
J.
PCC: Point of common: coupling:
K.:
PWM: Pulse -width modulated. -
L.
RFI: Radio -frequency interference.
M.
TDD: Total demand (harmonic current) distortion.
_.l N.
THD(V): Total harmonic voltage demand.
- k O.
VFD: Variable -frequency dative motor controller.
16269-1 MOUWAIRE FARMS - LUMBER BRIDGE
I
WWTS UPGRADE

l.4 SUBMITTALS
A; : -Product Data: For each type and rating, of VFD indicated: Include. features, per£ormanoe, .
electrical ratings, operating characteristics, shipping and operating weights, _ and furnished
specialties and accessories: =
B. Shop Drawings: For each VFD -indicated. Include:dimensioned plans, elevations, and sections;
and. conduit .entry locations and sizes, mounting arrangements, and details, including required
.
cleatances and service, space around equipment.
L Show tabulations of installed devices, equipment features, and ratings. Lrclude the
following:
a; Eachinstalled unit's type and details... I
b. Factory -installed devices.
1
C. Enclosure types and details.
d. Nameplate legends.
e;. _ Short=circuit current (withstand) rating of enclosed unit.
f.. Features, characteristics, ratings, and'factory settings of each VFD : and installed
devices.
.2. Schematic.and_Connectibn Wiring Diagrams: For power; signal, and control wiring.
C. Coordination: Drawings: .Floor plans, drawn to, scale, showing dimensioned layout, required
working clearances,. _ and required area above and around VFDs. Show VFD layout and..
relationships between: electrical components and adjacent struci t ual and mechanical elements.' .
Show support, locations;. type of support, and weight. . on each. support. Indicate . i•Ield
measurements.
D. Product Certificates: For each VFD, from manufacturer.
E. Field quality -control reports.
F. Operation and Maintenance Data: For VFDs. to include in emergency, operation, and
maintenance manuals.. 1n addition to items specified in Section 01720 "Operation and
Maintenance Data," include the following:
1. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting thermal -magnetic circuit
breaker and MCP trip settings.
2. Manufacturer's written instructions for setting field -adjustable overload relays.
l3. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing, adjusting, and reprogramming
microprocessor control modules.
4. Manufacturer's written instructions for setting field -adjustable timers, controls, and status
and alarm points.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, I -
by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
f
16269-2 MOUNTAIRE FARMS -LUMBER BRIDGE
WWTS UPGRADE
L� .

B.
Comply with NFPA 70; = i
1.6
DELIVERY, STORAGE;.AND HANDLING
A.
J; .
If stored; in space: that is not permanently, enclosed and air conditioned- remove loose packing .
and flammable materials from inside drives and install temporary electric heating; -with at least..: =
250 V per drive.
1.7
:PROJECT CONDITIONS .
A
Environmental Limitations: Rateequipment' for continuous operation, capable of driving full
- - :
load without Berating, under the following conditions unless otherwise indicated:
I..: Ambient Temperature: Not less than 14 deg F and not exceeding 104 deg F.
2. Ambient Storage Temperature: Not less than mirMs-4 deg F and not exceeding 140 deg F
3. Humidity: Less than 95.percent (noncondensing).
4. Altitude: Not exceeding 3300 feet.
S..
.. ... ... ...
Interruption of`Existing Electrical Systems: Do. not interrupt electrical systems. in facilities `
...
occupied by Owner :or others unless permitted under the following conditions and. -then only
after. arranging to provide dote' oiary, electrical service according to.requirements indicated:
1. Notify Owner. °oi Owner's Consh•uction Representative iio fewer than two days in
Advance of.proposed iiiterruption.of.electrical systems.
—�
2-. Indicate method of providing temporary electrical service.
3. Do not proceed: _with inteti iiption of electrical systems without .Owndr':s or the Owner's
Construction Representative's written permission.
j
. :4. Comply with NFPA 70E::
C.
Product Selection for Restricted Space: Drawings indicate maximum dimensions for. VMS,
including clearances between VFDs, and adjacent surfaces and other. items. -
1.8
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate feattires of motors, load characteristics, installed. units, and accessory. devices to be
compatible.with the following:
_1
-
1. Torque, speed; and horsepower requirements of the toad.
2. Ratings and characteristics of supply circuit and required control sequence. .
r
3. Ambient and environmental -conditions of installation location.
B.
Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment provided. Cast anchor -
i
bolt inserts into bases.
1.9
WARRANTY
-- A.
Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form ,in which manufacturer agrees to repair or
replace VFDs that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
16269-3 MOUNTAIRE FARMS - LUMBER BRIDGE.
WWTS UPGRADE

j
1. Warranty Period: Five years from date:of Substantial. Completion.
1.10 EXTRA. MATERIALS
A. Furnish extra materials described below that match. products installed and that are packaged .
with protective covering for -storage and identified with labels. describing contents.
1 Power Fuses: Equal to 10. :percent of quantity installed for each size: and type; but: no
fewer than. three of each size and _type.
2. Control Power Fuses:: Equal to 10 percent of quantity installed for each size -and type, biit
no fewer than two of each size and type..
3". Indicating Lights: Two of oach type acid color installed.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS _
_I
2.1 MANUFACTURED UNITS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to"compliance with requirements,. available manufactiners ,offering
products that may be incorporated ated into the Work include but are not limited to the following:
1. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler -Hammer Business Unit;
2. General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution. -I
. 3. Rockwell Automation,14c.; Allen-Bradley Brand.
4: .. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric...
5.: .. Approved Equal
B,. General Requirements for VFDs: Comply with . NEMA:ICS 7, NEMA ICS 6-1800-2, and
UL 508C.
C. Application: variable torque.
D. VFD Description: Variable -frequency power converter (rectifier, do bus, and IGBT, PWM
inverter) factory packaged in an enclosure, with integral disconnecting means and overcurrent
and overload protection; listed and labeled by an NRTL as a complete unit; arranged to provide
self-protection, protection, and .variable -speed control of one or more three-phase induction
motors by adjusting output voltage and frequency.
1. For existing High Service Pump motor:
a. Units suitable for operation of NEMA MG 1, Design A and Design B motors as
defined by NEMA MG 1, Section IV, Part 30, "Application Considerations for
Constant Speed Motors Used on a Sinusoidal Bus with Harmonic Content and
General Purpose Motors Used with Adjustable -Voltage or Adjustable -Frequency
Controls or Both:"
b. Provide load side filters to mitigate the effect of drive output switching transients
on the existing non -inverter duty motor.
2. Listed and labeled for integrated short-circuit current (withstand) rating by an NRTL
acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
16269-4 MOUNTAIRE FARMS - LUMBER BRIDGE
WWTS UPGRADE
I_
I

E. Design and Ating: Match -load type.and type of connection used between motor. and load..
F.
OutputRating: , Three-phase; 10 to 60:Hz, with -voltage proportional to requency t iron lout .
voltage range; maximum -voltage equals input voltage.
G.
Unit
Operating Requirements: :
1: : -
. Input AC Voltage Tolerance:: Plus 10 and minus :15 .percent of VFD input.voltage rating.
...
L
2.:
= Input AC Voltage Unbalance: Not exceeding 5 percent.
3.
Input Frequency Tolerance: Plus of minus 3 percent of VFD frequency rating.: -
4.
Nlinimum.'Efficiency 97 percent`at 60 Hz,_ filll load '
5:.:
Minimum. Displacement Primary-Side.Power Factor: 98-percent under -any load or speed
condition:
6.
Minimum Slioi•t-Circuit Current (Withstand} Ratuig: 351A
1.
:'Ambient Tempe;'attueRating: Not .less than:14 deg F:and hot exceeding 104 degF.
1
: 8.:
Ambient Storage, Temperature Rating:: Not less than minus 4' deg F and'not exceeding
..
140 deg F . :.
9.
1141pidity Rating: Less than 9S eecent nonco.n. ensin
P . g) ..
0..
°Altitude Rating: Not exceeding 3300 feet.:'
1:1....
Overload .Capability; 1.1 times the base„load current for 60 seconds;, minimum of .1 8
tunes the base.load current for three seconds.
-12.
Starting Torque: 1VIiniirium 100:percent of mated torque'from 3 to:60 Hz..
13. ,
Speed Regulation: Plus or minus 5 percent.
14. '
: Output Carrier Frequency: _ .Selectable;. 0:5 to 15 kHz.:
15.
Stop'Modes: Programmable; includes fast and -free -wheel:
..
H.
Inverter Logic Microprocessor based,' isolated from all'power circuits.
I.: - :
Isolated Control Interface: Allows VFDs .to follow remote -control signal over a minimum 40:1 .
speed range.
1
Signal: Electrical.
].
Internal AdjustabilityCapabilities:
E
L
Minimum Speed: 5 to 25 percent of maximum rpm.
__I _
2.
Maximum Speed: 80 to 100 percent of maximum rpm..
3.
Acceleration: 0.1 to 999.9 seconds.
4:
Deceleration: 0.1 to 999.9 seconds.
t
5.
Current Limit: 30 to minimum of 150 percent of maximum rating.
- K.
Self -Protection and Reliability Features:
-
1:
Input transient protection by means of surge suppressors to provide three-phase
protection against damage from supply voltage surges 10 percent or more above nominal
.line voltage.
2.
Loss of Input Signal Protection: Selectable response strategy,, including speed default to
a percent of the most recent speed, a preset speed, or stop; with alarm.
-- _:
3.
Under- and:overvoltage trips.
4.
Inverter overcurrent trips.
16269-5 MOUNTAIRE FARMS - LUMBER BRIDGE
WWTS UPGRADE

5. VFD: and Motor:Overload/Overtemperature Protection: Microprocessor -based thermal
protection -system for monitoring VFDs and motor thermal characteristics,. and for .
providing VFD overtemperature: and. motor overload alarm and -:trip; settings selectable .
via the keypad; NRTL approved.
6..- Critical frequency rejection; with three selectable,- adjustable:deadbands.:
7. Instantaneous.line-to-line and line -to -ground overcurrent trips.
8. Loss -of -phase protection:
9. - Reverse -phase protection...
10. Short=circuit protection.
11. Motor overteinperature fault.
-L. Automatic Reset/Restart:: Attempt three restarts after drive fault or on return. of power after an
inteii•uption and before shutting down for manual reset:oi fault coli`ection; adjustable delay time
between restart attempts.
M. Power -Interruption Protection: To, prevent motor from re=energizing after a power interruption
until motor has stopped, unless "Bidirectional Autospeed .Search" feature is 'available and
engaged.
N. Bidirectional: Autospeed Search:.Capable of.starting VFD into rotating loads spinning in either
direction. and returning motor to. set speed in proper direction, without causing damage. to drive, .
motor, :or.load.
O. Motor Temperature Compensation at Slow::Speeds: ::Adjustable, Wrrent fall -.back based on
output frequency for' temperature protection of self -cooled,. fan -ventilated motors. at slow .
speeds::
P. Integral Input Disconnecting Means and OCPD: NEMA AB:!,'. thermal magnetic : circuit
breaker with pad -lockable, door -mounted handle mechanism.
2.2 CONTROLS AND INDICATION -
A: Status Lights: Door -mounted LED indicators displaying the following conditions::
I . Power on:
2. Run.
3. Drive fault: I
B. Panel -Mounted Operator Station: Manufacturer's standard front -accessible,; sealed keypad and
plain -English language digital display; allows complete programming, program copying,
operating, monitoring, and diagnostic capability. I:
1. Keypad: In addition to required programming and control keys, include keys for HAND,
OFF, and AUTO modes.
2. Security Access: Provide electronic security access to controls through identification and
password with at least three levels of access: View only; view and operate; and view,
operate, and service.
16269-6 MOUNTAIRE FARMS - LUMBER BRIDGE
WWTS UPGRADE

a. Control Authority: Supports at least four.conditions::Off, locaI'manual control at
VFD, local automatic control at VFD, and automatic control through a remote..
source..
Historical:Logging Information and Displays:
a. Real-time clock with current time and :date.
b. 'Running log of total power versus time.
o. .'Total run; time: ... . ...
A., Fault.log, maintaining last four faults .with time and date stamp for each.
4-
Drive. Parameterlridicating Displays: ..
a.: Output fiequency:(114. :..
b. Motor speed (rom)
c. Motor status {running, stop, fault);
d. Motor current (amperes), .
C. _ . Motor torque (percent). ... .
f Faulfor alarming status (code): .
g DC -link voltage (V dc):..
h... ' Set point°frequency (Iiz).
...
:i: Motor output voltage (V ac)....
C. Control Si al Interfaces:...
1.
Electric Input.Signal Interface:
a. :A minimuin'oftwo programmable' analog -inputs: 4- to: 20-mA dc;
b. A minimum of six.muitifimetion programmable digital inputs..
2:
Output Signal Interface: A mniimum of one programmable analog output signal (4- to
j
20-mA dc), which can be configured for any of the following:
a. Output frequency (Hz).
b. Output current (toady,.
a DC -link voltage (V dc).
t .
d. Motor torque (percent).
e.. Motor speed (rpm):
-
f. Set point frequency (Hz).
3.
Remote Indication Interface: A minimum of two programmable dry -circuit relay outputs
(120-V ac;1 A) for remote indication of the following:
a. Motor running.
b. Set point speed reached.
-
C. Fault and warning indication (overtemperahlre or overcurrent).
2.3 LINE CONDITIONING AND FILTERING
-- A. Input Line Conditioning: 5% line reactors
16269-7 MOUNTAIRE FARMS - LUMBER BRIDGE
W WTS UPGRADE

B. EMT/RFI Filtering: CE marked; certify compliance with T.EC 618%-3 for Category C2.
2.4 . ' ENCLOSURES.
A. VFD Enclosures: NEMA 250, to comply .with environmental conditions at installed location.
1. - Dry and. Clean Indoor' Locations: Type 12.
2.5 ACCESSORIES
A. General Requi' ements for• Control -Circuit and Pilot Devices; NEMA ICS 5, factory installed in
VFD enclosure cover unless otherwise indicated.
L Push Buttons, Pilot Lights, and Selector Switches: Heavy-duty, oiltight type.
a. Push Buttons: Shrouded types; momentary.
b. Pilot:Lights: Incandescent types;; push to test.
C. Selector Switches: Rotary type, .
B...: Supplemental Panel Meters:.,
1..: Elapsed=time meter:
C. Cooling Fan and Exhaust System: For .NEMA 250,'Type 12; UL 508.component recognized:
Supply fair, with composite Insert material intake and exhaust grills, and filters; 120 -V ad;
obtained fiorn.integral CPT. I
I"
PAR_ T 3 -"EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas, surfaces, and substrates to receive VFDs; with Installer present; for compliance
with requirements for installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting performance.
B. Examine VFD before installation. Reject VFDs that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold I
damaged.
C. Examine roughing -in for conduit systems to verify actual .locations of conduit connections
before VFD installation.
D. Verify that the disconnect operating handles of the proposed drive will not be higher than 79
inches above finished floor
E. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
16269-8 MOUNTAIRE FARMS —LUMBER BRIDGE
WWTS UPGRADE iI
4-

3.2
INSTALLATION
A:::
Coordinate layout: and installation of VFDs with other consiruotion including conduit, piping, -:
egtiipment,,'and adjacent --surfaces.:. 'Maintain.,required workspace. clearances and required
clearances for equipment access doors:and panels:
B.
Wall -Mounting Drives: Install-VFDs on walls with tops at uniform height and with disconnect
operating handles not higher than 79 -inches above finislied- floor unless otherwise indicated, and
'.
by bolting units to wall' of mountug on lightweight structural -steel channels bolted to wall. For
drives. not on walls; provide freestanding- racks complying .with Section: "Hangers and.
Supports." :..
C..
Floor=Mounting Drives: Install VTDs:on 44h6h nominal thickness concrete base.
1. Install dowel rods to connect concrete base.to concrete floor, Unless otherwise indicate ,
install;dowel rods on 18-inch centers around the full -perimeter• :of concrete -base.
..
.. ..
anchor bolts that extend'ough concrete
2. Fororegitiphient, install -epoxy -coated tln
base, and anchor into structural concrete floor. ... ... .
3: Place and secure- anchorage . devices... Use setting drawings; templates; diagrams,
instructions, and:directions:furnished with items to be.embedded.
.4. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment:
D.
Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes,- channels, and: brackets .and
temporary blocking of moving pants from enclosures arid. oomponeiits..
E..:
Install Rises in control circuits if :not fa' installed.
-F.
Install heaters in thermal -overload relays. Select heaters based oil actual nameplate ftill-load
amperes after motors have been -installed.-.
G.
Install, connect, and fuse thermal=protector. monitoringrelays furnished With ' motor -driven
equipment.,'_ .
_1:
H.
Comply With NECA'l .
- 3.3
IDENTIFICATION
A.
Identify VFDs, components, and control wiring. Complywith requirements for identification
specified in Section 16075 "Electrical Identification." .
-
1. Identify field -installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide
warning signs.
2. Label each VFD with engraved nameplate.
3. Label each enclosut'e-mounted control and pilot device.
3.4
CONTROL WIRING INSTALLATION
A.
Install wiring between VFDs and remote devices and facility's central -control system.
B.
Bundle, train, and support wiring in enclosures.
16269-9 MOUNTAIRE rARMS - LUMBER BRIDGE
W WTS UPGRADE

C. Connect selector switches and other automatic control devices where applicable.
1. Connect selector switches -with control circuit in both manual and automatic :positions for .
safety -type control devices such as low- and high-pressure cutouts and high -temperature
cutouts.
3..5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
Service: Engage.
A... Manufacturer's Field .a factory -authorized service representative to inspect,
test, and adjust components, assemblies; and equipment installations, including connections.
B., Pet -form tests and inspections.
1. 1Viariufacturer's Field Service: Engage afactory-authorized service representative - to
inspect components, assemblies, and equuipment installations, including connections, and
to assist ni testing.
C. Acceptance Testing Preparation:
1.' Test insulation resistance for each VFD element, bus, coiriponent, connecting. supply,
_. feeder, and control circuit.
2: Test continuity of each circuit. .
D. Tests and Inspections:
1. Inspect . VFD, wiring, components, connections; and equipment installation. Test and
adjust- * trolleys; components,. and equipment.
2. Test insulation resistance for each VFD element, component, connecting motor supply,
feeder, and control circuits.
3. Test continuity of each circuit. T
4. Verify that voltages. at VFD locations are within 10 percent of motor nameplate rated
voltages. If outside this range for any motor, notify Owner or Owner's Construction .
Representative before starting the motor(s).
5. Test each motor for proper phase rotation.
6. Perform each electrical test and visual and mechanical inspection stated in
META Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters.
7. Correct malflmctioning units on -site, where possible, and retest- to. demonstrate
compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest.
8. Test and adjust controls, remote monitoring, and safeties. Replace damaged and
malfunctioning controls and equipment.
E. VFDs will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.
F. Prepare test and inspection reports, including a certified report that identifies the VFD and 1
describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken, and
observations made after remedial action.
1
16269-10 MUUNTAIRE FARMS - LUMBER BRIDGE
WWTS UPGRADE
a
i i_

.3.6.. STARTUP SERVICE
A.: Engage:a factoiy�authol ized service rept'esentativeao perform startup service.
_ Complete: installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions.
3.7 ADJUSTING
A. . • Program microprocessors for required operational sequences, status indications, alarms, event. .
recorduig; and dislilay features. Clear events memory after final-acceptance:testing a' prior to
Substantial Completion. .
B.:.. Set field -adjustable circuit -breaker trip ranges :.
_ 3.8 PROTECTION : .. .
A:: Temporary Heating: Apply temporary:heatto maintain temperature according to manufacturer's
written instructions until drives are. ready to be energized_ and placed into service:
B.-- Replace VFDs whose interiors have been exposed to water or other liquids prior to Substantial
...
t
Completion.,
�.. 3.9 DEMONSTRATION
A. Engage a factory -authorized service- representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to
adjust,. operate, reprogram, and maintain VFDs.
END. OF SECTION 16269:
16269-11 MOUNTAIRE FARMS -LUMBER BRIDGE. -
WWTS UPGRADE

SECTION 16410 - ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND. CIRCUIT BREAKERS'
PART I - GENERAL:: -
1.1. - RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings. and general provisions of the Contract; 'including - 'General- and Supplementary
Conditions:aud other Division 1 Specification Sections; apply to this Section:
A. Section Includes:
1. ,Nonfusible switches..
... ...
2..: Molded�case circuit breakers (MCCBs). .
3 Enclosures.
1:.3 SUBMITTALS
A.: Product Data: For. each type of enclosed switch, circuit breaker, accessory, and: component
indicated. Include dimensioned elevations, sections, weights; and manufacturers' teclinical data
on features, performance; electrical characteristics, ratings; accessories, and finishes.
1. Enclosure types and details for types other than NEMA 250, Type 1.
2. Current and voltage ratings.
3.. ... Short'
current satin s. rnterru tirn and withstand as a _ ro state .
g.� P _g_ I?p p )
4. Detail features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual overcurrent
protective devices, accessories, and auxiliary components. L.
B. Shop Drawings: For enclosed switches and circuit breakers. Include plans, elevations, sections,
details, and attachments to other work.
1. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring.
C. Field quality -control reports.
_I
1. Test procedures used.
2. Test results that comply with requirements.
3. Results of failed tests and corrective action taken to achieve test results that comply with
requirements.
D. Operation and Maintenance Data: For enclosed switches and circuit breakers to include in
emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified 'in Section
01720 "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following:
16410-1 MOUNTAIRE FARMS - LUMBER 13RIDGE
WWTS UPGRADE

1-: Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting.enclosed switches and circuit
breakers.
— 1.4- :
QUALITY ASSURANCE--:
A.
Source- Limitations: .:Obtain: enclosed, switches and.<:cir�cuit:breakers, ove.rcurieiit `protective ..
devices, components, and.accessories,'withiri same product category, -from single source from
i
single manufacturer.
B.
"Electrical Components, Devices;: and Accessories:: Listed and labeled .m defined in NFPA 70,
by a qualified. testing agency, and.marked for.intended location and ;applicatio '
C. -:
"Comply with NFPA 70.
1.5
PROTECT CONDITIONS
A.
Enviroiirnei�#a1 Liiitations:' Rate equipment for= contnurdus operation" under the following
conditions unless otherwise indicated:
- -::
1. Ambient Temperature: Not less than minus 22 deg F and' riot exceeding 104 _deg F.
2. Altitude.:. Not exceeding 6600 feet.
1.6 :..
... COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate layout and installation;of switches; circuit breakers, and components -with equipment
served and adjaceilt_suiiaces. Maintain required workspace clearances and required clearances
.-for equipment access doors arid. panels.:. " ..
PART 2 -`PRODUCTS
2.1
VALVE DISCONNECT SWITCHES
A.
Basis -of Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Ctitler:Hammer ,
rotary disconnect switches", Catalog No. DR4025UX or. comparable product. by one of the
following:
7
1. General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution.
f
2. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.
3. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.
i
B.
Accessories:
1. Equipment Ground Kit: Internally mounted and labeled for copper and aluminum ground
conductors.
16410-2 MOUNTAIRE FARMS -LUMBER I3RIDGF
WWTS UPGRADE

...
2-2 NONFUSIBLE SWITCHES
A. Manufacturers: Subject to ;compliance with requirements, _ available .manufact4rers.:offerin
products that may be incorporated :into the Work include; but are not limited to, the following: I
I
1. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer$usiness.Unit.
2. General Electric Com an GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution. .
n Y�
3..: Siemens Energy, &.Automation, Inc. ...
4. Square D;'a brand of Schneider Electric.
5. Approved equal.
B. Type HD, Heavy Duty,SirigIe Throw, 600-V.ao; 1200 A.and Smaller: 'UL 98. and NEMA KS 1,
horsepower, lated,.lockable handle with capability to accept three padloeks, and interlocked with
cover in closed position.
:I
-C. Accessories::
1. Equipment Ground Kit: Internall mounted and labeled for• copper-, and aluminum ground
Y pp_ .. _.
con actors.
2:, .. Lugs:' Mechanical type, suitable for number, size, and conductor material.
2.3 . MOLDED -CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS
A.- Manufacturers: Subject to-conripliance .with requirements, available manufacturers. offering- .
products that maybe incorporated into the Work include, butare not limited, to, the' following:.
1. Eaton:. Electrical-liic.; Cutler -Hammer Business Unit.. - ... :.: ...
2. General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution. .
3. -Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc:
4... Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.
5• Approved equal. ::
as B. General Requirements: Comply with UL 489, NEMA:AB 1, and NEMA AB.3, with
interrupting capacity to comply with available fault currents.
C. Thermal=Magnetic Circuit Breakers: Inverse time -current element for low-level overloads and
instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits. Adjustable magnetic trip setting for I
circuit -breaker frame sizes 250 A and larger.
D. Features and Accessories:
1. Standard frame sizes, trip ratings, and number of poles.
2. Lugs: Mechanical type, suitable for number, size, trip ratings, and conductor material.
3. Application Listing: Appropriate for application.
2.4 ENCLOSURES
A. Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers: NEMA AB 1, NEMA KS 1, NEMA 250, and UL 50,
to comply with environmental conditions at installed location.
1641 O-3 MOUNTATRE FARMS - LUMBER BRIDGE _
WWTS UPGRADE
i

1:; --- Indoor; Dry and.Clean Locations: NEMA.250, Type 1.
2. Damp or Wet Locations: NEMA 250,'Type 4X .
3. Hazardous Locations: UL; Listed for. Area of. Classification.: ,
4: --'Outdoor: NEMA 250 Type 4X,
.: .
PART: 3 --:EXECUTION
3.1 .. - :
.:
EXAMINATION; .
A.
Examine ele* ents and .surfaces to receive enclosed switcles and circuit'breakers.for compliance
with installation tolerances and other -conditions affecting performance of the Work.
B,::
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions.have:been corrected.
.: 3.2 ...:
INSTALLATION- ..: ..: .
A.
Install individual wall -mounted switches and.circuit breakers with. tops at'uniform height -unless
'
otherwise indicated.
B.
Temporary Lifting Provisions:: Remove temporary lifting. eyes, - channels; and :brackets and
temporary blocking of moving parts from enclosures and 6omponents.
C.:
Comply with NECA 1
3.3
IDENTIFICATION .
A.
Comply with requrrements-rn Sectron.16075" .I;leetrrcal Ideutrfication."
1 • Identify field-installed :conductors, .interconnecting wiring; and components; :provide .
warning signs.
2. Label each enclosure with engraved metal or laminated -plastic. nameplate.
3.4
FIELD :QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Perform tests and inspections.
B.
Acceptance Testing Preparation:
'
I. Test insulation resistance for each enclosed switch and circuit breaker, component,
connecting supply, feeder, and control circuit.
'
2. Test continuity of each circuit.
C.
Tests and Inspections:
1. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA .
Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters.
1.6410-4 MaUNTAIRE FARMS - LUMBER BRIDGE
WWTS UPGRADE

- i
I
1.
2.- Correct .malfinidioning units on -site, .where.:possible, "and. retest to, demonstrate
compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest.- .
3. Perform tlie:followin ' infrared scan tests and inspections and prepare reports: 4
a. Initial lnfiared Scanning:. After. Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days
after Final Acceptance, perform an infrared scan of each enclosed switch and
circuit breaker; :Remove front panels soJoints:and connections are accessible to
..portable scanner.
b. -Follow-up: Infrared Scanning: - -Perform an= additional follow-up. infrared -scan of i
each enclosed. switch and circuit breaker 11 months after date of, Substantial:
Completion.
c. histruments 'and Equipment: Use ail uifrared scanning device designed to measure
temperature or to detect significant deviations fioni 'normal -values. Provide
calibration record for device.
4:: ' Test -and adjust, controls, remote monitoring, -and safeties, Replace'' damaged' and
' J g,a
.:. .. p g : ..
malfunctioning controls and equipment.
:.I
D. Enclosed switches and circuit breakers will be considered defective if they do. not pass tests and
inspections.. .
E. Prepare: test and inspection reports, including a certified report that identifies enclosed switches,
and circuit breakers and .that describes scanning results. Include. notation - of deficiencies
detected, remedial action taken, and observations after remedial action..
I_
3.5.ADJUSTING
A. .Adjust moving parts and operable components to function smoothly, and lubricate as
recommended by manufacturer:
B. Set field -adjustable circuit -breaker trip ranges.
END OF SECTION 16410
I
4I
�II
I_
16410-5 MOUNTATRE FARMS - LUMBER BRIDGE
WWTS UPGRADE
I

i
SECTION 16441 , SWITCHBOARDS . .
'PART 1
- GENERAL:: ..
. 1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS"
A.
Drawings- and general. provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary.,
_ .. .
Conditions: and Division 1 S�ecificationSections,:apply to this. Section.::
1.2
..SUMMARY
Y A.
Section Includes:
1. Distribution switchboards 'rated 600.V and less.
Transient voltage suppression devices.
K Disconnecting and overcurrent protective -devices,.:
_T
4:: Accessory components and'. -features.
5. Identification. ..:
:1.3.
SUBMTI'TALS-
A.
Product Data: For each type of switchboard, overcurrent protective device, transient voltage
suppression. device, ground -fault, : protector;: accessory; :and component indicated. Include
dimensions and. manufacturers" technical data on features, performance, electrical
characteristics, ratings, accessories, and, finishes.::
B.
Shop Drawings: For each: switchboard and related equipment.
1: Include dimensioned.: plans, elevations, .sections, -.and, details; including required ..
clearances and service space around equipment. Show tabulations of installed devices,
Y fequipment
featuures, and ratings.
f
2. Detail enclosure types for types other than NEMA 250, Type 1.
3. Detail bus configuration, current, and voltage ratings.
�f
4. Detail short-circuit current rating of switchboards and overcurrent protective devices..
5. Detail features, claracteristics; ratings, and factory. settings of individual overrcurrent
u-
protective devices and auxiliary components.
6. Include - time -current coordination curves,; for . each type and = rating of' overcurrent
protective device included in switchboards. Submit on translucent log -log graft paper;
include selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent protective device.
7. Include schematic and wiring diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring.
C.
Qualification Data: For qualified Installer.
_ D.
Field Quality -Control Reports:
1. Test procedures used.
2. Test results that comply with requirements.
16441-1 MOUNTAIRE FARMS - LUMBER BRIDGE
WWTS UPGRADE

3.: Results of failed,tests and corrective action taken to achieve test results that comply with
- requirements.
E'. Operation and Maintenance Data: For switchboards and components, to include. in emergency,
operation, and .maintenance manuals. In . addition -to .items .specified hi Section; 01720 ..
"Operation -aid Maintenance Data," include the following:
l: :Routine, maintenance requirements for switchboards and all installed components.
2: Manufacturer's written instructions for testing. and adjusting overcuirent protective
devices.
3. Time -current coordiliation Clli'Ves for each: type and rating of :overcurrent protective
device. included in. switchboards. Submit on translucent log -log graft. paper; include
selectable -ranges for each type of overcitrrent protective device. .
1,4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer -Qualifications: An . empIoyer of workers, qualified as defined in NEMA.PB 2. l and
trained: in electrical safety as required by NFPA 70E.
B. Source Limitations: Obtain switchboards, :overcurreiit protective devices, components,' and
accessories from single source from singlemanufacturer. -
C. Product Selection for: Restricted Space: Drawings: indicate amaximum : dimensions for
switchboards including clearances between switchboards and adjacent surfaces and other items.
Comply with indicated maximum dimensions. r
D. Electrical Components,. Devices, and Accessories: Listed' and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended. location and application. i.
E. Comply with NEMA PB 2.
i
F. Comply with NFPA 70.
G. Comply with UL 891.
I
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
L
A. Deliver switchboards in sections or lengths that can be moved past obstructions in delivery path.
B. Remove loose packing and flammable materials from inside switchboards and install temporary r
electric heating (250 W per section) to prevent condensation. -
C. Handle and prepare switchboards for installation according to NEMA PB 2.1.
i
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Installation Pathway: Remove and replace access fencing, doors, lift -out panels, and structures
to provide pathway for moving switchboards into place.
16441-2 MOUNTAIRE FARMS - LUMBER BIUDGE
WWTS, UPGRADE
i

-B.
i
Environmental Limitations:
1. Do not deliver: or urstall switchboards until spaces are enclosed: and .weatheitight., wet .
work in -spaces is complete and dry, work above switchboards is complete, and temporary
HVAC system is operating and,maintaining ambient -temperature and humidityConditions
at occupancy:levels during the remainder of the construction period.
2 Rate equipment for continuous operation under -the following conditions unless otherwise .
indicated:
..:
a.: Ambient Temperature: Not exceeding 104 deg F. .
b. Altitude: Not exceeding 6600' feet.
C..
Service Conditions: NEMA PB 2: usual service con itions­ as follows':
1, Ambient temperatures: within limits specified.
2;: Altitude not exceeding 6600;fee't.
D..
' Interruption of Existing Electric Service: Do not interrupt electric service -to facilities occupied
by Owner or otliers unless permitted � under. the following conditions and then only after
arranging to provide temporary electric service according to requirements indicated:
-°
]. Notify Construction Manager no: fewer than- 3' days in advance of proposed;:interruption
.:of electric `service... '
-' ..
2:: . - Indicate method: of providing temporary electric service.
3. Do . ; not proceed with: interruption of ..electric service without Construction. .
Manager'swrrtten permission.
4: Comply with NFPA-70E.
1.7 ..
COORDINATION
--i A.
Coordinate layout and installatioir.of switchboards and components. *with other: construction that
penetrates walls or is supported by them; including electrical and other types of egiripmetit,
raceways, piping; encumbrances to workspace clearance requirements; and adjacent surfaces.
Maintain required workspace clearances and required ,clearances for equipment access doors
and panels.: -
B.
Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases With actual; equipment provided. Cast anchor -
bolt inserts into bases. .
1.8
WARRANTY
A.
Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard forin in which manufacturer agrees to repair or
replace transient voltage suppression devices that fail in materials or workmanship within
specified warranty period.
I
E
1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.
16441-3 MOUNTAIRE FARMS - LUMBER BRIDGE
W WTS UPGRADE

: I9 EXTRA MATERIALS:
A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and .that. are packaged with protective
covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1. Control -Power Fuses: Equal to 10_ percent of quantity installed for each size.and type,. .
but no fewer than two :of each size and type. 1
2: Indicating -Lights: Equal to 10 percent of quantity installed for.each size and type, but no
fewerAban one of each size and :type.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURED UNITS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering
products Ghat maybe incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the. following:..
1. Eaton Electrical Ine.;.Cutler-Hariunot Busiiiess Unit. -
2... General Electric Company; GE'Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution.
3: Siemens Energy & Antomatioli; Inc. .
4. Square D• a brand of Schneider Electric. Main tugs
..I
5. -Branch Devices:. Panel mounted.
6. Sections front and rear aligned:
B:.: -Nominal System Voltage: As indicated:on Drawings._
C. Main -Bus Continuous:.: As. indicated on Drawings.
D.: . Indoor Enclosures: Steel, NEMA 250, Type 1.
E. Enclosure Finish for Indoor Units::: Factory -applied finish in manufacturer's standard gray. finish 1
over a rust-inhibitingprimer on heated metal surface...
F.' Hinged Front Panels: Allow access to circuit breaker; metering, accessory, and blank
compartments.
G. Buses and Connections: Three phase, four wire unless otherwise indicated.
1. Phase- and Neutral -Bus Material: Tin-plated, high -strength, electrical=grade aluminum i
alloy with tin-plated aluminum circuit -breaker line connections. l
2. Ground Bus: Minimum -size required by UL 891, hard -drawn copper of 98 percent J_
conductivity, equipped with mechanical connectors for feeder and branch -circuit ground
conductors.
3. Main Phase Buses and Equipment Ground Buses: Uniform capacity for entire length of
switchboard's main and distribution sections. Provide for future extensions from both
ends.
4. Neutral Buses: 100 percent of the ampacity of phase buses unless otherwise indicated,
equipped with mechanical connectors for outgoing circuit neutral cables. Brace bus
extensions for busway feeder neutral bus.
16441-4 MOUNTAIRE FARMS -LUMBER BRIDGE
W WTS UPGRADE
1.

H.
Future Devices:: Equip compartments with mounting brackets, supports, bm:connectiofis,.and
appurtenances at full rating of circuit -breaker compartment.
'- 2.2
TRANSIENT VOLTAGE SUPPRESSION DEVICES
A;
"Manufacturers: Subject to : compliance with reg0irements;::available ..manufacturers: offering
products that may be incorporated: into the Work include,'but are not limited to, the following:
i
1. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hainmer Business Unit. .:.
2. General Electric Com ari GE Consumer &'Industrial - Electrical Distribution.
p Y;
. - .
3, Siemens Energy &' Automation, Inc. .. .
4. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.
- B.
Surge Protection Device Description: IEEE C62.41 compliant; integrally mounted; bolt-dh j
"
solid-state, parallel -connected, modular (with field -replaceable modules) type, with sine -wave
tracking suppression and filtering modules, UL I449,-second edition, short-circuitcurreit rating '
matching.or exceeding the switchboard- short -circuit -rating, and with the::following features and I
accessories:
I:: ... Fabrication using bolted compression lugs for internal wiring.
.2. Redundant suppression circuits.
3. : Redundant:replaceable: modules.:: ...
4. LED indicator lights for power. And protection status..
5. Audible alarm, w:itli. silencing switch, to indicate:when protection has failed.
6. Form-C contaefs rated at,5.A and 250-V ac; one normally open and one normally closed,...
for'remote inonitoring of system: operation.:: Contacts sliall reverse position :on failure of .
.. . any surge diversion module -or' on opening of any current -limiting device. Coordinate
with. building power:monitoring and control system.- -
7. Four -digit, transient -event counter set to totalize transient. surges..
C.
Peak Single -Impulse Surge Current Rating: 1.60 kA per mode/320 kA per phase:
j... D.
'Withstand Capabilities: 12,000 IEEE C62.41, Category C3 (10 kA), .8-by-20-mic.sec. surges
with less than 5 percent change in clarfi ing voltage..
E.
Protection modes and. UL 1449 SVR for grounded wye circuits with 480Y/277-V, three-phase,
_j .
four -wire circuits shall be as follows:
is Line to Neutrai::800 V for 480Y/277.
2. Line to Ground: 800 V for 480Y/277.
3. Neutral to Ground: 800 V for 480Y/277.
- 2.3
DISCONNECTING AND OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES
A.
Molded -Case Circuit Breaker (MCCB): Comply with UL 489, with interruptuig capacity to
meet available fault currents.
-
1. Thermal -Magnetic Circuit Breakers: Inverse time -current element for low-level
'
overloads,. -and instantaneous magnetic trip element -for short circuits. Adjustable
magnetic trip setting for circuit -breaker frame sizes 250 A and larger.
16441-5 MOUNTAIRE FARMS -LUMBER BRIDGE
WWTS UPGRADE

i
2.: . Electronic trip circuit breakers with rms sensing; field -replaceable ratingplug or field-
replie'able electronic trip; and the following field adjustablesettings:
a. Instantaneous -trip.
- b. Long- and:shoit-time.pickup levels.
G. Long- and short_ time time. adjustments. -
d. Ground -fault pickup level; time delay, and IIt response.
1 Molded -Case Circuit�,Breaker (MCCB) Features and Accessories:
a. Standard frame 'sizes, trip ratings, and number of poles. 1
b. Lugs: Mechanical style, suitable for number, size,. trip ratings,. And conductor
material.
B. Insulated -Case Circuit Breaker (ICCB) 100. percent rated, sealed, insulated -case :power circuit "
breaker with interrupting capacity rating to meet available fault current.
1. -Fixed circuit -breaker moiuntuig.
2: -Two-step, stored -energy closing:
3. Full-fanction, nlicroprocessor-based trip units ,with interchangeable rating plug, "trip I
indicators, and the following field -adjustable settings:
a-. Instantaneous trip:..
b. Long- and -short -time time adjustments.
c. Ground -fault pickup level, time delay, and h response:
4. Key Interlock Kit: Externally mounted to prohibit circuit -breaker operation; key shall be
removable only: when circuit breaker is in off. position. "
2A ACCESSORY COMPONENTS AND FEATURES
A. Accessory Set: Include tools and . miscellaneous items . required for overcurrent protective
device test,, inspection, maintenance, and operation.
B. Portable Test Set: For- testing functions of solid-state trip devices without removing from
switchboard. Include. relay and meter test plugs suitable for testing switchboard meters and
switchboard class relays.
PART 3-EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Receive, inspect, handle, and store switchboards according to NEMA PB 2.1.
B. Examine switchboards before installation. Reject switchboards that are moisture damaged or
physically damaged.
C. Examine elements and surfaces to receive switchboards for compliance with installation
tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
16441-6 MOUNTAIRE FARMS -LUMBER BRIDGE
W WTS UPGRADE
. i.
1

3.2
INSTALLATION
k :
Install switchboards and accessories according to NEMA PB 2.1. ;
B.
Equipment Mounting: -:Install switchboards on concrete:base, 4-inch nominal thickness.
A. -Install dowel rods to concrete base to concrete floor. Unless -otherwise -indicated,
_connect
install. dowel rods on 18-inch centers around the full. perimeter: of concrete. base.
i
2 For supported equipment, :install epoxy -coated anchor bolts. that extend: through concrete
base and anchor into structural concrete floor.=
3. _-Place and - secure aitchoi•age devices. Use-:scttin drawings,: templates', din rams ..
g g, P g
instructions, and. directions fiftnished with items to be embedded.
4. Install anchor bolts'to elevations required for proper attachment to switclibbards.
C.
Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove tem orar -liftin a es . channels and:'brackets and
P Y. g P Y g Y ,. .
temporary blocking of moving parts -from switchboard units and components.. ;
D.:
Operating. Instructions: Frame and :mount the - printed basic operating instructions for
switchboards,. including control' and key interlocking. sequences. and einergency procedures.
J
Fabricate frame of finished wood or metal: and cover: instructions with clear; acrylic plastic.
..
Mount on.front of switchboards.
f E.
Install filler plates in umised'spaces of panel -mounted sections.
F.
Install, overcurrent protective devices,' transient voltage. ' suppression devices,. and. .
instrumentation..:: .. .
1 Set field -adjustable switches and circuit -breaker trip. ranges.::
G.
:Comply with NECA 1. - ..
3.3
IDENTIFICATION
A.
Identify field -installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide warning
signs complying with requirements for identification -specified in Section :16075 "Electrical
Identification."
B.
Switchboard. Nameplates: Label each switchboard compartment .with a nameplate complying
Jwith
requirements for.identification specified in Section 16075 "Electrical Identification."
C.
Device Nameplates: Label each disconnecting and overdurrent protective device and each
meter and control device mounted in compartment doors with a nameplate complying with
requirements for identification specified in Section 16075 "Electrical Identification•"
f 3.4
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
- A.
Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage. a factory -authorized service representative to inspect,
test, and adjust components, assemblies, and equipment. installations, including connections.
B.
Acceptance Testing Preparation:
16441-7 MOUNTAIRE FARMS -LUMBER BRIDGE
WWTS UPGRADE

I: Test insulation a•esistance for each switchboard bus, component, connecting supply,
feeder, and control circuit.
2. Test continuity of each circuit.
C. Tests and Inspections:::
1. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA
Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters.
2. Correct malfunctioning
units on -site, where.' possible,: and retest to demonstrate '
compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest.:
3. Perform the following infrared scan tests and inspections Arid prepare reports:
a. Initial Infrared Scanning: After -Substantial Completion, but not more than, 60 days
after. ,Final Acceptance, perform an infrared scan of each switchboard: Remove.
front panels so: joints and connections are accessible io portable scanner.
b. Follow-up Infrared Scanning: -Perform an additional follow-up infrared seam of
each.switchboard 11 months afterdate of Substantial Completion.
e. Instruinents and Equipment:
1).._ Use,an-infrared scanning device designed to:measure temperature of to
detect significant deviations from normal values. Provide calibration record.. ° I
for device...
4.. Test . Arid . adjust controls, remote monitoring, . and. safeties... Replace. damaged and J
malftmctioning controls and equipment. J
D. Switchboard will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.
E. Prepare test and inspection reports, including a certified report -that identifies: switchboards
included and that describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies detected; remedial .
action taken and observations after remedial action,
3.5 ADJUSTING
A., Adjust moving parts and: operable . components to function smoothly, and lubricate as j
recommended by manufacturer.
i
3.6 PROTECTION
A. Temporary :Heating: Apply temporary heat, to maintain temperature according to
manufacturer's written instructions, until switchboard is ready to be energized and placed into !
service.
3.7 DEMONSTRATION
A. Engage a factory -authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to I
adjust, operate, and maintain switchboards, overcurrent protective devices, instrumentation, and
accessories.
END OF SECTION 16441
I_
16441-8 MOUNTAIRE FARMS -- LUMBER BRIDGE
WWTS UPGRADE
a
f_

SECTION 16461 -LOW-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS
:PART 1-
GENERAL:' . .
1.1. ,
RELATED DOCUMENTS
` A.-
Drawings and general provisions of ' the ' Contract; including General. and Supplementary, . -
Conditions: and Division.l Specification:Sections, apply to this Section.::
:. 1.2 ..
SUMMARY
A.
..
This, Section. includes the. following .types of dry -type transformers rated 600. V and less,; with
capacities up to 1000 kVA:
1. 'DistHbutibn transformers:
1.3 ....
SUBMITTALS ...: ...
_ 'A.
Product Data.` Liclude rated nameplate data, capacities, weights, dimensions, minimum
clearances,: installed :devices and feahires; and perf6 finance : for _. each :type and aize-of
transformer indicated.
-I B.
_: ...
Shop Drawings;. Detail -:equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions weights, loads re uired
clearances; inethod of field assembly, . components; and location "and size of each field
. connection.
1.. ... Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and
. :control wiring.
I. C.-
Source quality -control test reports.
D.
Field quality -control test reports. .
J E..
Operation and Maintenance :Data: For- transformers to include. in emergency, operation, and
maintenance manuals.
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
E A.
J
Source Limitations: . Obtain each transformer type" through one source from a single
manufacturer.
B.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in 4PA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
C.
Comply with IEEE C57.12.91, "Test Code for Dry -Type Distribution and Power Transformers."
16461-1 MOUNTAIRE FARMS - LUMBER BRIDGE
WWTS UPGRADE,

1.5 .
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING `I
r_
A.,
Temporary Heating: Apply- feinporaiy heat according to manufacturer's . written : instructions
within the enclosure of each ventilated -type unit,"tlu oughout periods during which equipment is
not energized and when transformer is not in: a space that is continuously underm normal :control {
of temperature and humidity.
1.6-:
COORDINATION
A:
Coordinate installation of wall -mounting and structure -hanging supports with actual. transformer
'
provided. ...
PART 2'-PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Available Manufacturers: Subject.to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that maybe incorporated into the Workinclude, but are not liinited to; the following:
I
1. Eaton, EIectiical Inc.; Cutler -Hammer Products. "
2-.: General Electric Company: .
3. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.
I
4. Square D; Schneider Electric.
5: .. Approved equal.
2.2 :. -
.. GENERAL TRANSFORMER -REQUIREMENTS
A.
Description: Factory -assembled arid. -tested, air•-cooled.units for 60=Hz.service..
B.
Cores:. Grain -oriented, non -aging silicon steel.
C.
Coils: Continuous windings without splices except for taps.
1. Internal Coil Connections:. Brazed or pressure type.
2. Coil Material: Aluminum.
2.3
DISTRIBUTION TRANSFORMERS
A.
Comply with NEMA ST 20, and list and label as complying with UL 1561.
B.
Cores: One leg per phase.
C.
i
Enclosure:. Ventilated, NEMA 250, Type 2. �-
1. Core and coil shall be encapsulated within resin compound, sealing out moisture and air.
D.
Transformer Enclosure Finish: Comply with NEMA 250.
16461-2 MOUNTAIRE FARMS - LUMBER BRIDGE
WWTS UPGRADE

I;.: '. Finisli:Color: Giay.
E.:
Taps for Transformers Smaller than 3 kVA: None._ .
F.
Taps for Transformers 7.5 to 24 kVA: Two S_percent taps below raied:voltage:.
= G::
Taps for Transformers 25 kVA :and Larger: Two: 2:5 percent taps above and two: 2.5 percenti
_
taps below normal full capacity.
H...:
' Insulation Class:, '2 0 deg C, UL-component-recognized insulation system with a inaximum of
150 deg C rise above 40 deg:C ambienttemperature.
I:
Energy Efficiency for transformers Rated 15 -kVA and -Larger:
:1. Complying with NEMA TP 1, Class 1 efficiency levels:
2. Tested according.to NEMA TP 2.
J.
Wall Brackets: Manufacturer's -standard. brackets.- -
: 2.4
IDENTIFICATION DEVICES ;
A.-
Nameplates: Engraved, lamiiiated-plastic or.metal nameplate:for each:distrlbutiontransformer,
mounted with corrosion -resistant: screws. Neplates -and label products: are specified in
... ... ... _.....
Section.16075 "Electrical Identification."
2.5.-.
SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL:: :..
A::
.. Test and'inspect transformers according f6 IEEE C57.12.91.::: . -.
PART, 3 -EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
_
i
A.
Examine conditions for compliance with enclosure- and ambient -temperature requirements for
each transformer.
-i B.
Verify that field measurements' are as needed to maintain working clearances required by
NFPA 70 and manufacturer's written instructions.
I
f C.
Examine walls, floors, roofs, and concrete bases for suitable mounting conditions where
transformers will be installed.
} D..
Verify that ground connections are in place and requirements in Section 16060 "Grounding and
Bonding" have been met. Maximum ground resistance shall be 5 ohms at location of
transformer.
E.
Proceed with installation only after iuisatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
i
16461-3 MOUNTAIRE FARMS- LUMBER BRMGE
WWTS UPGRADE

:a
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install..wall-mounting transformers level. and plumb with .wall brackets fob_ ricated by .
transformer manufacturer..
3.3 CONNECTIONS ::
.i
A. Ground equipment according to Section 16060 "Grormdung and Bonding."
B. _ Connect wiring according to Section 16120 :"Conductors and Cables."
3.4 .. FIELD .QUALITY CONTROL
•
i
A. Perform tests and inspections and prepare test
A. .
B.... Tests and Inspections:
I
I. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection :and electrical test stated in..NETA
Acceptance Tesiiilg Specification. Certify connpliance with: test parameters:
C. Remove and. replace units that do not pass tests or inspections and retest as specified above. =
•
D.. Infrared Scanning: Two inontlrs after Substantial Completion,: peiform an ' infrared : scan of
transformer connections.
1;: Use an infrared=scamning device designed to measure temperature or detect significant
deviations from normal values. Provide documentation of device calibration.
2. Perform 2 follow-up infrared scans. of transformers, one at 4 months and the other at -11 .
months after Substantial Completion.
3;.. Prepare a certified . -report identifying. transformer• . checked and describing results of I_
scanning. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken, and scanning .
observations after remedial action.
E. " Test Labeling: On completion of satisfactory testing of each unit, attach a dated and signed I'
"Satisfactory Test" label to tested component.
i
3.5 ADJUSTING i
A. Record transformer secondary voltage at each unit for at least 48 hours of typical occupancy
period. Adjust transformer taps to provide optimum voltage conditions at secondary terminals.
Optimum is defined as not exceeding nameplate voltage plus 10 percent and not being lower i than nameplate voltage minus 3 percent at maximum load conditions. Submit recording and tap
settings as test results.
B. Output Settings Report: Prepare a written report recording output voltages and tap settings.
3.6 CLEANING
A. Vacuum dirt and debris; do not use compressed air to assist in cleaning.
END OF SECTION 16461
I
16461-4 MOUNTAIRE FARMS - LUMBER BRIDGE
WWTS UPGRADE

SECTION 16511 -INTERIOR LIGHTING
PART I - GENERAL::
1.1.
RELATED DOCUMENTS
.: A.:
Drawings and general provisions of the : Contract; including General.. and Supplementary,
Conditionsand Division I Specification:Sections,.-apply to this Section.::
1.2 ...:
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes: ..
1. Interior lighting fixtures'.. lamps, and ballasts..: ..
Lighting fixture supports:
1.3 :.:'
DEFINITIONS ..
A.
BF;, Ballast factor.
B.:
CCT: Correlated color temperature.
C.
CRI: Color:renderingindex.
D.
HID: :High -intensity discharge; -
E.
LER:- Luminance efficacy rating....: . , -
i
_ F..
Lumen: Measured output of lamp and luminaires or both.
G.
Luininaire: Complete lighting fixture, including ballast horsing if provided.
1.4
SUBMITTALS
A.
'Product Data: For: each type. of lighting fixture, arranged in order of fixture designation. .
Include data on features, accessories, finishes, and flee following:
1. Physical description of lighting fixture including dimensions.
2. Ballast, including BF.
3. Energy -efficiency data.
4. Life, output (lumens, CCT, and CRI), and energy -efficiency data for lamps.
.5. Photometric data and adjustment factors based on laboratory tests, complying with
IESNA Lightuig Measurements Testing & Calculation Guides, of each lighting fixture
type.' The adjustment factors shall be for lamps, ballasts, and ;accessories identical to
those indicated for the lighting fixture as applied in this Project. -
16511-1 MOUNTAIRE FARMS -- LUMBER BRIDGE
WWTS UPGRADE

a. Manufacturer Certified Data: Photometric data shall be - certified by a
manufacturer's laboratory with a -current accreditation under the --National
Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation: Program for Energy -:Efficient Lighting
Products. ,
B. Installation instructions.
C. Operation and Maintenance Data- liglntirig equipment:and fixtures to include in emergency,
operation, and maintenance manuals.
1, J
Provide a list of all lam tp�Yl? es used on Project use ANSI and manufacturers' codes.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
- A. Luminaire Photometric Data Testing Laboratory Qualifications: --Provided. by. -manufactu ers'
laboratories that are accredited under the National Volunteer Laboratory Accreditation Progi•arn
for Energy Efficient Lighting Products:
B. Electrical Components; Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
.by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended. location and application.
C-. Comply with NFPA 70:
D. FM Global Compliance: Lighting fixtures for liazardous locations shall be. listed and labeled for .
indicated class and division of hazard by: FM Global.
1.6 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of lighting fixturesand suspension system with other
construction. that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including HVAC equipment, fire -
suppression system, and partition assemblies.
1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish extra in that match products installed and that are packaged with protective
covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1. Lamps: 10 for every 100 of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least one of each
type.
2. Plastic Diffusers and Lenses: One for every 100 of each type and rating installed.
Furnish at least one of each type.
3. Ballasts: One for every 100 of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least one of
each type.
4. Globes and Guards: One for every 20 of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least
one of each type.
16511-2 MGUNTAIRE FARMS - LUMBER BRIDGE
WWTS UPGRADE

PART 2 - PRODUCTS: ... ...
2.1.
MANUFACTURERS
A.;.:.
Products: - Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that. gray be .
incorporated into,the Work include, but are not limited to, product(s) indicated on Drawings.
2.2 ...:
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR LIGHTING FIXTURES. AND COMPONENTS
A.
Fluorescent. Fixtures: Comply with UL 15W Where :LER is,'specified,. test according to
NEMA LE Sand NEMA LE 5A as applicable:
B.
HID Fixtdres: : Comply with: UL 1598. Where: LER; is specified; test according to
NEMA LE 513: -
C:
Metal Parts: Free of burrs and sharp corners and edges.
D.
Sheet Metal: Components: Steel -:finless otherwise indicated. Foriri and support to prevent
..`
warping d sa in
P gan.. gg g•.'
1:
E
........ ... ... .. .._
Door%' Frames,. and Other Internal Access:. Smooth operating, .free= of light leakage, under
,..
operating conditions, and..designed ;to permit relamping without.:use of tools: Designed to
prevent doors, fi-ames; lenses, diffusers, and other components from falling accidentally�dui
relamping and when secur•eddii operatingposition:­: '...
p , ..
F..
Diffusers and Globes:::
1. Acrylic Lighting Diffusers: 100 .percent :Virgin acrylic. plastic:.. High resistance ao '.. .
yellowing and other changes due to aging,.e'xposure.td heat, and.UV radiation.
Lens Thickness: At'least 0.125 inch minimum unless otherwise -indicated.
-1
U. UV stabilized.
f2.
Glass: Annealed 'crystal glass unless otherwise indicated:
G.
Factory -Applied Labels: Comply with UL 1598. Include recommended lamps and :ballasts.
—�
Labels shall be located where they will be readily visible.to service persomiel,. but not seen from.
normal viewing angles when lamps are in place.
1. Label shall include the following lamp and ballast characteristics:
'
1
a. "USE ONLY" and include specific lamp type.
b. Lamp -diameter• code (T-4, T-5, T-8, T-12, etc.), tube configuration (twin, quad,
triple, etc.), base type, and nominal wattage for fluorescent and compact
fluorescent luminaires.
C. Lamp type, wattage, bulb type (ED17, 131356, etc.) and coating (clear or coated) for
HID luminaires.
d. Start type (preheat, rapid start, instant start, etc.) for fluorescent and compact
fluorescent luminaires.
e. ANSI ballast type (M98, M57, etc.) for HID luminaires.
-
16511-3 MOUNTAIRE, FARMS -LUMBER BRIDGE,
W WTS UPGRADE

f. CCT and CRI for all luminaires.
2.3, BALLASTS FOR LINEARFLUORESCENT LAMPS T
A. General Requirements for Electronic Ballasts:
1. Comply with UL 935 and with ANSI C82:11.
2: Designed for type and quantity of lamps served. -
3. Ballasts shall.be designed for full .light output unless another BF; dimmer, or bi-level .
control is indicated. .
... 4- Sound Rating: Class A. .. .
5. Total Haiinonic Distortion.Rating: Less than 20.percent.
6. Transient Voltage Protection: JEEEC62.41.I :and IEEE C62.41.2, Category. A or better..:
7. Operating:Frequency: 42 kHz or higher.
8: - Lamp Current Crest Factor: -1.7 or less.-
9. BF: 0.88 or higher.
10. Power Factor:- 0.95 or higher.
•.I
11. Parallel.Lainp Circuits: Multiple lamp ballasts shall comply with ANSI C82:11 and shall
be connected to maintain full light output on surviving lamps:if one or more lamps fail.
B. .. Luminaires controlled by occupancy sensors sliall:have programmed -start Ballasts.
C. Electronic Programmed -Start Ballasts for T8 .Lamps:: Comply: with ANSI C82.11 and the
following:.
L . ' Automatic lamp starting after lamp replacement.
I
D: Electromagnetic -Ballasts: Comply with ANSI C82.1; energy saving, high -power factor,.. '
-Class P; and having automatic -reset thermal protection.
1.: Ballast Manufacturer Certification: Indicated by label.
i
E. Ballasts for Low -Temperature Environments:
1. Temperatures 0 Deg F and Higher: • Electronic type rated for 0 deg F 'starting and
operating temperature with indicated lamp types.
2. Temperatures minus 20 Deg F and Higher: Electromagnetic type designed for use with
indicated lamp types.
2.4 . BALLASTS FOR HID LAMPS
A. Electromagnetic Ballast for Metal -Halide Lamps: Comply with ANSI C82.4 and UL 1029.
Include the following features unless otherwise indicated:
1. Ballast Circuit: Constant -wattage autotransformer or regulating high -power -factor type.
2. Minimum Starting Temperature: Minus 22 deg F for single -lamp ballasts. I-
3. Rated Ambient Operating Temperature: 104 deg F.
4. Open -circuit operation that will not reduce average life.
16511-4 MOUNTAIRE FARMS - LUMBER BRIDGE
wwTS UPGRADE

:2.5..
a
FLUORESCENT LAMPS
=
A.
T8 rapid=start lamps, rated 32 W maximum, nominal .length: of .48 inches,.2800 initial lumens -
(minimum), CRI 75 (niuiim'um), color temperature 3500 K, 'and average rated life 20,000 hours
.
un, less otherwise. indicated.
2.6
HID. LAMPS '.
A.
-. Metal -Halide Lainps. ANSI _C78'.43, with.rninimum CRI 65, and color temperature 4000 K.
B.
Pulse-Start,.Metal-Halide Lamps:.- Minimum CRI'65, and color temperature 4000 K.
PART:3 ;.:EXECUTION ..;
3.1 ...:
INSTALLATION, _
A.
Lighting fixtures: ...
_ -
1. .Set level, plumb, and.square with.ceilings and:walls unless otherwise indicated;
liistall lamps, in each lurninaire.
B.,
Tem ,,orar L'i htin : If it �is.necessai and:a roved b Eii ineet 'to use ermaiient luminaires
P y g g �',. Pp Y g � _ P
for temporary lighting, install and energize the itiinimum nuinber of. luminaires :necessary.:
When 'construction rs .sufciently complete, remove the temporary luminaires,: disassemble,
clean thoroughly, install new lamps, -and reinstall.
C... _
, . Connect wiring according to -Section 16120 "Conductors and, Cables."
3.2
IDENTIFICATION .
A.
Install labels with panel and circuit. numbers on. concealed junction and outlet boxes. Comply
With requirements for identification specified in Section 16075 "Electrical Identification.": ,
_
i
END OF SECTION 16511
I
J
d
16511-5 MOUNTAIRF FARMS -LUMBER BRIDGE
WWTS UPGRADE

SECTION I7001- CONTROL SYSTEM. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS.;
:PART 1 - GENERAL:. ...
1.1 SCOPE AND PURPOSE..
A. The scopeof work under this contract includes but -is n6t limited to:
1. All investigation work required to establish the use and configuration
g q g ration .of the as -found
hardware and software of each control signal affected_under:this. contract...:
2. Document all .clianges to_. the plant's control.system, including the updating of the plant's .
existing control system documentation to reflect changes madeduring construction and
discrepgncies foiund during -the investigation worlc. .
3: Furnish, - install, connect, configure and test PLC hardware; and softwareproducts and
related items.:
4. Furnish, relocate, install;: connect,, -configure and test Ethernet -:LAN and. PLC LAN
communication equipment. hardware, software and related iteiris:
5: Furnish and install all equipinerit.enclostires, power supplies; interconnecting cables; 'and
support software and equipment required fora complete and functional system.:
6. _Furnish and install all conduit,:conductors; terminal boxes, and appurtenant equipment
.. shown: on the Contract Drawings, hereinafter specified, and/or required for a complete
and frilly functional installation to the satisfactions of the Engineer..
7. :Configure: all:,equipment.,to operate. satisfactorily and demonstrate that the system: is
:properly operating.
:. 8:: ... Provide'. training: on the OIT,: IM:: and PLC. Hardware:: and: software. , supplied . and
implemented under this contract.
9. :Provide additional services froni the System..Integrator, as requested, for additional...
training,.configuratio'n and programming services, troubleshooting, and related activities.
B. This section outlines procedures and requirements that will assure a timely installation with
minimal disruption to.the operation of the facility: Any requirements listed in this section are in
addition to requirements listed in other sections.
1.2 . DISCONNECTION -AND IDENTIFICATION
�y A. All power,, control and instrumentation wiring associated with equipment, panels, devices, etc.
to be removed and replaced shall be identified, marked and then disconnected in order to make
the equipment safe. See demolition drawings for more details'.-
B. Notify Plant personnel prior to disconnect any existing signals.
C. Prior to connecting any signals, each existing signal shall be tested to verify that the signal is
I within the expected range and suitable for connection to the new control system.
i 1.3 SEQUENCE OF CONSTRUCTION
A. General
CONTROL SYSTEM GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 17001-- 1

1. The system upgrades need to be coordinated so that the plant has minimal down time.
Owner shall have the final decision. on what is an expectable clown time.
B. The contractor shall begin the submittal process within two weeks after notice. to proceed by _I
submitting the .name of the proposed System: hitegratoi• along with all information required to
determine the adequacy of the proposed System Integrator (see Section 17950).
C. Within one month after approval of the System hntegr•ator, all hardware and software product
submittals shall be delivered to the Engineer.
D.. - Within. two months after approval of the' System Integrator, detailed installation submittals shall'..
be delivered to the Engineer
E. --All work. shall be . coordinated with plant maintenance personnel and approved . by plant .
operations personnel prior to beginning any work.
i
a
F. Written consent from the Owner's. Representative must be obtained not less than one week prior
to carrying out any portion of the work included in this Contract which requires interruption.of
service.
G. Plant operations shall be notified no less than 24 hours liiior to beginning any work that requires
disruption of plant operation:. I
H. Complete any work that can be performed without interference to the existing operation: of the
plant control'system, such as conduit and cable installations, prior to d sconnecting.any:existing
control_ equipment:
.. I. Provide and:nnplement a -workaround to address any Plant control. "or:Monitoringprocessthat is
affected by'temporary or permanent work being performed under, this contract.
J. Only two filter panel may be taken out of service at any time. "Work on the next filter panel"shall
not begin until:..
1. The previous panel is completely. operational.
2. Plant operations staff has been -properly trained in its use.
3. The work has been accepted -by plant maintenance personnel.
K. Train operators in the functional operation of the new equipment in each process area, as each
process area comes on line.
L. Demonstrate that the new and existing equipment is properly configured and operating by
displaying process data at the local workstation and at other workstations oil the existing
SCADA system and verifying the accuracy of the displayed data.
1.4 SPECIAL NOTICES TO CONTRACTOR
A. Unavoidable interruption of service must be confined to the daytime: Contractor will not
receive extra compensation for overtime, should this become necessary to insure continued
service.
CONTROL SYSTEM GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 17001 - 2

.. .,.
.B.
as
In connection .with all: of the foregoing, Contractor must, have 'on the construction -site, all ,
materials,. equipment, construction facilities, adequate supervision and a sufficient number of .
qualified workmen to -insure parrying out all ofthe-above work in the shortest possible. time.
1.5
INSUFFICIENT INSTRUCTION
A.
The -Contractor shall furnish and install all materials and equipment which..are reasonably
inferable to -be part of the complete installation without aityadditioiial charge to the Owner. -.
B.::
If, in the opinion .of the Contractor, any: work shown on the Drawings or called foi• tinder these
Specifications.is insufficiently specified or specified in:such a manner as to make it impossible
for him to produce first-class work which will meet the: approval of the Engineer; he shall refer
same to the Engineer beforeproceeding_ with the work and, if he fails to. refer such instances. to- -
the Erigineer, no,excuse for;poor-workmanship willbe entertained.
1.6 --..
FIELD. ENGINEERING .- ..:
A.
Where existing conditions and dimensions are shown or.indicated on:the Contract Drawings; the
information given is approximate only, and is not warranted' by the Owner to lie either complete
or correct. The Contractor. shall verify. actual existing conditions and dimensions. in the field
before ordering materials or starting construction.:
B.
... ... .. ..: .. .. ... ...
. - The Contract Drawings indicate the :general location and arrangement of conduit, 'wiring
devices, -equipment,'.and other. products. The Contractor shall adjust -the indicated locations'
(subject to approval in the field) as necessary to:
1. Comply with. all applicable code requirements.. '
Permit access.for construction, inspection, testing, operation, and:inaintenance. ,...
3. Avoid conflict with pipes, mechanical equipment, structural openings (e.g., doors),.and
other obstructions, as built, :whether or not as shown. on the Contract Drawings. .
4. Produce a neat,'workmanlike arrangement.
C.
The Contractor, shall determine the proper connection points for all power, control, and signal
wiring, regardless of whether the connection points are -in equipment fiirnished under this
j
Contract, in equipment Punished by others, or in existing equipment.
D.
The Owner will makeavailable available. to the Contractor any reference drawings it may. have.
However, the Owner: does not -guarantee. the correctness, completeness, or availability of .
reference drawings. Should.the Contractor choose to rely upon the reference drawings, he does
so at his own risk.
i
_! E.
The Contractor shall perform all field surveys, wire tracing, and other work required to ascertain
the proper connection points for all wiring.
F.
The Contractor shall coordinate the making and sealing of all holes through structures to
accommodate electrical conduits and supports for electrical equipment, and shall submit
-
working drawings thereof for the Engineer's approval.
CONTROL SYSTEM GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 17001 - 3

7
SECTION 17050 -. BASIC CONTROL SYSTEM MATERIALS AND METHODS ..
-, PART
1 - GENERAL::
1.1
CODES AND STANDARDS
A.
All electrical work to be performed and all materials to be furnished shall be in accordance with -.
the Contract Drawings and Specifications, to :the :satisfaction of theEngineer; :and the
.
requirements of the following codes, regulations; and specifications:am
...
1. National Electrical Code (NEC)
2 .National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)
_.
1.: National Electrical:Manufacture?s Association (NEMA)
4: Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE)
5. American National Standards Institute (ANSI):
1.2
SIIBiV1ITTALS
` A.
The submittal requireients listed, in this section: are additional requirements. to those' listed: in "
--
other sections 'of these specifications and do :not release the contractor from any requirements
..
listed'in other sections:
B.
Submit catalog cuts and shop drawings for materials and equipment in conformance with the
requirements;of.Section;01300 - Submittals. Electrical shop drawings shall include:
l., Terminal identification: diagrams: and schedules...
2: .. Point-to-point interconnection diagrams.
3. Single, line and :elementary wiring diagrams, for. all. power, signal, control and lighting
systems, together with panel layout. drawings. .
-�
4. Description of Operation.
.5. Actual details of conduit installation.
jC.
Submit final As -Built Drawings in conformance with the requirements of Section 01300 -
Submittals. The As -Built Drawings shall depict -the actual installation with all items clearly
identified, all dimensions exactly as installed, and all details correct. -
D.
The electrical section of the As -Built. Drawings shall consist of one -line diagrams of the
complete installation, one -line and relay diagrams of the power systems, elementary diagrams
of power control and signal circuits, complete connection and interconnection wiring diagrams
for the entire installation, including items furnished under other contracts, conduit schedules and
panelboard schedules.
E.
Submit Operating and Maintenance Manuals containing detailed information for all equipment
and associated control systems fiimished and installed under this Contract. O&M Manuals •for
f
the Contract shall meet all requirements of Section 01300- Submittals.
F.
Each O&M Manual shall include:
BASIC CONTROL SYSTEM MATERIALS AND METHODS 17050 - 1

1.
1: A complete set of reduced -size prints of the final As -Built Drawings. J
2. A complete list of all relay settings, and all control and alarm point settings.
3. One copy of the manufacturer's spare -parts list for all equipment furnished.
1.3 SUBSTITUTIONS
A. Wherever the Electrical Contractor proposes to substitute.equipment, he shall submit threesets
of certiEcd:tnai2ufacture-r's-prints -and one set of engineering data for the equipment he proposes
to furnish along with one set of manufacturer's prints and one set of engineering. data for the
specified e' uipment; for evaluation and preliminary approval by the Engineer. Deterinination
of acceptability by the Engineer shall be final. Samples may be requested by the Engineer for
evaluation, . .
1:.4: _ . MATERIALS
A. No materials of any kind shall be used' that have not been approved by the Underwriters
Laboratories, Inc., where UL provides 'such. service, and each piece of equipment shall.have
marked thereon, where it can readily be observed, the name or trademark of the manufacturer.
B: Materials, and equipment shall be the best oftheir.several kinds and all work shall be -performed .
in a neat, substantial and workmanlike manner, to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
1.5 DEFECTIVE MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT
A. Defective material and equipment or materials and equipment damaged in the course. of
installation or test shall be replaced or repaired in a manner meeting the approval of the .
- Engineer:: All materials and workmanship shall be of the best quality .and all work done in: a
thorough manner in strictaccordance with the rules and regulations of the American Insurance
Association (formally the National Board of Fire Underwriters,) the state, and local authorities
and the electric company that will furnish the power.
`l
1.6 MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION
A. Unless otherwise specified, all conduits shall be installed 'concealed in partition walls and I
fmished ceilings and exposed on concrete surfaces. Before starting the work, the Contractor
shall submit to the Engineer, for approval, his proposed arrangement and mounting details.
B. All items shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. The
Contractor shall furnish and install all material and hardware required for mounting and to
provide a complete and functional installation, at no additional cost to the [Authority][Owner].
C. Mounting hardware shall be stainless steel, unless otherwise noted. Field mounted instruments
shall be mounted on pipe stands or mounting brackets which will allow easy removal. Supports
shall be attached to concrete surfaces with wedge anchors and stainless steel bolts.
BASIC CONTROL SYSTEM MATERIALS AND METHODS 17050 - 2
I

— 1.7
REMOVAL:AND RELOCATIONS
A-
Where existing materials and: equipment are to be removed or: relocated; :all materials no longer
.-
used shall be removed unless otherwise directed by the Engineer. Affected surfaces shall be
-,
repaired to conform to the type,. quality, and finish of :the: surrounding surface :in a neat and
..:
workmanlike manner:
B.
Where existing panels. are to be removed, the. Contractor shall firsi.identify and label all wiring
which will be reused.:No'wires shall be disconnected ;which have=not been properly identified.
-
Existing panels shall be removed in an orderly fashion in order to minimize plant disruptions. - _ : -
1.8
GROUNDING
-; A.
All equipment furnished and/or :installed under this Contract shall be : grounded in' accordance
with -the latest regi ireinents of the -National Electrical Code.
1.9 . -
CALIBRATION°
A. ..All
instrumentation. and control devices,, furnished sunder this Contract, shall be' calibiated' by
competent, qualified technicians. prior to final acceptance. A_ copy of the calibration data shall
be submitted for approval.
:: .. 1.10 :
.. IDENTIFICATION ...
A.
Nameplates: shall be provided, as: required.::Nameplates shall be;:black laminated plastic with
White center, fastened with stainless steel screws.
-B.
The. size and shape of nameplates'and lettering -shall be in pleasing proportion for each specified
location..::: =
�I 1.11
WARNING SIGNS
-1 A.
'Furnish all warning signs in conformance with NEC.code and.OSHA regulations.
1.12
CLEANING AND TOUCH-UP PAINTING
- A.
The premises shall be kept free fiora accumulation of waste material and rubbish. Upon
completion of work, the contractor shall remove materials, scraps, and debris from the site.
Scratches, scrapes, or chips in interior or exterior surfaces of devices shall be touched=up With
finishes matching as nearly as possible the type and color of the original finish.
I
J
i
BASIC CONTROL SYSTEM MATERIALS AND METHODS 17050 - 3

BASIC CONTROL SYSTEM MATIRJALS AND METHODS 17050 - 4

SECTION 17100 - CONTROL -EQUIPMENT
.PART 1
- GENERAL:
- LF
SCOPE OF WORK
_... . A.....
Design,. Supply.and. Install all:hardware. and software products .required to•provide a. complete .
And fully functional control system as shown on the Contract Drawings and/or herein specified::
I B.
Resign the: control panels and; field wiring interfaces required to implement the control
equipment.
L: All control panels; shall be: designed and manufactured in. accordance with UL .5.08A,
Standard for Industrial Control Panels; and.NFPA 79, Electrical Standard for Industrial
Machinery..:
r5'.
... ...
2. All components shallbe UL recognized.
C.
Furnish, Install and Test:
1: Control.panels, programmable controllers, enclosures and appurtenant'equipnient. .
2:: ... Software.products, interface:cables and:related products. ...
3. Data communications -equipment-, materials-and;software required to. interface.the [new]_ .
control egiiipinent to the [existing] SCADA:network.:: . -.
4-. Relays,,resistors; signal splitters or other devices required to condition input and output
field signals for the control equipment.::
�- D.:
Connect and test all input and output field wiring to and from the control_ eduipmerit:
E.
Provide all manufacturer's services required for installation,, startup; calibration, inspection, and
training.
F.
Provide all coordination required for -system. integrator's services as specified in -Section 17950 -
System Integration.
1.2
WARRANTY
j
_ A.
Conform with all Contract Warranty requirements specified in the General Conditions and
General Requirerrients.
._! B.
Provide an. extended manufacturer's warranty.on all products and equipment to remain in effect
for not less than one year after the successful completion .of the reliability acceptance tests.
1.3
CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITIES
A.
The contractor shall retain the services of a qualified system integrator, to assist in the selection
I
of equipment, preparation of submittals, installation, configuration and startup of all control
equipment.
CONTROL EQUIPMENT 17100 - 1

L. Refer: to Section:17950 - System Integration, for additional details -and requirements
regarding the qualifications and responsibilities of the systein integrator.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit catalog cuts, shop drawings, and O&M manuals for all equipment in conformance with
the requirements of Section 01300 -Submittals..
1. All control. equipment hardware, software -,and control panel shop drawings shall be .
.reviewed and approved by the System Integrator prior to submission to the Engineer.
B. Siibmit one: binder of catalog cutsheets for equipment common to multiple locations, and submit
a separate binder of panel drawings, data and field wining diagrams for. each of the separate.
building locations.
1. The intention of this provision is to permit the contractor to proceed with panel assembly
and installation in one:building before receiving approval for the submitted information
. ... ,
of all buildings:
-C. -Submit the following information involving proposed hardware for the control system:
l: A detailed written description of the controi'system outlining the purpose and capabilities
... of each component..
2. Catalog information, shop drawings, and descriptive literature for each component of the
control system.
3. Shop drawings and catalog cuts for all panels and enclosures:
D. Submit_ complete detailed shop' drawings, working. drawings_, and descriptive literature for...
control panel equipment, cabinets, and components. Asa minimum the shop drawings and _.
working drawings shall include the following: .
1. Bill of Materials
2. Power load calculations verifying capacity. of power supplies and UPS units to carry the
panel load.
a. Provide a minimum of 20% spare capacity on DC power supplies.
b. Provide 10 minutes of no power operation on UPS units.
3. Heat rise calculation of each enclosure.
4. Front panel, back panel and panel schematic wiring diagrams.
a. Submit detailed drawings showing proposed arrangement of equipment within
each enclosure, proposed locations of all equipment and enclosures, and proposed
arrangement of all conduits and conductors that will enter each enclosure.
b. Provide a minimum of 20%, but no less than two (2), installed spare 1/0 for each
type of 1/0 present in the panel. All 1/0 are to be factory wired out to field terminal
strips in the panel. These spare 1/0 are to be hi addition to the material to be
supplied under the Spare Parts section of this specification.
CONTROL EQUIPMENT 17100 - 2

C. :Provide a minimum of 20%, but.no less than two (2), spare (open) module slots.on ...
the controller J/O back plane:
5. Interconnection wiring diagrams showing all component and panel terminal' board
..
identification numbers and: _ external wire: numbers, including :existing equipment - and
�, :: ...: • equipment fiunished by others.
Retain note -below only if there is. additional.information on the drawing that, needs to be incorporated. into
the shop drawings -
a: Refei to the drawings for -additional information regarding the level - -of detail
.. :: required for the wiring diagrams.
6. Provide field wiring diagrams showing. the.connection.of the wiring out to.all new and:
existing inonitored and controlled field_ devices. Field wiring diagrams include:
a. Point -to -Point Field Interconnection :Diagrams. .
Retain paragraph and sub -paragraphs below. for plants that are upgrading anexisting control. system. Edit
AS appropriate:for site conditions.
b. Edited, revisions .of the plants' existing: record drawings for field. wiring and.
... ... interconnection work that can be better represented. by modifying the existing field
wiring drawings: Record. drawings. include:
1) Terminal -identification diagrams .. `
oint-to- oint interconnection diagrams, 2) p . P- g . .
3).- instrumentation loop diagrams,
.�
4 Coiifrol:panel diagrams.
PART 2- PRODUCTS
.
2.1 PROGRAMMING SOFTWARE
Retain paragraph A or B below to suit the project.
A: All Programming shall be performed using version and edition of the programming software
1 currently owned and maintained by the [Authority] [Owner] at the Plant.
B. All Programming, shall be performed using the latest version and edition of the programming
software being installed on the [Authority's][Owuer's] IM Desktop computer.
i
C. The Contractor's System Integrator shall be responsible for maintaining their own version of the
programming software for their own purposes, and shall not be permitted to use or work .with
the Authority's software for the execution of the work required under this Contract.
1. Refer to Section 17950 - System Integration, for system programming requirements.
CONTROL EQUIPMENT 17100 - 3

.'I
' 2.2 . - PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC CONTROLLER
Maintain Paragraph Below.f6r propriety specification of a specific brand. of PLC.— Requires:approval.of
Owner and/or Solicitor
A. In order to minimize training requirements, provide a uniform look and feel, and provide better
support and administration;:the <Place` Owner's Name Here> has standardized:on:a single
Control System software package and PLC _manufacturer for the. <Place Facility's Name
Here>. Therefore, no, substitutes will be accepted for the specified:products.
= Maintain' Paragraplr Below =for Modicon Premium PLC —.EVALUATE EACH_ PART AGAINST THE
APPLICATION
B. The Programmable .I ogic Controllers shall be a Modicon TSX Premium Series controller with:
power supplies, processors and network interface modules.
1. The standardized I, jpmeiit is listed below.
a. CPU', Modicon Catalog No.TSX P573634M, with integrated Ethernet'port.
b. Modbus Plus PCMCIA card, Modicon Catalog No. TSX MBP 100
c. 16pt.24VDC DI Module, Modicon Catalog No. TSX DEY .16D2
d. 16pt.24VDC DO Module, Modicon Catalog No. TSX DSY 16T2
C. 4pt Al Module, Modicon Catalog No. TSX AEY 414
f. Opt AO Module, Modicon Catalog No. TSX ASY 410: .
g. I/O Module Screw Terminal. Connector, Modicon Catalog No.TSX BLY01
h. _ 4 Slot Expandable. Rack, Modicon Catalog No.TSX RKY 4EX
i. 6. Slot Expandable Rack, Modicon Catalog No.TSX RKY 6EX i
J. 8 Slot Expandable Rack, Modicon Catalog No.TSX RKY 8EX _
k. Power Supply, Modicon Catalog No. TSX PSY 2600M
2. PLC Remote 1/0 (RIO) Cable
a. All Remote 1/0 cabling shall be supplied and installed in accordance With Modicon
Modbus Plus Network Planning and Installation Guide
3. Mixed 1/0 Module
a. Module shall be Modicon Momentum Mixed I/O with MB+ communication
adapter and accessories as necessary for a complete installation.
1) Analog I/O: 6 Ch In/4 Ch Out
2) Discrete 1/0: 8 In/8 Out I-
3) Modicon Catalog No. 170 ANR 120 91
Maintain Paragraph Below for Allen-Bradley Control Logix PLC — EVALUATE EACH PART
AGAINST THE APPLICATION
C. The Programmable Logic Controllers (PLC) shall be Allen-Bradley 1756 ControlLogix series
controller with power supplies, processors and network interface modules.
1. The standardized PLC Equipment is listed below.
CONTROL EQUIPMENT 17100 - 4
I

a, CPU, Allen-Bradley 1756-L61 ControlLogix CPU w/2048K RAM'-.. - - _
b. Ethernet Module, Allen-Bradley 1756-ENBT
c. 1/0 Wiring System,: Allen-Bradley 1492
2.: :The Remote 1/0.00) shall: be:Allen-Bradley 1794 Flex UQ series controller with. power
roc supplies,essors and network interface modules. .processors ... ..:
3. Operator Interface Terminal (OI:T) shall be: Allen Bradley PanelView 1000 Plus Color
with Ethernet port•:
Retain paragraph :for Remote SCADA panels., Note that..SCADA ,controllers.typically.have greater.
temperature tolerance and are easier to program for remote communications than PLCs.
2.3 'REMOTE TERMINAL UNIT :(RTU)
..: A. General: ..
1. T- J' SCADA controller sliall be intelligent, modular unit; oapable of both data acquisition:
And local data processing. It shall monitor and control local equipment in:'a sfaird-alone
mode as well as being an intelligent .node in a distributed system. It sliall be based on
- ... .. ... . .
multiprocessor architecture, in .which a co -processor is= used .for handling on -board
input/output channels.. To, facilitate initial installation, maintenance and future expansion,
all external input/output modules shall connect to the basic controller using a high-speed
internal -bus.
2. The SCADA. controller shall be configured and programmed with standard programming
g
'languages as Relay_ Ladder .Logic (RLL) and/or.ANSI ;C.'...Programs shall 'be'.
developed and downloaded either directly to the ,controller. using a- standard RS7232
interface cable, -or remotely through Elie commiuiication network media such as phone
lines, dedicated lines, or wireless radios.
The:controller must be supplied:with the number and: type of input/output modules and
communication ports as indicated elsewhere in tlie specifications. Future expansion.may
be made by simply plugging in additional input/output modules to the 1/0 bus.
B. SCADA controller hardware specifications: .
_! 1. The controller shall include the following:
2. Central Processing Unit (CPU):
3; The central processing unit shall be high speed (minimum 14 MHz), 16 bit CMOS
} microprocessor. The design should incorporate a separate co -processor for controlling
input/output channels.
4. The CPU shall be equipped with at least 128 KB RAM for application programs, 128 KB
ROM for firmware and application programs, and 0.5 KB EEPROM for storing system
- parameters and configuration.
S. CPU RAM and ROM capacity shall be expandable to 1 MB RAM and 2 MB ROM,
6. The CPU shall include a real time clock/calendar, accurate -to within one minute per
month, with lithium battery backup. The battery will maintain the memory and
clock/calendar for two years of power off time.
7. All vital electronic components such as RAM, ROM, and communication port drivers
rmist be mounted on sockets (not directly soldered on the board) to allow firmware
upgrades and servicing of the unit in the field.
CONTROL EQUIPMENT 17100 - 5

8. Diagnostic LEDs shall be included for the following: _ _I
a. Power supply. .:
b. 'Program Run/Stop. `1
C. Communication parameters such as transmit, receive, clear to. send, request, to
send,.and carrier detect.
d. CPU Status.
e. Forcing.
9. To minimize power constimption,.the controller shall support the .following: ,.
a. . Sleep -Mode: which shall allow .the CPU to .turn off the power supply and reduces
power corisumption.to at least.120niW. : The Sleep -Mode must be controlled by
the application program.
b. All LEDs controlled by the CPU must be disabled to reduce power :coiisuinpti
: A push button switch on the CPU module shall allow the LEDs to turn on when
field service is being performed: I
. I.
10. The controller shall include a built-in power supply allowing AC and DC input. The
powerSupply must be capable of providing 24 VDC output to -power field .transmitters..
C::: ..Mixed: process input/output:
1: The controller shall. include the following: i
a. 16 digital inputs:
b.-2.mcclianical relays digital outputs.
C. 8 isolated analog inputs:. yI
2. Digital inputs must be. available for 12/24 Vrms/DC, 115 Vrms or 220 Vrms-input ranges
and shall tolerate 150% over -voltage.
3. In addition to the above mentioned I/O, The controller shall include at least three high-
speed counters (up to 5 Khz) rated at 12/24 Vrms/de..The counters shall also function as
digital inputs.
4. Digital outputs will be configured as follows:
a. 2 Form C individually isolated.
b. 2 Form A individually isolated. l
C. 8 Form A with common ground for each group of four.
d. 220 Vrms/240 Vdc maximum operating voltage.
e. 1000 Vrms contact isolation.
5. An isolated open -collector status output for fault annunciation shall be included in
addition to the outputs described above.
6. Analog inputs shall be 0-5 V or 0-20mA, 12 bit resolution, ( 0.2% accuracy over the
operating temperature range, ( 0.1% accuracy at 77 (F (25 (C) with 150OW transient
suppresser on each input. Inputs shall be single ended and isolated from .logic circuitry.
7. The controller shall include one internal temperature measurement channel, readable in C 1
or F to indicate the operating temperature, for remote monitoring via the communication
network, or use within the application software.
CONTROL EQUIPMENT 17100 - 6

8, The controller shall include: one RAM .battery voltage: measurement channel which:can be
--
monitored remotely via the communication network.
9. Analog outputs will support 12 bit resolutx' n :0-20mA or 4-20mA- -software selectable,
+/- 0.2%accuracy, over the operating'temperature range, { 0.05% accuracy at 77( F (25
(C) with600W transient suppresser on each output:
10. The controller I%O sliall be controlled by high performance co -processor.
11. The state of digital and/or=analog output shall be configurable to.hold last output. value- or,
go to. off condition: when the. application program.is_stopped...
12. Tenniinal blocks sliall be reovable and can accommodate'solid or standard wires from ;
22 to 12 AWG. This allows module replacement without disturbing:the field. wring.
13. The controllei'inust be capable ofsripportirig the following input/:output points in'total
a. 25d digital inputs
b. - 256 digital outputs
: c. 128 analog inputs
I :: ...'.. d. .. 64.analog outputs
e. - . 32 pulse counfers,
£ -- - maximum of 40. I/O. modules'
D. Communication:
.1. The. RTU::sliall possess..a minimum of three. built -.in .communication ports. with the ..
following characteristics:
a.. Two-RS-232, software controlled with full DCE/DTE operation°to 38400.baud.
b. One RS-232/485, software controlled with full; DCE/DTE operation: to :115,20.0
.. baud.
c. -:An-ethernet communication port:shall be provided, as noted.
2. The RTU shall 'support asynchronous operating made, half and full duplex transmission.:
E. Mechanical Design:
j
1. The controller shall. be DIN rail mounted ,with screw clamp for vibration resistance.
Front access to all controls,: indicators, lithium battery, communication ports and power
j supply shall be. -provided. Communication ports: shall be standard 9 pin RS-232 to allow
easy access using standard cables. No proprietary communication cables shall be
allowed:
_r 2.. All boards shall be coated with conformal coating, for protection against humidity and
corrosion. In order to minimize the cabinet size, the. controller shall have a maximum
footprint area of 51.2 square inches.
3. Where sockets are used, they must be machined type and be gold plated. Bifurcated. or
leaf contacts are not allowed.
4. All system components must be constructed of corrosion resistant zinc plated steel with
removable metal covers.
F. The controller shall operate over an ambient temperature range of -40 F to 158 F (-40 C to 70
C) with a relative humidity 5%to 95%, non -condensing. The RTU shall operate from 16 Vrms,
50/60Hz or 12-24 VDC.
G. Certifications and Standards:
i
CONTROL EQUIPMENT 17100 - 7

... ... ... ..
L All inputs: and outputs (except the serial communication ports) must survive ANSI/IEEE I
C37.90 surge withstand capability (SWC) tests without damage.
2. The controller must be certified for electrical safety by UL as conforming to UL 508 or
CSA as conformin to CSA:C22.2/142.
g :. ..
3:: The controller shall meet or:exceed thefollowing standards::: .
a. Surge withstand capability: ANSUIEEE C37.90
.'RF emission: compatibility: FCC. part 15, Subpart 1, Class A
c Electrical safety classification: UL 508/CSA C22.2/142 i
d. Hazardous area classification: 'CSA Class 1, Division 2, Group A,B,C,D =
:e: CE standards::EN55011,:EN55022,.'EN60082-:1; EN60082-2 and EMC -directive
f. 'GOST standards: 8.009-84 12997-84 22261-92: 26203-80
... g:• ... 291125-' 1, PR:50-2-009-94
H. Communication. Protocol:
-1. The. RTU shal1.support:Modbus, with -the following minimum features:
a. :.Allows up:to.255 stations in one:system.
b. , . ` Ability. to transfer. complete programs-and'data over the communication network.
C. .. Support high data security techniques -such as Cyclic:Redundancy Check, CRC 16::: ..
A. Proprietary protocols will:not be allowed.
2. The controller shall be able to receive information fromother sites 'and retransmit the. .
message to another site, using the. same communication port.
3. The conttoHer shall allow flexible communication algoritlnns on all communication t
_ ports:: Any of the ports can.act as Master,. Slave or Store -and Forward at any time during
the execution: of the application pio ram.
A. The RTU: shall be .able to function as , an interconnection point between different
communication systems such as radio, leased lines, and radios with different frequencies.
5. The RTU shall be able to send broadedsting messages to a number of locations.
6. The RTU shall be able to perform report by -exception' (event driven communications)'
rinder.the control of the application program.
7.: The RTU shall be capable of supporting other protocols, such as Allen-Bradley Dr1, on
any of the communication ports,
8. The RTU shall support programming of custom protocols for data interchange on any of �-
the communication ports.
9. Each communication port shall be configurable with a unique station number when used
with -the standard'protocol. _
10. Any port running the standard communications protocol shall allow for programming via 1
local or remote communications.
i
1. Operating System:
1. The software shall be based on a multi -tasking executive system optimized for real-time
environment.
J. Programming Software:
CONTROL EQUIPMENT 17100 - 8
r

L
The programming software shall allow; downloadingof Relay.. Ladder Logic, and/or ...
standard ANSI C programs from within one package. The software shall allow the user -
.
to develop: and download the application: and :system ." configuration over the .
_
communication network via radios, leased and dial -up lines.
2:
The RTU shall allow Ladder and C a lications Go run concurrently. Any failure' in the
PP y ' y
Ladder application shall not affect other applications running under Q. .. .
3.
:The Relay: Ladder Logic shall include the following functions:
a. PID feedback control.= .
,.
b. Modem dialing and control, :
...
.: .
:c. Timers, counters, mathematical functions; memoiy functions.
d. Standard Ladder Logic -fiwctions. such as coils and contacts:
e. Boolean logic' functions.
f. Bit transfer functions.
°g. Block transfer functions.
.4.
On-line monitoring of Relay Ladder Logic power flow .shall be included- to facilitate
..
start-upand: debugging: of programs..
5:
Relay Ladder Logic. program shall be up. to 12K words in size, with no fixed limit on the
number of networks.. - ...
G.
The programming software shall support on-line monitoring and forcing of any.register in. .
the protocol databasewhen utiliziri the built-in protocol: ;Forcing s(iall wrtie a.valueao ..
P g.
the register and prevent modification of the register." content . by the communication
protocol or the application software. - A global command to: remove all forcing must: be
included. :.
7.
. ii addition: to* forcing, th'e software shall be'capable of:writing a -value to any register in sp
- � `
the protocol database but continue to allow the protocol or application software to, modify :. .
the contents of the register:
8•
The controller shall -be, capable of processing up to : 32 PI_D ..loops with : individual.
execution time bases:from 0.1 to 25.5 seconds.
9::
Standard ASNI C tools shall. support the following fiinctions::
ws
=
-a. - Database functions.
b. Modem dial -up functions:
C. PID functions.
d. . ` System functions.
—
e. Protocol.functions.
10.
When: downloading C programs, the communication message size must be configurable
to a minimum of 26 bytes and a maximum of 256 bytes. .
I L
The software communication settings most allow - configurablenumber of retries in
addition to message time-out ofup-to 99 seconds.
J K. Warranty:
I.
The manufacturer shall warrant the hardware specified above against all defects in
-"
material and workmanship for a period of three years
+i L. RTU
shall be a Control Microsystems SCADAPack32 model T4-100-01-0-1 or approved equal
M. RTU
shall be a Control Microsystems SCADAPack model P1-230=01-0-1 or approved equal.
CONTROL EQUIPMENT 17.100 - 9
}

2.4 - PC BASED HUMAN MACHINEINTERFACE (HMI):=:
A-.:- HMI Desktop Personal Computer (PC) :: .
1:: Desktop style workstation with. the following featitres:and configuration:
a. Processor: Intel:Dua1 Core:Xeon Processor, 2AGHz :
b. Operating'system: Genuine Windows XP Professional:
. . . . c. Ram: 2GB Dual Chanine] DDR3 SDRAM at 1066MHz- 2DIMMs:
d.: Hard Drive: 250GB Serial ATA Hard. Drive (7200RPM) w/DataBurst.CacheTM
e: 56K PCI Data Fax Modem .
...
f•. Video Card: : 25 6MB. nVidia Geforce 7300LE TurboCache .. .
g..
A225 Speakers .
h. Microsoft Office Professional
Two (2) Network Interface Cards (NIC): 10/100MB Ethernet
J. Minimum 19 inch UltrasharV" -1908FP Digital Flat Panel
k. 48X DVDRW/CDRW Drive I
a: ... TAPI=compliant: voice modem. shall be a, Zoom. modem model 3030 (,for SCADA . 1
Ala. )
..2. Laser Printer.with Ethernet connectivity and 2, extra toner cartages..
- _3. The PC shall be a Dell Trecisioii T3500 or approved equal.
4. HMI Workstation Software- (Desktop PC):
a. HMI software package: One.(1) Intouch_Development/Runtime 3000 tag with UO .
Licensejatest version ow
:. b. Dial out Alarming software package- One (1) SCADA Alarm, Version 6.0
C. -Reporting: 'Software package: One (1) Sytech XL Reporter Suite:software package,
Ver 7.0., Pt# XLISM
d.... PLC "software package:
l) OAe (1) RSLinks Classic program (latest version), as supplied by Allen
{
Bradley.
2) : One (1) RSLogixs '[500][5000j program (latest version), as supplied by
Allen Bradley.
3) Ono (1) Modicon Unity Development Licenses.
4) One (1) OTT screen configuration software, Pro -Face GP -Pro EX.
e. System Remote Access software packager One (1) PCAnywhere program: (latest
version), as supplied by Symantic.
B. HMI Industrial Panel Computer
1. Industrial panel mounted computer with the following features and configuration:
a. Processor (1.5GHz, CPU)
b. Operating system: Genuine Windows® XP Professional
C. Rain: 1GB Dual Channel DDR2 SDRAM at 800MHz- 2DIMMs
d. Hard Drive: 40GB SATA Hard Drive_HDD
e. Single PCI Slot
f. Network Interface Cards (NIC):.10/100MB Ethernet
CONTROL EQUIPMENT 17100 -10

g. 15-inch LCD Panel
h. DVD/CDRW Drive
2. The 1PC shall be a 117 LCD panel -computer, Quiatioil Arista Iindustrial model Q-ARP
{ 1717. or approved -equal.
r 3.. HMI -software package (Panel -Mounted PC): One (.1):Intouch Rrrntiine:300.0 tag with I/O
.License, Version 10A. :
sw
C. HMI Desktop Personal. Computer Uninterruptible Powei•.Supply (PC_UPS) _
•
1. -Floor mounted book case type 865."Watts /..1500 VA UPS; with extended r4n .time, USB_
'interface, software, C6id'Ma1iagem6ht Straps, USB cable, User Mannar
a. Output Power• Capacity:,­865 Watts 11500:VA'
-b. - ' Nominal Output: Voltage: 120V
6. Output Connections .
_: ... ..
1) " (2) NEMA '5-15R (Surge Protection)
` ... 2) (0) NEMA-5"-1 5R (Battery Backup)
d. :: Nominal Input Volta ge:,120V
e... ` Input Fregkncy: 47 Hz. .
. hiptit_ Connections:. NEMA:5-1.5P on: 6' cord
g. Battery " Type: Maintenance -free . ' leakproof ' sealed Lead -Acid . 'battery ..with
suspended:electrolyte: .
h. Included Battery Modules: 1 , -
i: Typical -recharge time: 8 hours:
t Typical Backup Time: 12.4 minutes @ 432.5 Watts
k. USB Interface Ports :: .
1.: Control panel: LED status display with .On Line, On Battery, -Replace Battery and.
Overload indicators
in. ..Audible Alarm: Alarm when on.battery, distinctive low battery alarm, configurable
delays
n. Surge energy rating: 420 Joules
o. Filtering: "Full time multi=pole noise filtering, -5% IEEE surge let-throtigh, zero
:clamping response time, meets UL 1449
p, Dataline protection: RJ-11 Modem/Fax/DSL protection (two wire single line),RJ45
10 Base-T Ethernet protection
q. Dimensions: 14.60" H x 3.'40"W x 13.10"D
h r. Net Weight: 25.00 lbs
s. Operating Environment: 32 - 104 °F
t. Operating Relative Humidity: 0 -- 95%
U. Audible noise at 1 meter from surface of unit: 45 dBA
V. Online Thermal Dissipation: 180 BTU/hr
W. Regulatory Approvals: cUL Listed,FCC Part 15 Class %FCC. Part 68,UL 14495-UL
1778,U1, Listed 4 X. Lifetime $150000 Equipment protection policy
-- Y. Two year warranty.
2. APC Back -UPS. RS, 1500VA/865W, Input 120V/0utput 120V, Interface Port USB,
4 Extended runtime model BR1500 , or approved equal.
CONTROL EQUIPMENT 17100 - 11

2.5 THIN CLIENT -.HUMAN MACHINE INTERFACE (HMI)
A. General
L HMI Graphic panels_ shall he industrial #bin client computers with local touchsel' flat
Panel dis l..Y Pa s operating as a thin, client under the Plant's existing InTouch Terminal..
• . p
'Services.
a. Provide and install two additional hiTouch-Terminal Services client session_ aicense
..: on Plant's existing-InTouch Terminal. Services computer.
2.. I-IMI..Panels shall: provide. -consistent. ope►ator..interface graphics and. functions :from
supervisory computers on HMI operator panels
B. Industrial Thin Client Computer`
1: Computer shall: be intended for use as an industrial processor with robust, and: reliable
hardware and no moving components housed in a compact enclosure foi• panel mounting
2. Opei'ating:System: Microsoft Window XP Professional
3.: Processor: Intel's Pentium M L6 GHz
... ..: .. ...
-VGA -Graphic Output:. Resolution/Color
a. Up to 1920 x 1200 resolution with 32-'bit color ,
Up to 2048 x .1536 resolution with .16-bit color.
. 5. :Memory: I GB
6:.. Hard Disk Drive: 40GB
7. Network: One Ethernet Poit.(10/100/1000)
8. Audio: 31) Audio: ALC655 3D AC97 Audio CODEC
9. Expansion Slots: 1 x 32-bit PCI (Iialf-sized),
10.. - System Diagnostics BIOS Watchdog Timer
11. External Interfaces
a. One CompactFlash type II slot
b. Two RS-232 ,
C. One Printer
d. Six USB 2.0
e. One PS/2 Keyboard
f. One PS/2 Mouse
g. One Audio Line-out
h. One Microphone
i. One VGA Output
12. Overall Dimensions: 11.56 x 3.95 x 8.0 inches
13. Weight 7.8 lbs.
14. Rated Input Voltage: 100-240 VAC, 50-60Hz, via external AC/DC power supply
1.5. Thermal Management: Fanless, passive cooling
16. Temperature:
a. Operating: 01 to +50°C (32°F to 122°F)
b. Storage: -20° to +60° C (4° to 140° F)
CONTROL EQUIPMENT 17100 - 12'

17.
Safety Standard'Ce'rt.ificati6hs; UL/CUL 508
C.: Indur
si W Flat Panel Monitors
1::
19" SXGA 1280.x 1024 resolution, 266k TAT colorLCDdisplay
.-2.
Construction: Heavy duty steel chassis with JP65 black aluminum'front bezel
3.
]Mounting: Panel Mount - -
k
Touch. Screen Type: 5-wire analog resistive
5..:
Touch: Screen Controller: RS-232 interface a
6.
Control: Rearaccess OSD (On screen display buttons)..
7.
.'Power Supply: Externd power adaptor, 12V I 4A
8..
Overall Dim'insions: 17.8" x: 15.7" x 2.1"
9::
Gross Weight: I's lbs
... ... ... ... 10.
�Operating Te mparature: .3 2F - 11:3 9F ... ...
... ... ... ...
1.1.
Vibration:; 1 G 10 - 500 Hz operation.
12.-'
Shook: TOG peak acceleration (I 1m, sec. duration)
2.6 OPERATOR INTERFAC&TERMINAL (OJT)
... ... ... ...
A. Graphic -Panel Touch "Screen. shall be Fully griaPhical touchscr6en :display with s I pria port
-configured. for coti.imunication'to local, PLC..
L: ...
7.4" 64k -color TFT Display ... ...
.2.
Built-in Ethernet 10/100 TCP/IP for programming
3.
Tro-face AGP3400 Operator Interface
B. General Requirement
..J.
Display: 5.7" diagonalicolor STN. (Super TwistedNernatic) LCD -display with 15.6 colors, -
320 x 240 pixel'resolution,'206 NITS display brightness, 50,006 hour average backlight
lifetime Analog:riesistive (1024- X 1024) touch screen allowing unlimited touch areas as -
2.
Communication: Ethernet, 10/1 QO. Base-T port (prog'rai'TI/download & PLC comm), Serial
PLC interface (RS-232/422/485)':
3.
Memory' I GBytd CompactFhish card slot, buiti-in'. Expansion assembly (optional) for
CompactFlash devices (use with, optional CF Card 1dterfhc6M6dule),'l0 MByte-project
memory, Data logging functionality, USB port B (program/downlodd) and-US13 port A
(USB device options)
4.
Power: 24 VDC powered
5.
Environmental-; NEMA 4/4X, IP-65. compliant When mounted. correctly, indoor use -only
Slim design saves panel space, 0 to 50'C (32 to 122°F) operating,temperature range
6.
Approvals: UL, cUL* CE agency approvals
7.
Warranty: 2-year
8.
Programming: Set -Up WindowsTm based PC software via RS232/ethernet
C. The OIT shall be automation direct model EA7S6C or approved equal.
1.
The OIT programming software shall be automation -direct', model EA-PGMSW or
approved equal.
-CONTROL EQUIPMENT
17100-13

'2.7
PLC-RIO FIBER OPTIC MODEM
A..
- .. Power Supply
1::
: Mounting: DIN Rail-:
-. 2.
Input Voltage: 120 VAC.at 50/60 Hz & 85 to140VDC
3.
Input Current: 250mk
Input Fuse: 400ma:Slow-blow.
5:
Regulated: Output Power:9VDC, 1.1A:Max
6.
Indicators:.Power On,(Green LED);
.7
,Operating,Temperature: =40 to 85°C ,.
8..:
Operating Relative:Humidity::0 to 90%. non- condensing
9.'
: Dimensions: 3.9"H x 1.8"W x 4 9"D
10.
Approvals:-CE, UL
11.
: Weed.Instrtuneiit EOTEC 2000 Power.Supply Model 2A06,,or approved equal.'
.
B.
..: ..: . ... ...
Electrical Interface Module "
1.
Mounting: DIN Rail
2.:
Baud Rate: 1.54M Baud -
3.
Copper Cable Connector: F-Type
A.
:Copper End;Termination:.internal; 75 oluns
5: ..
'Max Cable & Tap Loss: 20 dB.:
6. ..
Indicators: Power- On (Green LED), Comm Activity (Amber LED)
7.
Operating Temperature: r40 to 85°C -
8.
Operating Relative Humidity: 0 to 90% non- -condensing
9.
Dimensions: 3.9"H x 0.9"W x 4.5"D
10.
Weed: InstrumentEOTEC 2000 MODICON R-1/0Model 2C14; or approved equal:
C.::
Optical Interface. Module : --
L
Mounting: DINRail
2.
-Optical Wave Length:.850nm, Multi -Mode -
3.
Corrim Data- Rate: 9.6k Baud to 12k Baud ll
4. -
Optical Port Connection: ST Compatible l_
5.
Optical Dynamic Range: 12dB utilizing 62.5/125 fiber
6.
-Indicators: Transmit (Green LED), Receive (Amber LED)
7.
Operating Temperature: -40 to 85°C I_
8.-
Operating Relative Humidity: 0 to 90% non- condensing
9.
Dimensions: 3.9"H x 0.9"W x 4.5"D
10.
Weed Instillment EOTEC 2000 Optical Interface Model 2E07, or approved equal,.
2.8
1
ETHERNET LAN EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS
A.
For premises wiring cable see SECTION 16120 Wires and Cables.
B.
Fiber Optic Cable Patch Panel
1.
i
Fiber Wall Cabinets, Open
ij
1.
CONTROL EQUIPMENT 17100 - 14 I-
I

Low -profile cabinets: with front:cover extending past the coniiector field on the user.side
7.
of the panel to provide full patch cord protection.
3.
Material: 16.=gauge cold -rolled steel
4; .:
Four 6-connector.ST Adapter Panels per cabinet. :.
5::
B1ack:Box 24-Port Open Fiber Wall Cabinets, or approved equal
C: Ethernet Media Converter .
l; ---
Heavy Duty, hardened, sealed steel enclosure, DIN rail mounted; Ethernet -fiber to:copper
- - - - -
media converter. ... .
2.
:2k MAC Address
C
1:
--- -- .. ...
Ports:::
a:.' ST 106Mbps multi -mode fiber port.
... ... ...
.(2)RJ-45 10/l00Mbps copper ports.
4.
Maximum Fiber Distance:1.2mi .
5.
LED Indicators: Power; LK/ACT,:F/H, 10/100
6: -
°.Standards_ IEEE 802.3, IEEE, 802.3u; IEEE 802:1p/q : '"
I.
7:: ..
CE Approved
$.
"Temperature Rating: -
a. Storage: -40.to +185° F .
b. Long-tern.j operating:::13 to +140' -F
9.
Humidity: -545%, non condensing
10.
Size: 3.5"H x YW x 1"D
If. --
Weight: 0:4 Ib...
..: 12.
Black Box. Hardened Media Switch,, or approved' equal
D. Managed Ethernet Switch
1.
Standalone. &port managed Ethernet switch. with Ruig topology support and suitable for
any harsh industrial environment.
a. IPv6 Ready logo awarded (IPv6:Logo Committee certified)
b. IEEE. 1588 PTP (Precision Time Protocol) for. precise time synchronization of
networks
�(
c. DHCP Option 82 for IT address assignment: with different policies
(
d. Modbus/TCP industrial Ethernet'protocol supported
e. Turbo Ring and Turbo Chain (recovery time less than 20 ms at full load), and
RSTP/STP (IEEE 802.1w/D)
i
f. IGMP snooping and GMRP for filtering multicast traffic
g. Port -based VLAN, IEEE 802.1Q VLAN and GVRP to ease network planning
~'
h. QoS (IEEE 802.1p/1Q) and TOS/Diff'Sery to increase'deteianinism
i. Port Trunking for optimum bandwidth utilization
j. RMON for efficient network monitoring and proactive capability:
k. SNMPv I /v2c/v3 for different levels of network management
1. IEEE 802.1X, HTTPS, and SSH to enhance network security
In. Bandwidth management.prevents unpredictable network.status
n. Lock port function for blocking unauthorized access based on MAC address
CONTROL EQUIPMENT 17100 - 15

i
o. Port mirroiing.for online debugging
p. Automatiic warning by exception through e-mail and relay output
q. Works with MXview industrial network management software
r. .740 to 75°C operating temperature -range (T: models)
r.�
'2. Moxa EDS-508A Series-8-port managed Ethernet switch, or Approved Equal.
E. Unmanaged -Ethernet Switches ...
1. -Heavy Duty, hardened,. sealed steel:enclosure, DIN rail.rnounted, fiber/coppers switch.
2. Features::
Sit" ort VLAN to in and spanning tree asstivou b: =
a P gg g P g P g
...
b. In lude link-Loss=Learn (LLL) feature for fast network recovery.
: c. Auto MDI/MDI-X ports
d. Nonblocking switching atchitechire, with a 2K MAC address table
3. :Ports:
a. ST 100Mb s.multi-mode,fiber ports.
b. Ri-4510/100Mbps.copperports.
c. Number. of fiber:and copper ports as indicated on the drawings...
4, ..: Maxinnim Fiber .Distance: 12mi ...
5. LED Indicators:
a. '(2) Power,
b. Per:Port: (2) LK/ACT, (2) F/H;
c. ' Per Copper Port: (2) 10/100
6. Standards: IEEE 802.3, IEEE _802.3u, IEEE 802.1p/q J
7.- - CE Approved
8. Temperature Rating: .
a. Storage: -40 to +1850 F
b. Long-term operating: -13 to +140° F
9. Humidity: 5-95%, noncondensing
10. Size: 3.6"H x 3 "W x 1.7"D
11. Weight:
a. Switches: 0.8 lb.
b. Power Supplies: 0.4 lb.
12. Black Box Heavy Duty Hardened Edge Switch with hardened power supply, or approved I_
equal.
F. Fiber optic patch cords
1. Fiber optic patch cords shall be factory assembled multifiber cables with the following
features:
CONTROL EQUIPMENT 17100 - 16
I
i

a. Plug -to -socket design with ceramic 0.3 AB.. loss ST, .and/or :SC connectors. as
required for the-speoif c application.
b. Made with high strength:62:5 µm ..Itimode:fber requiring a minimum bend
diameter of one inch.'
c. Available: in- factory made lengths -from 1: meter to 3.0 meters:-: Each patch cord
provided shall boas required for the installation with at least 1. meter of slack cable .
after installation:
_- d. Fiber optic patch cords- shall be. Black Box Pre nium. Ceramic, Multimode, 62.5-
Micron Fiber Optic Patch Cables; or approved "equal
G. 'Cat-5 :Patch Cables
1: Shielded "twisted pair (ScTP) cables shall be' high performance . -pail cables with
,protective foil, shielding. specifically designed for Ethernet applications,.. verified to=
EIA/TIA Category 5e; with.snagless boot and factory installed RJ=445 connectors.- .
a. 'Cat-5 Patch Cables shall be. Black Box CATSe, Shielded Twisted-Pair.(STP) Patch
Cables; or approyed equal._
2.9 EQUIPMENT ENCLOSURES -
A. FloorMounted Enclosures.
1. UL.508A listed, free standing, NEMA 4X, [Stainless Steel] (fiberglass], [single][double]
Zoor; [single access] enclosures with:minimiim.dimensions as indicated on the drawings:
2. Hoffinan Bulletin [A? ][A4][A17]-series of approved equal.
B. Wall Mounted Enclosures
I. UL 508A'listed; wall mount, NEMA 4X, fiberglass, single .door, hinged with quick -
release latch enclosures with minimum :dimensions as: indicated on the drawings.
2. Hoffinan Bulletin [A?] [A17] [A50]-series or approved equal.
1
2.10 PROCESS LOOP CONTROLLERS
A: Process Loop Controller shall be MicroMod Micro-DCI 53SL6000 Micro -Mite .Single Loop
Controller configured for Analog Back -Up Control.
B. Specifications
4 1. 'Analog Inputs
a. Quantity: 2 Standard
b. Signal Range: 0 to 20 mA or 4 to 20 mA
C. Input Impedance: 250 SZ
d. Measurement Error-5 ±0.02 mA
C. Common Mode -Voltage: 250 Vrms
2. Digital Input
CONTROL EQUIPMENT 17100 - 17

a, Quantity::2 Standard
b. Voltage input Off:. 0 to 1 V dc; On: 4 to 24 V do
o. Recognition Level Input Impedance: 1,000 Q = .
d. 'Contact Recognition Duration: 50 ms minimum
C. Analog,Output
1'. Quantity-1
2. Signal: Range 0 to 20 mA or to 20 mAdc-
3. .Load Range 0 to 750 SZ .
4. Output Acdura6y+0.2%
i
D., Digital, Output .. .
1. Quantity 2
2.: Closed Contact (ON)
.1
... ... - ---
3.' Operating Voltage 30 Vdc maximum
... .
..4. Voltage Drop 2.0 V dc:maximum
5. ..Operating°current 50 mA do maximum.
G.. Short Circuit Current 100 mA maximum
l
.7. Open Contact (OFF) <I mA leakage.
E. Microprocessor Sampling.and Update'
1. Computation. Rate Program executed once per. 50 ms
_ 2. 7iilut Signal Sample Rate 50 ms::
3. 'Display Update 50 ms
.- 4:: Output Signal Update 50 ms 1
r
F. Power:Supply Requirements::
L. Voltage Range 93.5 to 276 Vac
2. Frequency Range 47 to 63 Hz
3. Power Consumption:, 20 W/35 VA
G. Transmitter Supply 1
i
1. Rated Voltage +25 V fl V
2. Ripple:5 200 My P-P
3. On -load Current <_ 50 mA (short-circuit protected)
H. Physical Characteristics I_
I
1. Weight 3.3 lb I. Dimensions
1. Bezel 2 53/64 x 5 43/64 in
2. Case 2 5/8 x 5 13/32 in.
3. Depth behind panel 2 in
CONTROL EQUIPMENT 17100 - 18

J. Environmental Characteristics
:I .
-Ambient Temp: Operation:: 23 to: 1229C
2.
Relative Humidity: .Operation:.5 to 95%
3.:
Physical Shock Operation: 15 g; 1/2 sine wave, I l:ms:
�. 4.
Vibration Operation: point-to-point constantdisplacement 0.76 min,..5 to 14 Hz; 0.3 g, 14
. .. _ : ._ . ...
to 200 Hz.
5..:
Enclosure Rating.Faceplate: NEMA 4-(IP64)/Housing: NEMA 1 {IP201..
2.11. ' MISCELLANEOUS EQUIPMENT
-A..
Control Power Transfornieis:
i.
-The control panel shall be provided with a suigle voltage feed. Provide a control power
transformer s) as required for:each voltage in the control panel::,
2.
Primary voltage shall be the:primary voltage of the system. 'Secondary:'volfage shall be as
requned for:the equipment being:powered.
3:
Transformer VA. rating shall be as required for the system being provided,
_ ... . 4:: ...
Provide fused primary and secondary,; and bond unfiised leg of secondary to enclosure.
.5.
Transformer shall be UL listed, Square D or -equal
B. Uninterruptible.Power Supply (UPS)
1.
Floor mounted book case type 865. Watts / 1500 VA UPS,:with extended run :tine, USB- -
:;
interface, software, Cord-Manag6nient Straps,'USB cable, .User Manual
2.
Output Power Capacity: 865 Watts / 1500 VA
3;:
: Nominal Output.Voltage: 120V:
:. 4.
Output Connections ;
a. (2) NEMA 5-15R (Surge Protection)
=
b. : (6):NEMA 5-15R (Battery Backup) :
- ` 5.
: Nominal Input Voltage: 120V .
6.
Input Frequency: 47 - 63 I-Iz
7.
Input Connections: NEMA 5-15P on 6' cord
8.
Battery Type: Maintenance -free leakproof sealed Lead -Acid battery with suspended'
electrolyte
- 9.
Included Battery Modules: I
10.
Typical recharge tine: 8 hours
11.
Typical Backup Time: 12.4 minutes @ 432.5 Watts
-- 12.
USB Interface Ports .
13.
Control .panel: LED status display with On Line, On Battery, Replace Battery and
Overload indicators .
14.
Audible. Alain: Alarm when on battery, distinctive low battery alarm, configurable
delays
15.
Surge energy rating:; 420 Joules
16.
Filtering: Full time multi -pole noise filtering, 5% IEEE surge let -through, zero clamping
response time, meets UL 1449
17.
Dataline. protection: RJ-I I Modem/Fax/DSL protection (two wire single luie),RJ45 10
Base-T Ethernet protection
CONTROL EQUIPMENT 17100 -19

18. Dimensions: 14.60" H x 3.40"W x 13.1'0"D
�I
19. Net -Weight:25.00lbs:
20. Operating Environment: 32 - 104,°F
21. - Operating Relative -Humidity: 0 95% f
.I
. 22. Audible noise at 1 meter from surface of unit: 45 dBA
... ...
23. Online Thermal Dissipation: 180 BTO/hr
24. Regulatory Approvals: eUL Listed -FCC Part 15 Class B,FCC:: Part 68,UL 1449,UL
1778,UL Listed.
P policy ,
25. Lrfetu-he $150000 Equipment protection olic
26. Two year warranty. 4I
27. APC Back -'UPS. RS,.' 1500VA/865W, Input I20V/Oiitpiit 120V Interface" Port USB,
Extendedruntime. model BR1500 , or approved equal.
C. DC Power Supply .
I:: Din Rail mounted ower supply housed in rugged narrow metal case with large, ru ed, {
... p. PP Y gg _.. g gg
accessible, multiple connection screw terminations.
-:a. -Power supply, shall be enclosed and: completely'finger safe: Open power supplies
::shall not be acceptable.
11i
-2. Auto Select 115/230 VAC, 50/60'.Hz single :phase Input:
3. 'Powers high inrush loads without shutdown or foldback, meet SEMI F47 Sag Immunity'
4:: PowerFactor Correction (pen EN61000'3-2)
S. Adjustable Voltage
6. Industrial grade design.
7. -10 C to 60 C operation without derating.
i
8.: Indefinite:short circuit, overvoltage and:overtemperature protection.
9. High MTBF and reliability
10. .Highly efficient greater than 90% switching technology
= 11..: Power.supply shallbe UL listed (UL 508.) and have 5 year warranty.
12. SOLA Hevi-Duty, model::SDN, in:'size and voltage as. iequired for application.i or
approved equal.
D. Selector Switches, Pilot Lights, Illuminated Pushbuttons .
1. Selector switches, pushbuttons and indicator lights unless otherwise noted shall be round
style, 30mm, heavy-duty, oil -tight type equal to Square D, Class 9001, Type K, or Cutler -
Hammer Type T and shall have nameplate lettering as noted on the Drawings,
2. Miniature style units shall not be acceptable unless otherwise noted on the Drawings.
3. Operator mechanism including locking ring and legend plate shall be a corrosion resistant
material.
4. Switch contacts shall be arranged for the configuration and duty as indicated, and
operating handles shall be easily operated by hand without the use of tools.
5. Pushbuttons shall be momentary or maintained contact type as indicated.
6. Switches and pushbuttons located remotely from the controller shall be provided with
lockout features.
7. Indicator light lenses shall be glass type with color as noted.
8. Lamp replacement shall require removal of the front mounted lens cap only.
9. Where control unit exhibits corrosion or other physical failure during the contract time
frame, the Contractor shall replace the entire item at the expense of the Contractor.
CONTROL EQUIPMENT 17100 - 20

E. Process Meters/Analog.Signal Indicators
1.
Loop powered analog signal indicator
1 /8 diii low impedance (20 ohm) analog input panel -meter
3.
5-digit 0.56" red sunlight readable display :
i
�.
4.
Configured. to display, engineering. units matching the: calibratiori of monitored process
valise.
5.'.:
Red Lioh-Model PAXP or approved equal"
..
F.:: Signal
Isolators -. -
1::
Sigual:conditionerroith AC powered re46nsmitter
2: -
Single`or Dual channel DC input,, as required for,the 'applicatioii:
3.
Signal Isolation: 2000VAC isolation between Input, Output and Power.
4.
Action Instruments Q403 DC input iriulti-cliannel.isolator or approved equal
G. IriterposingRelays . >
_.
L ..;Miniature-'higin
relay, 10A resistive.ratiug, double throw.C-Form contact'output, UL
_. Listed: '... ... ...
.2.
Coil Voltage and contact count as required for.the application:
3.
SgD:Class:8501 - Type RMiniature Plug-in Relays with.DIN Rail mounting Socket, or
approved. equal
H., Power=On Relay '
1.
Miniature plugin relay, 10A. resistive rating, double. pole, double throw.GForm contact
output; UL Listed
..2.
Coil Voltage equal to_panel incoming power. .
a. Coil to be wired to panel incoming. power.
' -
b. Contact output to be wired to receiving device as indicated in other section of these
{
specifications or. as shown on the drawings.
_
3.
SqD Class 8501 - Type R Miniature Plug-in Relays with DIN Rail mounting Socket, or
approved equal -
I. Motor Controls
1.
Motor starters
-
a. All motor,starteis required for a system shall be in accordance with the applicable
requirements of Section 16420 -Enclosed Controllers..
2•
Variable Frequency Drives (VFD's)
a. - All VFD's required for a system shall be in accordance with the .applicable
requirements of Section 16296 - Variable Frequency Controllers.
I Alarm Horn
_
1.
24vdc powered, "Button" type buzzer
CONTROL EQUIPMENT 17100 - 21

2: Edwards model E100 Series or approved equal. I
K.: Alarm Horn
1: 24VDC powered; grill type vibrating horn, weatherproof, NEMA 4X;:low current high
decibel
2. .Edwards Model 877 Series AdaptaHorn or Approved Equal
'L. Wiring ..
1. All Wiring shall be in: accordance with the. applicable requirements of Division 16120:= '
.. Wires and Cables.
M:: Terminal Blocks..::'
L- Terminal blocks shall be one-piece molded plastic -blocks with screw.type terminals and
barriers rated for 300 volts: -I
2. -Terminals shall be double sided and supplied with removable covers to prevent accidental:
contact with live. circuits.
3: .. Terminals shall-bave permanent, legible -identification, clearly visible with the protective
cover removed.:
A. Terminal blocks shall be fused type where indicated on th' drawings:-
5-. Analog- signals shall be terminated on .modular -narrow form factor terminal blocks
intended for the:protection:of a. floating double conductor (4�20 mA analog) signal.
a. Two -stage stage protection; for. one operated floating double: conductor:
b. Discormect knife on both signal paths.
C. ::Separate ground connection.
d.. Screw teiminal'connections.-. i
e. Nominal: voltage: 24 V DC:
f. Phoenix Contact TERMITRAB TT-2-PE-M-24DC or,approved equal.
N. Power Disconnects
1. Panel disconnects
a.. Provide NEC compliant panel disconnects. Disconnect and shall be interlocked to
the control panel door handle.
2. Motor disconnects
a. Provide NEC compliant lockable motor disconnecting means for each controlled
motor.
O. Nameplates And Name Tags
1. Panel mounted tags shall be plastic; field mounted tags shall be stamped stainless steel. .
2. Nameplate shall be engraved, rigid, laminated plastic type with adhesive back. Unless
otherwise noted, color shall be black with white letters and letter height shall be 3/16
inch.
CONTROL EQUIPMENT
17100 - 22
Il
I

2.12
SPARE PARTS,
A.:
Terminal Blocks: Provide 20% spare blocks of each type used; installed::: .
B.
Fuses: Provide-1:0% spares for alk types used (no less than one each). '...
-( C.::
Panel Lights: Provide-10% spares for all: types used (no less than one cacti}:
D.
Patch Cables: Provide 10%:spares:f6r all types used (no :less:than one each).
E:
A (One) spare 2.Port Fiber/4 Port: Copper Ethernet switch/media converters
F.
PLC -Equipment:
_
- 1. 1(one) spare Power Supplies
j
2..: 1 (one) spare CPU
J-
3:. l (one) spare DI I/OModules
4. l_ (one) spareDO I/O Modules. ...
(one) spare AI Modules
1 (one).spare AO: Modules
T 1 (one) spare PLC 1/0.Module of each type supplied
8. 1. (one) spare -MO 1/0 Module of each type supplied ..
PART 3 -:EXECUTION
3.1
SCIiEDULING.OF WORK
..: A.
...The Plant will be.kept in full scale operation during.the performance of the work specified:in.-
this section. All' modifications to existing panels: all equipinent/device/panel replacement work
_
and. all rehabilitation work. shall be scheduled by the contractor and submitted to the Engineer
!
for approval.
B.
The Contractori in addition to the requirements of Section 01300 - SUBMITTALS, shall submit
An expended initial schedule to the Engineer for approval showing all the work specified. in this
section. The, contractor shall adjust the schedule as per the comments .of the Engineer and
resubmit the schedule for final approval -by the Engineer.
C.
Written consent from the Owner representative must be obtained not less than one week .prior to
cariyiug out any portion of the work included in this Contract which requires interruption of
service and control/instrumentation systems.
_.I D.
Unavoidable interruptions must be confined to the daytime. Contractor will- not receive extra
<r
compensation for overtime, should this become necessary to insure continued service.
E.
In connection with all of the foregoing; Contractor must have on the construction site, all
J
materials, equipment, construction facilities, adequate supervision and, a sufficient number of
-i
qualified workmen to insure carrying out. of the above work in the shortest possible time.
J
I
i
CONTROL
EQUIPMENT 17100 -- 23

3.2 CONTROL SYSTEM COMMUNICATION COORDINATION
A.. Modify:LAN cabling,.fiber opfic_cablirig and patch cords and network hubs/switches throughout . .
the plant via new and existing conduit systems, as shown on the contract drawings:
B. Establishcommunications between the-Hiunan Machine Interface (HMI) server and each
programmable logic controller -(PLC) as they become available, and verify monitoring of 1/0
data points....
C...: Establish - communications -between the plant'. PLC programming - workstation - and each .
programmable logic -controller PLC as they become available, and verify programmability,
upload and downloading functions. '
D..: Cutover PLC data points to the SCADA rnonitoring system...
E. Ethernet Patch Cables -
1. P.rovide and install copper and fiber optic patch cords: to connect from patch panels to
network switches, hubs, media converters, and other network devices.
2-.: - Coordinate and supply suitable connectors foa• each patch: cable as required for each
application. .
3.3. DISCONNECTION AND REMOVALS
1
A.: All power, control and instrumentation. wiring associated with equipment;' panels, devices, etc.
to be removed and replaced shall be identified, marked -and then disconnected to. facilitate their
replacement: and any related work::ps
.
_.
R. All materials no'longer used shall be removed: unless otherwise directed by the .Engineei...
Affected surfaces shall be repaired to confirm to the type, quality, and finish of the surrounding
surface in a neat: and workmanlike manner. J
i
3.4 CONTROL PANELS
A. Control panels shall be completely fabricated, instruments installed and wired in the
manufacturer's factory and tested prior to delivery to the site. The control panels shall be
factory assembled with all input and output devices.
1. All wiring and equipment shall be completed and tested prior to shipment.
2. All external connections shall be by way of numbered terminal blocks.
3. Install spare terminal blocks on backpauel.
i
B. Panel instrumentation arrangement shall be as shown, with minor modifications as required by
the particular equipment Rirnished. Modifications shall be subject to the approval of the
Engineer.
C. All back panels shall be secured with all the appropriate zinc plated mounting hardware.
D. All devices and wiring shall be properly labeled.
CONTROL EQUIPMENT 17100 - 24

i
I
Front panel devices -shall be'identified by laminated'nameplates..
2. Panel mounted- devices and wiring shall be identified by a permanent,marking system.
E.
All circuit breakers, terminal strips; -and related devices required to .provide -a complete, safe,
and neat installation shall be provided..
F::.
..Wiring.: .
1: Wires shall be 600=volt class; PVC insulated stranded copper and shall be of the sizes
..:
required for_ the current: to be carried, but -not -below. _14 -AWG enclosed in: either sheet. -
metal raceway or plastic wiring duct: "
-
2:: Wiring for signal: circuits shall be twisted shielded:pairs not. snnaller than'No. 18. AWG,
and be` se arated at least 6-inches. from: an ii p y power wnru?g. .:
3. All wires shall be identified as per the requirements:of Division: 16120.— Wires and:
Cables.... .
..:'"
4,; Provide Wiring channels as reguired. : ; ': •: ':
-
5. All.mtercounectmg Wires: between.panel mounted equipment and external equipment
shall be brought out to numbered:external wiring terminals. and terminated.
6: .:All wires.shall be numbered and: identified.-
G.
- . Terminal Blocks
I
1: -Wires shall be terminated at. the terminal` blocks with crimp type, pre -insulated, Ang-
'
tongue lugs.
2. Lugs shall be of the appropriate size for the terminal blacks screws and for the' number .
and size of the wires terminated.::
3;... Fused terminal Block shall be used for:power distribution.
H...:
Nameplates And Name Tags..:.
1. All components.. provided tinder this.: Section, both field and panel mounted, shall be _
Hounded with ; permanently mounted name to s bearing-: ihe:'entire: to number" and
- P' p Y g g': g
f
description of the component.
3.5
INSTALLATION
_ A.
All items shall be'nnstalled'iri accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.
B.
The Contractor shall furnish and install all material and hardware.required to supply a complete
and functional installation.
C.
f
All conduit shall be installed and routed above the drop ceiling, where applicable.
_
D.
Notify Plant personnel prior to disconnect any existing signals.
_t E.
Deliver all salvaged equipment to [Authority] [Owner].
F. "
Prior to connecting any signals, each existing signal shall be tested to verify that the signal is
within the expected range and suitable for connection to the new PLC.
CONTROL EQUIPMENT 17100 - 25

G. Completely configure and program each PLC as required. to meet these Specif cations (see
Section 17050). Additional installation information is covered in Special Conditions and . .
Sequence of Construction (see Section 1600:1).
4h
3.6 CONFIGURATION AND PRO-GRAMMING
A. Configure each.new programmable logic controller (PLC) for all inputs 'and outputs. _
..: B... Configure and program the new programmable logic controllers to allow monitoring and control .
-'from the control system.
C. Configure the -new PLC 10 communicate with- the control system -I/0 servers: via Ethernet
connections.
D. Coordinate and document PLC LAN Node .numbering -and JP addresses with Plant personnel j
before installation.
E: Qualified representatives of the PLC -manufacturer or a qualified systems Integratorshall
:. _ perform all configuration and programming.
:. P Y � g program 9 p .(
F. Com letel conf of and ro ram each PLC as:re uired to meet these Specifications see
Section 17950).,
3.7 :.: TESTING.
A. Test the hardware and software using simulated inputs and outputs. prior to installation.
1. The Contractor. shall : retain the :services of a system. integrator :to provide; detailed test
plans and procedures to demonstrate and document that .a]I equipment has. been properly
installed and configured :for a frill, functional .system ..which meets all contract
requirements. .
2. See Section.17950 for additional details.
B. Test the complete installed system by demonstrating that all signals are properly received and
sent and that the control system operates as intended.
C. See Section 00110 for additional test requirements.
i
3.8 CLEANING AND TOUCH-UP PAINTING
A. The premises shall be kept free from accumulation of waste material and rubbish. Upon
completion of work, the Contractor shall remove materials, scraps, and debris from the site.
Scratches, scrapes, or ships in interior or exterior surfaces of devices shall be touched up with
finishes matching as nearly as possible the type and color of the original finish.
B. All material, equipment, and workmanship shall be subject to inspection by the Engineer or his
representatives. In, the event the Engineer finds the materials or workmanship not in accordance
with these Contract Documents, the work or materials shall be removed and replaced, or
corrected, by and at the expense of the Contractor.
CONTROL EQUIPMENT
17100 - 26

CONTROL EQUIPMENT 17100 - 27

SECTION 17200 — PROCESS INSTRUMENTATION J
PART 1 - GENERA;.: ...
1.1 SCOPE
A.' -Description: of Work_ .
1; Provide all labor; material and necessary equipment to install instrumentation and control
systems, and be responsible for the satisfactory operation of the entire system as specified
herein and as shown on the drawings.
2. ,Work includes-supplyingerecting; testing and placing.in operationthe system specified::
. -:
3. Work.includes the supply and installation of all process measuring elements, transmitters
interconnecting wiring and process taps as specified herein and indicated: on the
drawings.. .
4. : Work, includes the provision and connection of all wiring to and from every electrical
device furnished under this Section including 120 volt power. ; wiring and all
instrumentation:and control wiring.
. 1
. ...
All wiring shall be in accordance =witli� Section 16050,- BASIC ELECTRICAL
a. ,I
MATERIALS AND;METRODS with exceptions as required herein.
b.. Instrumentation and Control Wiring _noted within this. Specification_ Section_
includes:
1) . Circuits used to carry analog signals ..
t
2) Circuits used"to start and stop equipment
3) Circuits used to key a control ftinetion or serve as ari.interlock
4)- Circuits used to indicate equipment operating status'
'5) Circuits used to actuate alarms.
C. Work includes the provision and installation of and all piping, manual shut-off
valves, and :mounting hardware (e.g. nuts, bolts, washers, pipe stands, or cinch
anchors) associated with connecting or mounting the instrumentation, as described
herein.
B. Related Work Specified Elsewhere
1. The provisions of this Section are a direct extension of Section 16050, BASIC
ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS, and although set forth only'once within I.
the Specification, shall apply equally to this Section.
1.2 PERFORMANCE
A. Contractor
I
1. The Contractor shall be responsible for the complete supply and installation of process
instrumentation and control systems furnished by single company regularly engaged in
the manufacture of process instrumentation systems.
PROCESS INSTRUMENTATION 17200 - 1
'I
t-

4
2.1 Functional system data .is described herein and .is augmented by acconh anying :product
specifications. - All elements shall -be' provided as shown and/or required. Additional. .
elements such as powersupplies, current repeaters, and other such elements as may be ..;
required -to complete the system shall be provided even though. not shown.I
3: All material shall be -new, free from defects, and of the quality specified or.. shown. Each
type. of material shall: be of the same manufacturer throughout the. -work. 'All material
shall be the product, of -established,-reputable manufacturers normally engaged in the
production of the paiticulanitem being furnished..:
B. • : Instrumentation Supplier
1:: All -instrumentation equipment, panels, sensors; transmitters and other ..system
components shall 'be., supplied by :one 'instruiiieiitation manufacturer who shall be
res onsible:foi- total system design' integration and fiiiie'tioning, of the system and all:
components, including those .items . manufactured by others but: furnished by the '
instrumentation supplier.
2. The. °instrumentation supplier must have the proven skill, experience; `ability, facilities,
:and.- qualified ,.per - nnel.•necessary: to successfidl timal and.: properly coin lete the
Y� Y P P Y. p _.
involved.work. During the bid. evaluation period; any proposed °instrumentation supplier
will -be evaluated:to consider their ability to satisfy the foregoing.requirernents.
3. The instrumentation supplier must -assign sufficient qualified personnel to the project to
assure the timely and: proper c6hipletion :of the work.' Full, continuous,: arid. detailed ..
supervision of the work will be required: -
C.' Equipment Requirements
The product Specifications_include description of instrumentation items used in systeins.
In certain instances,'this description is followed": by at least one (1) brand. name :(and/or
model number) and an," or equal",provision.--Each product submitted under the "or equal"..
_ provision will be reviewed as to.whether it.is acceptable as au equal. . -as
2. In conducting .such a review, the County shall -,consider the comparability. of the
I specifically namd products with the "or equal"products: - including: specifically thee
relative performances:: Such review shall be based both on.the product individually and
its interrelationship with all other aspects of the instrumentation system.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Operating instructions,. manuals _ and shop drawings shall be submitted in accordance with
Section 01300, SUBMITTALS. .
B. Instrument supplier shall review the- Contract drawings to verify .suitability of the supplied
instrument for the intended application prior to submittal process.
1. Provide verification of this review process by instrument and application.
_ C. Shop drawings shall include the following:
1. Catalog Cutsheets.
2. Field wiring diagrams.
PROCESS INSTRUMENTATION 17200 - 2.

3: Construction drawings arid' engineering data:: defining ':materials' of construction,
dimensions, weights and sizes.
D. Operation and Maintenance Manual:
1. Submit complete boundmanuals for all hardware and software components assembled
into 3 ring binders.
2. Include:
a. Shop.Drawing information
b. Calibration information
C. Configuration of each device as coilfi ured at'time of. Maintenance Training..
d. Disk. copies of all custom programs incorporated7.
.
I
1.4 EQUIPMENT MANUFACTURER'S SERVICE REPRESENTATIVE
A. Installation Assistance r
I
1.. Provide the services of a qualified factory engineer to supervise the installation; to test .
and make any adjustinents required, and to place the completed system in operation.
B. System Operation Training
.1 The Contractor: shalthave the instrumentation supplier provide a factory trained engineer
to instruct. the.County.'s operating personnel in. the use,: operation,: care, and: maintenance
of the process control instrumentation.
- . 2. The training shall be conducted on -site and be presented in a manner.to impart thorough
understanding of the systems and equipment provided.
3. The -training shall be ghiven to the plant personnel designated by _the County:who will:be --.
responsible for the plant operation during each work shift. The personnel shall sign a
certificate presented:by the:Contractor. that they have.been trained on the plant equipment
and they thoroughly understand the operation, care and maintenance of the equipment.
4. When the.County is ready to have his personnel trained-, the Contractor will be so notified
by the County. The Contractor will then ensure that the manufacturer's representatives
are available on -site to conduct the required training.
j
a. Provide for two (2) eight (8) hour working days total to instruct Plant Operators for 1
the equipment supplied. The County will require the Contractor to integrate such
training with the overall plant training program developed by the County.
b. An additional two (2) trips not less than one (1) day per trip shall be provided for j
operation assistance of the equipment supplied.
1.5 PRODUCT IDENTIFICATION
A. All.the equipment shall have a stainless steel name plate permanently affixed in a conspicuous
place on which is plainly marked the manufacturer's name, address, model number, and loop
number as stated in. the Specifications and shown on the Drawings. The nameplate of a -
distributing agent only is not acceptable.
PROCESS INSTRUMENTATION 17200 - 3 1
r

1.6 TESTING
A:: Factor Tests
L- Testing of Individual: Components
a: Each::item of equipment shall: be frilly factory inspected and tested for fiuiction,
..operation and continuity of circuits.
1 b. Eacli instrument shall .be factory calibrated: 'Calibratioii sheets verifying instrument
-.E... accuracy shall be supplied.
2. Full System Tests
a. An operation check of the entire systerii shall.be peiformed..by the instrumentation: .
supplier at his,f6ctory. Power and manually adjustable rrieagd ement:and control
circuits shall be connected to -the central: control for simulating' the functions
.. . ...
specified:within the Specification section.:
" b. The County shall- be notified at least ten 10 : da s in advance of any factor
systoms tests and reserves the right to'have.its representatives in attendance..
B.- ..Field Tests'
`An operation check; of the entire system shall be_ performed ° by the-instrurrientation
supplier after installation to:verify operation. . .
2. Power and -manually adjustable measurement and control circuits shall be connected to.. `
the control system to verify the functions specified within.the Specification section.
1.7 .-,WARRANTY
A. Warranty shall .be in accordance with the General Conditions.
_.,
B. The equipment shall be unconditionally. guaranteed ' to meet or exceed the design' criteria
detailed in Part 2 of this Specification.
C. Venturi manufacturer shall provide a 25-year warranty against defects in. workmanship and
materials.
F
PART2-:PRODUCTS
2.1 LEVEL INSTRUMENTS
A. Ultrasonic Level Transmitters
1. Ultrasonic level transmitter shall be a microprocessor -based electronic unit consisting of
a sensor assembly, and/or transmitter, and an interconnecting cable for remote
monitoring.
2. The sensor shall be encapsulated in a chemical and corrosion -resistant material such. as
Kynar or CPVC, and shall be suitable for operation over a temperature range of -20° to
+1500 F and a relative humidity of 10 to 100 percent.
PROCESS INSTRUMENTATION 17200 - 4

. i
3. The sensor shall be compatible with the. process media being measured. .
4. The ultrasonic level transmitter shall have automatic compensation for changes in air
temperature at the sensor location.:
a. If separate temperature sensing probes are provided, they shall be: mounted with. or
adjacent to the ultrasonic sensor, as recommended by the manufacturer. -
5..: The transmitter shall have a.four-digit LCD display scaled to read in engineering units.
a. The transmitter.shall be designed to ignore motnentaiy level spikes, false targets;
mo
mentary omentary loss -of -echo.
b. The transmitter output shall be an1§olated.4-20 mA do.. signal linearly proportional::to the measured,level'range.
c: Output shall be characterized to be proportional. to the tank "Volume .instead of .to
the tank level.
d. _ Calibration athrough rameters shall be entered a ke ad on the unit and shall be
P....YP ...
stored in nonvolatile EEPROKmemo
1 e. Accuracy of the_transmitted signal shall be 0.25%percent of the level -range.
6:: Provide a remotely mounted digital :level indicator shall:: be provided. for the level
transmitters where indicated'on the Drawings or in the Schedules.
7. The ultrasonic level transmitter shall. be Mobley-Roseniount MSP 400/900 series, K.rohne
Optisound, Siemens SITRANS LU, or approved equal.
B.' Containment Area High Level Switch
L General
a Strobe e: Xenon tube
b. LED indication::Sensor, relay & power status
c. Enclosure,mount.: 100 3/4" NPT.
d. Certificate number: Lk 79326-3
e. CE compliance: EN 61326 EMC, EN 6 10 10-1 Safety
2. Electrical I
a. Supply voltage: 120 / 240 VAC, 50 - 60 Hz
b. Consumption: 5 Watts max. C. Sensor inputs: two -wire level switch
d. Sensor supply: 13.5 VDC @ 27 mA
e. Contact type: LC10: (1) SPDT
f, Contact rating: 250 VAC, 10A,1/4 hp. I-
g. Contact delay: 0 to 60 seconds
3. Environmental
a. Electronics temp.: F: -40'to 158'
b. Enclosure rating: NEMA 4X (IP65) I-
c. Enclosure material:PP (U.L. 94 VO) and Polycarbonate
4. Containment Level Switch shall be a Flow Line model LC 10 or approved equal.
PROCESS INSTRUMENTATION 17200 - 5

G. Su binersible:Level Transducer and Transmitters (For Raw -Water Clear Well Level)
1.
Submersible level transducer
-
a. :Material: 316 Stainless Steel
{'
6.. Electrical: Input: 15 - 45 VDC Output:. 4.= 20 mADC/digital .
c'. Electrical Connection: Attached four wire:20GA:shielded cable.
d. Ranges: 0-16 feet
e. Temperature Limits:- 40— 248 degrees F
..: ..:
f Accuracy: +/- 0.1
.g. Diameter: 1.25 inch
..
h. Weight: 8 oz:
i. Submersible Level Transducer shall be Sigma Controls, Inc. model 6000MP series
j.: Submersible Level Transducer shall be supplied with a loop powerdisplay by
Precision Digital Corporation model P17660.
2.2 'PRESSURE INSTRUMENTS
. .
A. Pressure switeh.*.
1.
:General
2. -
. 'Maximum'Operating`Pressure .
3: _ ..
250 psi Operating TemperAfttre.:
4.
Range
a. Indoor or outdoor use: -40F to 160E
b. MaximumAdjustment Pressure :Range
c. 10 to 100 psi
J 5'..
Cover Tamper Switch
6:
- UL Models: Optional PM 546-8000
7.
ULC Models: Factory. Installed .
8.
-Differential Approximately 3 psi,@ 10 psi, 6,psi @ 100:psi-
9.
Enclosure Rated UL 4x, NEMA 4 for indoor or outdoor use
10.
Switch Contact. Ratings
a. EPS 10-2: Two sets SPDT- (Form C) .
b. 10.0 A, 2 HP @ 125/250 VAC
C. 2.5 A @ 6/12/24 VDC
11.
Service'Use
j
a. Automatic Sprinkler: NFPA 13
b. One or Two Family Dwelling: NFPA 13D
C. Residential Occupancies up to 4 Stories: NFPA 13R
-
d. National Fire Alarm Code: NFPA 72
12.
Pressure Connection
a. 1/2" NPT male
PROCESS INSTRUMENTATION 17200 - 6

1
13. Warranty.
-a. 3 years . .. ;
14. Dimensions
1
15. 5.1t H, 3.325` W; 4.250` L
16. The Pressure Switch shall be System Sensor model EPS40 or approved equal.:
B. Gauge Pressure Indicating Transmitters '
1
Gauge pressure transmitters shall be of the capacitance: type with.a process: isolated
diaphragm with..silicone oil_ fill, microprocessor .based "smart" electronics, and .a:feld {
adjustablerangeablility of-100:1 input range.
a Span and zero shall be continuously adjustable externally over -the entire range. ;
b. Span and zero adjustineiits shall be- capable of being disabled internally.
c. Transmitteis shall beNEMA 4X weatherproof and corrosion resistant.constiuction
_ with 1'ow,copper.aluminum:body and-316 stainless -steel process wetted parts.
d. Accuracy, including nonliiiearity, hysteresis and' repeatability errors- shall be plus
.. or minus 0;065 percept -of calibrated. span, zero based: .
e. The maximum zero elevation and maximum zero suppression. shall beadjustable to
anywhere within sensor limits.
: f. Output shall. be linear isolated 4-20 .milliamperes 24 VDC.'
p lb 24V
g. ower supply shal e. DC, two -wire design.
h. Each transmitter shall be furnished with a 4-digit LCD .indicator capable of .
displaying engineering units and/or milliarnps and mou►atirig liardware:as.requireii
i. Overload. capacity shall be rated at.a minimum of 25 MPa.
Environmental limits shall be -40 to 85 degrees :Celsius at: 0-100% relative
J• -
humidity.
lc. Each transmitter shall have a stainless steel tag with calibration data attached to
body.
2. The capacitance pressure sensor: shall be :mechanically, electrically, and. thermally:
'isolated from the process and the environment, shall include - an integral 'teinperatare ll
compensation sensor, and shall provide a digital signal to the transtnitter's' electronics for J_
further processing.
a. Factory set correction coefficients shall be stored in the sensor's non-volatile
memory for correction and linearization of the sensor output in the electronics
section.
b. The electronics section shall correct the digital signal fromthe sensor and convert
it into a 4-20 rnA analog signal for transmission to receiving devices.
C. The electronics section shall contain configuration parameters and diagnostic data
in non-volatile EEPROM memory and shall be capable of communicating, via a
digital signal superimposed on the 4-20 mA output signal, with a remote interface
device.
d. Output signal damping shall be provided, with an adjustable time constant,of 0-36
seconds. f
e. Total Long Tenn Stability (Frequency of Calibration) shall'be no less than 0.125%
of URL for 5 years.
PROCESS INSTRUMENTATION 17200 - 7
l
f

3;
Where scheduled,. gauge pressure indicating transmitters shall be calibrated in: feet of
liquid for liquid level service.
4.
Gauge pressure indicating transmitters shall be..lZosemount Model 3051T; ABB 2600T
Series, Siemens SITRANS P, or approved equal.
2.3 FLOW _INSTRUMENTS
A.. Magnetic Flow Meter_
1.
Magnetic flow metersystems A' a magnetic flow tube: and a microprocessor-
based. "smart" transmitter that is.capable-of converting and transmitting.a signal from the
... ...
flow:tube: :. .
: a. � Magnetic .flow meters : : sliall utilize the ,characterized ''field . principle , of "
...
electromagnetic induction, and shall .produc6 DC signals directly. -proportional to
.: ... ...
the li uid flow rate.
2.
Eacli .meter shall be furnished with a stainless steel : or carbon steel metering tube and
... .
.. carbon steel flanges with a polyurethane; ceramic neoprene, or Teflon liner as required
by the application and/or as specified fierein.
a. Liner shall have a minimum thickness of.0.125 inches.
_. .
b. :::The inside:diameter:of the liner,shall be within. 0.125:n lilies of the'inside diameter
_
of the adjoining pipe. Liner protectors shall be provided on all.flow tubes.
3. _
• The flow -tube shall be provided:with flush mounted electrodes. .
_
..
a.. Ultrasonic electrode'cleaning, shall not be acceptable.
4.
'Grounding rings shall be provided for all meters.
All materials of Construction for metallic- wetted: parts (electrodes, grounding rings, -etc.)
shall be minimum 316 stainless steel, but shall be compatible with the process fluid for.
each meter in accordance with the recommendations of tlie-manufacturer.
6.
Flow"tube shall be rated for pressures up to 1.1 times the flange rating of adjacent piping.
a. System shall be, rated for ambient temperatures of -30 to +65C.
b. Non-metallic transmitter housings shall not be acceptable..
f 7.
Meters located in flood hazard areas:.
a. Flory tube meter housings shall be rated for continuous submergence to 30 ft
b. Transmitter shall be separately mounted and rated for -outdoor usage.
I
c: Provide sun shade housing for transmitter..
8.
Meters located in other than flood hazard areas:
a. Meter and transmitter housings shall meet NEMA 4X requirements as a minimum.
b. Transmitter shall be mounted integrally onto'flowtube.
9.
The transmitter shall provide pulsed DC coil drive. current to the flow tube and shall
convert the returning signal to a linear, isolated 4-20 mA DC signal.
PROCESS INSTRUMENTATION 17200 - 8

1
a. The transmitter shall .utilize "smart" elbd onics Arid .shall contain automatic,
continuous zero correction, signal processing routuies for noise rejection; and an. .
integral LCD readout capable of displaying flow rate and totalized flow.
b. The transmitter' shalt continuously run self diagnostic routines and report errors via
English language messages.
10. Transmitter shall have:a dual compartment. Housing with the terminal block isolated front
the electronics compartment,
] 1. The ti•ansinitter's preamplifier input impedance shall be a.nuinitnum .of 109-1011 ohms
which shall. snake the. system suited for the amplification of low-level input -signals arid:'
:capable of operation with'a material build up on the electrodes.
12. Tile transmitter shall provide an automatic low flour cutoff below a user -configurable low
flow: condition {0-10%).
a. The -transmitter's outputs -shall. also -b capable of being forced to zero by, an
external contact operation.
13. Each flow tube. shall be factory calibrated and assigned a:calibration constant or factor to
_.
be entered into tlie:asso'ciated transmitter as part of the meter configuration parameters:
a. . ' Manual.calibration of the flow meter shall not be required.
-. .. b.... Meter configuration parameters shall be stored in non-volatile memory in the
transmitter...
C. -:An output; hold feature. shall be provided: to _ maintain -.a constant.:output::du ing
configuration changes.
14.. - The transmitter shall be capable of communicating digitally with a remote configuration
device via a frequency -shift -keyed, high frequency signal superimposed on the 4720 mA
output signal..
a. The remote configuration device shall be capable of being placed anywhere in the
4-20 mA-output loop:
b.. A password -based security lockout feature shall be provided. to prevent
unauthorized rriodification of configuration parameters.
15. The transmitter shall have built in diagnostics including .high process noise detection,
electronics temperature monitoring, wiring and grounding verification, coil fault
detection and empty pipe detection.
a. The transmitter shall also have the ability to enable internal calibration verification
in the field. Calibration verification must not require external equipment.
16.* Accuracy shall be 0.50% of rate over the flow velocity range of 0.3 to 10.0 m/s.
Repeatability shall be 0.1% of rate; minimum turndown shall be 100:1. Minimum
required liquid conductivity shall.not be greater than 5 uS/cm.
a. Maximum response .time shall be adjustable between 1 and 100 seconds as a
minimum. l
b. Transmitter ambient temperature operating limits shall be -10 to +50 C. Power
supply shall be 115 VAC, 60 Hz, j
PROCESS INSTRUMENTATION 17200 - 9

17.
Flow tubes shall be 1.50-lb flange mounted unless:otherwise noted.
a; The cables for interconnecting. the meter and transmitter shalt be furnished by tfie . .
manufacturer:
b. :Transmitter shall -be mounted integrally onflow tube; wall, or 2-inckpipe mounted
as shown in the'Drawings and/or as specified.
18..
Magnetic flow meter, shall be Rosemount-8750WA;. Krohn Optiflux, ABB COPA-X,' or
:approved equal .:: ..:. -
BFlow
Indicating Transmitte> (FIT)
1 . ...
General
A:. Enc.losui•e: NEMA 4X
b. Display: 8 digitLCD display
c. Power Requirements.' 120Vac @ 60Hz with- power consumption of 15 Watts.
d. Outputs: 4-20 ma DC signal ro ortional to flow:
. proportional
P
2:
The Flow hidicating Transmitter shall be Sensus Metering Systems Modell 10AR-I£.
2.4 'WATER QUALITY ANALYSIS INSTRUMENTATION
A. Analyzing Instrument-Transmitter'(AIT) for°Dissolved Oxygen (DO) meters
1:
' General: AIT sliail.be cable -of monitoring.I)O and temperature sltnult' eously. '
2:: .
-: Ambient Conditions: Operation with less.than 7. W sensor load:. -20 to:601. C (4to 1401
-i
F); 0 to 95%-relative humidity, non -condensing' With less. than 25 W sensor load: -20 to...:
400 C (-4 to;104° F); :0 to 95% relative humidity, non -condensing: Storage -20 to:70° C (- ..
4 to 158° F); 0 to 95% relative -lumidity; non -condensing
3:
Power: Requirements: 100 to 230 Vac, 50/60 Hz; :Power: 1 l W with TW _sensor load; 35W
with 25W sensor load
ax 4.
Display: Graphic LCD; 128 x 64 pixels with LED backlighting
5.
Relays: Three SPDT, user-configurable_contacts.rated 100 to 230 Vac, 5 Amp resistive
_ 6.
maximum
Outputs: Two analog 420 mA, maximum impedance 500 Ohins, optional digital network
connection
7.-
Communication::RS-232 (MODBUSP): Configure and retrieve measured -data. fofone
analyzer using ' IBM-compatible PCRS-485 (MODBUS®): Advanced
J
communications/networkingwith PLC or SCADA system directly from analyzer
.� 8.
Mounting Configurations: Surface, panel, and pipe (horizontal and vertical)
9.
Enclosure: NEMA 4X/IP66; metal enclosure with corrosion -resistant finish
` 10.
Certifications: ETL to UL 6101 OA-1 and CSA C22.2 No.1010.1
11.
The Analyzing Instrument Transmitter (AIT) shall be Rosemount or approved equal.
IB. Analyzing
Instrument Transmitter (AIT) for oxygen reduction potential (ORP) and pH meters
-- I.
General: AIT shall be cable of monitoring ORP.and pH:simultaneously.
2.
Ambient Conditions: Operation with less than 7 W sensor load: -20 to 60° C (4 to 140°
F); 0 to 95% relative humidity, non -condensing With less than 25 W sensor load: -20 to
PROCESS INSTRUMENTATION 17200 - 10

400 C(4 to 104 F);:0 to 95% relative humidity; rron-condensing Storage.-20 to 70°.0 (-
4 to 158' F); 0 to 95% relative humidity, non -condensing. .
3. Power Requirements: - .100 to 230: Vac, 50/60 Hz; Power: 11 W with 7 W sensor load; 3 5 W
with 25W sensor. load
4: -Display: GraphicLCD, 128 x 64 pixels with LED: backlighting
5. Relays: Three SPDT, user -configurable contacts rated 100 to 23.0 Vac, 5 Ainp resistive
maximum ..
6. = Outputs: Two analog 4-20 mA; maximum impedance 500 Ohms, optional digital network
conneotiofi
7. Control: PID, High/low- phasing,_ setpoint,-deadband, .overfeed timer,off delay," and on:
de ...
lay .. .: - : ..
8.: Alarms: Low alarm'point, low alarm point deadband high alarm point,, h alarm Dint
deadband off delay, and on delay. g p g P
Coirnnunication: RS-232 (MODBUS®): Configure and retrieve -:measured data forone
7anal zer . usin IBM-com atible . "PCRS-485S MODBUS� Advanced
Y g..' P ( .. ) :..
communicationsLnetworkingwith PLC: or SCADA system directly from analyzer
10. Memory Backup:. All. user settings. are retained indefinitely in memory "(non-volatile), .
(EEPROM) : .
I I-. Mounting Configurations: Surface, panel,. and pipe (horizontal and vertical) '
_
12. Enclosure: NEMA 4X/IP66 :m' etal enclosure with: corrosion --resistant finish.
. -13. Dimensions: 1/2 DIN; 144 x 144 x 1,50 rnm (5.7 x 5.7 x 5.9 in)Weightl.6 kg (3..5 lbs.)
14. Certifications: ETL to.UL 61010A-1 and CSA C22.2 No.1010.1
15.: The Analyzing Instrument Transmitter (AIT) shall be HACH-.model sc100 or approved
equal. :
.2.5 SPARE PARTS
A.... Furnish one portable primary head simulator for calibration and testing: of magnetic flowmeter..
signal converters:
l : - The :calibrator shall be furnished complete with recliargeable" battery pack, test leads,
spare battery pack, charger, carrying case and accessories.
2. Calibrator shall be furnished by the flowmeter manufacturer, and -shall be fully matched
to the instrumentation furnished.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 ERECTION
A. General
1. Equipment shall be located so that it will be readily accessible for operation and
maintenance.
2. The Contractor shall examine the Contract Drawings and shop drawings for the various
equipment in order to determine the best arrangement forthe work as a whole, and shall I
use personnel skilled in the applicable trade for- the erection of the various materials and
interconnections.
f ,I
PROCESS INSTRUMENTATION 17200 -11
I

B. Equipment Mounting and Support:
1. Field instruunents shall be mounted in the areas specified' otherwise noted:::
2..: Instruments attadhed directly ao' concrete. shall be.spaced out from the, mounting surface
not less than 1/2 inch by use:of phenolic spacers of framing channel.
- 3. Expansion.. shields or. - cast -in -place inserts. shall be. used for securing equipment or .
supports to concrete surfaces.
4.. Unless other•wise.noited, field:instruments shall be. mounted, between 48. and 60 in;. above
.: ...
the floor or work platform.
C. ' Transmitters.
I. 1: Flow* and: pressure transmitters shall: be comiected to the,' process piping with ,nipples,
fittings and/or tubing of material compatible with the process fluid.
2. Where transmitters are'supported' from.process piping; Ieveling saddles shall be provided.
3;: ... Transmitters shall be oriented such that:output indicators are readily visible.
4. Electrical copnections to° transmitters and elements mounted . on :process piping or
egiiipmentahall be made through _liquid tight flexible conduit.
S: . - 'The fitting materials shall be comipatible with the process fluid.
D. . Magnetic.Flowmeters
L Ground magnetic flow meter flow tubes and grounding rings in strict accordance with the
manufacturer's recommendations.
3.2 ELECTRICAL WORK
A: Signal:wiriing shall be carried in-raceways.or conduit.provided in accordance with other sections ,
of this .Division of.the Specifications.
r L Shielded twisted: pairs carrying 4-20 nnAdc and: other low: level signals shall be:run in
conduits or raceways separate from all other control- and power wiring.
a. All analog.circuits shall be run as twisted pairs or triads.
b. In no case shall a circuit be made up using conductors from -different-pairs or
triads.
C. Triads shall be used wherever three (3) wire circuits are required.
d. Triads shall not be formed by using two (2) pairs.
2. Terminal blocks shall .be provided at all instrument cable junctions, and all circuits shall
—� be identified at such junctions.
3. Signal circuits shall, in general, be run without splices between instruments, terminal
boxes or panels.
B. Shields shall; in general, be bonded to the ground bus at the control panel and isolated at all
other locations.
1. Terminal blocks shall be provided for interconnecting shield drain wires at all junction
boxes.
. PROCESS INSTRUMENTATION 17200 - 12

.. r
l
C. Alternating current power supply connections for panel inounted:egtupment shall be by cord
and plug (where practicable):
Field inounted units shall be wired in solid and provided with,a, power disconnect switch
either internally, or adjacent to the unit.
2. Where multiple field mounted units are fed from a- single circuit breaker, each field
mounted trait shall be protec#ed by individual draw -out fuses.
3.3 FIELD. TESTING AND ACCEPTANCE.
A. Analog Instrument Calibration
1, All analog instruments -shall be installed such that taps and parts,.etc: are available for iri
:place .calibration and test with removal: - For those instruments where such in situ
calibrations are -.not. feasible ' (e.g. pH - immersion electrodes', etc.), other calibration {
methods shall be provided subject to review by the County. -
-.2. F:ield ealibratioii shall -be achieved using a minimum of five (5) points (0, 25,. 50, 75, and
100 percent) for, calibration. Additional points may, be required by the County for non-
hnear:insti uments. ..
3. Receiving eleirients such: as controllers, final operators; etc. shall be observed and
readings documented :during transmitter exercising to :demonstrate correct operation 'of ,
entire control loop.
4. Other -elements such:as controllers, final operators, etc. shall lie exercised. to demonstrate 1
correct operation.
B. Operational Tests
I-
1. Inspection: Verify that units and controls are. properly labeled and interconnecting wires.
and -terminals are identified.
2. Electrical Tests: Minimum required tests are as follows:
a. Verify the absence of unwanted voltages between circuit conductors and ground..
b. Test all conductors for short circuits using an insulation -testing device:
C. With each circuit pair, short circuit at the far end of circuit and measure circuit
resistance with an ohmmeter. Record circuit resistance of each circuit.
3. Pretesting:
a. After installation, align, adjust, and balance system and perform complete
pretesting to determine compliance of system with requirements in the Contract
Documents.
b. Correct deficiencies observed in pretesting.-
C. Replace malfunctioning or damaged items with new ones and retest until
satisfactory performance and conditions are achieved.
d. Prepare forms for systematic recording of acceptance test results.
e. After pretesting is complete, provide a letter certifying that installation is complete
and fully operable; include names and titles of witnesses to preliminary tests.
4. Operational Tests:
PROCESS INSTRUMENTATION 17200 -13

1
a. Schedule tests:after pretesting hats been successfiilly completed.
b. Test all.modes of system operation at each device. .
c. All . conditions of -operation shall be.:simulated..to demonstrate that each system - -
operates properly.
d. Test each initiating and indicating device for operation: and proper` response at local
..... ... control, stations, PLC panel.and supervisory control station..
5. Report of Tests and Inspections:
a..- Prepare a written record of tests, inspections, and. detailed test results in. the form. of.
a testlog. .
6. Tag all egiiiptnent, stations,' and other: components for which tests have been satisfactorily
:completed: ....
C. Acceptance ::
..-
... ...
1, The _ system -Will not: be accepted until -all' equipment, satisfies 'the acceptance test
requirements. The complete system shall,operate continuously.diiring an acceptant. test
periods of. not less..than thirty . (30) days. with :no ; down -time. of the --complete:: system
resulting from. failure of .hardware.. Downtime ° of the system or portions of the ' system,
resulting from the following causes -will not:beconsidered.system failures:
a. :Downtime: resulting: from an :outage of: the -.main -power supply.:provided..that
automatic shutdown and restart of the. system satisfies the requirements of these...
Specifications.. , ... ... ...
b. Downtime of a portion. of the system resulting from failure of a communications
:channel provided that the system operated as specified: under this. condition.::
... c.: Downtime caused by operator error.
-3.4 EXPENDABLES
ear's supply of px endables shall be, provided .as noted within this: Specification .
A. One (l) year's ' Pp Y P
Section. Expendables. (charts, ink, test chemicals, etc.) :used during calibration and checkout
prior to plant'acceptance shall be replenished at the Contractor's expense to insure a full year
_ supply at the time:of plant acceptance.
3.5 MAINTENANCE
- A. Corrective maintenance sliall be performed only by a factory trained service technician
specifically trained for servicing the types of equ ipment furnished under this Contract.
END OF SECTION 17200
I
PROCESS INSTRUMENTATION
17200 - 14

SECTION 17950 --.SYSTEM INTEGRATION
'PART 1 - GENERAL::
am
1..1 SCOPE OF, WORK
A... Review. and approve all submitted control equipment and designs of other sections of this ,
specification prior to submission to the Engineer. -
d. B. Supefvise, ;inspect and test the installation of the control equipment and materials supplied
. under other sections of this
specification-
C. Provide all programming necessary: implement the new control functionality. as shown. On the
Contract Drawings and/or herein specified. -
1. Programming shall include All -Programmable Logio Controller (PLC) and- Operator
Interface Terminal-(OIT) programming services necessaryto provide.a:fully fiinctional
controls stem.
D. Perform the Final-Acceptairce Testing of all control equipment and, materials supplied under this
Contract.
E. Provide and coordinate the training of Owner personnel in -_the. operation, configuration, and
maintenance ofthe new control system.
:
F. All items and created works performed tinder this, contract shall become. the property of the
Owner. and shall be turned over to the. plant personnel at the completion:of Testing.
G. Provide continuing system integration, support. -
1. The. Contractor shall provide for the supply of additional support days of onsite
programming and configuration services above- and beyond all programming . and
configuration requirements -specified herein.
a. Eight (8) additional support days shall be provided under this Contract:
b. These service days will not necessarily be consecutive calendar days.
2. The bidder is advised that these services are to be provided at' any time during the
contract including up to 30 days following successful completion of the reliability
acceptance tests for the system and that this contract shall remain open until that time.
3. The application of the additional work during construction shall be determined and
approved by the Engineer and Plant Manager.
4. The application of the additional work after the installation and acceptance of the new
equipment shall be provided at the written request of the Plant Manager.
a. The support shall be provided by the person who performs the original I_
programming under this contract..
SYSTEM INTEGRATION 17950 - 1
L

i
5 Servicesto be provided may include., additional.: training,,. system troubleshooting,
configuration -and programming services, and other on-site.sewices as required.. '
i..2. : CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITIES
- A.: The Contractor shall retain the services of a qualified System Integrator to select: equipment, . _ -
:, : provide any. design details required to accommodate the selected I equipment, completely
configure and ro ram: the: equipment, su ervise and inspect the -installation: test the systems,
.. g P g p, p .�
.. provide. training, and preparesubmittals: and final documentation, all as herein specified.
B. The- Contractor shall furnish all _labor, equipment and ,materials. required. :to. -install a :fully
functional monitoring: grid control system including any and all 'terns recoinrnen ed : y the
System.Iirtegrator. . .
L: The Contractor shall furnish all prograinriming and configuration required- for a complete
and functional system to automatically control and 'monit6f all: of the equipment Being
sup
lied under this Project.
2. Tlie Contractor` is responsible to notify the: Engineer iinmediately upon recognition of -an
instructi61 or specification- contained _herein that, would cause the supplied system: to fail
to meet the -conditions setfoith in these'specifications: .
- ... ..
C. The .Contractor `shall coordinate the° rmplernentatiori and recommendations of the SystemIntegrator with.Contractors.staff and the Contractor's subcontractors. _..
_ 1.3 SYSTEM INTEGRATOR RESPONSIBILITIES '
A. The system' integrator -shall perform the following general activities:
1 1 Selection and Evaluation of Corimponents:
a. The System Integrator shall -evaluate and: select tlie'individual'components of the
- control system.--: The evaluation shall: be based oti the specification iequiremerits,
industry standards, compatibility between components; arid. the experience of the
^i System Integrator. - -
1) The System Integrator shall 'review and approve all. control hardware,
software and control system related .components, prior to submission to the
engineer.
2) The System Integrator shall assist in the preparation of submittals and
documentation of other sections of this specification as needed for a
complete and coordinated hardware design.
3) The Engineer shall review all equipment following approval by the System
Integrator.
2. Interfacing of Equipment:
a. The System Integrator shall interface between all components within the control
system including those components supplied by others and existing equipment.
SYSTEM INTEGRATION .17950 - 2

b. The system Integrator shall evaluate the interface between components and supply
and/or modify systems to ensure compatibility.
c. The -:System Integrator :shall provide. any .'.design as required to
accommodate the selected equipment, to completely configure and program the
.:equipment , and to the interface the new. equipment to new and existing field
devices:
3. Information Gathering:
a. The System Iutegrator shall investigate plairt: 'documentation arid: as -found
conditions of the plant control systen! to establish the use and configuration of the
hardware acid software ` f each- control signal affected under this 'contract.. This
ineesti ation shall include the entire si al �p atlr from;the initiating hard wired field
device through to the control room operator interface terminal.
4: Coordination:
a. The,System Integrator shall inspect the* existing equipment to detennine the best
- . method for interfacing. the new control system with the existing equipment. All
work required. to interface to existing equipment and communications -networks
shall -be provided by the System Integrator.
up
5. Programming:
a. The System Integrator sliall provide all programming, control logic and software- . 11
for the system controls and monitoring.
b. The System. Integrator. shall interact with the Engineer to determine detailed
operational conditions and shall incorporate those:conditions into the ':system
operational .logic.
c. All.confi uration and programming performed under this:.contract shall:be full
g p �' g. p y
documented: by the system Integrator and shall become the property of the Owner. I.
d. Programming for the control algorithms .shalk be performed with the equipment
vendor's latest configuration. software using the IEC ladder diagram configuration.
6. Installation: 1,
a. The System Integrator sliall oversee the installation and field connection of the
control system.
b. The System Integrator shall make all the necessary modifications, additions and/or
updates to hardware and software as required to accommodate the field conditions
encountered.
t�
7. Field Tests:
a. The System Integrator shall be present during the start-up of each programmable
controller to respond to any discrepancies or questions which arise.
b. The System Integrator shall be on -call during the operational testing of the
systems.
8. Documentation:
SYSTEM INTEGRATION 17950 - 3 `
_ J-
1

a. The System integrator shall provide detailed documentation for ahe. design_ of the
control system. As a minimum the following design documentation is required:
1). Cut sheets and ..descriptions of all components_ :and hardware including
- ratings -and limitations.
2) Wiring diagrams for all- connections and controls.
- 3) Program logic on both -hard copy printout and compact disk. .:
4) Flow charts describing functioning of the control system. .
... 5) As. -built drawings for field wiring and connections:
6) ... Panel layouts.
b. The System:Integrator:shall document the.field tests..in accordance with .detailed
test reports.
c. The System Integrator shall coordinate' e -final documentation, including as -build:
drawings, O&M Manuals and : Warranty information.. All documentation shall: be
submitted,to'the Engineer for review and -shall become' -part of the Operation and
... ... .. ...
Maintenance Manuals.
A. The_ -System Integrator or contractor shall label: all wires; and equipment with :a
unique non, repeating. system. The labeling" identification ' nuinbers shall: be
included on the As -Built,, existing loop and: interconnection drawings.
.
e... . The System Integrator shall provide special and standard warranty services'.
9: . ' Training:. '
a.. The System Integrator shall' provide. or coordinate the. training of control- .
equipment provided for under :this oi: other sections :of the specification'with Plant
personnel:
JM: . 1.4 SYSTEM INTEGRATOR QUALIFICATIONS -
A. The system integrator shall:be subject to approval by the:Owner.
B. The system integrator shall meet the following minimum requirements:
1. Actively involved in the control integration for control systems for a period of -at least
five years.
2. Actively involved in the design and installation of Ethernet local .area networks.
3. Maintain a permanent staff of engineers and technicians who assemble, program, test and
field service distributed control systems.
4. Experienced in the installation, configuration, and programming of PC based SCADA
software using the specified software:
a. The system integrator shall have provided these services for not less than two
major projects, using the specified SCADA software, within the last 5 years.
b. This experience shall be documented by submitting two references, complete with
project descriptions, services provided, contact names and phone numbers, for
projects which included not less than 5 personal computers on a standard local area
network using the specified SCADA software to monitor and control plant
processes through programmable logic controllers.
C. Each of these systems shall be for a system -with not less than 200 points.
SYSTEM INTEGRATION 17950 - 4

5.: Experienced in configuring: and programming PLCs for iiidustrial processes, such as a
pumping station, including PID control.
a. The system integrator. shall have provided these services for not. less than .two
major projects within.the last 5 :years.
b. This experience shall be documented by submitting two references, complete with.
project descriptions, services provided; .contact names and phone -numbers, for
projects which included multiple PLCs with not less than [100][200.1 points of I/O
1.5 : - SUBMITTALS
A. Review and approve. -all submitted control : equipment and designs of other sections: of this
specification prior.to submission to the Engineer.. ,
B. In addition .to the requirements of Section 01300 submit" the following information necessary to
determine the adequacy of the system integrator.
1. A detailedexperience list of at least five control systems assembled and prograrnmed.by
the system integrator. Include project descriptions, contact names and phone numbers in
the list.
a. List shall include at least one control system upgrade of similar size and scope to
.this project.
2, A description_ of the system integrator's capabilities. Include a listing of personnel who
shall work on this project, test equipment available,. and facility size and layout.
3. All other. references, resumes, and .other information required to document that the
proposed system integrator meets .all requirements of the contract specifications and is., '
capable of providing all required services.
4'. Provide a' copy of the letter or stamp used to review and approve the submitted control
equipment and designs of other sections of this specification::
C. Installation Sequence Plan (NOT USED)
D. IP Address Listing
1. Submit a complete IP address listing of all existing and proposed Ethernet components. l
E. I/O Data Base
1. Submit an I/O Database for all new and modified PLC data points. Database shall
include:
a. Unique Signal ID (Record Key Value)
b. PLC Tag Name
C. OIT Tag Name
d. HMI Tag Name
e. 1/0 Description
f. Drawing Reference
g. Source Unit
SYSTEM INTEGRATION 17950 - 5
1-

i
h: Source Unit -Address ;
i. Signal.T.ype
Signal Level
k. Signal Format
1. :Signal Power•(Field or Panel)
tn. Raw zero
n. Raw::full
o. Eng_zero ..'
p. Eng_fhll ; :: .
q..- Eng_units
i•; Zero' State :.. •
S. One State...'
t. Alarm
F. Programming
1: Submit detailed description of all proposed control .equipnieiit- programming :prior to
_,.. ..
delivery to the site. The submittal shall include:
a. A'tabular listing of all I/O points: '
b..: Written functional description, sic siding: :
4) . Listing : of the . input signals; including a " reference' to the monitored
instruments and devices...: ... ... .. :: ..
2) Listing of the output signals, including a reference to. the controlled. devices
3) Listing of status tags 'and calculated valises.interfacing.with all other plant ..
control systems, including existing controllers and. control systems specified
_
in other: section and divisions of this. Contract.
..
4 A : descri tion of the . control functions gonei•atin the butput signals and.
calculated values
5) Submit a Power-�On, Start -Up sequence: '
6) Provide a state sequence: table to indicate the: state of. each: output under
normal sequencing of a filters.
C. -Preliminary program listings
d. HMI workstation graphics
_
e. OTT panel graphics
f. Any programming manuals or other documents required to interpret the program "
listings.
G. Testing Plan
1. Detailed step-by-step test procedures to demonstrate all functions and features of each
component of the control system.
j
equipment and a. These test procedures shall cover all control and communication a q p
materials specified under other sections of these specifications plus any additional
items required to document that a complete and fully functional system has been
installed.
SYSTEM INTEGRATION 17950 - 6

{
1 Submit a .detailed_testing plan and procedure for each 1/0 data point and; calculated value,
including test forms.
3. Refer to TESTING subsection in Part 3 of this specification for additional requirements.:.
4: Test forms to document completion of field tests with written procedures, expected
results; spaces for. entry of actual results, spaces for comments, and spaces for sign.off by
the contractor, system integrator, and Plant representative.
14. O&M Manuals-
1. Submit detailed final documentation including as -built (record) drawings, Operation & .
Maintenance manuals; software: documentation, and other items required-- to fully
document the system as installed and commissioned.
a.: The -O&M manual -shall include a detailed functional description and alarm section;•
with descriptive trotiible-sliootitig procedures for each alarm.
b. See Section 01300 for additional requirements: .
2. Include Final copies of all program listings with annotations, comments :and cross:
-reference tag list.in both hard copy printout and on and CDs in O&M Manuals.
a. 'Load Final copies of all programs on the HMI :workstation, along with the
configuration programs, and verify communication and interaction of all
development software with remote equipment prior to submitting O&M manual.
1.6 TRAINING
A. Coordinate :the . training provided :for under other sections of the specif cation with. Owner I
personnel.. ..
B. All training must be coordinated with the activities of the plant personnel.
1. The system integrator shall not schedule any training . until it has been confirmed in.. '
writing that the proposed schedule is acceptable to the plant manager. - .
2. The system integrator shall submit the proposed schedule for each course not less than 4 [
weeks prior to the proposed training date. .
3. If the proposed dates for training are not convenient to plant personnel, the system
integrator shall adjust the schedule accordingly.
C. Training shall be scheduled to the convenience of Plant Operations and shall be coordinated
with the Owner or the Owner's Representative.
l
i
(-
SYSTEM INTEGRATION 17950 - 7 l
I!

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION -
N3.1 VV
A. Completely configure all programmable controllers, -data communications equipment, and field ;
devices. supplied tinder other sections of this specifications.
... l Provide: all calculations and .functions :called for. in.- other sections of these specifications
or noted oil the contract drawings.
2. Debug and .trouble shoot all programming aiid. software,installatioii prior to the: beginning:.
of the testing phase.
B.. Network Configu ation
1. Coordinate and organize 'the new control equipment ,cornmunicatioh addresses with the
existing SCADA LAN at the plant.
2: Completely configure.the refresh rate and:pollilrg configuratio`of all -nodes on the PLC
and. HMI LAN to optimize the transfer of data under worst case conditions.
C. I/O Coordination
. A. :Create, compile and- install all ::databases . required to inonitor:and control the plant
processes from any and all Operator Workstations.. .
2. Create and configure a variable flag for each input point and each output point for :each
1 new PLC and other input devices.. .
k 3. Configure all calculated variables:required to present the desired hiformation'.: ...
D. Programmable Logic Controller (I'LC) Programming
I. Programming for the control algorithms shall be performed with the -equipment vendor's
latest configuration software using the IEC ladder diagram configuration. .
4 a. All Programming shall be done in ladder logic format; function blocks; structured
_ text, or other programming methods shall -not be acceptable.
2. Configure the new PLC equipment to monitor and control. the field devices_ indicated on
the Drawings.
3. Map each hardwired discrete input 110 point to a series of consecutive registers in the
M PLC CPU.
_ I 4. Map each hardwired, analog input I/O point to a series of consecutive registers in the PLC
CPU.
a. Program a second set of analog values, stored in a series of consecutive registers,
__ representing the engineering value of each of the input and output signals.,
b. Multiply the raw numerical value by the engineering scale, plus the zero offset
5. Program the control logic required for the analog outputs and discrete outputs as
indicated under Function Description.
SYSTEM INTEGRATION 17950 - 8

r
I
6. Program the control logic required to: generate and maintain' a calculated value, to be
passed to the HMI system.
a. Provide calculated values for all function's indicated in this and other sections of
these specifications..
7. Program the control logic required'to allow. operator override control of all. PLC outputs .,.
passed froin the HMI system.
a. - Provide..programming necessary for the -HMI to monitor and -control every data...
point that the PLC is monitoring and controlling._:
E. Human Machine Interface (HMO programming'-
1. Provide graphic programming of -the [existing] HMI server- for all work performed under
this Contract. Programming shall provide all thefunctionality and control that an
operator would have when standing in front of the local control panels and equipment.
a: General Requirements
1) Display all monitored process values and device status in a tabular format:
2) Display an alarm log screen in a tabular format with time and date: stamp.
.3) Display, 'an- exaggerated alarm'- indication on unacknowledged alarm
conditions.
4) Display motor run times as both resetiable and uinresettable values. Motor
run times shall be: individually resettable from the operator interface
terminal-.
5)... Display.a 24 hour trend screen of the monitored process values.
b.... Provide.an automated graphical format, screen. for, each process area controlled -
under this Project
c. Display all monitored I/O points.
1) Provide HMI operator forced override to all monitored 1/0 points
d. Display all controlled 1/0 points.
1) Provide HMI operator manual override to all controlled (output)1/O points. I-
2. Provide tag modifications and communication configuration of the existing Human
Machine Interface (HMI) terminals.
a. Provide all programming and coordination necessary to create control equipment
addresses tags, links to screen components and configuration in the existing HMI.
b. Investigate each of the I/O signal tags that are listed in the HMI tag list dump at the
beginning of construction.
1) ' Identify each tag that is not affected by the work under this Contract. I_
2) Identify each tag that needs to be redirected due to the work under this
Contract.
SYSTEM INTEGRATION 17950 - 9
I_

3). - Identify. each tag that needs to be added due to the:work under this Contract.
4) Identify each tag that needs to be 'removed, from ' the database due to the
work under this Contract.
C. Create new tags for UO not presently in HMI system..:; "...
-J1) Create new graphic screens displaying a tabular list .linking al1:I/0. tags with
a displayed indicator or control for each I/O tag not actively displayed in the
HMI at the beginning of construction:
d. - Verify the function ;of each: I/O to b . actuatin the field device or graphic control
fY g Y g gr p
and verifying that the corresponding graphic- indicator :or controlled field device
responds appropriately. '
Setup and conE ure:`automatic:re ort generation to automaticall enerate:a da.1.
3. g p g- y .f; y,
weekly and monthly process. and alarm report.
-a. Coordinate report: requirements and schedule with .Owner. ..
b. Include time stamped alarm events. .
4" Setup and configure dial ouYsystem via dial -out telephone service,.
a. Provide -for up- to 64 alarms and calls to. 4 different individuals byphone, cell
- phone or pager.
b. Coordinate alarm and notification schedule With Owner.
...
F. All. security shall be the.:Microsoft :Corporatiori' "Local Users . and Groups". configured in
Windows computer management window and: shall be ac#ive for any remote access.
.1 • Provide three. (3) leyels..of operational access for the supervisory- .system : as ..
follows:
a. Operator Access - limited to.access required for system operation
- li. Supervisory Access - access to system characteristics & alainis.
C. Engineer Access - unlimited access
3.2 FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTIONS
f A. This section specifies programming work required for specific process applications in addition
- to the.generat programming descriptions above.
i
I . Hand Switch Auto Status
a. Display all hand switches auto status on HMI.
f b. Local hardware "Manual/Auto' switches shall take precedence over the HMI
manual override finnctions.
2. Annunciate all alarms on HMI.
3. Display current filter mode for each filter on HMI.
SYSTEM INTEGRATION 17950 - 10

33- TESTING
_I
A.: Submit test plans and procedures, including test forms, to the :Engineer for review and approval
within one week after theequipmenthas been delivered to the site. I
1. Demonstrate that each network connected device installed udder this contract is properly
installed and functioning. =
2: .. Demonstrate that the SCADA.software [Modifications executed under, this Contract]
has been installed and [is] [ars] functioning as intended.
3. Demonstrate that the SCADA software is properly communicating with each U.O point on..
each PLC or other devices and that the field data is available at all network iiodes.
4: Demonstrate that all displays,. trends, alarms, and reports have been configured and. are
i o erl o eratin
p' p. Y p g ..
5. ,Demonstrate that all real-time data .is being. collected as historical data and is accessible
from PCs on the existing LAN.
6... Demonstrate that. all control system configuration software: is. properly. operating o.n the
M41 workstati0ni and that the final -.configuration files can be uploaded; modified, and
downloaded into the network attached control equipment:
B. Unless otherwise approved in writing, all- testing shall be performed in the presence of
authorized Plant personnel from both the Operations and`Maintenance.
C. Test forms shall be prepared and submitted by the contractor prior to scheduling of each test.: - -
1. These forms shall be completed .at the tune of witnessed testing and signed by b' the
contractor and Owner's representatives.
a. Perform or assist in the performance of a test and demonstration of the configured
PLCs at. an off site.facility prior to delivering the equipment to the site.
D. Perform or assist m the performance of the check out of existing field signals.
E. Perform or assist in. the performance of all field tests listed in other sections of these contract
specifications. i
F. Testing shall be required at various stages during the contract time in order to provide. an
orderly transition from the existing system to the new system.
END OF SECTION 17950
SYSTEM INTEGRATION 17950 - 11